Home

ipLDK-20/100/300/300E Feature Description and

Contents

1. FLEX10 FLEX02 0 OFF HOLD SAVE Mute Ring Service If this value is set to ON the station can get FLEX11 0 OFF VALUES mute ring HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Call Cut Off timer Outgoing CO call time is restricted with this FLEX12 0 VALUE VALUES timer Call is released automatically after this HOLD SAVE 0 99 MINUTES time If itis O call is not released automatically Barge In Mode If monitor mode barge in station can hear FLEX13 O VALUE VALUES current conversation only HOLD SAVE 0 Disable If speech mode barge in station can 1 Monitor Mode converse gt together 2 Speech Mode VIB when FWD to VMIB timer i is expired HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Station Port Block FLEX15 0 OFF VALUES we it s impossible to use that station HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON P MSG DND If this value is set to ON then when Pre FLEX15 0 OFF selected Message feature is set at this HOLD SAVE station CO and ICM ring is treated just like DND feature 10 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE PGM 114 In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGMI button 6 Dial 114 7 Enter the appropriate Station Range 8 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS DON IA Calling Line identification If this value is set to ON the CLI is display
2. The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow Deny Tables If the tables have no entries no restriction is applied If entries are made in the allow table and only there then only those numbers are allowed If entries are made in the deny table and only there then only those numbers are denied If there are entries in both tables the allow table is searched at first and if number is found it is allowed If not found the deny table is searched and if number is found it is denied If it is not found in either table it is allowed Not Exist RULE CONDITIONS amp RESULT DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE Found allowed Not Exist Not found denied ES Found allowed Not found check deny table In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 1 Dial 224 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM224 _ Descriptin_____ Procedure COMMENTS Allow Table A Deny Table A Allow Table B p Deny Table B Allow Table C Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 2 and COS 4 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 2 and COS 4 Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Den table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4 Used to check whether the
3. No Answer Timer 12 Pilot Hunt Alt If No Member Music Source Alternate Destination Max Queue Call Count 00 99 15 sec In circular terminal hunt if the incoming call is not answered during this time the call is routed to the next idle station in the group ON OFF If this value is set ON the call to the each hunt group member is processed as the call to hunt group A circular terminal hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number the station group so that only calls to the pilot number will hunt ON OFF OFF If there is no member on duty intercom call will be dropped and CO incoming call will be routed to overflow destination or to ring assigned station if overflow destination is not assigned 00 13 00 Not If music source is assigned calling user ip LDK Assigned will be heard music instead of ring back 300 300E tone 00 12 ip LDK 100 0 8 io LDK 20 Station Hunt When a call is received in the group and Group there is no available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned 00 99 This value is the maximum call count that can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected 16 Hunt Member ON OFF OFF OFF receive Hunt Call forward ON not receive Hunt Call Queue Count Display ON OFF ON If this value is set to ON Hunt member can check the Qu
4. Dialing after accessing a CO Line by dialing a CO Line access code 0 or 0 only Dialing after accessing a CO Line by pressing the LOOP button Dialing without accessing a CO Line Speed Dial Off net Call Forward Redial if the previous call is LCR applied ACNR lf the call is LCR applied when activating ACNR Any leading digit string at the LDT table can be a sub string of another leading digit string such as 012 and 0123 Capacity for LCR Table 3Day Zones 3 Time Zones Number of Dialed Code Bins 250 bins Number of Modification Code Bins 100 bins Maximum number of Dialed digits 12 digits Maximum number of Added digits 25 digits Alternative DMT index 1EA Admin Programming CR Attributes PGM 220 MLeading Digit Table PGM 221 m Digit Modification Table PGM 222 WICH Table Initialization PGM 223 16 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 8 Memory Dialing 2 2 8 1 Auto Call Number Redial ANCR Description If Call destination is busy or no answer redialing is operated repeatedly within the ACNR retry counter The system will retry the number based on programming with appropriate pauses in between dialing default 3 times Operation To use ACNR while receiving a busy no answer indication on a CO Line perform the following Steps Press the REDIAL button Replace the handset or go o
5. If the user doesn t enter any digit while Inter digit time the connection is dropped automatically If VMIB User Record Timer expires while recording user greeting the recording is finished and will go to main menu Reference A DID 2 1 3 B DISA 2 1 4 Admin Programming m MIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX 3 E Inter digit Timer PGM 181 FLEX 8 m MIB Message Rewind Timer PGM 181 Flex 17 111 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 11 3 Two way Recording 2 11 3 1 Two way Recording via SMDI Description This feature allows a station to record a conversation on the mailbox by pressing a RECORD button while the station is talking with CO party Operation To set a flexible button programmed for 2 way record feature Press the TRANS PGM button Press the FLEX button to be assigned Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 54 Press the HOLD SAVE button a e While a station user is the conversation with the CO line caller the User can press the RECORD button then the conversation will be recorded on user s mailbox The user press the RECORD button again or hang up then the recording will be canceled Protocol When the User presses the RECORD button the System will send a SMDI message to Voice Mail PC through RS 232C cable The format is same as follows gt crilf MD0010mmmmHOxxxxxxxxxbbcrlf Y cr carria
6. Secondary DNS Address 7 secondary DNS address which is used when primary DNS is down Called Party Domain Set called party domain name VOIB makes TO header of INVITE message using dialed number and this field ex dialed_noOcalledparty domain 0 UDP 1 TCP reliable transfer of SIP protocol 157 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 no Use Rport Method E Usage of SIP rport extension to support NAT OFF 0 Use Single Codec Only If this value is ON VOIB suggests default codec only through a SDP codec negotiation If this value is OFF VOIB suggests all available codecs through a SDP codec negotiation TT Pemo Part ID ON OFF This Admin is used to support Remote Part ID for CID E Message ON OFF If this feature is set to ON 181 message is supported ex call is being forwarded to a different set of destinations GE ee IS EE 501 or character Header ex caller caller domain cada A character authentication is used pe STE character password if authentication is used Contact Number Maximum VOIB use Contact header using this 8 digit field and VOIB IP address Usually set station number or DID number to route this SIP UID User ID Register 0 1 JO Determines registration of this SIP UID 6 User D Usage ON OFF DeterminesifUserlID is used 7 Associate Station Station Used to set the Associate Station for Num
7. 09 SLT DTMF MSG 10 SLT PULSE MSG 11 ISDN PHONE 12 SLT CID FSK 13 SLT CID DTMF 14 IP PHONE pLDK 300 300E 01 DKTU 10 ICM BOX 11 WHTU 12 SLT DTMF 13 SLT PULSE 14 SLT DTMF MSG 15 SLT PULSE MSG 16 ISDN PHONE 17 SLT CID FSK 18 SLT CID DTMF 19 IP PHONE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DSS DLS One station can have up to 3 FLEX1 02 Station ID VALUES sequentially numbered multiple FLEX2 Station Number pLDK 20 100 DSS DLS maps HOLD SAVE 02 DSS MAP 1 03 DSS MAP 2 04 DSS MAP 3 ipLDK 300 300E 02 DSS MAP 4 03 DSS MAP 5 04 DSS MAP 6 02 DSS MAP 7 03 DSS MAP 8 04 DSS MAP 9 Initial Button Configurations for DSS DLS Map O TEM DEFAULT CC REMARK DSS DLS MAP 1 Buttons 1 t012 s Button 1 Intrusion Button 2 All Call Page ooo QQ Button3 Call Park 01 Button 4 Station Groupi d Pp Buttn5 CampO0n_____ Button 6 Internal All Call Page o O Button7 Call Park02 Button 8 Station Group2 Button 9 Group Call Pickup Button 10 External All Call Page O J po O O Buttontt CallPak03_____ Button 12 Station Group Buttons 13 to 48 Station Ports 100 135_______________ LL Buttons 13 to 48 Station Ports 100 135 Station Ports 10 37 ipLDK 20 NO Station Ports 136 183 ipLDK 100 300 300E Station Ports 184 231 for ioLDK 300 300E 184 227 for ipL
8. 76 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 5 Call Barring 2 5 1 Account Code Description An account code is used to identify outgoing call for accounting and billing purposes the account code is appended to the SMDR Call record A company uses an account code for each User Station so that the company can identify and bill where applicable calls made from each Station An account code may use up to a maximum of 12digits 1 12 Operation To enter an account code before accessing a CO line perform the following Steps 1 Press the programmed ACCOUNT CODE flexible button or dial 550 from SLT Refer to Ref A for code 2 Dial the account code max 12 digits Followed by key if less than 12 digits 3 Intercom dial tone should be heard and a CO line is secured to make a call To enter an account code during a conversation with an external party 1 Press the ACCOUNT CODE flexible button or Recall Flash and dial 550 from SLT 2 Dial the account code max 12 digits 3 Press the ACCOUNT CODE flexible button the user will be reconnected to the external party or press from SLT To enter an account code without the ACCOUNT CODE flexible button during a conversation with an external party 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 5 5 0 refer to Ref A 3 Dial the account code maximum 12 digits Followed by key if less than 12 digit
9. Condition The BLF manager software should be installed on one System for the whole Networked System The number of Net DSS can be restricted according to the capability of each System When a flexible button on a Station is assigned as the NET DSS button of another system the System serves as local BLF to indicate the status of the Station COBLF is not supported and also the ringing signal does not update the status of that Station ICM CO Transfer CO Recall ring When a Station is in DND mode the NET DSS button will flash f the BLF manager does not exist BLF services can be activated between only two Systems The address of the Gate Keeper should be registered on each System Reference m BLF Manager Software PC Application Admin Programming E Networking Supplementary Attributes PGM 321 E TCP Port Assign PGM 321 FLEX2 EUDP Port Assign PGM 321 FLEX3 WBLF Manager IP Address Assign PGM 321 FLEX4 E Duration of BLF Status PGM 321 FLEX5 175 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 17 Net Follow Me Forward Description A User from one System can activate a Follow Me Forward from a Station on another System within the Network Once activated all calls to the Forwarded Station will be forwarded to the designated Station over the Network The forward can only be cancelled from the Forwarded Station Ope
10. EDISA Account Code PGM 141 ECO Line Group Account PGM 141 E Loop LCR Account Code PGM 111 E 5 Digit Authorization Code Usage PGM 161 FLEX21 E Station Account PGM112 FLEX20 78 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 5 3 Automatic Call Release Description When a Station does not initiate dialing on an outgoing CO line or receives a no answer on an intercom call the System will disconnect the call based on the assigned Auto Release Timer ADMIN program 180 FLEX 14 If the User Station is in speaker phone or MON mode the Station will return to idle otherwise the station will receive an error tone if using the handset Condition Intercom call in H F mode refer to Ref A is considered answered and Station Auto Release will not be activated When the Automatic Release time is assigned to 0 Auto Call Release is not activated While making a call without lifting the handset and the Auto Release timer expires the call will be canceled and the station will return to an idle state automatically While making a call using the handset and the Auto Release timer expires the call will be canceled and the station will receive an error tone Reference A Intercom Signal Mode 2 4 14 Admin Programming E Automatic CO Release Timer PGM 180 FLEX 14 E Station Auto Release Timer PGM 182 FLEX 5 79 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Versi
11. FLEX11 VALUE VALUES the system by entering the HOLD SAVE MAX 12 CHRACTERS appropriate User ID Password even if their MAC address is changed User Password Phontage can be registeredto FLEX12 VALUE VALUES the system by entering this HOLD SAVE MAX 12 CHRACTERS User ID Password even if their MAC address is changed 3 13 8 RSG DKT RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 390 The RX gain of DKT on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK zin O EE ANA giel RSG_DKT RX from CTR_SLT 00 63 TE 5 RSG_DKT RX from ACO 00 63 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_ACO RSG_DKT RX from DCO _ RSG_DKT RX from VMIB RSG_DKT RX from DTMF RSG_DKT RX from TONE RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 2 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_DKT RSG_DKT RX from RSG_SLT RSG_DKT RX from RSG_LCO RSG_DKT RX from IP Phone 89 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 3 13 9 RSG DKT TX GAIN CONTROL PGM 391 The TX gain of DKT on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK A RSG_DKT RX to DKTU 00 63 RSG_DKT RX to SLT 00 63 RSG_DKT RX to CTR_SLT 00 63 RSG_DKT RX to WKT 00 63 RSG_DKT RX to ACO 00 63 6 RSG_DKTRXtoCTR_ACO 00 63 7 a RSG_DKT RX to DCO 00 63 E RSG_DKT RX to DVU 00 63 3 13 10 RSG SLT RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 392 The RX gain of SLT on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK RSG_SLT RX from DKTU 00
12. Networking Enable This ADMIN program value is used to enable the networking feature To set this ADMIN value to ON the networking software lock key must be installed when a Station user enters the software lock key check dialing command TRANS PGM 78 This ADMIN value is used to retry the connection when a System error is detected during network connection signaling This value is only used when the networking feature is executed through the public switching network This value is not used at the networking feature between direct connected ipLDK systems The name of calling station is sent to the called system between ipLDK systems CNIP is displayed on the called party station LCD according to ADMIN programming If the CNIP and CLI are received together CNIP is prior to CLI The name of answered station is sent to the calling system between ipLDK systems CONP is displayed on the calling party station LCD according to ADMIN programming Select the information element type for networking supplementary service message FACILITY USER TO USER information element can be used for networking supplementary service message Networking Retry Count Networking CNIP Enable Networking CONP Enable Networking Signal Method FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX2 Retry Count number 2digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE FLEX3 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX4 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 VALUE HOLD SAVE N
13. 2 14 24 CLI Transit Service Description When user try to make outgoing call outgoing CLI can be changed through some specific situations Outgoing CLI can be selected automatically according to CLI Transit Option PGM143 Btn7 and authorization code There ate two kinds of option in CLI Transit Type First is Original type seconds is forward type And also there are two kinds of supported Authorization Codes in LDK system system Passwords 029 200 129 500 0301 1000 0601 2000 Operation 1 Outgoing call through DISA line When system receive DISA incoming call with CLI and then Outgoing call is made outgoing CLI is selected through some specific cases Original CLI can be provided to PSTN when it is allowed from PSTN DISA call password In UK and Sweden CO Access is not allowed System Password CLI of Attendant ORI ON Personal Password Original CLI of external caller if it received ORI ON System Password Original CLI of external caller if it received ORI OFF Without Authorization Original CLI of external caller if it received 2 Walking COS feature CO Account feature PGM141 Btn9 Forced Station Account feature PGM112 Btn20 LCR Password feature PGM221 Btn6 Dialed Password CLI provided to PSTN System password CLI of Attendant Personal password CLI of Station which password is attached to 3 DID Destination is assigned to SPEED Bin Incoming CO Off Net CFWD Type
14. 5 wm un O ise A gt Do not Record Figure 2 11 3 2 Two way Recording Operation To set a flexible button programmed for 2 way record feature Press the TRANS PGM button Dial flexible button to be assigned Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 54 Press the HOLD SAVE button gt INS While a station user is the conversation with the CO line caller the user press the RECORD button then the conversation will be recorded on user s mailbox The user presses the RECORD button again or hangs up the recording will be canceled Condition During the recording feature is enabled the RECORD button will flash at 240 ipm and if it is disabled the RECORD button will be extinguished Not available to SLT Recording operation is canceled when station goes off hook press RECORD button again press FLASH button or CO party hangs up Not available to intercom call recording f the system has an external voice mail system the conversation will be recorded to the external voice mail system Admin Programming m Two Way Recording PGM 112 FLEX 10 113 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 11 4 Recording User VMIB Announcement Description If the access to the VMIB is allowed user can record User Greeting and make a call be forwarded to VMIB port according to forward condition type if user enables forward And
15. HOLD SAVE FLEX13 Value Range 1 2 refer to VALUES STA Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE FLEX14 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE FLEX15 Seconds Range 00 00 HOLD SAVE FLEX16 1 ON HOLD SAVE SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 COMMENTS Max Queued Call Count The maximum call count that FLEX17 Seconds can be queued If the total Range 00 99 queued call count is achieved HOLD SAVE the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Supervisor Used to set the Supervisor FLEX18 STA Number Station number Range 100 125 HOLD SAVE UCD hunt Stations Used to set the UCD group FLEX19 VALUE 1 digit Priority members priority The value of Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE O is the highest priority and the value of 9 is the lowest priority If the station has high priority it takes more priority to receive the incoming call Hunt Member forward If this value is set to OFF the FLEX20 VALUE Hunt Call will be received HOLD SAVE If set to ON Hunt Call will not be received UCD DND Timer If this timer set to 00 sec this FLEX21 VALUE timer is not operated HOLD SAVE If this timer is setto 10 after 10 sec ringing UCD member is automatically in the UCD DND state QUEUED TONE If this value is set to ON Muted FLEX22 1 ON ring is given to first UCD group HOLD SAVE member when c
16. Hold Tone 13 Hold Tone Condition Only 1 MOH channel is supported SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 B VMIB MOH 2 4 17 2 Admin Programming ECO Line MOH PGN 142 FLEX 6 EMOH Type PGM 171 FLEX 2 94 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 17 1 SLT MOH Description When a CO line call is placed in the hold state refer to Ref A the external party will hear music ipLDK 20 ipLDK 100 ipLDK 300 300E 0 Not assigned 0 Not assigned 0 Not assigned 4 8 SLT MOH 7 11 SLT MOH 8 12 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone 12 Hold Tone 13 Hold Tone Operation SLT MOH Type Assign 1 Press the TRANS PGM button Type 171 3 Press FLEX 4 4 Enter the SLT Station Number 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button 6 Press the TRANS PGN button 7 Type 171 8 Press FLEX 2 9 Enter SLT MOH type refer to values listed 10 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition SLT ports connected with MOHU can provide MOH channels Up to 5 SLT ports can be used as MOH channels TouseaSLT port as a MOH channel assign the desired SLT port with the MOH channel and connect the MOHU to the SLT port Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 Admin Programming ECO Line MOH PGM 142 FLEX 6 EMOH Type PGM 171 FLEX 2 E Assign SLT MOH PGM 171 FLEX 4 55 o JOLDk
17. MIB Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX 1 m MIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX 3 MIB Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX Ai m MIB Rewind Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX 17 2 11 5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant Description Incoming CO calls may be answered by VMIB and rerouted to another station with CCR when attendant does not answer the call until No Answer Timer expires or attendant is busy Operation To operate Auto Attendant perform the following Steps When an incoming call is received at attendant 2 The call is not answered when the No Answer Timer expires 115 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 3 The call is forwarded to the Auto attendant the caller will hear a VMIB message and can reroute to another user using CCR Condition Not available for recall and transferred calls CO ringing should be assigned to only the Attendant Admin Programming E Auto Attendant VMIB Announce Number PGM 165 2 11 6 VMIB Message Transfer Description The received message at a station may be transferred to another station Operation To transfer a message to the other station perform the following Steps 1 While hearing a message dial the Station number to be transferred to 2 The message will be transferred to the Station Condition Ifa transferring station is empty user will hear error tone and can retry to th
18. PGM160 F16 should be set to ON Forward To VMIB Timer If Auto Forward To VMIB feature PGM113 FLEX20 VALUE 2 digits F14 is set for a station the call is Range 20 60 automatically forwarded to VMIB after this HOLD SAVE timer expired so the caller can leave a voice message 48 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 5 3 SYSTEM TIMERS lll PGM 182 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 182 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGmis2__ Description_______ Procedure TI COMMENTS _ SLT Hook Switch Bounce Designates the length of time neededto FLEX1 VALUE 100 msec Timer detect a valid on or off hook state 2 digits Range 01 25 SLT Only HOLD SAVE SLT Maximum Hook Designates how long the User needs to FLEX2 VALUE 10 msec 3 Flash Timer press the hook switch to register a digits Range 001 250 SLT Only FLASH Timed Break Recall HOLD SAVE SLT Minimum Hook Flash Used to designate the minimum time for FLEX3 VALUE 10 msec 3 Timer the System to register a hook flash digits Range 000 250 SLT Only HOLD SAVE Designates the ring phase or cadence FLEX4 VALUE 10 msec 1 MN ex 5 SEC 1SEC ON 4SEC OFF digits Range 2 5 HOLD SAVE Station Auto Release If a Station hears a ring back tone and FLEX5 VALUE 10 msec 3 Timer no action
19. PGM223 Description_____________ Procedure SS COMMENTS FLEX1 VALUE 6 digits Each pair 2 digits is the day zone 1 of LDT to the new value Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE index of the DMT for each FLEX2 VALUE 6 digits Time Zone 1 2 3 day zone 2 of LDT to the new value Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE day zone 3 of LDT to the new value Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE CO Line Group Change all CO Line Group values of FLEX4 VALUE 2 digits pLDK 20 01 08 DMT entry to the new value Range 01 24 HOLD SAVE ipLDK 100 01 24 pLDK 300 300E 01 72 Alternative DMT Changes the all Alternative DMT FLEX5 VALUE 2 digits Index Index values of DMT entry to the new Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE value Initialize All LOR Initializes the all LCR ADMIN data to FLEX6 HOLD SAVE the default value 64 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 ipok 3 9 Toll Table PGM 224 226 Toll tables are used to accessing certain toll free calls as well as not allowing certain calls for Stations assigned to a particular Station COS 3 9 1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE PGM 224 The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site Each allow deny table may contain up to 30 number strings All bins of allow and deny tables have no entries by default Each number string can contain up to 14 entries including any number 0 9 Don t care
20. Reroute Busy Destination F1 F3 F1 7 Reroute Error Destination F1 F3 F1 Reroute No Answer F1 F3 F1 Destination 168 1 3 Tsaka 20 1 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 eg 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 1 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 1 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 1 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 1 5 ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 3 ipLDK 20 FT First Contact wem Contact o Third Contact g Forth Contact Fifth Contact Sixth Contact 1 5 ipLDK 7 Seventh Contact 100 300 300E fp a 8 wf 8 LCD Date Display Mode WE DDMMYY If the value is setto ON Busy announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Busy Destination when the original destination is in DND If the value is setto ON No Answer announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to No Answer Destination If the value is set to ON Attendant Transfer announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Attendant When DID DISA call is rerouted by no answer and routed destination is busy this call is rerouted to destination by reroute busy destination Tone Attendant Hunt When DID DISA call is rerouted by no answer and routed destination is error this call is rerouted to destination by reroute busy destination Tone Attendant Hunt When DID DISA call is rerouted by no answer and routed destination does not answer this
21. Table of Contents INTRODUCTION H 1 1 1 Manual Usage A A 1 2 ADMIN PROGRAMMING PREPARATION 0 cccsccceesecensecensecesseenseeensenenses 2 2 1 Entering Programming MOde cccccccssssssseeeessseessseeeeeeeessseeeeeeoonseeeeeeeonnsseeeeeeooesseeesens 3 2 1 1 Permanent Update Procedure ENEE 4 Bdge TACSC MING UNG SS Meetic liebe 4 2 2 Pre programming Ra 4 3 ADMIN PROGRAMMING coria 5 3 1 Station PGM 110 131 oooccccconnnnccccnnconcccconnnnccnnnonancrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrrnnnnnnrrrnanananena 5 3 1 1 STATION amp DSS DLS MAP ID PGM 0 5 31 2 STATION ATTRIBUTES POM TTT oir ria aa 6 3 1 3 STATION ATTRIBUTES IPGM E isis iaa 8 3 1 4 STATION ATTRIBUTES III PGM NEE EEN 10 3 1 5 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE PGM 114 sisas 11 3 1 6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT PGM 11 12 3 1 7 STATION COS PGM IEN 13 3 1 8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS PGM 11 14 3 1 9 PAGE ZONES PGM 118 119 ccccesccscececececesescececeesvsveveveveveveceveveveuueeeesevevevevavavavaveverenenenen 14 3 1 10 ICM TENANCY GROUP PGM 120 15 3 1 11 ICM PRESET CALL FORWARD PGM 121 15 3 1 12 IDLE LINE SELECTION PGM 1201 16 3 1 13 ClloTA ONAL TRIBUTE POM Ee EE 16 3 1 14 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP PGM 124 17 3k15 COPY DSS DUT TONE POM Te letal arte peas 17 3 1 16 STATION IP LIST PGM 126 pt Dk 20 17 3 1 17 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY COS or CO ACCESS GROUP PGM 130 131 18 3 2 CO Line CIE TO 19 3 2 1 CO SERVICE TYPE PGM IA 19 3 2 2 COLINE ATTRIBUTES POM
22. This Admin is used to transport SIP protocol TCP UDP 100Rel Support If this feature is set to ON the System OFF ON will support 100Rel which is used to acknowledge receipt of reliably transported provisional responses 1xx Use R port Method If this feature is set to ON R port is OFF ON supported which is used for NAT traversal problems If this feature is set to ON ree single codec Sr Only is ree Remote Part ID The Remote Party ID header field hc provides information about the remote party Different types of party information can be provided e g calling and called and for each different types of identity information can be provided as well A request or response MAY contain more than one Remote Party ID header field with privacy requested independently for each This Admin is used to support Remote Part ID for CID 181 Message If this feature is set to ON 181 message E is supported call is being forwarded to a different set of destinations IP Centrex If this feature is set to ON IP Centrex W service is supported which is only used on Broadsoft servers SIP Name Service If this feature is setto ON SIP Name OFF ON Service is supported Asserted ID This field uses private extensions to the OFF ON SIP that enable a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identify of authenticated users and the application of existing privacy mechanisms to the identify problem The use of these extensio
23. This value is used to set the destination when route DID call during night ring mode The eleven different destination types can be selected This value is used to set the destination when route DID call during weekend ring mode The eleven different destination types can be selected This value is used to set the destination when route DID call during Lunch ring mode The eleven different destination types can be selected e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 ES FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Reroute Destination STA Hunt ATDSTA This value is used to set the second destination when routed DID call destination is busy VMIB drop SPD Net Number Station Voice Mail Box DIA System Speed Zone 01 10 Speed Bin Range in Zone 2000 6999 The system speed zone can be grouped the ipLDK 300E maximum 10 system speed zone 2000 4999 About each system speed zone the ipLDK 300 accessibility can be set at PGM232 FLEX 2 2000 3499 The toll check of each system speed zone can ipLDK 100 be set at PGM232 FLEX 4 2200 2499 And the account code to access each system ipLDK 20 speed zone can be set at PGM232 FLEX 5 But the system speed bin section between 2000 and 2199 is defined the toll free zone The system speed dial within this zone isn t checked by the toll table Station Range STA No 1000 1599 The accessibility of the syst
24. To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 4 If desired press the CO Line or Group button 5 Dial the desired telephone number including these special codes CALLBK Insert Pause key If stored as the first digit its function is Display Security Otherwise its function is Pulse to DTMF Switchover DND FOR If CO Dial Tone Detect refer to Ref A is ON and it is stored as the first or second digit and the accessed CO Line is behind the PBX mode its function is Dial Tone Detect Otherwise its function is Pause FLASH Inserts a Flash into the speed number lfthe accessed CO Line is analog its function is Flash to PX or PBX f the accessed CO Line is ISDN line refer to Ref B and it is stored as the first digit it makes the remaining digits sent with envelope information not in the Calling Party Number IE but in keypad facility 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button 7 If desired enter the name max 16 characters using the 2 digit code for each character 8 Press the HOLD SAVE button 9 To store continuously repeat this procedure from Step 3 To delete a Station Speed Dial bin perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Press the SPEED button Dial the Speed Dial bin number to be erased Press the HOLD SAVE button The stored Speed
25. _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEA DEFAULT _ ___ 450 initialization ao a Numbering Plan ee PGM106 PGM107 Initialization Station Database Initialization PGM110 PGM111 PGM112 PGM113 PGM114 PGM 116 PGM117 PGM118 PGM119 PGM121 PGM122 PGM123 PGM124 PGM179 ras Pe Fae ros PGM144 IT Wie ll AI Initialization C a JJ Initialization e a Initialization ro Dei O Rove System Timer Database PGM180 PGM182 Initialization 9 Toll Table Database Initialization PGM224 PGM225 LCR Database Initialization o PGM220 PGM222 Tables Initialization PGM227 PGM229 PGM232 PGM235 A Initialization 7 aa OO merromarorss PGM 324 14 All Database Initialization AllofPGM450 Z o Z System Reset By Sofware SS 16 DD Reroute Table Peeemeraprou 7 BoardData A O EIC 98 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 15 3 PRINT PROTECTED DATABASE PGM 451 PaM FLEX TEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK gt er PintProred Data O i Rese Numb Pan Pit 2 StationDatabase Prit STN R ___________ CO Line Database Print_____ COR 4 SystemFeature Database Print TT O 5 Station Group Database Prit Lt 6 ISDN Tables Database Prit 7 System Timer Database Prit Lt 2 TollTable Database Prit It 9 LCR Database Prit It 10 OtherTables Prit t 11 Nation Specific Database Prit te O 12 Flexible Button Program Prit STNR 43 Networking Da
26. address of VOIP board SUBNET Mask This ADMIN program is used FLEX3 Subnet Mask 12 VALUES for setting the subnet mask of digits HOLD SAVE Skip VOIP board Default 255 255 255 0 This ADMIN program is used FLEX4 DNS Address 12 for setting the DNS address digits HOLD SAVE of VOIP board Trace Password This ADMIN program is used FLEX5 VALUE 10 for setting the password Characters refer to Keyset which needs to contact to Map HOLD SAVE VOIP board for trace KEYSET MAP x 1 Blank K2 K3 PGm340 _ Description____ Procedure COMMENTS Default Codec Used to set the default codec FLEX6 VALUE VALUES for the VOIP board HOLD SAVE Default 0 G 723 1 0 G 723 1 1 G 729 2 G 711_ALAW 3 G 711_ULAW 4 G 729A the VOIP board Range 1 62 HOLD SAVE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 COMMENTS No Delay A Used to designate if the VOIP FLEX8 VALUE VALUES board will have a delay HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Throughput TOS Used to set VOIP board FLEX9 VALUE VALUES throughput HOLD SAVE 0 NORMAL 1 HIGH Reliability TOS Used to set VOIP board FLEX10 VALUE VALUES reliability HOLD SAVE 0 NORMAL 1 HIGH Firewall IP Address Used to set the NAT Firewall FLEX11 VALUE VALUES IP address of VOIP board HOLD SAVE 12 Digits Firewall IP address VOIB mod
27. 4 Conference Room 57 _ SI S S S S CS SI 5 SLT Conference Page Join 58 W58__________ 58___58 58 S 58 S58 Unsupervised Conf Timer 44 pH ST 44 HH Am HH HH Extend Remote MEX control EI ETT EE IO a 2 ES ES E O 111 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 7 IP SETTING EE IP IP Name Max15 15 il IP Address 12 ae ee 168 1 1 CLI IP Address 12 Digits Gem Gateway Address 12 Digits AN Subnet Mask 12 Digits 255 255 255 0 4 3 8 STATION ID ASSIGNMENT IAEA FLEX TEM amer DEFAULT SS DAN 16 PA 11 g gege sa o i o STA 4 3 9 STATION ATTRIBUTE NIII EE TE Auto Speaker Selection ON OFF If this value is set to ON Station user can access a CO line or make a DSS call by pressing appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting handset or pressing the MON button A oro Rae can be forwarded to the other destination MS be denied Je Line WE bad OFF If this value is set to ON override and camp on from other stations are prohibited when this station is busy Howling Tone to SLT ON OFF If this value is set to ON System gives howling tone to SLT In SLT user keep off hook state continually system gives error tone first then off hook state still continue system gives very noisy error tone This noisy error tone is howling tone lic o ges receive intercom box signal pd Touch Answer ON OFF If this value is set to ON the sta
28. 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes Condition 1 During a conference or paging Call Waiting is not activated refer to Ref B Ref C 2 Camp on is not applied to a station which is in DND mode refer to Ref D 3 The Attendant can override a Station using the Camp on feature refer to Ref E 4 Ifthe Stop Camp on Tone ADMIN program 112 FLEX 15 is set to ENABLE the camp on tone will not be heard Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual System Hold Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 17 B Conference 2 7 C Paging 2 8 D DND 2 4 9 E Attendant Override 2 13 5 Admin Programming E Stop Camp on Tone PGM 112 FLEX 15 E Voice Over PGM 113 FLEX 6 Voice over is also applied to SLT 44 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 6 Change Ring Type Description The ring tone signal used to notify Stations of an incoming call can be changed in ADMIN Programming to provide distinctive ringing on a per CO line basis A distinctive ring tone can be programmed for each CO line that is used to ring each Station Button Configuration for Distinct Ring Frequency PGM 422 FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REAMRK 0000 9999 o Nation specific 0000 9999 aa Nation specific 0000 9999 o Nation specific 0000 9999 d Nation specific Admin Programming EH CO Distinct Ring PGM 142 FLEX 5 E Ring Frequency PGM 422 2
29. 63 RSG_SLT RX from SLT 00 63 RSG_SLT RX from CTR_SLT 00 63 4 4 RSG_SLT RX from WKT 00 63 RSG_SLT RX from ACO 00 63 eC RSG _ SLT RX from CTR _ACO 00 63 RSG_SLT RX from DCO ENS RSG_SLT RX from VMIB RSG_SLT RX from DTMF RSG_SLT RX from TONE j 3 13 11 RSG SLT TX GAIN CONTROL PGM 393 The TX gain of SLT on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK RSG_SLT RX to DKTU 00 63 2 RSG_SLT RX to SLT 00 63 2 RSG_SLT RX to CTR_SLT 00 63 4 4 RSG_SLT RX to WKT 00 63 RSG_SLT RX to ACO 00 63 6 RSG_SLTRXtoCTR_ACO 00 63 7 Bh RSG_SLT RX to DCO 00 63 B RSG_SLT RX to DVU 00 63 90 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 12 RSG LCO RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 394 The RX gain of LCO on RSG can be adjusted FLEX DEM IL RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 00 63 2 Iech om ST 00 683 3 RSG_LCORXtromCTR ST 00 63 4 RSG_LCORXfromWKT 00 63 5 RSG_LCORX from ACO 00 63 6 RSG_LCORXkfromCTR_ACO E RSG_LCO RX from DCO 8 RSG_LCO RX from VMIB 9 RSG_LCO RX from DTMF RSG_LCO RX from TONE RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 1 RSG_LCO RX from MUSIC 2 RSG_LCO RX from RSG_DKT RSG_LCO RX from RSG_SLT RSG_LCO RX from RSG_LCO RSG_LCO RX from IP Phone 3 13 13 RSG LCO TX GAIN CONTROL 395 The TX gain of LCO on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 00 63 00 oi RSG_LCO RX to CTR_SLT 00 6
30. DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 lf a member is not on duty intercom calls will be dropped and CO incoming calls will be routed to the designated Alt If No Member FLEX12 1 ON HOLD SAVE overflow destination or will ring at the assigned Station if the overflow destination is not assigned If a music source is assigned the User will be able to hear music instead of a ring back tone FLEX13 Music Source refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE Music Source Alt Destination FLEX14 Destination Type refer to VALUES Station or Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE FLEX15 VALUE 2 digits If no members are on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be routed to an alternate destination If no members are on duty or all members are busy incoming CO calls will be queued The Hunt Group Supervisor will be able to see the incoming call queue count until the max queue count is attained If this value is set to OFF Hunt Calls will be received If set to ON Hunt Calls will not be received Queue Count Display If this value is set to ON a Hunt member can check the Queue Count MAX Queue Count FLEX16 VALUE HOLD SAVE Hunt Member forward Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE FLEX17 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 Not assigned by this field ioLDK 20 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 V
31. Description A station can make a call without lifting the handset by using the speakerphone or monitor mode If this feature does not operate verify if the speakerphone is enabled or disabled On hook dialing is not available on all keysets 56 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To use On hook dialing perform the following Steps Verify the Auto Speaker Selection is ON Assign CO line Intercom Speed Dial to a flexible button Press the flexible button Then it is operated immediately OR Verify the Auto Speaker Selection OFF Assign CO line Intercom Speed Dial to a flexible button Press the flexible button LIFT HANDSET should be displayed on the LCD Lift handset or press the MON button to operate AR INEA 9 On Admin Programming E Auto Speaker Selection PGM 111 FLEX 1 2 4 21 Station Name Description Each station may be assigned with a name up to 12 characters and also a System and Station speed dial number up to 12 characters The System will allow Station Users to dial Station numbers by entering a name that has been programmed for the Station via intercom When the names are programmed in the digital display keyset the user may select a Station or Speed dial number by the name Operation To register Station Name perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Type 74 3 Type in the Name 12
32. Dial 2 3 the confirmation tone should be heard 3 Enter the authorization code the intercom dial tone should be heard and the used extension COS Ref C is temporarily changed 4 A CO line call can be placed only one time To program Walking COS on a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press the applicable FLEX button Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 2 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes tS Condition Can be used on DKTUs and SLTs Available on a per use basis only While activating walking COS hanging up or pressing the TRANS PGM button to hold the call and seize another line the original programmed Station COS will be used When a wrong number is dialed press the FLASH button to dial again without changing to an idle CO line The fee for a call with Walking COS will be charged according to the Station authorization code not the actual Station When a User tries to use Walking COS at a station set to COS 7 with temporary COS the call will follow the original COS of the Station Reference A Authorization 2 5 2 B SMDR 2 12 C COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming E Authorization Code Table PGM 227 82 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 6 Hunt Group Description Stations can be grouped so incoming calls may be routed to an idle station in the group The number of Hunt groups and the number of Stati
33. E Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 16 8 Call Completion Description Call Completion is the same service as Call Back except that it is conducted within a networking connection environment and is used at H 450 protocol standard specification There are two kinds of call completion as follows Completion of Calls to Busy Subscribers CCBS After calling a user in another system using basic call and encountering a busy tone A station user can be notified when the busy destination of another system becomes idle If the user wants to make a call to the destination on that notification the call can be reinitiated to the destination of another system again Completion of Calls on No Reply CCNR After calling a user in another system using basic call and encountering no reply The caller can be notified when the destination becomes an idle status after some actions If the caller wants to make a call to the destination the call can be reinitiated to the destination again Currently the system supports only the Connection Retain Mode of CCBS in this stage Figure 2 16 8 and the Call Flow Table describe the CCBS operation on the networking connection environment Internet T a o q Figure 2 16 8 The CBS operation 166 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Call Flow to
34. E is internal call S is SMS SMS SMDR is also controlled by PGM 177 F17 18 toggle ON OFF ICM SMDR record format is same as existing SMDR record format ICM HUNT Call SMDR record is same as just ICM Call For example Station 100 call to Hunt 620 and answer 620 member Station 110 then STA field Station 100 and DIALED field Station 110 Paging call SMDR can be printed At STA field paging station number is displayed and be paged station number is displayed at DIALED field In case of ICM Conference Room SMDR station number which is entered Conference room is printed at STA field and Conference room no is printed at DIALED field for example Conf Rm 1 In case of Conference feature Conference initializing station is always printed at STA field and Conference members are printed at DIALED field In Hands free mode or Private mode SMDR can be printed ICM call parking feature SMDR is printed as two records Before parking and after parking and someone is answered records And park recalling is printed as another record In ICM call parking feature parked time is not calculated SMDR time Two records are produced Before parking and after parked call answering time is displayed ICM SRMR is possible when ICM SMDR SAVE is set to ON PGM 177 F17 ICM SMDR Print is possible when ICM SMDR PRINT is set to ON PGM 177 F18 Admin Programming E SMDR Attributes PGM 177 E Metering Unit PGM 142 FLEX 3 WSLT D
35. HOLD SAVE 01 15 ipLDK 300 300E Error Tone for Telephone If this value is set to ON and TAD is used on FLEX14 1 ON Answering Device TAD the SLT port when the caller hangs up a HOLD SAVE busy tone will be provided to TAD instead of an error tone SLT Flash Drop O Disable Flash detected but Line Drop is FLEX15 0 VALUES disable Default already existing feature DISABLE 0 Disable 1 Flash Drop Flash detected and Line Drop HOLD SAVE 1 Flash Drop is disconnected already existing feature 2 Flash Ignore 2 Flash Ignore Ignore Hook Flash in any 3 Hold Release cases The line is disconnected only if user goes ON Hook 3 Hold Release Drop the holding line if system detects Flash and then On Hook Loop LCR Account Code If this value is set to ON the Station User FLEX16 1 ON VALUES must enter an Account Code to use Loop HOLD SAVE 0 OFF LCR 1 ON VMIB Message Type FIFO LIFO plays the first recorded VMIB FLEX17 1 FIFO VALUES message or the latest message respectively HOLD SAVE 0 LIFO 1 FIFO Off net Call Forward If this value is set to ON off net call forward FLEX18 1 ON VALUES oc mmm o ore 1 ON Forced Hands Free If this value is set to ON the station can force FLEX19 1 ON VALUES the called party station to use the hands free HOLD SAVE 0 OFF wenig mode when it is ringing CID SLT CAS Gain This feature adjusts
36. Internal MOH RTP port digits Default 8186 HOLD SAVE RTP Port number of Use this entry to set the external FLEX2 Port number 4 External MOH music source RTP port digits Default 8188 HOLD SAVE MOH Type Selects the source of MOH type FLEX3 VALUE2 VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 HOLD Tone Default 1 MUSIC Music Source The RSG has one internal and one FLEX4 VALUE2 VALUES external MOH source RSG HOLD SAVE 0 INT Default associated devices use their local 1 EXT MOH source The music will be heard when RSG devices on RSG are held or digital keyset on RSG activates the BGM External Contact 1 Used to assign an external contact FLEX5 VALUE2 VALUES point Up to 2 can be assigned Station Number when 1 Default Not Assigned LBC is selected 1 LBC HOLD SAVE 2 Door Open External Contact 2 Used to assign an external contact FLEX6 VALUE2 VALUES point Up to 2 can be assigned Station Number when 1 Default Not Assigned LBC is selected 1 LBC HOLD SAVE 2 Door Open Alarm Enable When Alarm Signal is detected from FLEX7 VALUE2 RSG the ipLDK system gives the HOLD SAVE Alarm Ring to the Alarm assign station And the alarm will be stop by Alarm Reset code Alarm Contact Type Used to set the contact state for FLEX8 VALUE2 VALUES 1 CLOSE Default Alarm Door Bell Mode Used to designate if the contact will FLEX9 VALUE2 VALUES be treated as a doo
37. La N RTEL LDODK pLDK 20 100 300 300E Feature Description and Operation Manual 3 LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Copyright 2008 LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by LG Nortel Co Ltd LGN Any unauthorized reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws LGN reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice The information furnished by LGN in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 3 LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Revision History Sep 2008 Initial Release for ipLDK 20 100 300 300E v3 8 INS ISS OOOO i e LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Table of Contents LINTRODUC TION coa osea 1 1 1 Manta USE star ib 1 ZO TEM FEATURE ino 2 e AP e e o E 2 CSN Wl ASS PMNS ON EE 2 2 1 2 Preferred LING Answer PLA EE 3 2 19 Direc inward Dialing A 4 2 1 4 Direct Inward System Access UIGA 5 2 1 5 Customer Call Routing CCR with VMIR cc cccccceccesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseseaeeeeeseas 6 2 16 CO
38. Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 7 VMIB MOH 8 12 SLT MOH Max Queued Call Count The maximum call count that FLEX11 Seconds can be queued If the total Range 00 99 queued call count is achieved HOLD SAVE the next queuing call will be disconnected VMIB Supervisor FLEX12 STA Number Range 100 125 HOLD SAVE Hunt Member Forward If this value is setto OFF the FLEX13 VALUE Hunt Call will be received If set HOLD SAVE to ON Hunt Call will not be received Queue Count Display If this value is set to ON Hunt FLEX14 VALUE VALUES Group members can check the HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Queue Count 1 ON Group Name Assign Group Name can be assigned at FLEX15 VALUE this Admin field HOLD SAVE 99 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 5 7 2 4 VM GROUP ATTRIBUTE Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a call FLEX1 Seconds will be held in a busy state following Range 002 999 expiration of the timer HOLD SAVE Put Mail Index One of the voice mail dialing tables FLEX2 VALUE Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE Get Mail Index One of the voice mail dialing tables FLEX3 VALUE Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE Hunt Type Used to set the hunt type for VM FLEX4 1 Circular VALUES members HOLD SAVE 1 CIRC Circular Hunt Group 2 TERM Terminal Hunt See The Simplified Message Desk FLEX
39. PGM121 PGM122 PGM123 PGM124 PGM179 i D e Initialization PGM143 PGM144 O peene O TT Initialization i sl Initialization ISDN Tables Database PGM201 PGM202 PGM230 Initialization PGM231 7 pResewed LI None Reserved O pere pe Initialization pem oo o ee Initialization KS LCR Database Initialization PGM220 PGM222 Tables Initialization PGM227 PGM229 PGM232 PGM235 Flexible Button Program O c 15 Initialization Networking Database IA Initialization PGM321 PGM322 PGM323 PGM324 14 AllDatabase Initialization Initialize All DB of PGM450 15 System Reset By Software 16 DID Reroute Table Reroute Destination of PGM231 i7 BoardDATA O O POM340 341 155 Initialize DB added from V2 2 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 Initialize DB added from V2 3 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 4 Initialize DB added from V2 5 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 Initialize DB added from V3 0 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 Initialize DB added from V3 2 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 Initialize DB added from V3 3 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 Init Version 3 5 Initialize DB added from V3 5 to current version Not in ipLDK 20 MN Init Version 3 6 Initialize DB added from V3 6 to current version Init Version 3 7 Version 3 7 Initialize DB added from V3 7 to current version DB added from V3 7 to current version 11 eene Version 3 8 ii DB added from V3 7 to c
40. Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Call Forward Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 11 B Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual DND FWD Cancel Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 16 Admin Programming E Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX 2 WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 2 5 1 10 Preset Call Forward Description When a station receives incoming CO Calls and the Station is programmed to Preset Call Forward the call is routed to the Preset Call Forward destination if the station does not answer within the Preset Call Forward Timer The destination can be another Station or Hunt Group Condition 1 In Preset Call Forward a busy station will not receive a CO Line ring and the next assigned station will receive the CO Line ring If the station is not forwarded to other destination then the call will not be forwarded and will continue to ring at the station until answered 2 The Preset Call Forward loop feature is not available A gt B C gt A 3 When a CO Line is forwarded with Preset Call Forward the original station will stop ringing the LED of CO button will flash continuously Admin Programming E Preset Call Forward PGM 121 E Preset Call Forward Timer PGM 181 FLEX 12 31 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 2 Call Transfer Description An Intercom Call or CO Call can be transferred to another station or CO Line
41. SMDR long distance code is none In this program mode the following item can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 204 3 Enter bin number 01 16 4 Enter local code Max 5 digits 74 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 e Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 10 ENBLOCK PREFIX TABLE PGM 205 Dialing service by prefix code is defined one of ISDN CO line service In IP LDK system it has 6 prefix table and maximum 50 entry per prefix table can be programmed Each Prefix table entry has Prefix code Minimum digit Maximum digit Sending Complete Number of type and Numbering plan In this program mode the following item can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button Dial 205 Select Table number Flex 1 Flex 6 Enter bin number 01 50 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM205_______ Description______ Procedure COMMENTS party number is defined ETS 109 i DIGITS D Mask Digit DND FWD Button a button is used as Mask HOLD SAVE Aa Y Ze Min Digits Min dial digit no FLEX2 Min dial number 2digits Range 00 30 HOLD SAVE Max Digits Max dial digit no FLEX3 Max dial number 2digits Range 00 30 COL SAVE Sending Complete Overlap sending or Sending FLEX4 VALUE apna Complete HOLD SAVE OFF 7 ON Number of Type Type of called number FLEX5 VALUE VALUES HOL
42. Station COS There is no restriction to dial Monitored by Exception Table A COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A 8 B COS 5 Long distance call is not allowed longer than 8 digits COS 6 Long distance call is not allowed max 8 digits may be dialed COS 7 Only intercom paging and emergency calls are allowed no dialing allowed on CO lines COS 8 Monitored by Exception Table C COS 9 Monitored by Exception Table C COS 10 Monitored by Exception Table C amp D COS 11 Monitored by Exception Table A B C amp D CO COS COS 1 There is no restriction Monitored by STA COS COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A amp STA COS 2 4 COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B amp STA COS 2 4 COS 4 Long distance call is not allowed for all STA COS max 8 digits may be dialed COS 5 Overrides STA COS 2 3 4 5 6 no COS restriction 80 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 CO to CO line COS COS 1 There is no restriction to dial l COS 2 Monitored by Exception Table A l COS 3 Monitored by Exception Table B COS 4 Monitored by Exception Table A B l COS5 Long distance call is not allowed longer than 8 digits l COS6 Long distance call is not allowed only max 8 digits may be dialed COS 7 Only intercom paging and emergency call are allowed no dialing allowed on CO lines COS 11 The assignments in
43. VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 173 FLEX6 0 OFF HOLD SAVE FLEX7 0 OFF HOLD SAVE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Pem12 Descriptin_________ Procedure _ _ COMMENTS Prepaid Call If this value is set to ON the Station User FLEX8 0 OFF VALUES can use the Prepaid Call feature HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Speed Dial Access If this value is set to ON the station user FLEX9 0 OFF VALUES can use system speed dial call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Two way Record If this value is set to ON the station user FLEX10 0 OFF VALUES can record the incoming and outgoing HOLD SAVE voice during a conversation z Fax Mode If this value is set to ON a single ring is FLEX11 0 OFF provided and Attendant recall is not HOLD SAVE operated Off net Call Mode If this value is set to EXT the station user FLEX12 1 EXT can only forward CO calls to off net ex HOLD SAVE 1 External Off net mobile phone Otherwise both CO and Call Fwd is only ICM calls can be forwarded to Off net allowed EXT O Internal and External Off net Call Fwd are allowed ALL UCD Group Service This feature is used when a station FLEX13 1 ON VALUES receives a DID DISA call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF If this value is set to ON the UCD Group 1 0N the station belongs to will receive the incoming call If this value is set to OFF the s
44. When a call to a busy Station is made the FLEX13 Seconds 3 a CPTU attempts to detect the valid tone type digits Range 001 300 until ANCR Tone Detect Timer expires HOLD SAVE 46 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM 180 Automatic CO Release Uncompleted CO line calls will automatically FLEX14 Seconds 3 Timer be released when the timer expires digits Range 020 300 HOLD SAVE Used for the CCR inter digit timer in the FLEX15 Mseconds 3 a DISA DID CO line In DID type 2 it is used for digits Range 000 255 the DID inter digit timer HOLD SAVE CO Call Drop Warning On prepaid CO calls the System will give a FLEX16 Mseconds 2 Timer warning tone designating prepaid amount has digits Range 00 99 been used After the timer expires the call HOLD SAVE will be disconnected Also used for call drop warning in Unsupervised Conferences CO Dial Delay Timer Used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow FLEX18 VALUE 100 response from the Central Office Line or msec 2 digits Range 00 99 PBX HOLD SAVE CO Release Guard Timer Designates the amount of time before a CO FLEX19 VALUE 100 line can be re seized after a CO call msec 3 digits Range 001 disconnects controls the time necessary to 150 HOLD SAVE guarantee an idle loop state when a line is released CO Ring Off Timer Used to designate the time interval between FLEX20 VA
45. and a hunt group member FLEX2 1 On receives an intercom call then all hunt group member HOLD SAVE Stations will ring NOTE Auto Pickup ADMIN program must be set to ON 3 7 3 COLP TABLE PGM 201 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 201 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS COLP Table The COLP table is used for outgoing CLI refer COLP Table Bin Number ADMIN program to the Section 2 14 2 2 of ipLDK Feature Range 00 49 VALUE2 Up 143 FLEX 1 and 2 Description and Operation manual to 10 digits HOLD SAVE 60 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 8 LCR PGM 220 223 3 8 1 LCR ATTRIBUTES PGM 220 FLEX TT CS Remark Value FLEX1 LCR Access MOO Disable LCR M01 LCR shoes attribute is COL can be accessed only through common CO access code 9 0 MO2 Internal LCR and Loop LCR are activated M11 Loop LCR and Direct CO LCR are activated M12 All LCR types are activated When the user dials 9 0 or presses the loop button the pLDK will not seize a CO Line until LCR is finished M13 All LCR types are activated When the user dials 9 0 or presses the loop button ipLDK first seizes a CO Line and will wait to dial the following LCR FLEX DayofWeek Zone ta Day 1 7 1 Monday FLEX3 Wednesday t
46. cccccc ccssscsesececesscccesseeeeeeessccceeseeeeeensscccsesesneeesecsccceseseesesssnccasesseeeeeees 161 so EE 165 4332 PRINT PROTECTED DATABASE ege Ee 166 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 1 INTRODUCTION This Programming Manual is designed to provide general system information related to ADMIN Programming using a DKTU and PC for the ipLDK 20 100 300 300E This manual contains the following sections 1 1 Manual Usage Section 2 Admin Programming Preparation A brief overview to ensure the system is appropriately prepared for Admin Programming More detailed preparation of pre programming is covered in the ipLDK 20 100 300 300E Installation Manual Section 3 ADMIN Programming This section focuses on ADMIN Programming for features A brief overview is included that explains the function of each button used for non factory installed functions that need to be programmed using ADMIN More detailed description and operation instructions are covered in the ipLDK 20 100 300 300E Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 4 Quick ADMIN Programming Tables This section provides a quick reference ADMIN Programming table for use by those familiar with the system o LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 eee Admin Programming Manual September 2008 2 ADMIN PROGRAMMING PREPARATION The ipLDK System can be programmed to meet each customer s individual needs Elements of Basic Admin Pre p
47. door 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 Not in ipLDK 20 5 Ext 3 Not in ipLDK 20 External Relay External Control Contact can be for FLEX1 3 VALUES External Relay HOLD SAVE 1 LBC STA 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 Not in ipLDK 20 5 Ext 3 Not in ipLDK 20 36 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 10 LCD TIME DATE LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE PGM 169 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 169 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS LCD Time Display Mode Two LCD Time formats are available FLEX1 0 24H VALUES Ordinary 12 hour and Military 24 HOLD SAVE 0 24 HOUR MODE hour mode 1 12 HOUR MODE LCD Date Display Mode Two LCD date formats are available FLEX2 1 VALUES Day Month Year DDMMYY or MMDDYY 0 DDMMYY Month Day Year MMDDYY mode HOLD SAVE 1 MMDDYY LCD Language Display A choice of 15 LCD language formats FLEX3 VALUE VALUES Mode can be selected Range 00 15 00 English HOLD SAVE 01 Italian 02 Finnish 03 Dutch 04 Swedish 05 Danish 06 Norwegian 07 Hebrew 08 Germany 09 French 10 Portuguese 11 Spanish 12 Korean 13 Estonia 14 Russian 15 Turkish 3 4 11 MODEM ASSIGNMENT PGM 170 Modem service is available only when a MODU is installed on the MBU In this prog
48. the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 166 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS Day COS Class of Service of Day Mode FLEX1 2 VALUES HOLD SAVE 1 11 Night Weekend COS Class of Service of Night Weekend FLEX2 2 VALUES Mode HOLD SAVE 1 11 33 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 3 4 8 DID DISA DESTINATION PGM 167 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 167 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 167 COMMENTS Busy Destination Error Destination No Answer Destination DND Destination VMIB Prompt Usage Busy Prompt Usage Error Prompt Usage DND Prompt Usage When there is a DID DISA incoming call if the caller dialed a busy destination the call will be routed to the Busy Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call if the caller dialed an invalid number the call will be routed to the Error Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call if the destination does not answer the call will be routed to the No Answer Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call and the destination is on DND state then the call is routed to DND Destination Tone Attendant Hu
49. when press call coverage button gt The LCD display for CO incoming call is lt XXXX originator station YYYY caller ZZZZ coverage station gt CALL FOR STA XXXX STATION ZZZZ T YYYY TIME YYYY TIME lt when receives an call coverage ring gt lt when press call coverage button gt Condition Multiple coverage stations can have the same remote ringing station s programmed on their keysets Once a coverage station answers the call all the related rings are stopped and the call is picked up by the coverage station The station user assigns the call coverage button at their station via the Flex Button programming sequence If the coverage station is in DND no audible ring will be heard Call coverage do not support hunt group members Call coverage do not support DECT SLT WIT terminals Admin Programming To activate Call coverage at a Station 1 Press the TRANS PGM 2 Enter 45 To activate Call coverage at a flexible button d Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEXIBLE Button to be programmed and the press the TRANS PGM button again 3 Enter 4 6 then enter the Station number 4 Press HOLD SAVE 2 4 42 Station Port Blocking Description The station port can be blocked by admin program All calls are not available from to the blocked station port Condition Attendants cannot be port blocked by admin programming ADMIN programming enable station can not be set port blocking A Port
50. zones three table index of each time must be selected Day Zone 2 DMT 6 digits This value is used to set the table index DMT PGM222 of the day zone 2 Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zones three table index of each time must be selected Day Zone 3 DMT 6 digits This value is used to set the table index DMT PGM222 of the day zone 2 Because day zone 2 has 3 different time zones three table index of each time must be selected Check password ON OFF If this value is set to ON pLDK system request the account code of user when dialed digit is matched LCR code 147 Ion 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 BC FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK o a Modification Table 00 99 Refer to ipLDK Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 2 7 o Digit Max 20 digits This value is used to add digit stream at user dialed digits This value is added at the position of Add Position PGM222 FLEX 4 Removal Position This value is used to set the removal position at user dialed digits Some digits are removed from this position up to the Remove Number PGM222 FLEX 3 Number Of Remove This value is used to set the remove digit count at user dialed digits Some digits are removed as much as this value from the position of Removal Position PGM222 FLEX 2 Add Position 1 13 1 This value is used to set the add position at user dialed digits Some digi
51. 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 00 48 Fark Description A User can park an ICM or CO call in a virtual location The User can then make a page announcement for the desired User to pick up the parked call The paged user can retrieve the call by dialing the designated location number Operation To park a call 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial the parking location 601 608 refer to Ref A 3 Replace the handset or go on hook 4 Page the desired User to retrieve the call To retrieve the parked call from a DKTU 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Dial the parking location to retrieve the parked call Condition 1 To receive the parked call the Station should have a CO or LOOP button 2 Ifthe call remains unanswered for the duration of the Call Park Recall time the original Station that parked the call will receive a recall If the call is still unanswered then the attendant will receive the recall If the Attendant does not answer again in the Attendant Recall time the CO Line call will be disconnected and the line will be returned to an idle state 3 Incase of ICM call parking the attendant will not receive recall Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Call Park Location Code PGM 107 FLEX 5 Admin Programming E Call Park Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 2 36 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation M
52. 030 100ms This timer is used for the CCR inter digit timer in the DISA DID CO line In DID type 2 it is used for DID inter digit timer CO Call Drop Warning Timer 00 99 2 digits Sec If prepaid money is going to expire during a CO call system will give warning tone and after this time the call will be disconnected This timer is also used for call drop warning in Unsupervised Conference 17 RESERVED HEEN 18 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 GE ee digits 100ms Voice connection to the outside party will be made after this timer This can be used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office Line or PBX 8 19 CO Release Guard Timer 001 150 3 digits 020 100ms This ADMIN program sets the amount of time before a CO line can be re seized after the CO call disconnects This timer controls the time necessary to guarantee idle loop state when the line is released 20 CO Ring Off Timer 010 150 3 digits 060 100ms This timer is to secure time interval between incoming ringing signals so that the active ringing can be lasted in the system until this timer is expired CO Ring On Timer 1 9 1 digit 100ms This timer controls the time necessary to detect an incoming CO call as ringing into the system 135 21 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 ME ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Warning Tone Timer 060
53. 1 To used CNIP and CONP service the name of the Station and the related PGM 320 FLEX 3 amp 4 must be set properly Admin Programming E Networking CNIP and CONP Enable PGM 320 2 16 4 Net Transfer Description Net Transfer is used to transfer net calls lt can transfer any kind of call to a Station in another System by pressing the TRANS PGM button and dialing the Station number The operation of net transfer is the same as transferring a call screened or unscreened within the same System NOTE There are two different kinds of standard net transfer signaling method transfer by join and transfer by rerouting The main difference is in the connecting path between the transferring transferred transferred to Station controls Join an additional connecting path is needed to transfer the call to another Station Routing a new connecting path is used to transfer the call the old connecting path of transferring station will be cleared If both transfer by join and transfer by routing are supported by the System the appropriate mode can be selected using PGM 321 The Figure 2 16 4 describes the unscreened net transfer operation on the networking connection environment At the first step the outside caller dials the telephone number of Station 100 And Station 100 receives the incoming ring at the second step At the third step Station 100 answers and requests the call transfer to the Station 202 located in another Networ
54. 10 3 EXECUTIVE SECRETARY TABLE PGM 229 When the executive designated station is in DND state intercom and transfer calls will be automatically routed to the designated secretary station By default Executive Secretary pairs are not assigned at all pS pLDK 200 PB In this program mode the following items can be customized 6 Press the TRANS PGMI button 7 Dial 229 8 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table A PGM229_ Description Procedure COMMENTS Executive Secretary Pairs When the Executive designated station is FLEX1 Bin number VALUES in DND state intercom and transfer calls Executive STA Secretary Default Not will be automatically routed to the STA HOLD SAVE Assigned designated Secretary Station CO Call to Secretary If this feature is set to ON every incoming Bin number Value VALUES CO call to Exec is automatically routed to HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Sec even when Exec is not in DND state 1 ON Call Executive if Secretary In some locations Korea India Israel FLEX3 Bin number DND Turkey every ICM call to the Executive Value HOLD SAVE Station is routed to the Secretary regardless of the Executive state However if this feature is set to ON each call to Exec is not routed to Sec if the Sec is in DND state Executive Grade In some locations Korea India Israel FLEX4 Bin number VALUES Turkey every ICM call to the Executive Value Range 1 12 Def
55. 10min It is possible for the second originator to page with the first originator during the Paging Conference paging announcement Add On Conference Multi Line Conference Supervisor Supervisor Figure 2 7 1 Add On and Multi Line Conference Operation To establish an Add on Conference perform the following Steps 1 While on a call press the CONF button the existing call will be put on HOLD and the intercom dial tone will be heard 2 Dial the digits to connect the second internal party 3 When the call is answered press the CONF button 4 When all parties have been called press the CONF button again all parties will be connected to the call 93 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To make a Multi line Conference perform the following Steps 1 While on a CO line call press the CONF button the existing call will be put on HOLD and the intercom dial tone will be heard 2 Dial the digits to connect the second party 3 When the call is answered press the CONF button 4 When all parties have been called press the CONF button again all parties will be connected to the call To make Unsupervised Conference 1 During a conference press the CONF button in supervisor 2 The conference is still connected and the supervisor CONF button LED should flash 3 Tore enter the conference lift the handset and press the
56. 12 2 Print out Description Lost call means that the caller gives up and terminates the call before the call is answered The format of the individual call record is illustrated below and the contents are focused on each case about the types of lost call NO STA CO TIME START DIALED 0001 EXT 031 00 00 10 24 05 99 11 55 R RING 00 05 Normal incoming call is received at an assigned stations of CO 031 during 5 sec 0002 101 003 00 01 20 25 05 99 16 23 R RNG 00 09 DID call is disconnected during it is being forwarded to ATD STA 101 because the dialed station does not exist 0003 100 001 00 00 20 25 05 99 18 11 R100 RING 00 04 DID call is received at STA 100 during 4sec and disconnected 0004 102 002 00 01 20 26 05 99 18 37 R103 RING 00 04 DID call is received at STA 102 via unconditional call forward to STA 103 during 4 sec and disconnected 0005 621 008 00 00 20 26 05 99 13 02 G620 RING 00 06 DID call is received at Ring Group 621 during 6sec and disconnected 0006 100 001 00 00 04 06 05 99 16 04 H100 RING 00 02 DID call is disconnected while STA 100 is being held it 0007 102 001 00 00 07 06 05 99 17 04 H100 RING 00 02 DID call is disconnected while it is being transferred from STA 100 to STA 102 G Incoming call to hunt group see Ref 1 but the caller hangs up before answer H Answered incoming call was transferred to another station but the caller hangs up before answer And incoming call placed on hold state and cleared down in
57. 2 Tuesday FLEXA Thursday t 3 Wednesday D r Foy fue FLEX6 Saturday 9 Friday 6 Saturday FLEX3 Time of Zone 3 DAY Zone FLEX2 Time 00 24 1 ioLDK accepts it as same value for 00 and 24 FLEX4 Time of changes to 00 if input is 24 as starting value and vice versa pene NOTE The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 Time of 10 13 means 10 00 00 12 59 59 DAY Zone 3 Zone 1 00 24 3 5 1 1LCR Access In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 220 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table LCR Access Mode This value is used to select the FLEX1 VALUE VALUES LCR access mode Range 1 6 1 MOO Disable LCR HOLD SAVE 2 MO1 Only Loop LCR 3 M02 Internal and Loop LCR 4 M11 Loop and Direct CO LCR 5 M12 Internal Loop and Direct CO LCR 6 M13 Internal Loop Direct CO and Or Loop LCR Day Zone Used to set up the LCR setting FLEX2 VALUE1 VALUES each day can be grouped up to VALUE2 Value 3 zone HOLD SAVE 61 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Time Zone 1 of Day Zonet Time Zone 2 of Day Zonet Time Zone 3 of Day Zonet Time Zone 1 of Day Zone2 Time Zone 2 of Day Zone2 Time Zone 3 of Day Zone2 Time Zone 1 of Day Zone3 Time Zone 2 of Day Zone3 Time Zone 3 of
58. 2 8 5 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming m DID Conversion Type PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Digit Conversion Mask PGM 146 FLEX 2 Automatic Speaker Selection PGM 111 FLEX 1 DID DISA Destination PGM 167 DID Call Wait PGM 114 FLEX 17 DID Restriction PGM 114 FLEX 16 2 1 4 Direct Inward System Access DISA Description The DISA feature allows incoming CO calls to access a specific destination bypassing the attendant station Compared with DID refer to Ref A there is no digit conversion in DISA On accessing an incoming CO Line the system will give the pre recorded VMIB announcement refer to Ref B or dial tone The caller then is able to dial additional digits to access their desired destination on the system Operation To program DISA Line Assignment perform the following Steps 1 Press TRANS PGM and enter 140 Select the CO Line Range to be assigned to DISA Line Press FLEX 2 and select the Ring type and press FLEX 1 To select the Ring Type press FLEX 1 for Day FLEX 2 for Night FLEX 3 for Weekend FLEX 4 for Lunch or FLEX 5 for On demand Dial 1 Press HOLD SAVE to activate the DISA Line Assignment Press FLEX 2 select the Ring Type Press FLEX 2 then enter 01 70 for the VMIB Greeting Assignment Press HOLD SAVE to accept changes DS ae ee To use DISA Line Assignment perf
59. 3 P BREAK ON OFF DEFI 4 JE rr Tome oe S t line SMDR Statistics Print 01 14 ipLDK 300 300E 01 12 ipLDK 100 COM1 01 01 10 ipLDK 20 ADMIN data is printed through this port a aa lego e through this port O cl port AAA li E this port O IT IT iss through this port Jens this port pe e this port i al SELECT this port Off line SMDR data is printed through this port 10 PC_ATD NET PCATD PC Admin is connected through this port port 12 REMOTE_DIAG NET REMOT Remote Diagnostic data is E printed through this port PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 176 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio 66 33 66 33 Pulse dial speed ratio is set 60 40 only for 10 PPS SMDR Attributes 1 14 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls As an assignable database option If All Call record type is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are all provided If only Long Distance is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed below are provided SMDR Save Enable ON OFF If this value is set to ON maximum 5000 of SMDR data can be recorded at system memory SMDR Print Enable ON OFF If this value is set to ON SDMR data can be printed real time through the serial MODEM LAN port A An e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 MC FLEX ITEM JNE
60. 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM EE DEFAULT REMARK 234 Voice Mail Dial Table 1 9 This ADMIN program is used at the VM hunt group feature This value defines the interface of dialing command between ipLDK and the external VM device 1 PrefixIndex 12Digits li 2 Suffix Index 12DigitS J ooo o 236 __ Mobile Extension Table Extension Table Mobile Extension Table EES EES A A a Enable cl Group mobile extension Wee ee No extension A eee EXT ae No _ value is used as the la eae of Mobile ae So weer Extension Hunt ae If this feature is set to ON and station is a Call member of Hunt group then the Hunt call is served to the Mobile extension also Voice Mail Notification ON OFF If this feature is set to ON and if a voice to Mobile message is left at the station the system sends SMS notification to its Mobile Extension Only possible when PSTN SMS is served 7 Mobile Extension ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON it means mobile Usage extension is used Same as station PGM 34 204 Local Code Entry No 01 NONE The local call is defined that the telephone 16 Max 5 number is matched with ADMIN program 204 digits If telephone numbers matches this table the SMDR is printed as local call Max 16 SMDR local codes are available SMDR long distance code can be up to 5 digits number 4 3 25 PSTN SMS ATTRIBUTES Foul FLEX em RANGE oe REMARK ___ _ __
61. 300 LDK 300E LDK 100 e LDK 20 Cancel 4 Click on the OK button 5 Select the port type Serial Connection 6 Click on the Select button Static C ISON Connection TCP Connection POCO COCO E ENEE EE EE REES C Modem Connection onnection ou selected sera Your PC must have free COM port Or you cant progress this work Terminate 7 Enter the Serial Port Number Admin Password and select the serial port Baud Rate 8 Click on the Next button 189 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 User Information Upgrade LOK Seres System E F i Ioj x Remote Site Info System serial Port Mo Admin Password Serial Port Cah Baud Fate ji 9200 File Info Binary File EN Browse aut settings Test Method 9 Click on the Start button the ipLDK MPB software upgrade will begin 10 When the ROM file is finished downloading the ipLDK System will erase the previous ROM data and start to fill ip LDK ROM area with the downloaded ROM file Condition While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ipLDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again Ifthe ROM files you want to send are invalid ipLDK MPB software upgrade will not be started Serial port should be connected to COM port 2 in the MP
62. 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition When external paging is required appropriate external equipment should be attached to the proper external page connections on the MBU A station which is in DND or busy it cannot receive a page A station which is not allowed to page cannot make a page When a paging is used in the system another paging is not allowed Page warning tone may be controlled by Admin Programming When the page timer is expired paging connection is automatically released and ICM busy tone is presented to the paging station You should lift the handset to make a page When trying to make a page without lifting handset LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE is displayed on the LCD Paging can be programmed to a Flex button If an intercom call is received to the paging station the caller will hear intercom busy tone If a CO line call is received to the paging station the station will receive off hook ring A station may respond meet me page regardless of assignment of pick up paging group assignment page access Page from CO line can t be answered by pressing the HOLD SAVE button or the code of meet me answer If a user tries to answer a meet me page request from CO line error tone is heard and LCD message for error will be displayed Admin Programming E Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 FLEX 10 E Page Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX 4 E Page Access PGM 1
63. 4 1234 is received when DID Digit Mask is set as 8 the digit is converted as 834 Collect Call Blocking 0 2 0 Not Block 1 block with indicator 2 block without indicator e Oalleat Gall Answer Timer e Im e CollectGallldle Timer Im 120 4 3 14 SLOT BASE PROGRAM Not available in pLDK 20 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT EE ege 155 R2 CRC Check ON OFF If this value is set to ENABLE the R2 eS is checked Set Distance coefficient Gain value is set according to the Distance 0 3 Coefficient a DCO IP Address 12 Digits IP Address IP Address of E1IB DCO Gateway IP Address 49 Digits IP Address a Gateway IP Address of E1IB DCO Subnet Mask 12 Digits IP Address a Subnet Mask IP Address of E1IB 6 DCO Server IP Address Server IP Address 12 12 Digits IP Address IP 12 Digits IP Address EE IP Address of E1IB ep ee 1 ON 0 OFF ea cial e a E value decides E11IB is Master party or Slave party 123 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Peers Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 15 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM TA TAM DA CE 160 e System Attributes 4 150 Attendant Call Queuing RBT MOH Mon kihe value s seio RET rng this value is set to RBT ring Ringback Tone back tone is provided to the station when the station calls busy attendant Otherwise hold tone or VMIB MOH PGM171 FLEX2 is provided AS RBT MOH Parvon ls or Ke a Back tone is heard _ a on Je Lin
64. 4 4 PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Remove Number 4 2 4 5 PGM 143 FLEX 5 ISDN Enblock Send 4 2 4 6 PGM 143 FLEX 6 Enblock Digit Timer 4 5 3 10 PGM 182 FLEX 10 CLIP COLP Table 4 8 2 PGM 201 Networking CO Line Type 4 12 3 2 PGM 322 FLEX 2 VOIB Mode 4 13 1 12 PGM 340 FLEX 12 SIP Attribute 1 PGM 500 SIP Attribute 2 PGM 501 197 LG NORTEL pao K IpLDK 20 100 300 300E Admin Programming Manual 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Copyright 2008 LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved This material is copyrighted by LG Nortel Co Ltd LGN Any unauthorized reproductions use or disclosure of this material or any part thereof is strictly prohibited and is a violation of Copyright Laws LGN reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice The information furnished by LGN in this material is believed to be accurate and reliable but is not warranted to be true in all cases LG and pLDK are trademarks of LG Nortel Co Ltd All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Revision History ISSUE DATE ContentsofChanges___________ REMARK A Sep 2008 Initial release for ipLDK 20 100 300 300E V38 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008
65. 4 7 Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security ADMIN program 111 FLEX 4 is set on a Station communication between the Station and another party is protected from signals such as overriding and Camp on to the Station refer to Ref A This status should primarily be used for modems and fax Stations Condition If an analog extension Data Fax Modem assigned data line security makes an external call via ISDN line 3 1 KHz Setup message will be sent to an ISDN CO line instead of the speech Setup message lf a busy station is assigned data line security receives an incoming CO call the call is disconnected regardless of the DID DISA Destination setting Reference A Camp On 2 4 5 B Attendant Override 2 13 5 C Call Transfer 2 3 2 Admin Programming E Data Line Security PGM 111 FLEX 4 45 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 8 Dialing Security Description The dialed phone number may not be displayed on the LCD of the called station when calling with a speed dial number refer to Ref A Operation To program a speed dial number with security dialing NOTE If speed dial starts with is operated with dialing security Press the TRANS MON button Press SPEED button Dial speed dial bin number Press button Dial the desired speed number Press HOLD button SOs e dl To activate a speed dial wit
66. 63 29 CCSS SUBRXGan SS C E E A SLIB SLT 00 63 23 3 SLIB CTR SL 00 63 12 pLDK 100 Default 27 Not in ipLDK 20 4 SLIBWTU 00 63 pLDK 100 Default 16 5 SLIB ACO 00 63 6 SLIBCTRCO 00 63 Not in ipLDK 20 161 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 POM FLEX MEMO RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 7 eoo ow C e TIE jos D s Japm men mm SUBTONE me 1 fems RS Pl SLIB MUSIC2 E SO O o o o A A A E to CTRSL2DKT__ 00 63 32 2 CTRSL2 SLT J00 63_ 433 ESCHER BS CTRSL ACO 00 63 44 6 OTRSLVAIRCO 00 682 Sg CTRSL2 DCO 00 63 SPEECH EE 9 CTRSL2DTMF 00 63 OB 403 WTIBRXGain Il 6 WTIBCTRCO J00 688 aa 8 WTIBVWMIB__ 00 638 OD 9 WTIB DTME _ 00 683 es 404 legen O ES A EA A E e ACOB ACO 00 63 oo J C 8 ACOBWMIB___ 00 63 B2 9 ACOB DTME_ 00 63 32 ICI E E 405 OTRACOBRX Gain Not in ip LDK 20 6 CTRCO8 CTRCO_ 00 68 J32 8 CTRCO8SNVMIB________ 00 683_ 37 9 CTRCO8 DTME_ 00 63 37 162 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DON FLEX ITEM LC RANGE _ DEFAULT REMARK 14 CTRCO8 MODEM 00 63 406 cos RX Gain 1 DCOB DKT 00 63 SL 2 E E G DCOB ACO 00 63 el C 8 _DCOBWMB_________00 63 B2 9 DCOB DOTMF 00 63 1 a o EE O JEE CO CA 407 WMIBRXGain_ LI ro wen o o SLL EE EE A VMIB ACO 00 63 I
67. 801 872 801 872 401 472 801 872 801 872 801 872 801 872 E f Es 801 824 801 824 801 824 401 424 801 824 801 824 801 824 801 824 pLDK 100 801 808 801 808 801 808 401 408 801 808 801 808 801 808 801 808 pLDK 20 88001 88001 48001 88001 88001 88400 88001 88400 88400 48400 88001 88400 88400 88400 88001 88400 ipLDK 300E 88001 88001 48001 88001 88001 8 Individual CO Access 88200 88001 88200 88200 48200 88001 88200 88200 88200 88001 88200 ipLDK 300 8801 8840 8801 8840 8801 8840 4801 4840 8801 8840 8801 8840 8801 8840 8801 8840 ipLDK 100 8801 8816 8801 8816 8801 8816 4801 4816 8801 8816 8801 8816 8801 8816 8801 8816 IP LDK20 9 Tie Routing Access 8901 8901 8901 4901 89 8901 8901 401 L Retrieve Held CO Line ES E ES J ES SO ESO E 11 Retrieve Held Individual CO SHXXX SHXXX SHXXX 4 Xxx SHXXX SHXXX Stee 8 XXX e SE pLDK 100 20 19 Access CO Line In the 1 available CO Line Group 110 SS IOLDkK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 TEE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 FLEX FIELD NUMBER NUMBER SET2 NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER E Gg Gg SET6 SET7 SET8 109 13 Attendant Cal DJ ESOS Zem CO O In DI 2 Door Open th SCH in pLDK 7 7 7 7 7 7 loLDK N A N A pLDK 100 20 i wit essage Waling Enable 3 e e 5 e d 3 3 oO 22 VMMessage Waiting Disable Y II Im AAA EE 2 RSG Door Openi III II IT 3 RSGDoorOpen2_ 2 IS IS a RARA
68. 900 3 digits 180 sec Determines the amount of time before receiving warning tone in order to remind the call elapsed time in case of outgoing CO line conversation Only for Korea 181 1 Call FWD No Answer Timer 000 255 3 digits 015 sec This timer is used at the no answer call forward feature Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 2 3 1 2 and 2 3 1 3 If station is set for No Answer Call Forward and if station doesn t answer during this timer then the call will be routed to the forward destination 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer 00 99 2 digits 00 sec This timer is used at DID or DISA call routing If station doesn t answer about DID DISA call during this timer the call will be routed to PGM 167 FLEX 3 value 3 VMIB User Record Timer 010 255 3 digits 020 sec This is the maximum time that station user can record his VMIB announcement VMIB Valid User Message 1 digit sec This is the minimum time that station user must record his VMIB announcement If this value is set to 0 VMIB announcement can not be recorded needed to execute the door open relay for the setting time sec ICM box associated stations SE when ICM box user press ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 20 2 digits sec This timer is used when the off hooked station is heard the intercom dial tone If station doesn t dial a digit within this timer error tone is provided Inter Digit Timer 01 20 2 digits sec This timer is used
69. ADMIN Programming Manual 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes To assign a direct button i e CO or DSS button 1 2 3 4 Press the TRANS PGM button Press the FLEX Button to be assigned Type the desired Code Press the HOLD SAVE button To assign Telephone Number LDP 6000 7000 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX Button to be assigned 3 Press the TEL NUM soft button 4 Type the desired telephone number 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition A flexible button that is not assigned as CO Line button is considered a Feature button and is programmable at each Station When ADMIN program 112 FLEX 6 CO Line Programming is enabled the flexible button that is assigned as CO line button can be programmed 49 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Flexible Button Assignment PGM 115 ECO Line Programming PGM 112 FLEX 6 2 4 13 Headset Description An industry standard headset can be connected to a Station instead of handset The Station is programmed for headset operation in place of speakerphone operation Operation To change the Station mode for Speakerphone or Headset 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial code 7 5 3 The Station Answer mode should be displayed on the LCD 4 Dial code 1 Speaker mode or O Headset mode To change the Headset
70. Admin Programming E Paging Timeout Timer PGM 181 FLEX 10 2 8 3 SOS Paging Description The system allows of being recorded multiple VMIB messages for pre recorded paging Depending on circumstance user can use pre recorded messages for paging Recorded VMIB message is paged to a page zone at emergency Operation To assign VMIB SOS Paging at a flexible button perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Press the FLEX button to assign Dial paging code 5xx Dial Message number 001 070 Press the HOLD SAVE button te INS To activate VMIB SOS paging 1 Press the assigned VMIB SOS Paging flexible button Condition This feature can be only activated by pressing assigned flexible button on a DKTU in idle state The VMIB message for SOS Paging can be recorded only at attendant station Paging zone includes internal external and all call paging area VMIB SOS paging is not restricted by VMIB Paging timer The whole VMIB SOS paging can be paged even though Paging Timeout timer expires 99 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 8 4 Push to Talk PTT Description In WIT 300HE using the PTT button the user can talk to members of an internal page zone Operation Registration of internal page zone for PTT 1 Press TRANS PGM Press 17 2 3 Input the internal page zone for PTT If you want to remove the assig
71. Admin Programming NH Forced Hands Free Mode PGM 111 FLEX 19 2 4 33 Hot Desk Description A hot desk enables the user to dynamically select a Station using a login logout operation without having a fixed station For example in a call center or marketing department people can share work stations with one another Operation To activate hot desk operation at a dummy station perform the following Steps 1 User goes Off hook or presses the MON button 2 Dial the authorization code and then press the key If Authorization Code is set to 5 digits the is not needed 3 The Station restores the User s database station number COS ring assign etc and can receive incoming calls 67 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To logout a User perform the following Steps 1 Press the PGM 2 Dial the User Logout code logout code or press the programmed Agent Logout flex button To program Agent Logout at Flex button Press Trans PGM Flex Button Trans PGM 3 User can select the call forward type refer to values using the volume up down keys Off net speed 000 Mobile extension s VMIB VM group 4 Press the HOLD button 5 The User database is saved and the Station returns to the dummy state Condition A dummy station will display DUMMY STATION xxx xxx the physical Station number A dummy station on
72. Agents PGM 250 FLEX 2 E Agent Auto Logout Timer PGM 250 FLEX 3 2 4 34 Analogue CLI Display Description The ipLDK System supports the following CLI protocol specifications Bellcore GR 30 CORE SR TSV 002476 8 ETSI ETS 300 659 ETSI ETS 300 778 Denmark TDK TS 900 216 Sweden Telecom specification 8211 A112 Standard SS 63 63 25 68 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation When an incoming CO call is received at a CO line board 1 The CLI information is detected by hardware and is distributed to station Condition If an incoming CO call is assigned to multiple SLTs of a same slot the CO rings are generated sequentially with a 1 second interval on the SLTs CLI is displayed on the SLT after the first ring For CLI display on the SLT a Ring Phase PGM 182 FLEX4 more than 4 seconds is recommended lf the ring phase is less than 4 seconds some of the SLTs will not receive CLI display signal Admin Programming WCID ATTR PGM 185 2 4 35 Call Log Description The Call Log feature enables the DKTU telephone User to view a log of the last 15 50 incoming and outgoing calls The User can scroll the list of numbers stored select the desired number and activate a redial to that number The log includes the CLI or dialed number the time the date and Station System Speed name of the call it is stored on the MPB and is retained if
73. Attendant Station 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for Call Barring OR Press the FLASH key 2 0 Dial the password code to increase the COS Service will be accepted and or rejected by PX and display during off hook state When an Attendant station goes to on hook state if the COS is restored to C5 then the feature key LED goes off and the normal LCD message will be displayed But if COS is not restored to C5 Reject case then the LCD remains as before CO Key and feature key flashing at 60 IPM oo O Condition This feature is only available in National Keypad Protocol Password code for Call Barring can not be programmed to a flexible button the User will always need to dial the code This feature is supported only on an access basis only an Attendant Station can activate this feature If a non Attendant Station attempts to activate this feature an error tone will be heard The Call Barring key has toggle functionality class up down If activated ISDN CO line COS will change according to service type class up down When the COS is changed to C2 state the services available in all ISDN co lines depend on the PX 145 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 8 3 Call Forward Unconditional ATD only pLDK 20 Only CFU Italy national protocol Description This feature is used to reroute forward
74. CO call after the timer expires While seizing a CO line the Station User secures another CO line by pressing the CO button If this value is set to ON the previous seized CO line will automatically be placed on Hold If this flag is set to ON an outgoing CO call may be disconnected when CO call restriction timer expires Automatic Hold CO Call Time Restriction If this value is set to ON the Station User can access an individual CO line by dialing the individual CO access code Individual CO Line Access CO Line Queuing When a user of station receives a busy signal during an attempt to access a CO line the user may request a call back queued call when the CO Line is available If this value is set to ON the Station User will receive a call back from the CO Line when one is available If this value is set to ON the Station User can program a CO button to one of the available Flexible button If this value is set to ON the station user can answer calls according to designated priority Priority Line Answer PLA FLEX1 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON ADMIN 180 FLEX 22 VALUES Default ON for Attendant Station 0 OFF 1 ON VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON FLEX2 1 ON HOLD SAVE FLEX3 1 ON HOLD SAVE PGM 180 FLEX 17 VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON FLEX4 0 OFF HOLD SAVE ADMIN 107 FLEX 8 FLEX5 0 OFF HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON
75. COLP LCD Display ON OFF connected party s CLI is displayed on station LCD If this value is set to RED the forwarding station no is sent CLI REDIRECT CLI REDIRECT CL Otherwise the original CLI is sent when using networking forward feature 4 CLI MSG Wait If this value is set to ON the station can receive CLI message from CO ON OFF OFF Incoming call when the station doesn t answer 115 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM a ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK EXT or CO ATD If this value is set to ATD CO ATD code ADMIN 200 is used to RESERVED ATD EXT outgoing CLI information Otherwise station number is used as CLI information Keypad Facility If this value is set to KEYPAD ISDN station sends digit in keypad facility RESERVED era a after connected Otherwise DTMF is used Long Short Fee short If this value is set to LONG ISDN RESERVED aen acts in LONG passive mode CPN Type 0 Not used This value set CPN IE type of SETUP message If this value is set to 0 all RESERVED SO stations of the S port get the incoming call In case of 1 4 2 only one specific station gets the call SO Sub address 0 Not used This value indicates how the sub address is used in SETUP message RESERVED If this value is set to 0 station sub address not used Else if set to 1 sub address is filled in the CPN field of SETUP message Otherwise sub address i
76. COS will be applied 9 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 If using Extend System Authorization Code 3 11 digits the individual Authorization COS will be applied In case of UK or Sweden user can not access the CO line with station authorization Only system authorization code can be permitted Reference A Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 1 3 B VMIB Announcement 2 11 C Authorization Code 2 5 2 D Class of Service COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming EDISA Line Assignment PGM 140 FLEX 2 EDISA Account Code PGM 141 FLEX 3 m DISA Retry Counter PGM 160 FLEX 4 E CO to CO COS Assignment PGM 166 E Weekly Time Table PGM 233 DISA Restriction PGM 114 FLEX 10 2 1 5 Customer Call Routing CCR with VMIB Description CCR is the incoming CO Call type of DISA DID refer to Ref A Ref B the user can route the destination by pressing only one digit If user presses a certain digit the corresponding VMIB announcement is played When the user presses the desired digit again call routing is established CCR Reroute destination can be assigned by each VMIB announcement There is three reroute destination Busy destination Error Time out destination and No answer destination Each destination have three type Tone Attendant Ring Assigned destination Hunt group Refer to below condition about CCR reroute destination A user also may acc
77. Call UCD DND 00 60 sec If this timer set to 00 sec this timer is Timer not operated If this timer is set to 10 after 10 sec ringing UCD member is automatically UCD DND state Queued Tone ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON Mute ring is served to UCD group first member when call is queued This mute ring is served only one time during 0 4 sec Name a name can be assigned digit Ring Group VMIB Announce we 999 W sec nicas the call isn t answered during this timer 1 Timer the system plays VMIB announcement that is programmed at PGM191 FLEX 3 VMIB Announce 9 999 000 sec The second VMIB announcement can be 2 Timer played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2 announcement timer The played VMIB announcement can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 4 er Es 1 Location Ad when the VMIB announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 07 00 Not This is used to play VMIB announcement 2 Location ed when the VMIB Announce 2 timer expires This second VMIB announcement can be played repeatedly according to PGM191 FLEX 5 and 6 value VMIB Announce 000 999 000 sec This is used to repeat VMIB announce 2 2 Repeat timer when the timer is expired 000 Not repeat Peace Or PF etna 2 Repeat E D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Overflow The call to a station in the group will Destination continue to route until answered or each station in the group has been tried The call will rema
78. Call Transfer 2 3 2 D Call Forward 2 3 1 Admin Programming E Do Not Disturb PGM 111 FLEX 3 Executive Secretary Table PGM 229 ECO Call To SEC PGM 229 FLEX2 E Call EXEC If SEC DND PGM 229 FLEX3 MEXEC Grade PGM 229 FLEX4 102 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 9 2 Linked Pair Station Description Two stations can be linked with each other by programming Linking with a DKTU and another station the user can use them alternatively When two stations are linked the following functions are supported Figure 2 9 2A describes that if two linked stations in Linked Pair are idle and a CO call arrives two linked stations ring But the figure 2 9 2B describes that if one linked station in Linked Pair is busy and a new CO call arrives the caller will hear the busy tone Ex Call to STA 110 CO LINE Linked Pair STA 110 When the linked stations are idle Figure 2 9 2a Ringing in Linked Pair two IDLE linked stations Busy state CO LINE Call to STA 110 gt Busy Tone STA 110 When the linked stations are busy Figure 2 9 2b Ringing in Linked Pair one Busy linked station If one of two linked stations receives intercom calls CO incoming calls DISA DID recall ring system exclusive hold transfer then the other linked station will receive ring together refer to Ref A Ref B If one station of li
79. Chime Bell Activate Station press Chime Bell button Chime Bell Receive Station starts to ring To program a flexible button as the Chime Bell button perform the following steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and the flexible button to be assigned 2 Dial the code TRANS PGM 9 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 70 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To Active or Chime Bell 1 Press Chime Bell button at the Chime Bell Activate station Condition The ring stops when Chime Bell Timer expires Chime Bell Ring Cannot be answered If Chime Bell Receive station is busy or Off Hook state the station gets Mute ring instead Chime Bell master and slave station should be keyset Chime Bell can not be set linked pair Admin Programming E Chime Bell Station Pair PGM184 Flex1 E Chime Bell Relay PGM184 Flex2 E Chime Bell Timer PGM184 Flex3 E Chime Bell Frequency PGM184 Flex4 2 4 38 Emergency Intrusion Description lf Emergency Supervisor Station calls other station and the Supervisor is heard busy tone the Supervisor can dial Emergency Intrusion code and makes conversation directly with the called station Operation To activate Emergency Intrusion perform the following step 1 Just dial Emergency Intrusion code FF while listening to the busy tone Condition Emergency Intrusion call is only possible when
80. Description___________ Procedure COMMENTS Set MAC Address Designates registration of RSG to FLEX1 MAC Address VALUES the pLDK System enter the MAC HOLD SAVE Default 00 00 00 00 00 00 of RSG after completing VOIB Configuration The hex digits A F can be entered by pressing buttons refer to Button Tables BUTTON Table DIGIT DIGIT gt JA MUTE D_ IB UD TE LDP 7000 series Button Table DIGIT DIGIT igh Do fe fi Li EDM ZE Description____ Procedure JL COMMENTS IP Address Display Displays the IP Address of FLEX2 VALUES the RSGM Default 0 0 0 0 RSG Port View When using RSG 2 Stations FLEX3 VALUES and 1 CO can be assigned Default D S C this feature allows the Station D DKT number and the CO line DSLT number to be viewed C CO line D egret n RSGM of RSGM monov ea S o Numbers being used STUN Enabled If RSGM is connected to FLEX7 VALUES ipLDK system This feature Default NONE shows if the IP station use NAT of PAT Display Only None PAT NAT or NAT PAT 86 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 5 RSGM ATTRIBUTES II PGM 384 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 384 3 Enter the appropriate Bin number Range 1 8 ipLDK 20 01 96 ipLDK 100 300 300E 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table
81. Detailed Attribute of the type a D N W ee Night Weekend Lunch ae hr DISA SVC ON OFF Po MIB ANNG 00 70 00 Not Assigned 141 Ss CO Line Attributes I ESTO O A CO Line Group Assignment ipLDK 20 00 09 1 Each CO Line must be a member ipLDK 100 00 of CO Line Group 25 Groups may be assigned according ioLDK to CO type and Class Of Service Group 00 means private group and group 09 ipLDK 20 25 ipLDK 100 73 ipLDK 300 300E 2__ GO Line COS _ 4 5 II LOGO is assigned to each CO line DISA Account Code ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON when the incoming CO caller tries to access another CO Line by dialing CO Line access code the caller should enter the authorization code This is applied only when CO Service type is DISA CO Line Assign POL LOOP wt If this value is set to ON Reverse TT ray is applied to the CO Line otherwise Loop Start is applied CO Line Type TO Ooo this value is set to PBX the Tee system is PBX If it is set to CO the system is Central Office CO Line Signal Type e DTMF If this value is set to DTMF the CO Line signaling type is set to DTMF otherwise signaling type is set to Pulse N OFF If this feature is set to ON Universal Answer service is applied to this CO Line 300 300E 00 73 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM_______ RANGE DEFAULT REMARK_ CO Line Gro
82. Dial number should be erased from the speed bin MINA 19 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To display and enter a Speed Dial bin by scrolling perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Speed Dial bin number 4 Press the UP or DOWN key to display the next previous Speed Dial number To store Station Speed Dial numbers from a SLT perform the following Steps Lift the handset Dial the Speed Dial program code 5 5 5 refer to Ref C Dial the Speed Dial bin number 000 099 Dial the desired phone number up to 24 digits Press and release the hook switch Gi YS To make a call using Station Speed Dial from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed Dial access code 5 5 8 refer to Ref D 3 Dial the Station Speed dial bin 000 099 To delete a Station Speed Dial from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Speed Dial access code 5 5 5 refer to Ref C 3 Dial the appropriate Station Speed Dial bin 000 099 4 Press and release the hook switch Condition 1 CPTU should be installed to detect a dial tone 2 The Station Speed Dial is secured in data protect mode when the power is OFF 3 There can be a maximum of 24 digits in a Station Speed Dial number including special digits and Function codes 4 If you dial an empty station Speed dial bin an error
83. Digit Receive Number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146 2 Set DID Conversion Type to 0 using Digit Mask at ADMIN 143 and press FLEX A 3 Set DID Digit Mask by pressing 1 The first digit 2 is ignored and second digit 6 is converted to 1 and the last two digits are bypassed Ignore bypass Ex 2 To make a DID call using the Flexible DID Table DID type 2 perform the following 1 Verify that DID Digit Receive Number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146 2 Set DID Conversion Type as 2 using Flexible DID Table at ADMIN 143 and press FLEX A 3 Program Flexible DID Table as shown in the ADMIN 231 Flex DID Conversion Table ADMIN 231 FLEX DID CONVERSION TABLE 000 DAY Station 200 NIGHT WEEKEND LUNCH REROUTE DAY Hunt 620 NIGHT WEEKEND LUNCH REROUTE DAY Station 129 NIGHT WEEKEND LUNCH REROUTE Condition When a DID Type 2 is received at a busy station the call is automatically handled according to the reroute destination refer to Flexible DID Table and Ref A Destination of calls handled can be Station Hunt group VMIB announcement Drop after VMIB announcement System Speed refer to Ref B Net Station Station voice mail box If the call is not answered or the number was invalid the call is routed by DID DISA Destination DID calls to a busy station can be placed on a waiting stage according to admin programming to KTU and SLT Reference A Weekly Time Table PGM223 B System Speed Dialing 2
84. Enable PGM 161 F9 is set to OFF A guaranteed announcement is obtained by assigning O seconds to the first announcement Reference A Traffic Analysis 2 18 Admin Programming Hunt Group Assignment PGM 190 E Hunt Group Attribute PGM 191 E ACD Print Enable PGM 161 FLEX 9 E ACD Print Timer PGM 161 FLEX 10 m ACD Clear Database after Print PGM 161 FLEX 11 92 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 7 Conference Description A station user Supervisor can make a call with intercom stations and CO Lines Supervisor invites station user or CO Line user one by one with CONF button Connected users can speak and hear with each other at the same time In Multi Line conference up to 15 3 in ipLDK 20 Parities intercom CO Line can enter a conference Up to 14 2 in ipLDK_20 CO lines can have a conference with one intercom station Unsupervised Conference is that leaved members are still preserve conference status though the conference initiator supervisor may exit a conference Conference Type Description A station user can make a call with internal STA and CO lines Multi Line Conference One internal party can make conference with max 14 2 in ipLDK 20 CO lines In unsupervised conference it is restricted to Unsupervised Conference timer if Unsupervised Conference eg l l there is no internal station in the conference Default
85. Ge Line eg yee of DCO emmer al SE of DCO Ss CLI Digit Number 01 15 ME Set the digit numbers received for CLI 4 DCOBCO Type 02 TI 0 DID amp DOD 2 DIDOny 4 po S Block CMD ON OFF If this value is set to ON the DCO line send S Block command to PX 139 e Ip LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 19 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 190 Group Type Fee group type can be selected among NEE up networking VM Pick up Attribute WW This value is used to assign the pick up attribute for Hunt groups Except Pick up Hunt group all types of Hunt group can be assigned the pick up attribute optionally Member Assignment Not Assigned This member assignment process can be executed in two ways Individually assigning by pressing the Flexible Button which user wants to assign and then entering the station number or assigning successively by entering the first station number and last station number 4 3 20 STATION GROUP PROGRAM Po ITEM FLEX SUB TEM__ RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Circular Group VMIB Announce 000 999 015 sec If the call doesn t answer during this timer Terminal Group 1 Timer the system plays VMIB announcement that is programmed at PGM191 FLEX 3 VMIB Announce 000 999 000 sec The second VMIB announcement can be 2 Timer played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2 Announcement timer The played VM
86. If some CLI number is registered at Incoming CLI Destination Table all of DID call with these CLI will be routed to registered specific places ICLID Table Incoming CLI Destination Table has two fields one is CLID field and the other is Destination Index field Destination Index field is represent index number of DID Conversion Table PGM 231 If CLI from external call is matched with CLID field this call will reference Destination Index field and then look at registered destination of index from DID Conversion Table Operation To set Incoming CLI and Index Tables 1 PGM237 and choose table number 2 User can register CLI number at Button1 3 User can assign Index Table number at Button2 Rerouting destination by Incoming CLI 1 DID incoming call has own CLI 2 This call will be analyzed with ICLID Table 3 If CLI of this call is matched registered CLI field then look up DID Conv Table with saved index 4 This call will be delivered some specific destination by ICLID Index Table Condition This feature is supported when only CO type is DID This feature is executed first when system receives DID call with CLI 148 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 ICLID Table is auto sorted table So when admin user enters the CLI and Conv Table index number this field is saved automatically by sorted f saved CLI number is same some previous field
87. MOH 1 VALUES HOLD SAVE 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 ICM Ring Back To assign an external ICM ring back tone setthe FLEX6 SLT MOH VALUES Tone SLT Station number of the SLT port Range 1 5 refer to 1 SLT MOH 1 VALUES HOLD SAVE 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 CO Ring Back To assign external DID ring back tone set the FLEX7 SLT MOH VALUES Tone SLT Station number of the SLT port refer to VALUES 1 SLT MOH 1 HOLD SAVE 2 SLT MOH 2 3 SLT MOH 3 4 SLT MOH 4 5 SLT MOH 5 3 4 13 PBX ACCESS CODE PGM 172 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 172 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 172 COMMENTS PBX Access Code A maximum 4 PABX Access FLEX1 FLEX1 4 9 10r2 VALUES Codes can be assigned A digits Range f 1 99 Default Not Assigned PABX Access Code is a 1 or 2 HOLD SAVE digit number 39 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 e Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 14 PLA PRIORITY SETTING PGM 173 FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK SS REC Recall 3 INC Incoming Call QUE Queued Call 1 4 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 173 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 173 COMMENTS PLA Priority Sett
88. Manual September 2008 2 16 5 2 Net Call Forward Busy Description It is possible for a User to forward their Station remotely over the Network when it is busy Operation To activate Net Call Forward busy 1 Press the MON button and the DND FOR button 2 Dial Net Call Forward code 2 and dial a Station number on another networking system 3 The DND FOR button will flash and a confirmation tone should be provided 4 Ifan incoming call is received at the net call busy Forwarding Station the call is routed to the set Forwarded to Station when the called Station is busy 5 The Forwarded to Station will ring and when answered the call will be connected 2 16 5 3 Net Call Forward Busy No Answer Description It is possible for a User to forward their Station remotely over the Network when it is busy or there is No Answer within the appropriate timer Operation To activate Net Call Forward busy no answer Press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Net Call Forward code 4 and dial the Station number of another networking system The DND FOR button will flash and a confirmation tone should be provided If an incoming call is received at the Net Call Busy No Answer Forwarding Station the call is routed to a Forwarded to Station when the called Station is busy or does not answer The Forwarded to Station will ring When the forwarded to station is answered the Call Forwarded and Forwarded
89. Manual September 2008 2 12 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Description The ipLDK System SMDR station message detail recording provides details information about both incoming calls and outgoing calls In this feature it is programmable to record all calls or just outgoing long distance calls SMDR information includes outgoing CO Line dialed number time date station that answer the call duration of call and etc Authorization codes may also be entered and recorded SMDR for Intercom call include ICM SMS is also provided ICM call SMDR is controlled by admin programming Operation To print the SMDR perform the following Steps 1 Activate the PC utility program on a networked PC 2 Connect the serial port of MBU to the serial port of the PC with the RS 232C cable 3 Atthe Attendant Station Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 0111 Station Base or 0113 Group Base 4 Enter the Station or Group range 5 The SMDR is printed to PC To delete a SMDR 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0112 Station Base or 0114 Group Base To abort SMDR printing 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0116 Condition There is an assignable SMDR record option ADMIN Program PGM177 FLEX 3 If SMDR LONG DISTANCE ONLY is selected only outgoing toll call will be printed If SMDR ALL CALL is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance call are printed f user dials any number with a p
90. Name Set authentication user name if authentication is used Authentication User This Admin is used for setting SIP Max 64 digits of character string Password Authentication User Password set authentication user password if authentication is used Contact Number This Admin is used for setting the Contact Max 12 digits of character string Number VOIB uses the Contact header and VOIB IP address the set station number or DID number is used to route the SIP UID User ID Registration This Admin is used for setting User ID Provision Register Registration determines registration of the SIP UID User ID Usage When value is set to ON determines ON OFF the use of the SIP User ID Associated Station This Admin is used for setting Station Number Associated Station to support SIP supplementary service Click to dial Click to answer Voice Mail notify only for the BroadWorks soft switch 83 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 RSG IP Phone PGM 380 397 3 13 1 VOIB SLOT ASSIGNMENT RSG IP PHONE PGM 380 The VOIB slot and VOIB channel for RSG IP Phone can be assigned The RSG is serviced through VOIB So the VOIB for RSG should be assigned In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 380 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 380 COMMENTS VOIB Slot For RSG IP Designates the
91. Not Used 1 DKTU in RSG 2 E in RSG 2 RSG Nation Code System Nation TT ON OFF OFF O this value is set to ON IP security is q A 385 Les se wee EE 2 RSG 25 48 Non O S O 2 JPG Non 2 SC EC Non O O 386 UP Phore Attribute 1 SetMAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 IP Address Display OO 3 ITA O SO FORT Number Display 6 NAT Port Number so eNe o 8 CTIIP Address SKIP 00 S 9 IPSEC ONOFF OFF TI d0 Outside NAT Firewall ON OFF OFF 11 User ID Max 12 characters Phontage can be registered to the ti system by entering User ID Password Phontage can be registered to the system by entering this User ID Password 390 RSG DKTRXGain Il OR 2 RSGDKTRXtfromSLT____ 00 63 i y O 3 RSG_DKTRXfromCTR_ SIT 00 63_ O 4 RSGDKTRXtromWKT____ 00 63 o S O 5 RSG DKT RXfrom ACO 00 63 l i O 6 RSG_DKT RX from CTR_ACO 100 8688 159 e TAL DK 20 100 300E version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DON FLEX DEN RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 7 RSG DKTRXfrmDCO 00 638 8 RSG DKTRXfrom VMIB_ 00 63 9 RSG_DKTRXfromDTMF 00 638 10 RSG_DKTRXfromTONE 00 63 gt 11 RSG_DKTRXfromMUSIC1 00 63 12 RSG_DKT RX from MUSIC 2 00 63 13 RSG_DKT RX from RSG_DKT 00 63 14 RSG_DKTRXfromRSG_SLT 00 63 15 RSG_DKTRXfromRSG_LCO 00 63 16 RSG_DKT RX from IP Phone 00 63 391 RASGDKT TRA SS 1 RSGDKTRXtoDKTU__ mg 2 RSG_DKTRAXt
92. Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group FLEX7 VALUE VALUES will continue to route until Destination Type Range 1 4 1 Station answered or each station in the VALUE STA Hunt 2 Hunt group has been tried The call AT Bina 3 VMIB 00 70 00 will remain at the last station in Note Assigned the group or will be passed to 4 System Speed the overflow station group 2000 2499 ipLDK 20 VMIB System Speed bin after 2000 3499 ipLDK 100 2000 4999 ipLDK 300 2000 6999 ipLDK 300E the overflow timer expires Overflow Timer If timer expires after a call is FLEX8 Seconds received in the group the call Range 000 600 will be routed to the overflow HOLD SAVE destination Wrap up Timer Designates the amount of time a FLEX9 Seconds call will be held in a busy state Range 002 999 following expiration of the timer HOLD SAVE No Answer Timer In circular terminal Hunt Group FLEX10 Seconds if the incoming call is not Range 00 99 answered during the designated HOLD SAVE amount of time the call will be routed to the next idle station in the group Pilot Hunt If this value is set ON calls to FLEX11 0 OFF each Hunt Group member will HOLD SAVE be processed as a call to the Hunt Group A circular terminal Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number so that only calls to the pilot number will be treated as calls to the Hunt Group 94 SG In
93. PX and an announcement about wrong access will be heard 5 When the station returns to an on hook state the normal LCD will be displayed To retrieve messages left in Memo Tel MSRS 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for MEMO TEL Retrieve MSRS Code OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 9 4 An Enter Password announcement will be heard or if rejected the wrong access announcement will be presented 5 Dial the Password 4 digits the key 6 Dial the appropriate access code as detailed by the PX announcement Condition Memo Tel is only available in National Keypad Protocol When activated by the Attendant Station ISDN lines will be in Memo Tel mode the Attendant can retrieve MSRS messages or check the status of the system for all ISDN lines When activated by a non Attendant Station number basis the first CO line registered to the Station according to the MSN table will be in Memo Tel mode The User should be assigned with the specific subscriber number and CO number to MSN table If no CO number is assigned to MSN table the System will choose the first available CO as default To retrieve stored messages or check service status at the Station a CO line does not need to be accessed User can check service status to PX using Interrogation of Service Status service 2 14 9 DID Call Destination with Incoming CLI Description DID incoming CO call destination can be assigned by incoming CLI
94. Retry Counter expired If the destination is set to attendant system checks if there s any ring assigned station and gives the ring to assigned station first If the ring assigned station does not answer also then the attendant receives the call When there is a DID DISA incoming call and if the caller dialed busy destination the call is routed to Busy Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call and if the caller dialed invalid number the call is routed to Error Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call and the destination is not answer the call is routed to No Answer Destination Tone Attendant Hunt When there is a DID DISA incoming call and the destination is on DND state then the call is routed to DND Destination Tone Attendant Hunt If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available The proper VMIB announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to each Destination If the value is set to ON Busy announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Busy Destination If the value is set to ON Error announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed to Error Destination 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 Ion _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE _ SSES REMARK ___ DND Prompt Usage No Answer Prompt Usage Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage
95. SIP User ID Table bin 00 32 UID table index for SIP outgoing call VOIB make From Header if this value is 00 Use COLP 01 32 Use SIP UID PGM 501 1 Listen Redial DTMF If this value is set to ON DTMF tone is heard to the station user while redial CO Warning Tone ial OFF In case of restricting outgoing CO call time if this value is set to ON the station user receives warning tone during CO call after the timer expires ADMIN 180 FLEX 22 Automatic Hold ON OFF While seizing a CO line the station user seizes another CO line by pressing the CO button If this value is set to ON the previous seized CO line goes on hold automatically In case of Attendant default value is ON 112 CO Call Time ON OFF OFF If this flag is set to ON station e outgoing Restriction CO call may be disconnected when Call Cut Off Timer PGM113 FLEX12 expires Ind CO Line Access EN DIS ENABLE If this value is set to ENABLE the station user can access individual CO line by dialing Individual CO access code ADMIN 107 FLEX 8 CO Line Queuing EN DIS ENABLE When a user of station receives a busy signal during an attempt to access a CO line the user may request a call back queue when the CO Line is available If this value is set to ENABLE the user gets the recalling from the CO Line when it s available CO PGM EN DIS DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE the station user can program CO button at its Flexible
96. Send Station number as CPN 2 Bypass CPN from the Network SO Sub Address Indicates how the sub address is used inthe FLEX9 1 IN CPN VALUES SETUP message field of SETUP 0 Station sub If this value is set to 0 the Station sub HOLD SAVE address not used address not used If set to 1 sub address is 1 Station sub filled in the CPN field of the SETUP message address IN CPN Otherwise the sub address is filled in the 2 Station sub CPSN Called Party Sub address Number address IN CPSN field of the SETUP message DISA Restriction If this value is set to ON the station is FLEX10 1 ON VALUES restricted to receive the DISA incoming call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON CLI Name Display If this field is ON the system checks whether FLEX11 1 ON the received CLI matches with the speed dial HOLD SAVE data If it matches the speed dial name is displayed ISDN CLI STA Used as outgoing CLI when outgoing CLI is FLEX12 1 ON VALUES active and CLI type is EXT Station HOLD SAVE Default Logical Station Number Progress Indication If this value is set to ON the Progress FLEX13 1 ON VALUES Indicator shows non ISDN devices HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ISDN CLI Restriction If this value is set to ON the CLI information FLEX14 1 ON VALUES CLIR is restricted by PX HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ISDN COLR If this value is set to ON the connected party FLEX15 1 ON
97. Set CO Lines from the carrier A to CO group 1 Enable access CO group Override 1st CO Group Set CO Lines from the carrier B to CO group 2 01 02 OFF LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00 M01 M02 M11 M12 LCR TYPE COL Co Group 02 LOOP LCR enabled LCR CODE 001 DMT 00 00 00 Ex 3 Make another CO Access Code ipLDK system has VOIP CO Lines and normal CO Lines system administrator wants to access VOIP CO using code 7 and access normal CO Lines using code 9 as the default CO Access Code ADMIN 106 Remove change numbering plan which starts with 7 ADMIN 141 ADMIN 117 ADMIN 161 3 Set normal CO Lines to CO group 1 Enable access CO group 01 02 Override 1st CO Group OFF Set VOIP CO Lines to CO group 2 LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00 M02 M12 M13 LCR TYPE INT Remove Position 01 Internal LCR enabled LCR CODE 7 Remove Number 01 DMT 00 00 00 Co Group 02 Ex 4 Password for specific dial number The international access code is 001 system administrator allows international calls by only those users who know the system password ll ADMIN220 ADMIN 221 LDT ADMIN 222 DMT LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00 M12 M13 LCR TYPE COL Co Group 01 LOOP CO LCR enabled LCR CODE 001 DMT 00 00 00 Check Password ON 15 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition There are 6 LCR modes The mode is determined by ADMIN 220 FLEX 1 LCR Acces
98. Station COS Down gt 22 Station COS Restore 22 23 Walking COS gt sw Authorization Code Registration 32 Authorization Code Change OO M Wake up Time Registration One time Continuous 42 WakeupTime Cancel SS S 51 Pre selected MSG Activation lt 520s Set Custom Message _ _ oS S O EX ASI G 54 ug Way Recording gt Attendant Camp On Queue BTN Assignment 57 CallLog Display ISSO 6t Record VMIB User Greeting So O 64 ListnVMiBStationStatus __ S S O 66 Erase VMIB User Greeting _ o o O 71 LCD Display Mode English DomesticLanguage OO Background Music SO 74 i Station UserName Registration __________ O 75 Headset Speakerphone Mode 76 LDeadeet Ring Mode 80 Account Code Activation ss MMS Wa 83 ICM Hold BTN Assignment 84 TLOOP BTNAssignment _ __ o S O 85 Camp onjBTNAssignment ll 86 INTRUSION BTNAssignmet_____________ SystemAttendant _ Hunt Grp No 89 Keypad Facility Key 8 ACD STATUS BTN Assignment ss ou o MON BTNAssignmet 28BINKeyset 98 ID Restriction _ _ S o e ISA Restriction ss Yo Call RecordingviaUSB 103 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 2 ADMIN Programming Index MAIN MENU TI PGM ITEM PRE PROGRAMMED DATABASE Location Program Rack Slot Assignment Logical Slot Assignment 11 StationAtibutel__ oo 115 die STATION BASE PROGRAM Flex Button Assignment 16 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM SYSTEM
99. System Speed Dial the routing will be the same as Incoming CO Off net Call Forward Reference A Direct Inward Dial DID 2 1 3 B Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 1 4 C VMIB Announcement 2 11 D DISA Authorization Code 2 5 2 E System Speed Dial 2 2 8 5 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Flexible DID Table PGM 231 m DID Digit Conversion Table PGM 146 FLEX 5 FLEX 6 EDISA Retry Counter PGM 160 FLEX 4 E CCR Inter dot Timer PGM 180 FLEX 15 Winter dou Timer PGM 181 FLEX 8 m DID DISA Destination PGM 167 E Custom Call Routing Table PGM 228 2 1 6 CO Line Name Description This feature allows the capability to name each CO Line Stations with an LCD interface screen including the Attendant Station will display the programmed CO Line Name when incoming CO call in place of the default LINE XXX display If nation is Turkey all of incoming and outgoing CO call is displayed line Name Condition This applies to all conditions where the LINE XXX message is displayed However SMDR will display the line number in place of the programmed name refer to Ref A ACO Line Name can be assigned to each CO Line Each CO Line Name can contain up to 12 characters If the CO Line Name Display is set to OFF at ADMIN 142 with FLEX 1 selected the CO Line Name is not displayed even if the name is programmed
100. Table Index This value is used to make CLI when FLEX1 00 If this value is set to 50 the CLI ioLDK system received CO call through Range 00 50 of this CO Line refers to DID CO line HOLD SAVE ADMIN 114 FLEX5 Else if this value is set to 00 49 the CLI of this CO Line refers COLP Table ADMIN201 CLIP Table Index This value is used to make CLI when FLEX2 00 If this value is set to 50 the CLI ipLDK system makes outgoing CO call Range 00 50 of this CO Line refers to through DID CO line HOLD SAVE ADMIN114 FLEX5 If this value is set to 00 49 the CLI of this CO Line refers to the COLP Table ADMIN201 Call Type Used to set the call type of DID CO FLEX3 1 VALUES line CLI International 0 Unknown HOLD SAVE 1 International 2 National 3 Not used 4 Subscriber DID CONV Type When CO Service Type is set to ISDN FLEX4 1 VALUES DID MSN or DCO DID ADMIN 140 Conversion Type O Convert digits by DID this value is used to convert incoming HOLD SAVE Digit Mask PGM146 digits of DID line 1 Call to the valid extension 2 Convert digits by Flex DID Table PGM231 DID Remove Number If this value is not 0 and the CO Line FLEX5 02 is a DID Line the system will discard Remove Number the incoming DID digits up to amount Range 00 99 of this value ex if value is set to 02 HOLD SAVE and the outside caller dialed 01245 then the first two digits ar
101. The Voice Mail Dialing Table defines the interface for dialing between the pLDK and the external VM device In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 234 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table _PGM2334 _ Description______ Procedure COMMENTS Voice Mail Dialing Table VALUE1 Range 1 9 refer to VALUES Voice Mail Default Table VALUE1 VALUE2 Range 1 2 refer to 1 9 Voice mail table VALUES Prefix Suffix Code VALUE2 Up to 12 digits HOLD SAVE 1 PREFIX 2 SUFFIX Voice Mail Default Table DIGIT ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK Prefix P VM Table 1 Suffix Put Mail Prefix P VM Table 2 Suffix Get Mail Prefix P 3P VM Table 3 Suffix Busy Table Prefix P 4P VM Table 4 Suffix No Answer Table Prefix P 6P VM Table 6 Suffix DND Table Prefix VM Table 7 Suffix Prefix VM Table 8 Suffix VM Table 9 Prefix P 5P 5 VM Table 5 Suffix Error Table 13 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 8 MOBILE EXTENSION PGM 236 A mobile user is able to use the phone as extension of the system So he can receive the incoming call and make the outgoing call when a user registers the mobile phone number In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 236 3 Enter bin number which matches
102. VM SMDI Type TYPE II TYPE TYPE This value sets VM SMDI type 16 Incoming Toll Check MS OFF If this value is set to ON the system checks toll of incoming CO call een Bes Only ipLDK 20 used for automatic FAX transfer DSS Indication Enable Disable Disable If this value is set to ENABLE LED indication of CO button or DSS button is blocked ex LED does not flash even if there is incoming call to the assigned CO Line or Station This feature is not applied for direct call such as DID DISA UK billing mode ON OFF If this value is set to ON UK Billing Mode is applied UK only COS 7 when auth fail ON OFF If this value is set to ON station COS will be changed to 7 when invalid authorization code is entered 5 Digits Authorization Code ON OFF Authorization Code length type can be selected OFF 3 11 digits ON 5 digits dial tone detect option is not LCR Dial Tone Detect ON OFF If this value is set to ON ipLDK system first checks if the CO applied Trasnit OUT Security ON OFF When system receive setup packet for Transit Out feature from VOI CO line system can check setup packet with registered IP whether if this packet is valid or not If TRANSIT OUT SECURITY admin is set received IP in all of received setup packet for transit out feature will be checked with registered IP and if this IP is verified transit out feature will be operated Ka A 3 If LCR type is set to M13 LCR ADMIN password
103. VOIB slot FLEX1 VALUE slot VALUE Phone assignment for RSG IP phone number of VOIB 09 for ipLDK 20 HOLD SAVE VOIB Channel For RSG IP Designates the VOIB Channel FLEX2 VALUE number VALUE Phone number used for RSP IP phone of Channels 00 24 0 8 at ipLDK HOLD SAVE 20 3 13 2 RSG IP PHONE PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT PGM 381 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 381 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGmM381_____ _ Description__________ Procedure COMMENTS RSG Number The RSG number to be serviced FLEX1 VALUE RSG VALUE by the System Number HOLD SAVE 0 8 ijpLDK 20 00 32 ipLDK 100 00 96 ipLDK 300 300E IP Phone Number The IP Phone number to be FLEX2 VALUE IP Phone VALUE serviced by the System Number HOLD SAVE 00 16 ipLDK 20 00 64 ipLDK 100 00 96 ipLDK 300 300E 84 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 3 RSG IP PHONE PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT PGM 382 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 382 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM382__ Le Descriptiom_________ Procedure COMMENTS Transfer Mode Determines Transfer mode FLEX1 VALUE VALUES when using RSG when using HOLD SAVE 0 IP Default RSG messages are sent
104. Wake up Fail Ring timer expires confirmation tone will not be provided and Fail Ring will disappear f Wake up Fail Ring Timer is 0 wake up fail ring will not disappear automatically f Wake up Fail Ring Timer is 99 the fail ring is not given to attendant station f Wake up Fail Ring Timer is 1 98 after Wake up Fail Ring Timer expires the wake up fail ring will disappear automatically Admin Programming E Wake up Fail Ring Timer PGM 182 FLEX 7 2 4 28 Automatic Fax Transfer ip LDK 20 Description The system will determine if an incoming call from the preprogrammed CO line is for a FAX or for speech terminal by detecting the tone of the call 1100Hz 0 5s ON 3s OFF repeated When the system detects a FAX tone from the incoming line within the predetermined time the System will transfer the call to the appropriate FAX Station If the FAX tone is not detected within predetermined time the System will transfer the call to the appropriate Station s Condition Only one CO line can be programmed as a FAX CO line If the FAX CO line is not programmed Automatic Fax Transfer will not be activated Station 17 is used as the FAX Station The FAX machine should be connected to the port for Station 17 to use this feature If the FAX CO line is not answered within the FAX CO call time the incoming call will be disconnected Outside caller connected to the FAX CO line will hear a ring back tone while the system is de
105. When a call is received at the Station the Caller will hear a busy tone the Station in DND mode will not receive any notification of the call Condition When a Station is in DND mode the NET DSS of the DND Station will flash if the BLF Busy Lamp Field manager is activated Admin Programming E DND Attribute PGM 111 167 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 10 CO Transit In Description The CO Transit In automatically re routes incoming DID MSN calls from another networked System Figure 2 16 10 describes the CO TRANSIT IN operation on the networking connection environment At the first step the outside caller makes a DID call to the station 202 so the DID call request is arrived at the master system The networking system of station 202 is not connected to PSTN directly but it can be connected to PSTN through another networking system master system At the second step the master system checks the received DID call destination If the DID destination is matched with a station of system the DID call is routed to the station But if the DID destination is not matched the master system is search the network numbering plan table see Ref 1 whether the destination is matched with a station of the registered another networking system In this case the master system transfers the received DID call request to the found networking system like to the thi
106. a connection within the designated counter the call will be routed according to the DID DISA destination ADMIN 167 ICM Continuous Dial Sets whether ICM dial tone is FLEX5 0 VALUES Tone continuous Discontinuous 0 NON HOLD SAVE CONTINUOUS 1 CONTINUOUS CO Dial Tone Detect When speed dial is activated if this FLEX6 1 ON value is set to ON the System will detect HOLD SAVE a dial tone using CPT instead of the pause timer External Night Ring If this value is set to ON when an FLEX7 0 ON incoming CO call is received and UNA HOLD SAVE service is activated the call will be sent to LBC1 28 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 3 Slot Base Program PGM 155 3 3 1 BOARD ATTRIBUTES PGM 155 NOTE Mot available in ipLDK 20 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 1 Dial 155 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table R2 CRC Check If this value is set to ENABLE the R2 Slot Number of R2 VALUES CRC is checked Board FLEX1 1 0 DISABLE ENABLE 1 ENABLE HOLD SAVE Distance Coefficient When the switch for selection long loop Slot Number of Setting on the board is set to Long the gain LCOB SLIB HYBRID value is set according to the Distance FLEX2 1 SKm Coefficient applied to HOLD SAVE LCOB SLIB HYBRID DCO IP Address IP Address of E1IB Sl
107. a specific CO Line Call to another subscriber number PX will transfer a predefined specific subscriber s CO line call to another subscriber number according to CO line subscriber number ITEM Feature Code AA REMARK CFU Activation Code FLASH 22 National only CFU Deactivation Code FLASH 23 NOTE Flexible button programming is available Operation To activate Call Forward Unconditional preprogrammed flexible button only 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for CFU Activate with Destination OR 3 Press FLASH key 2 2 4 Service will be accepted by PX and the LCD will display as during off hook state or when service is rejected by PX then the LCD will display as during off hook state 5 When the station goes on hook the feature key LED and CO key LED will flash at 30 IPM when rejected the normal LCD will be displayed and feature key LED goes idle To deactivate Call Forward Unconditional 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for CFU Activate with Destination OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 3 4 Service will be accepted by PX and the LCD will display as during the off hook state CO key and feature key LED will be idle When service is rejected by PX then the LCD will display as during an off hook state 5 When the station goes on hook the feature key LED and CO key LED will go idle when rejected the normal LCD will be displayed and feature key LED does not c
108. alternate destination of Group 620 should not be Group 620 If there is no idle member at Hunt group the incoming call will be queued If the total queued call count is more than the supervisor call count value and ACD queued call ADMIN program value is set to ON and the queued time is longer than this timer then the counts of queued calls will be displayed onto supervisor s LCD The supervisor call count can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 15 The ACD queued call can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 16 If the number of queued calls is more than this call count the supervisor timer will be started The supervisor timer can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 14 If this value is set to ON the count of queued call can be displayed on supervisor station LCD e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Po ITEM ace SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK MAX Queue Call 00 99 This value is the maximum call count that Count can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next attempted queued call will be disconnected Supervisor This value is used to set the supervisor Station UCD Hunt 1 o This value is used to set UCD group Stations Priority member s priority The value of 0 is the highest priority and the value of 9 is the lowest priority Stations with the highest priority receive the incoming Calls first Forward ON not receive Hunt
109. announcement System Speed If CCR destination type is the 05 System Speed ipLDK 20 2000 2499 System Speed the call is routed to Number HOLD SAVE ioLDK 100 2000 3999 the system speed telephone ipLDK 300 2000 4499 number ioLDK 300E 2000 6999 Internal Page If CCR destination type is the 06 Internal Page Zone Internal Page the call can page to Range 01 10 the designated internal page zones HOLD SAVE 68 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DON ZZ Description_______ Procedure _ COMMENTS External Page If CCR destination type is the 07 External Page Zone VALUES External Page the call can page to Range 1 3 HOLD SAVE ipLDK 20 1 the designated external page zones ip LDK 300 300E 1 3 All Call Page If CCR destination type is the All 08 VALUE4 refer to VALUES Call Page the call can page to all VALUES Range 1 3 ipLDK 20 page zones HOLD SAVE 1 INT All Page 2 All Page ipLDK 100 300 300E 1 INT All Page 2 EXT All Page 3 All Page value the call will be routed to HOLD SAVE network If CCR destination type is set o this 10 Conference Room O value the call will be routed to the Number Range 1 9 Conference room HOLD SAVE Station Voice Mail Box If the CCR destination type is the 11 Station Number Station Voice Mail box the call will HOLD SAVE be routed designated Station s Voice Mail box directly 3
110. assign UCD DND button 1 Press TRANS PGM Press FLEX button Press TRANS P GM Dial 8 7 Enter the Hunt Group Number Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes oe aS NOTE Do not make a loop with UCD group alternative destination Condition The ipLDK system supports VMIB announcements for hunt groups When a call is received at the secondary VMIB announcement the caller can be connected another station by the entered number with CCR service PGM 228 87 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 6 7 ACD Automatic Call Distribution Description A separate supervisor or common supervisor can be assigned in UCD group And the supervisor can monitor the status of the group When a call is queued to a group for longer than a predefined time or when a predefined number of calls are queued the supervisor s LCD will indicate the number of calls in queue and the queued time for the longest queue The supervisor can change overflow destination and timing The system will provide traffic see Ref 1 and on line status reports based on the supervisor s request for the UCD group including the following group statistics Total calls Number of unanswered calls Average and the longest queued calls Number and total time when all agents are busy Average ringing time before answer Average service time after answer ACD Supervisor can activate two way
111. attempt to connect a net call according to MWI data Condition m The feature MWI is available on Stations with a LCD panel only When the System makes a call back according to MWI data the CO line is selected within the Network CO group Admin Programming m CLI Message Wait PGM 114 E Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 WR Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 WE Networking Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 172 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 13 Absent Text Message Description Absent Text Message is available within the networking connection environment If a Station User leaves his desk with an Absent Text Message active at the Station an incoming call to this Station from another Networking System will receive the absent text message displayed on the calling Station LCD Operation When Absent Text Message is active at a Station operation of the feature is automatic when a call is received from a Station from another Networked System Condition A text message will be displayed on the LCD of the networked calling station the called station still will receive the ring signal This feature is not supported when the calling party is using a WHTU on a Large LCD DKTU 2 16 14 Attendant Call Service CAS Description An Attendant call from a Station on a Networked System can be routed to the Centralized Attendant CA
112. blocked station can not be set linked pair If Station A 110 and B 111 are linked pair with number A 110 these stations set port block two stations are port blocked at the same time but if terminate linked pair these two stations are still port blocked and terminate port block by each station Admin Programming E Station Port Block PGM113 FLEX15 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 43 DND Operation of Pre selected MSG Station Description If user set Pre selected Message user can receive the ring from DID DISA CO and ICM call or not by P MSG DND Admin In other words if P MSG DND Admin of some station is ON then when Pre selected Message feature is set at this station CO and ICM ring is treated just like DND feature So if this station receives ICM call pre selected message will be shown to calling station with busy tone And if this station receives DID CO call from external user external user will hear busy tone with busy message And if DISA CO external user will hear Do not disturb Voice Message and can retry again Operation P MSG DND admin is off 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX was set Pre Selected MSG feature 2 Station XXX can get the ring 3 Caller hears ring back tone P MSG DND admin is on 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX was set Pre Selected MSG feature 2 Station XXX doesn t receive the ring 3
113. button If this value is set to ENABLE the station user can answer Calls according to the priority ADMIN 173 113 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _ PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Prepaid Call ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station user can use Prepaid Call feature ADMIN 180 FLEX 16 ff a Dial Access EN DIS If this value is set to Ileana eya the station kuss can use system KE heel tr al dial call Two Way Record ON OFF If this value is set to ON the station user can record the incoming and outgoing voice during conversation Fax Mode ON OFF If this value is set to ON single ring is provided and Attendant recall is not operated OFFNET Call Mode EXT ALL If this value is set to EXT the station user can only forward CO call to Off net ex mobile phone Otherwise both CO call and ICM call can be forwarded to Off net 13 UCD Group Service ON OFF This feature is used when a station gets DID DISA call If this value is set to ON the UCD Group which the station belongs to gets the incoming call and if this value is set to OFF the station gets the incoming call directly whether the station is busy or not 14 Ring Group Service ON OFF OFF This feature is used when a station in Ring Group gets a DID DISA call If this value is set to ON the Ring Group which the station belongs to gets the incoming call and i
114. calling station is set to Emergency Supervisor If the station was talking to other station or CO line the call is disconnected when the station receives Emergency Intrusion call The busy station is connected to Emergency supervisor only after short indication with beep tone Emergency Intrusion call is not possible to a station in DND state Emergency Intrusion call is not possible to attendant Emergency Intrusion call is also possible to Net DSS Emergency supervisor is connected to Master station of Linked pair if both of Master and Slave are busy Emergency supervisor is connected to Secretary station instead of Executive station If SLT user tries to emergency intrusion to busy Net station SLT user must do Hook Flash Admin Programming mEmergency Supervisor 4 1 3 24 PGM 112 FLEX 24 71 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 39 Forced Trunk Disconnect Description Forced Trunk Disconnect feature allows an authorized user Emergency Supervisor to disconnect another extension s active outside call and then the user can make an outgoing call on the released line This feature is used in an emergency when no other line is available NOTE This feature is used in case of emergency so only authorized user can use it Station base program will be implemented for this feature Operation To activate forced trunk disconnect feature 1 Seize CO
115. d O BS ExtemalAll Call Page o o 5490 A Call Page Int amp Ext le O Alarm Reset 801 808 ipLDK 20 801 824 ipLDK 100 CO Line Group Access 801 872 ipLDK 300 300E 8801 8816 ipLDK 20 Individual CO Access 8801 8840 ipLDK 100 88001 88200 ipLDK 300 300E 100 MU a SS OOOO 601 608 ipLDK 20 601 610 ipLDK 100 Call Parking Locations 601 619 ipLDK 300 300E TAN 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 O NUMBER Z JI MO BEMARR UO 8901 Tie Routing Access o BL Retrieve Held CO Line SO 8 xx ipLDK 300 300E Retrieve Held Individual CO Line 222222 9 Access CO Line in the 1 available CO Line Group Attendant Call o i y o 1 1 Door Open os G EA PAS G y o 43 Not in ipLDK 20 3 Door Open SS 4 Not in ipLDK 20 4 Door Open 5 Notin ipLDK 20 5 Door Open N 6 Notin ipLDK 20 PB DoorOpen le O 7 Not in ipLDK 20 100 7 Door Open o OO 8 NN Message Waiting Enable o y O 9 VM Message Waiting Disable Z O Z O Jo o y O EA ITESO EN SCI o EA PATA le 571 579 ipLDK 100 58 SLT Conference Paging S d y O Unsupervised conference Timer Extension IA Remote MEX control To enter user programming mode press the TRANS PGM button in a keyset or dial 5 6 3 Programming enter code ina SLT 4 1 2 STATION PROGRAMMING The following numbering plan is fixed so it cannot be changed by ADMIN Programming NUMBER TEM REMARK Enblock Mode S
116. dialed digits by COS 3 and COS 4 Station is matched with the allowed toll ass NOTE Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 3 and COS 4 Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Den table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 8 10 and 11 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 8 10 and 11 65 FLEX1 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 Don t Care HOLD SAVE FLEX2 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX3 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 30 Allow Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 30 Deny Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX5 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 50 Allow Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Not found allowed Found denied Not Found allowed ipok Deny Table C Allow Table D Deny Table D 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 8 10 and 11Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Den table A i
117. flashing CONF button on the supervisor Station Condition In unsupervised conference it is restricted to Unsupervised Conference timer if there is no internal station in the conference Default 10min The Unsupervised Conference timer will be reset if the internal party re enters the conference Up to 15 3 in pLDK 20 parties internal external can enter a conference in ipLDK system In Multi line conference up to 14 2 in ipLDK 20 CO lines can be on a conference with one internal party If the supervisor in a conference receives error or busy tone from the internal party while making a conference he can receive intercom dial tone again by pressing the CONF button Admin Programming E Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX 6 E Multi line Conference PGM 160 FLEX 9 2 7 1 Conference SLT Brokers Call Description A single line telephone user can initiate a 3 way conference with any combination of CO line or internal users A single line telephone user can alternate between two calls maintaining private conversations with both parties The parties may be either internal stations connected to the system or external CO line calls and may be incoming or outgoing Operation To set up a conference from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Make the first call 2 Hook switch and the intercom dial tone will be heard the existing call is placed on exclusive hold and the recall timer is activated 3 Pla
118. give a signal to the busy station by using of Call Offer service The busy station through the receiver or on speakerphone is notified of the call waiting by a camp on tone and flashing LED of the HOLD SAVE button The Figure 2 16 7 and Call Flow Table describe the call offer operation on the networking connection environment 1 Station 100 diais 202 but hears a BUSY tone 2 100 diais campon code 3 Calls routed to Station 202 4 Station 202 gets camp on signaling 5 Conversation by pressing Hold button Operation To activate Call Offer 1 Diala valid Station number on another networking system if busy the caller will hear a busy tone 2 Press the Camp On code the busy Station will receive an off hook muted ring the Calling Station will hear a ring back tone instead of a busy tone To answer the Call Offer 1 Press the flashing CO line button while receiving a muted ring OR 2 The muted ring is changed to normal CO ring when you go on hook state 3 Then Station User can answer the offered call 165 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition Call Offer is only applied to a station that is in talk status During a conference or page Call Offer is not activated The ipLDK System does not support the path reservation mode of a standard QSIG specification Admin Programming
119. go to an idle state and the selected background music will be transmitted or an external port E E ee To transmit background music through the intercom box at an Attendant Station perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Dial O 7 5 Dial the background music channel number and the selected background music is heard Press the HOLD SAVE button After hearing the confirmation tone the station should go to an idle state and the selected background music will be transmitted over the intercom box aS a a Condition When lifting the handset or pressing the MON button at a Station the music is automatically shut off When external music is assigned the music source should be connected to the MBU The same music source can be used with MOH Press the VOLUME button to adjust volume while the background music is heard The BGM may be blocked in an intercom box by pressing DND FOR button Reference A MOH 2 4 17 Admin Programming E Background Music Type PGM 171 FLEX 1 43 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 5 Camp on Description When a User calls a busy Station the busy tone should be heard The User can give a signal to the busy Station The busy Station off hook or on speakerphone is notified of the call waiting by a camp on tone and the HOLD SAVE button LED flash ASLT User may notify a busy Sta
120. impossible to record system greetings and prompts Error tone will be heard f there is a recorded message in the bin the already recorded message is played when user dials the message number f user stops recording by pressing the MON button or on hook the receiver while recording the already recorded message is saved User should delete the recorded message to cancel the recording To record or delete a message at attendant station all the VMIB ports should be idle state When a call is transferred to the attendant Transfer to Attendant Prompt will be provided to the caller and ring back tone will be heard after the announcement 109 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 f there is no recorded greeting or prompt the corresponding tone will be heard It is possible to use only 100 messages for system greetings system greetings system prompt When the memory is full while recording a system greeting the recorded message before message full will be saved tis available for station groups to have different system greetings When recording system greetings and prompts at attendant station they will be saved at all VMIB in the system The system supports system prompts 072 100 basically But users may use their own prompts by recording the prompts at attendant station When user uses USB Call Recording S W Call recording
121. into a FACILITY message with the h323 message body set to empty For example if a gatekeeper has already sent a CONNECT message to a calling endpoint and later receives a CONNECT message from a called endpoint that contains an encapsulated H 245 message it must forward the H 245 message using a FACILITY message Admin Programming mH 245 Tunneling PGM 340 F20 2 15 6 DiffServ Description In the IP Datagram 8 bits are reserved to the Service type These bits can be further broken into 5 subfields given below O 1 2 31 4156 7 PRECEDENCE D T R UNUSED The 3 precedence bits specify the datagram precedence varying from 0 to 7 This allows the senders to indicate the importance of each datagram The TOS provides a mechanism that can allow control of information precedence over data The other 3 bits represent the following D requests low delay T requests high throughput R requests high reliability The precedence bits bits 0 1 2 are significant in having an effect on load So we vary these bits and try to monitor the changes in the RTT Round Trip Time for varying loads 152 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 At low loads the traffic is not significant enough for the TOS to have any effect on the ping as the packets will get through anyway Similarly at high loads the TOS will not have an effect on the ping statistics but in this case there
122. is move to next flex button Admin Programming WR DND Destination PGM 167 FLEX 4 2 4 45 Incoming CO Ring assignment to Networking System Description User can assign CO ring to network system user Only one Net Station can be assigned by Net Destination Now we have four type destinations Station Hunt Group DVU Net Station And only one type received the ring In other words all of type can not receive the ring at the same time The priority type of the ring is Net Station and Hunt Group and DVU and Station If all of network CO line is busy incoming call will flow error destination program PGM167 Button2 Operation To set Incoming CO Ring Assign to Net Station 1 PGM144 and choose CO line 2 Select Net Station type and assign Net Station number 3 These CO line call will be routed to assigned network user Deliver the ring to destination 1 External part seizes assigned CO line 2 If ring assignment is to Net Station system searches idle Net CO line 3 If there is useful idle CO line system makes the NET call for Net Destination Station 4 If there is not idle CO line this call routed to Error Destination Rerouting destination is Hunt Group 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX is DND or Pre Selected MSG SET state 2 This call will be routed to assigned hunt group Condition This feature is based on Network feature Admin Programming E Network Station is Added for Assign Destination PGM 144
123. is set to O the CLI is Normal FLEX12 0 refer PGM200 PGM1 14 If this value is Normal Ge to 1 or 2 the CLI is e CLI Station Long CLI 1 or 2 HOLD SAVE 1 Long CLI 1 2 Long CLI 2 ISDN Call Rerouting Reserved FLEX13 1 ON VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Screening Indicator User can choice screening indicator FLEX14 1 O is User provide No service service Conversion Type 1 is User provide Pass HOLD SAVE 2 is User provide Fail 3 is Network provide Double CLI Service If this value is set to Transit Transit point FLEX15 1 ON CLI is displayed in station LCD If this value HOLD SAVE is set to Original Original Caller CLI is displayed in station LCD Prefix Table Index When a user dials the number a system FLEX16 1 VALUES checks the prefix code by the table Prefix Table Index 0 OFF all correspond to this index HOLD SAVE 1 6 Table Index Deny Incoming Call If this value is set to ON the incoming call FLEX17 1 ON VALUES is disconnected HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ICLID Table Usage If this value is set to ON ICLID service is FLEX18 1 ON VALUES 1 ON 24 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 2 5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT PGM 144 When CO Service Type ADMIN 140 is set to Normal CO incoming calls are routed to the proper destination according to this assignment The destination can b
124. item At ADMIN 144 select CO Line Range 01 08 and press FLEX 1 for Day Mode Dial 1 for the Station and enter the station range 100105 Press 0 to make the stations ring instantly when there is an incoming call To save changes press the HOLD SAVE button Press FLEX 1 for Day Mode again without exiting ADMIN 144 and press 1 for the Station again Enter Station Range as 110110 and dial 3 as the delay value Press HOLD SAVE again oo or Ex 2 When there s an incoming CO Call through CO Lines 1 8 during Night mode the Hunt Group Starts to ring The ringing station is decided by the Hunt Group type refer to Ref A Verify the CO Service type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140 Check if Hunt Group 620 is assigned properly at ADMIN 190 At ADMIN 144 select CO Line range 01 08 and press FLEX 2 Night Mode Dial 2 for the Hunt and enter Hunt Group Number 620 To save changes press the HOLD SAVE button eS 2 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Ex 3 When there s an incoming CO Call through CO Lines 1 8 during Weekend mode the VMIB announcement played and the line will be released 1 Check if CO Service type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140 2 Check if VMIB Announcement 01 is recorded properly at the System Attendant Station refer to Ref B 3 At ADMIN 144 select CO Line range 01 08 and press FLEX 3 for Weekend Mode 4 Dial 3 f
125. number of Announce not_assigned VMIB announcement played when Auto Attendant is activated 166 CO to CO COS 1 11 1 When an external user of DID DISA TIE line tries to access another CO Line in the system CO to CO COS is applied The attributes of CO to CO COS are the same as the station COS MA 1 r 1 Day COS Class of Service of Day Mode 2 NightWeekend COS 1 11 Class of Service of Night Weekend Mode 127 Ion _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK DID DISA Destination J 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Busy Destination Error Destination No Answer Destination DND Destination VMIB Prompt Usage Busy Prompt Usage Error Prompt Usage F1 F3 F1 F3 F1 F3 F1 F3 F1 F5 ON OFF ON OFF 128 F1 F F F F ON ON Issue 1 0 September 2008 When there is a DID DISA incoming call if the destination is not answer invalid busy the call is routed to Attendant Hunt group or the caller gets the proper tone If Attendant is assigned for DID DISA destination first the call will check ring assignment PGM144 if there exists ring assigned station the call is routed to that station If there is not ring assigned station then the call is routed to Attendant If VMIB announcement usage is enabled The proper announcement is presented to the caller before the call is routed This destination is applied when DISA
126. of CLI CLI provided to PSTN CLI of Attendant ORI Original CLI of external caller if it received Admin Programming ECLI Transit Type PGM 143 Flex7 139 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 3 CLIR COLR Description CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction amp COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction are used that calling party amp called party inform to the public switching system that they don t want to send their phone number to the other party If CLIR or COLR is requested the PSTN restricts the transmission of CLI If CLIR is set to ON calling party number is not sent to the called party If COLR is set to ON the connected party number is not sent to the calling party Admin Programming BISDN CLIR PGM 114 FLEX 14 BISDN COLR PGM 114 FLEX 15 2 14 4 COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation Description COLP is the same service as CLI except that the transmitted information is the telephone number of the answered party Admin Programming WCOLP LCD Display PGM 114 FLEX 2 BISDN COLR PGM 114 FLEX 15 WCOLP Table PGM 201 WCOLP Table Index PGM 143 FLEX 1 2 14 5 Key Pad Description The ipLDK system supports the key pad dialing feature The key pad facility dialing is the feature that the dialed digit information is sent through the key pad facility IE Information Element inste
127. of Call Attendant Service CAS master system This call will be queued when all centralized attendants are busy like to the normal attendant call and queuing operation Figure 2 16 14 describes the CAS operation on the networking connection environment In the figure there are four ipLDK networking systems ipLDK B C D system will be programmed CA in his system and Attendant DND should be set to each system attendant ipLDK A als master Cie ESCH Y Y o Dial ATD Call Dial ATD Call ipLDK D _ slave FP De EH 5 A pa STE d G h ipLDK B slave __ ipLDK c Dial ATD Call T slave MER di Daten STM TS CO LINE Figure 2 16 14 CAS Operation 173 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation For CAS Operation 1 Assign Net DSS to the attendant except System Attendant 2 System Attendant presses ATD DND button 3 Dial Attendant code at any station in the system then the call will be routed to the Net Attendant 4 The system provides Ring Back Tone to calling station and the NET DSS button lights Condition ICM Call is routed to Net attendant if system attendant is in ATD_DND mode CO Call can be routed to Net attendant only if DID DISA destination is ATD and the ring is not as
128. outgoing CLI information HOLD SAVE ISDN Line Used to set the ISDN CODEC Type FLEX3 1 u Law VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 A Law 1 u Law hase Sub address If this value is set to ON calling party sub FLEX4 1 On address of the ISDN Station is attached HOLD SAVE when an ISDN Station makes an outgoing CO Call through this CO Line DID Digit Receive This value is used to count received DID FLEXS 2 2 4 No Digit numbers for routing incoming DID calls digits HOLD SAVE DID Digit Mask When DID Conversion Type ADMIN 143 FLEX6 VALUE 4 FLEX4 is set to 0 The received DID digits digits Range 0 9 Default 41 are converted by this value ex 1234 is HOLD SAVE ignore received received when DID Digit Mask is set as digit 8 the digit is converted as 834 bypass digit Collect Call Blocking If this feature is set to ON incoming collect FLEX7 VALUE VALUE Brazil Only call is blocked HOLD SAVE 0 Not Block RESERVED 1 With Indicator 2 Without Indicator Collect Call Answer This feature is used when collect call is FLEX8 VALUE VALUE Timer blocked HOLD SAVE 001 250 100ms 3 Brazil Only RESERVED digits Collect Call Idle This feature is used when collect call is FLEX9 VALUE VALUE Timer blocked HOLD SAVE 001 250 100ms 3 Brazil Only RESERVED digits 26 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Program
129. outgoing call through ipLDK system Though the extension is member of Hunt Gr except Ring Hunt Gr a call is routed to the mobile extension To use the mobile extension in case of Hunt group member Hunt call should be programmed in PGM236 FLEX5 Mobile Extension can transfer a call to another station s mobile extension If VOI CO line was used for H 323 gatekeeper or SIP protocol system can use these line for calling to mobile In other words Gatekeeper and SIP CO line to connect between extension and mobile can be supported for mobile call Incase of SMS service PGM 37 for Mobile Extension SMS board must be installed Admin Programming E Mobile Extension Register PGM 236 65 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 30 Remote control with Mobile Extension Description If the mobile user DID s to their own station they will receive intercom dial tone and can control the basic status of extension with control code Operation 1 The mobile extension user dials his DID number of ipLDK system 2 Then he receives internal dial tone 3 He can enter the remote control menu with the fixed code and then confirmation tone will be provided The fixed code will be added to Flexible numbering plan 4 He can select the desirable menu 5 He hears the dial tone Remote control menu 1 Activate Mobile extension 2 Deactivate Mobile exten
130. print various system activities at the request of the main Attendant refer to Ref A The information can be used to Monitor and evaluate system performance Observe current usage and take corrective actions if needed Anticipate possible CO line problems Determine system updates and upgrades The traffic data is output to the RS 232C or LAN ipLDK system will support the following traffic reports Attendant Traffic Report Call Summary Report Call Hourly Report H W Unit Usage Summary Report CO line Traffic Summary Report CO line Traffic Hourly Report Operation The traffic analysis is only available at main Attendant refer to Attendant Programming Menu Table in the ADMIN Programming Manual The measurement time type can be one of Today s peak time Yesterday s peak time Last hour Yesterday s total and Today s total To print all summary traffic report perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0121 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print all summary traffic report periodically 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0122 3 Select the Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel periodic printing of all summary traffic report 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0123 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print the each traffic report 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0124 0129 3 Select Measurement Time type
131. s too much traffic amp there will be a significant amount of packet loss amp elongated round trip times irrespective of the precedence set Somewhere between these two extremes we expect to see a window where the TOS actually has an effect on the RTT packet loss high RTT Packet loss at TOS 0 amp low RTT Packet loss at TOS 224 Executing ping2 for different TOS with no load The modified NIKHEF ping code was run from nereus slac stanford edutonocdev1 qos es net with TOS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 amp No TOS specification The code was run for 10000 packets of each TOS The TOS numbers represent the precedence bits as follows PRECEDENCE BITS 0 1 2 TOS 0 000 0 1 001 32 2 010 64 3 011 96 4 100 128 5 101 160 6 110 192 7 111 224 Precedence 0 TOS 0 is NORMAL PRECEDENCE low precedence while precedence 7 TOS 224 is called network control High precedence Since there is no load on the line one would expect the TOS to have no effect on the ping statistics Rightly so we see from the chart that the obtained results are similar to the predicted results Admin Programming E Precedence value PGM 340 F21 153 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 H 450 over IP The ipLDK System supports H 450 over IP Internet Protocol networking The Networking System can link telephone systems together so that they behave like a unified communication network p
132. set A confirmation tone should be heard indicating that the station is in ADMIN Programming mode ao p en CS Each program is accessed by pressing the TRANS PGM button the following should display ENTER PGM NUMBER 8 Dial the desired three digit program number If an error is made while entering data the TRANS PGM button will return to the previous status NOTE To return to the parent state while ADMIN programming press the CONF button Pressing the CONF button clears temporary data fields The following Table is frequently used in ADMIN Programming procedures When entering each range refer to the table as the range is not always mentioned in the procedures System Range Station Range CO Range CO Line Group Range ipLDK 300E 1000 1599 001 400 01 73 IpLDK 300 100 399 001 200 01 73 ioLDK 100 100 227 01 40 00 25 IpLDK 20 10 37 01 16 00 09 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 2 1 1 Permanent Update Procedure To accept changes while programming perform the following Steps 1 Press the HOLD SAVE button when all changes have been entered to permanently store data 2 A confirmation tone should be heard when pressing the HOLD SAVE button if all data was entered correctly If there were any errors in the entry then an error tone is presented and data is not stored in the permanent memory 2 1 2 Resetting the System To reset the system perform the fol
133. set to ON ISDN call an Disable rerouting service is available Weekend STA_R HUNT On demand STA_R HUNT VMIB VMIB NET STA 145 You can check the ring assignment destination of the CO line for each Day Night Ring Mode If CO Call is assigned to the station at Day or Night Mode you can see the delay value also e g 100 1 means station 100 gets the ring with delay 1 When there are too many stations you can scroll data using volume up down key Pe NR SS EN EST O O 122 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 __PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK a __ _ _ II 5 Omdemand_ en Insertion code will be attached in front of incoming CLI 2 Outgoing Prefix Code ON OFF If this value is set to ON prefix Insertion code will be attached in front of outgoing CLI A Law OFF CODEC Type Calling Sub address ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON calling NO party sub address of the ISDN station is attached when an ISDN station makes an outgoing CO Call through this CO Line 5 DID DGT Receive Number This value is used as count of the received DID Digit number to route DID incoming Call DID Digit Mask igi When DID Conversion Type EE PGM143 FLEX4 is set to 0 The received DID digits are converted by this value The number 0 9 can be entered means to ignore received digit and means to bypass the digit The length of DID Digit Mask is
134. that is assigned MSN service Index of Flexible DID 000 999 If the received digit of Incoming CO call is Table matched MSN telephone number PGM202 FLEX 4 itis MSN call This value is used to search the destination of MSN call routing This value indicates the entry index of flexible DID table PGM231 SUB Number This value is only used when the destination Station type is ISDN telephone If the destination is ISDN telephone this value is sent as the ISDN sub address number of it Pye 20 mall NS value is ISDN MSN number If the received digit of Incoming CO call is e with this value it is MSN call ml Equipment Identification Only onal supplementary services HOLD RETRIEVE pt Channel Selection Prefer Extend Extend Type Italy Only ISDN Call Barring Up Max 10 digits 33 Italy Only 7 ISDN Call Barring Max 10 digits 33 EE Italy Only ISDN CFU Activation Max 10 digits 21 Code Italy Only ISDN CFU Deactivation Max 10 digits 21 Code 10 ISDN Memo Tel Max 10 digits 63 Italy Only Code Italy Only Activation LNR Code Italy Only Interrogation Code ltaly Onl Retrieve MSRG Code ltaly Onl 15 ISDN Memo Tel Max 10 digits 63 Italy Only 146 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 22 LCR TABLE ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX DEN RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 220 1 LCR Access Mode 1 6 Disable This value is u
135. that will receive the call 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button To deactivate Call Forward perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Press the key Call Forward cancel code Condition 1 To use Call Forward a Station should be activated in Admin Programming Admin Programming E Allow Off Net Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX18 E Authorization Code Table PGM 227 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 9 1 1 Call Forward Unconditional Description A user forwards all calls immediately to another station Hunt Group or VMIB Operation To activate Unconditional Call Forward Lift the Handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial the Call Forward code 1 Dial Station or Group pilot number to receive the calls Replace the handset and go on hook AI ES To assign CALL FORWARD button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press a flexible button Press the DND FOR button Assign Call Forward type 1 Dial the destination that will receive the call Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes PURAS To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward cancel code 2 3 1 2 Call Forward Busy Description When the User Station line is busy calls can be f
136. the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 324 3 Dial Net Numbering Plan Table index 00 71 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table HOM ZZ Description________ Procedure COMMENTS System Usage Used to set the networking FLEX1 VALUE2 VALUES connection type of the HOLD SAVE 0 NET selected table entries 1 PSTN FLEX2 Numbering Plan Code Max 16 digits refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE Net Numbering Code VALUES Ba digits 0 9 can be entered follows digits to signify an internal station number Used to set the networking number code of the selected table entries Net Number CO Line Used to select the CO line FLEX3 Net CO Line Group group for routing networking Group Range 00 24 calls HOLD SAVE CPN or IP Information CPN information for ISDN IP FLEX4 FLEX1 refer to address for VOIP CPN info VALUE P Address 1 CPN info 4 12Digits HOLD SAVE VALUE If NET CO Group of PGM324 FLEX3 is VOIP FLEX 1 15 CPN INFORMATION FLEX 2 2 CPN INFO FLEX 3 3 CPN INFO FLEX 4 4 CPN INFO If NET CO Group of PGM324 FLEX is ISDN CPN info without pressing FLEX key Alternate number used when FLEX5 Speed Bin WE the networking path Number Range 2000 2499 experiences fatal problems HOLD SAVE Designates the IP Address of FLEX6 IP Address 12 MO the system used to support digits HOLD SAVE DECT mobility service Digit Rep
137. the CO Busy Tone otherwise the pLDK system provides it If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides the CO Announce Tone otherwise the pLDK system provides it Designates the length of time limit for CO Flash CO Flashing is available within this timer otherwise the CO Line is released Designates the time limit for CO Open Loop Used to determine the line length when the CO Line length is too variable SAF only System answers DISA call after this time FLEX6 02 External Music HOLD SAVE FLEX7 0 No HOLD SAVE FLEX8 1 Yes HOLD SAVE FLEX9 1 Yes HOLD SAVE FLEX10 1 Yes HOLD SAVE FLEX11 1 Yes HOLD SAVE FLEX12 010 100msec Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE FLEX13 010 100msec Range 00 20 HOLD SAVE FLEX14 1 Long HOLD SAVE FLEX15 VALUE 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE COMMENTS Designates MOH on the CO Line refer to VALUES VALUE loLDK 300 300E 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 External Music 2 4 External Music 3 5 VMIB MOH 1 6 VMIB MOH 2 7 VMIB MOH 3 8 12 SLT MOH 1 5 13 Hold Tone ioLDK 100 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 External Music 2 4 External Music 3 5 VMIB MOH 1 6 VMIB MOH 2 7 11 SLT MOH 1 5 12 Hold Tone ol DR 20 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 Externa
138. the Exception Table A B C D are monitored for allow and deny numbers PBX Dialing Codes There are 5 PBX access codes 2 digits to enter the system and access a CO line via PBX A CO line marked as a PBX line will not be governed by any station or CO line COS until a recognized PBX code is dialed Exception Table A SR here are two exception tables with COS Each table has 20 allow codes and 10 deny codes and a code may have eight entries Condition COS Rules In STA COS 7 no dialing is allowed to CO lines In CO COS 5 STA COS 1 6 is ignored and there is no restriction to access to CO lines In CO COS 4 STA COS 1 6 is ignored and long distance calls are not allowed max 8 digits may be dialed In CO COS 1 it is restricted by STA COS In CO COS 2 and STA COS 2 4 it is restricted by Exception Table A There is no restriction in STA COS 1 3 In STA COS 5 long distance calls are not allowed max 8 digits can be dialed CO line Allow Deny Restriction Rules f there are no entries no restriction is provided by the table lf there are entries in the Deny table then the restriction is on a Deny Only basis Here are entries in the Allow table then the restriction is on an Allow Only basis Here are entries in both the Allow and Deny Tables the Allow Table is searched if the dialed number matches an entry in the Allow Table the call is allowed If a match is not found the Deny Table is searched and if a match is found in t
139. the caller can leave a voice message wait at the station after hearing user greeting Operation To record a user greeting at a station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial6 1 3 The announcement Press the button to record will be played if there already is a recorded message in the number dialed the recorded message will be played 4 Dial to start recording start recording after hearing the announcement Record your message and a confirmation tone 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button OR 6 Press the MON button to finish the recording a confirmation tone is heard To delete a user greeting at a station 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 6 6 3 The User greeting is deleted and Forward is deactivated To activate call forward to VMIB from a station 1 Go off hook or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the forward type 1 4 4 Dial the key a confirmation tone is heard To deactivate call forward to VMIB from a station 1 Press the DND FOR button To leave voice message wait at a Station 1 The caller will hear the User greeting and the Record your message announcement 2 After a beep tone record your message 3 Hang up to complete recording To retrieve a recorded voice message wait at the Station 1 Press the flashing CALLBK button for SLT and 2 8 BTN DKTU dial 557 refer to Ref A 2 The message number p
140. then the attributes of each Hunt Group can be programmed at ADMIN PGM 191 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table 53 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 7 2 1CIRCULAR TERMINAL GROUP ATTRIBUTES VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during the FLEX1 Seconds timer the System will play the VMIB Range 000 999 announcement that is programmed HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB FLEX2 Seconds announcement will be played if Range 000 999 the call continues to wait beyond HOLD SAVE the expiration of the 2 announcement timer VMIB Announce 1 Used to play the VMIB FLEX3 VMIB Location announcement when the VMIB Announcement Number announce 1 timer expires Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Used to play the VMIB FLEX4 VMIB Announcement Location announcement when the VMIB Number Range 00 70 Announce 2 timer expires HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Used to repeat the VMIB FLEX5 Seconds VALUES Repeat Timer announce 2 when the timer Range 001 999 000 Not Assigned expires HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Used to enable or disable the FLEX6 1 ON VALUES Repeat Enable Disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON
141. to 1 MAC various devices using an IP Address Casting Mode Determines Casting mode FLEX2 VALUE VALUES when using RSG HOLD SAVE 0 UNI Default 1 Multi Tone Source Determines the source for FLEX3 VALUE VALUES System tones when using RSG HOLD SAVE 0 Remote Default RSGM IP Phone 1 ipLDK Peer to Peer Determines if Peer to Peer will FLEX4 VALUE VALUES be used when RSG is in use HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Default Codec Type Determines Codec Type used FLEX5 VALUE VALUES with RSG HOLD SAVE 0 G 711_ALAW Default 1 G 711_ULAW 2 G 723 1 3 G 729 4 G 729A First Access RSG CO If set to ON the Station can FLEX6 VALUE VALUES access a CO line using the HOLD SAVE 0 OFF RSG and dialing the CO Line 1 ON Default access code in the 1 available CO group ex 9 RING without CO Ring Designates the RSG Stations FLEX7 VALUE VALUES Assign that will receive incoming CO HOLD SAVE Default ON rings even when CO ring is not 0 OFF assigned 1 ON Default 85 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 4 RSGM ATTRIBUTES I PGM 383 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 383 3 Enter the appropriate Bin number Range 1 8 ipLDK 20 01 96 ipLDK 100 300 300E 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM383_
142. to Station will be connected oe a T SR 2 16 5 4 Net Call Forward No Answer Description It is possible for a User to forward their Station remotely over the Network when there is No Answer Operation To activate Net Call Forward no answer Press the MON button Then press the DND FOR button Dial the Net Call Forward code 3 and dial the Station number of another networking system The DND FOR button will flash and a confirmation tone should be provided If an incoming call is received at the Net Call Busy No Answer Forwarding Station the call is routed to a Forwarded to Station when the called Station is busy or does not answer The Forwarded to Station will ring When the forwarded to station is answered the Call Forwarded and Forwarded to Station will be connected ao Ye a 163 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 6 Net Conference Description Net Conference is generally the same as the Conference feature with the additional specification that a Networked Station can be assigned as a conference member A call to a Station on one node is able to conference in a party on any other networked node Members of a conference must be allowed up to 3 Stations of the network Operation To conduct a conference from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CONF button during a network conversation The connected cal
143. to check whether the dialed digits by COS 5 and COS 6 station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits NOTE Allow table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 5 and COS 6 station is matched with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Deny table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6 FLEX1 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 20 Allow Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX2 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 20 Deny Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE 3 9 3 EMERGENCY SERVICE CALL PGM 226 The emergency code table is used for Emergency Call Service All stations regardless of COS can dial the emergency codes in this table In this program mode the following items can be customized 2 Press the TRANS PGMI button 3 Dial 226 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table lA _PGm26__ Description ___ Procedure COMMENTS Bin Number Range 1 10 VALUE2 Max 14 digits Emergency Service Call Maximum of 10 emergency codes can be programmed 66 Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 Tables PGM 227 237 204 205 3 10 1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE PGM 227 Authorization code table entries consist of each Station password and extra accoun
144. to off net unconditionally Code 8 or after No Answer Ring timer is expired Code 9 Note that if both incoming CO and outgoing CO are analog line the system will automatically disconnect the call after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired Operation To activate unconditional Off Net Call Forward 1 Lift handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 8 Seize a CO Line if required Dial the desired phone number instead of speed bin Replace the handset and go on hook DOES Gy To activate no answer off net call forward 1 Lift handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 9 Seize a CO Line if required Dial the desired phone number instead of speed bin Replace the handset and go on hook Ore Sy To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward Cancel Code Condition 1 The entered telephone number will be automatically assigned to a station speed bin but the telephone number cannot be erased or edited from the normal speed bin programming mode 2 The assigned station speed bin will be deleted automatically when the user cancel this function 28 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 8 1 7 Call Forward Incoming CO Off net ATD only Description The System Attendan
145. when ipLDK system detects an error during networking connection signaling This value is only used when the networking feature is executed through the public switching network This value is not used at the networking feature between direct connected ipLDK systems The name of calling station is sent to the called system between ipLDK systems CNIP is displayed on called party station LCD according to ADMIN programming If the CNIP and CLI are received together CNIP is prior to CLI The name of answered station is sent to the calling system between ipLDK systems CONP is Networking CNIP ON OFF Enable Networking CONP ON OFF Enable displayed on the calling party station LCD according to ADMIN programming o Networking Signal FAC UUS FAC Select the information element type for Method networking supplementary service message FACILITY USER TO USER information element can be used for networking supplementary service message o A JETT Networking CAS ON OFF The networking CAS is explained in the Feature Enable Description and Operation manual Section Par VPN ON OFF Enable 2 16 16 NET CC Retain ON OFF Mode If the centralized attendants enabled in the master system CAS should be disabled This value is used to set the networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion If this value is set to ON the signaling of call retain mode is executed Attributes Networking Transfer Wf At international standard
146. when station between digits cannot exceed Inter digit timer or error tone Is min ec ICM Box Timer 00 60 2 digits Select the ringing time of the CALL button is dialing some digits The time provided MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer 00 60 2 digits Select the amount of time between repeated reminder tones to station that it has a message waiting 000 255 3 digits 000 sec Select the maximum time of a page The system will automatically disconnect the page at the end of this time unless the caller has hung up earlier 11 Pause Timer 1 9 1 digit E This timer is used at the speed dialing feature LNR and etc In case of the speed dial or LNR ipLDK system sends the dial digits to the outgoing CO line after this time 136 Paging Timeout Timer e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 MC ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Preset Call Forward Timer 00 99 2 digits 10 sec This timer is used at the Preset Call Forward feature Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 2 3 1 9 After this timer expires incoming call will be forwarded to a predetermined station after this timer when SLT makes an outgoing CO call sec 3Soft Auto Release Timer 01 30 2 digits This timer is used only in 3soft BTN DKTU LDH 30DH In 3soft menu if no digits are entered within time the DKTU turn to Idle state 15 VM Pause Timer 01 90 2 digits 30 100m
147. with station physical number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table _PGM2336_ Description Procedure __ COMMENTS Activate Mobile Extension If this feature is set to ON the FLEX1 1 ON VALUES Station can use the Mobile HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Extension features 1 ON on L WE a Call routes to a mobile extension HOLD SAVE Assign Telephone Used to enter the telephone number FLEX3 Mobile Number Number of a mobile extension when this Up to 24 digits feature is activated HOLD SAVE mobile extension to 16 digits HOLD SAVE Mobile Extension Hunt If this feature is set to ON anda FLEX5 1 ON Call station is a member of Hunt group HOLD SAVE then the Hunt call is routed to the Mobile extension also Voice Message If this feature is set to ON and if a FLEX6 1 ON Notification to Mobile voice message was left at the HOLD SAVE station the system will send SMS notification to the Mobile Extension Only possible when PSTN SMS is served Mobile Extension Usage If this value is set to ON it means FLEX7 1 ON mobile extension being used HOLD SAVE Same as Station PGM 34 3 10 9 LOCAL CODE TABLE PGM 204 The local call is defined as one that satisfies the ADMIN PGM204 If the incoming telephone numbers matches this table the SMDR is printed as a local call Up to 16 SMDR local codes are available The SMDR long distance code can be up to 5 digits By default
148. 0 3 digits 015 sec When this timer is expired CCR is activated sec Se Inter Digit Timer 01 20 2 digits This timer is used at DID type 2 feature In DID type2 ipLDK system will be wait the new DID digit receiving until this timer is expired If this timer is expired the call routing of DID a 2 is executed 183 In Room Indication E Bees gt sponte iRoom Activates In Room Supervisor _ A bo act button Room Indication button is On 2 OFF 184 A Chime Bell Attribute Chime Bell Pair oeren Pair Master EE presses the Chime Bell button the paired Station will ring Chime Bell Relay 4 ipLDK If Chime Bell Relay is set LBC 100 300 300E is activated when paired 2 ipLDK 20 Station receives Chime Bell Ring Alim this timer expires engen 1 eran adjusted 138 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 17 CIDU SETTING PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT DEMAPK 185 CIDU Setting Tee CIDU USAGE ON OFF If this value is set to ON CIDU information is sent CID Name Display NAME 1 TEL NO O According to this ADMIN program value LCD TEL o displayed data can be selected Serial Port Select Set the port connected to CIDU hardware device CID Co Port Mapping 000 063 Set the CIDU port and the analog CO line port veem 5 Initialize CID Data 6 CID Type2 Usage Swor op eOe analog CO ine n the CIDU port and the an
149. 0 600 3 digits Wrap Up Timer 002 999 3 002 sec 8 00 13 ipLDK 300 300E 00 12 Alt If No Member Music Source iol DK 100 tes 20 o ME STA HUNT 000 SZ 3 030 sec ACD Warning Tone Alternate Destination Supervisor Timer Supervisor Call Count ACD Queued ON OFF OFF Call 142 after overflow timer expires The overflow timer can be set at PGM191 FLEX 8 If this timer expires after a call is received in the group the call is routed to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be set at PGM191 FLEX 7 A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value after the end of received call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap up time If there is no member on duty intercom call will be dropped and CO incoming call will be routed to overflow destination or to ring assigned station if overflow destination is not assigned If music source is assigned calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone When a call is received in the group and there is no available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned When a call is received in the group and there is no available station in the group then the call will be routed to this destination if assigned But it must be avoided to program the alternate destination as the hunt group itself For example the
150. 00 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Numbering Plan Unified Dialing Plan UDP In the ipLDK networking system the UDP numbering plan is used In the UDP networking the stations of each system can have a unique station number from 2 digits up to 7 digits The unique station number is assigned according to the numbering plan of each ipLDK system The figure 2 16 2 describes the networking configuration that is configured by UDP numbering plan In this figure the symbol of x represents the ranged digit as 0 9 Station 4XXX e Station ISS 2xxx Station m y Station OXXX H W pas 3XXX itl e E Figure 2 16B Networking Configuration UDP Numbering Plan Automatic Routing Service A dialed number is analyzed and routed to access the correct destination according to the Net Numbering Table The System supports an alternative route when the main path fails In order to maximize the use of Networking and efficiency of the private network the Net Numbering Table provides a simple accessibility to the end User 155 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 1 Net Call Description Net Call allows a Station User to make a call to a Station in another Networking System by dialing a Station number just as an intercom call would be dialed within the same System The Figure 2 16 1 de
151. 0E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 2 11 10 DID Call to Each Station Voice Mail Box Description In the ipLDK system maximum 1000 Flexible DID Table entry can be programmed Each Flexible DID Table entry has six attributes DID Name Day Destination Night Destination Weekend Destination Lunch Destination and Reroute Destination If destination of Flexible Conversion DID table PGM 231 is programmed as Station s VMIB If DID Call is routed to Station s VMIB external DID caller can leave message directly Condition If the Day Night Weekend Lunch DID destination is busy call is rerouted to Reroute Destination VMIB Access option must be ON PGM113 FLEX2 Admin Programming WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 EDID Destination PGM 231 2 11 11 CCR Call to Each Station Voice Mail Box Description In CCR table each station voice mail box can be assigned by each VMIB announcement If user greeting is recorded calling party hear user greeting and can leave a message and if user greeting is not recorded calling party just hear system announcement and leave a message Condition VMIB Access option must be ON PGM113 FLEX2 Admin Programming WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 ECCR table PGM 228 118 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation
152. 1 ON VALUE Account will be prompted to enter an authorization HOLD SAVE 0 OFF code to access this CO Line 1 ON Tenancy Group Designates the ICM Tenancy group FLEX10 01 VALUE number a Station belongs to If this value is Tenancy Group 00 15 ipLDK 300 300E set separated Day Night ring mode is HOLD SAVE 0 5 ipLDK 100 20 applied to incoming CO Calls according to the ICM Tenancy group Attendant Day Night ring mode 20 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 2 3 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES II PGM 142 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 142 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Pam Description__________ Procedure COMMENTS CO Line Name Display If this value is set to ON and the CO Line FLEX1 1 ON Name is assigned the Name is displayed on HOLD SAVE the station LCD when the station receives an incoming CO call through the CO Line CO Line Name Assign Designates the name of the CO Line FLEX2 CO LINE NAME Max 12 characters refer to Keyset Map HOLD SAVE KeySET Map 1 Blank 2 3 _PGM142_ Description_________ Procedure COMMENTS Metering Unit Designates the unit used to detect pulses FLEX3 VALUES from the CO Line There are 7 metering METERING 00 None signal types refer to
153. 1 a 1 sec HOLD SAVE R2 IN Manage Timer VG R2 signaling maximum time for FLEX4 Time 2digits waiting for forward signal from PBX 1 Range 01 50seconds sec HOLD SAVE R2 Disappear Timer FLEX5 Time 2digits Range 01 50seconds HOLD SAVE R2 Pulse Timer In R2 signaling time duration to send FLEX6 Time 2digits 20msec base pulse typed R2 signal 20 msec Range 01 30 HOLD SAVE Range 000 500 HOLD SAVE Range 01 ee SE Line AR FLEX9 Value dote e ES 1 9 HOLD SAVE ere Category FLEX10 Value 1digits Oe 1 9 HOLD SAVE haria Service Request the CID to the calling party FLEX11 Value VALUES 1 ON Range 01 10 Digits HOLD SAVE If outgoing dial is not performed within FLEX13 Value 2digits MO this timer the R2 outgoing call is Range 01 50digits failed HOLD SAVE R2 ERROR PROMT If R2 outgoing call is made and the FLEX14 Value USAGE ERROR signal is received error inthe HOLD SAVE traffic or etc the caller will hear an error announce to call again If there s no available VMIB the system error tone is heard R2 BUSY PROMT If R2 outgoing call is made and the FLEX15 Value USAGE BUSY signal is received the HOLD SAVE destination is busy the caller will hear the busy announce If there s no available VMIB the system busy tone is heard 91 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 P
154. 11 FLEX 8 E internal Page Zone PGM 118 E External Control Contact PGM 168 2 8 2 Pre recorded MSG Description User can record a VMIB message for paging Operation To record a VMIB paging message perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 6 5 The announcement Press button to record should be heard If there is already a recorded message in the number dialed the recorded message will be played Press the key to start recording After hearing the announcement Record your message and the confirmation tone record the desired message Press the HOLD SAVE button OR Press the MON button when finished recording the confirmation tone will be heard Press the SPEED button while the recorded message is playing to deleted the message a confirmation tone is heard To activate a VMIB message for paging Dial the page code 5xx and lift handset 2 The recorded VMIB message Is paged 98 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To delete a VMIB message for paging 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial6 7 3 Then the recorded message is deleted OR 4 Press the SPEED button while playing then the message is deleted and confirmation tone is heard Condition Lift handset to make a page lf there is any recorded message it is paged and if there is no recorded message user s voice is paged
155. 16 PRINT PORT SELECTION PGM 175 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 175 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 175 COMMENTS Off line SMDR Statistics Off line SMDR data can be printed FLEX1 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE 01 COM1 data can be printed through this port Range 1 11 03 TELNET1 HOLD SAVE 04 TELNET2 Traffic Traffic analysis data can be printed FLEX3 VALUE 05 TELNET3 through this port Range 1 11 06 ISDN HOLD SAVE 07 NET PCAdmin SMDI Print SMDI data can be printed through this FLEX4 VALUE 08 NET PCAttendant port Range 1 11 09 NET CTI HOLD SAVE 10 NET Remote Call Information Call information data can be printed FLEX5 VALUE HOLD SAVE 01 COM1 Info On line SMDR On line SMDR data can be printed FLEX6 VALUE 02 COM2 through this port Range 1 11 03 COM3 MODU HOLD SAVE 04 TELNET1 Trace Trace data can be printed through this FLEX7 VALUE 05 TELNET2 port Range 1 11 06 TELNET3 HOLD SAVE 07 ISDN Debug Debug data can be printed through FLEX8 VALUE 08 NET PCAdmin this port Range 1 1 1 09 NET PCAttendant HOLD SAVE 10 NET CTI PC Admin PC Admin can be connected through FLEX9 VALUE 11 NET Remote this port and is automatically detected Range 1 11 l if a connection is attempted from a HOLD SAVE Lae haa different type PC Attendant PC Admin can be connected throug
156. 2 4 15 123 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 1 Assign Attendant Description As default first station i e Station 100 is assigned as the System Attendant and other attendants are not assigned Main attendants can be assigned ADMIN program 164 but Intercom tenancy group attendant can be assigned ADMIN program 120 FLEX 1 Condition 1 IP phone cannot be assigned as an attendant Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 Admin Programming E Attendant Assignment PGM 164 MN Intercom Tenancy Group Attendant Assignment PGM 120 FLEX 1 2 13 2 Attendant Call amp Queuing Description Attendant call is the intercom call and CO call to an attendant In order to make an intercom call to the attendant a user enters the station number of the attendant or dials 0 button If a user dials 0 button it rings at the assigned attendant of the intercom tenancy group which the station belongs to If there is no assigned station as attendant it rings at main attendant Call to any attendant will be queued if the attendant is busy Then ring back tone or MOH refer to Ref B will be provided to the calling party ADMIN program 160 FLEX 1 Operation To call an attendant 1 Lift handset or press MON button 2 Dial 0 button OR 3 Enter the station number of the attendant Condition When an attendant calls another
157. 20 VALUE VALUES Noise HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON 29 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES PGM 161 In this program mode the following items can be customized 4 Press the TRANS PGMI button 5 Dial 161 6 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table ip TE time date is set by the network time date THOLDISAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Off Hook Ring Type The off hook ring type in the system can FLEX2 0 Burst VALUES be set to mute or a one burst ring HOLD SAVE 0 BURST 1 MUTE Override 1 CO Line If this value is set to ON when there is FLEX3 0 OFF Group no available CO Line in the first CO Line HOLD SAVE Group the System can access the next accessible CO Line Group tone will be heard when paging starts HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Auto Privacy If this value is set to ON a call is FLEX5 0 OFF VALUES md protected from override regardless of HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Station Override Privilege ADMIN 113 FLEX 4 Privacy Warning Tone If this value is set to ON a privacy FLEX6 0 OFF VALUES warning tone will be heard when a callis HOLD SAVE 0 OFF overridden 1 ON Single Ring for CO Call If this value is set to YES the ICM ring FLEX7 1 Yes cadence and the CO ring cadence is HOLD SAVE reversed each other The cadence of ICM ring is set to 1sec on 4sec off The cadence of CO ring i
158. 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 18 Mute Description During a conversation pressing the MUTE button will disable the handset microphone or the speakerphone for privacy while continuing to listen to the other party on the phone through the handset or speaker Pressing the MUTE button again will reactivate the microphone Operation To mute the transmitting audio while on a call 1 Press the MUTE button 2 The MUTE button LED should illuminate the connected party will not be able to hear the voice on the muted Station To restore transmission perform the following Steps 1 Press the illuminated MUTE button 2 The LED of the MUTE button is extinguished and transmission is restored Condition When changing from the speakerphone to the handset mute is released When pressing another DSS button the mute state will not be changed 2 4 19 MWI Message Wait Indication SLT Feature Description If the SLT station receives a message from another User then the SLT LED will flash indicating a message is waiting Condition When lifting handset user will hear DND warning tone indicating message waiting When a message waiting indication prompt is recorded in the System greeting 097 a voice announcement will be heard instead of the DND warning tone Admin Programming E Station ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX 1 2 4 20 On Hook dialing
159. 234567890 would be shown as 67890 SMDR Long Distance A long distance call is defined as a call that satisfies FLEX14 FLEX1 Codes the condition of ADMIN program 177 FLEX 4 or Range FLEX1 5 1 ADMIN program 177 FLEX 14 Up to 2 digits Range 0 99 HOLD SAVE 0 LEFT 1 RIGHT VALUES Default 0 Maximum of 5 SMDR long distance codes FLEX1 FLEX5 MSN Print on SMDR If this value is set to ON the MSN number is printed FLEX15 VALUE VALUES instead of the Station number when an outgoing MSN HOLD SAVE 0 OFF call is made 1 ON Print Caller Number If this value is set to ON the caller number is printed FLEX16 VALUE VALUES ICM SMDR Save If this value is set to ON ICM call data is stored in Off FLEX17 VALUE VALUES ICM SMDR Print If this value is set to ON ICM call data is printed in FLEX18 VALUE VALUES On line SMDR HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Interface service If this value is set to ON SMDR format for CIS FLEX19 VALUE INDIA KOREA is serviced HOLD SAVE If this value is set to ON SMDR data is saved and sent when there s SMDR data request from application software When using SMDR interface service normal Off line SMDR cannot be saved nor printed I SMDR connection This program determines port to be used for printer FLEX20 VALUE VALUES type when SMDR interface service is set HOLD SAVE 0 SIO SMDR Interface is serve
160. 290 SMSBAtwibutes NotinipLDK 20 fq IP Address 2 Gateway Address 3 SubnetMask Il 4 Server Address f B Password zai SMS Setings Not inp K20 Hl Center Number Max 8 digits This ber is dialed when a Short Message is submitted a Center CLI Max 8 digits This number is dialed when a Short Message is submitted This number should be matched with the caller ID of an incoming SMS call to receive the Short Message 292 KC SMS CO Attributes CO Range Not available in ipLDK 20 o ON OFF Short Message e Station incoming Short Message this CO line when submit Short SE I asa CID SMS RG This feature is used when CID function is not available for a CO line If this field is set incoming call is unconditionally answered and system decides whether it is SMS call or not 153 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 26 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE PGM FLEX DEM TL RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 320 Networking Basic F1 F7 Attributes Networking Enable ON OFF This ADMIN program value is used to enable the networking feature To set this ADMIN value to ON the networking software lock key must be installed at ipLDK system A Station user may enter the software lock key Check Dialing command TRANS PGM 78 then the installed software lock key is displayed on station LCD Networking Retry 00 99 This ADMIN value is used to retry the connection Count
161. 3 RSG_LCO RX to WKT 00 63 RSG_LCO RX to ACO 00 63 6 amp 6 RSG_LCORXtoCTR_ACO 00 63 7 RSG_LCORXtoDCO 00 63 8 RSG_LCO RX to DVU 00 63 3 13 14 RSG IP PHONE RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 396 The RX gain of IP Phone on RSG can be adjusted E O RAN Se RENA E RSG_IP PHONE RX from DKTU ores AR ED Een RSG_IP PHONE RX from ACO 6 RESERVED RSG_IP PHONE RX from DCO 8 PSG Ip PHONE RX from VMIB 9 RSG_IP PHONE RX from DTMF RSG_IP PHONE RX from TONE RSG_IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 1 RSG_IP PHONE RX from MUSIC 2 RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED RSG_IP PHONE RX from IP Phone 91 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 15 RSG IP PHONE TX GAIN CONTROL PGM 397 The TX gain of IP Phone on RSG can be adjusted FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK RSG_IP PHONE RX to DKTU 00 63 RSG_IP PHONE RX to SLT 00 63 RESERVED SS 00 63 INS AS RSG_IP PHONE RX to ACO RESERVED 7 RSG_IP PHONE RX to DCO 00 63 RSG_IP PHONE RX to DVU 00 63 92 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 14 SMS Attributes Reserved 3 14 1 SMSB ATTRIBUTES PGM 290 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 290 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGm20 Description________ _ Procedure _ COMMENTS IP address of the SMS board digits HOLD
162. 4 8 SLT MOH ioLDK 100 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 06 VMIB MOH 07 11 SLT MOH ipLDK 300 300E 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 07 VMIB MOH 08 12 SLT MOH VALUES ipLDK 20 O Not Assignment 1 Int Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone ioLDK 100 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 06 VMIB MOH 07 11 SLT MOH 12 Hold Tone loLDK 300 300E 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 07 VMIB MOH 08 12 SLT MOH 13 Hold Tone VALUES ioLDK 20 O Not Assignment 1 Int Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM 171 COMMENTS 4 8 SLT MOH ioLDK 100 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 06 VMIB MOH 07 11 SLT MOH IpLDK 300 300E 00 Not Assignment 1 Int Music 02 04 External Music 05 07 VMIB MOH 08 12 SLT MOH Assign SLT MOH To assign a SLT MOH set the value and match FLEX4 FLEX1 Range VALUES the SLT Station number for the SLT port FLEX1 5 SLT Station FLEX1 SLT MOH Number HOLD SAVE 1 FLEX2 SLT MOH 2 FLEX3 SLT MOH 3 FLEX4 SLT MOH 4 FLEX5 SLT MOH 5 Dial Tone Source To assign an external dial tone set the SLT FLEX5 SLT MOH VALUES Station number of the SLT port Range 1 5 refer to 1 SLT
163. 411 MODEMGain_________ COo WE r moomo oa a 2 ______ MODEM CTRCO 00 63 20 NotinipLDK 20 _ _ s momo RR IR Shot SLIB Gain 42 i fShoaco 00 63 283 a a 2 LogAaco fA longSlIBGain_____ 43 D _ ShtAco _______jo0 63 87 S ene ony 2 flongACO fF FaSUBGain a14 D ShotACO 00 sa ony 2 flongACO _______00 683_ 45 eren 1 Shot SLB S84 415 SAF only jkLongACOGain ETC 416 SAF only 47 SMSBRxGain J ___ NotinipiDk20 ro mro mwao A 2 FromCTRACO 00 63 20 3 Pops ozs A 4 Frompco 00 88 48 SMSBTxGain J Monn 1 Una SS 2 PTOBTRAGO 00 63 SS 3 TE os O 0o oOo oOo o O CA A 97 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK stem Tone Frequenoy 1 D alfone_Adigits a a Ring Back Tone 0400 0425 ES 2 ErrorTone 4digits 0400 0000 re 5 DummyDialTone _ 4digits 0350 0440 J gt Differential Ring Frequency ff Ringi digits 1000 1020 EE 0910 3 Dm Lidl 126012880 gt gt 4 Ring4 4digits 0800 0820 J gt Distinct Ring Frequency a E tights 10480 0000 igi 0400 0000 s fams aegis 0820 0000 2 Ring4 J4digts 0770 0000 fF ACNRToneCadence SS 2 BusyTone ________0 255 025 025 20msec base 3 Errorfone D pp 012012 20msecbase 4 SDialTone________ 0255 070 000 20msecbase pTiB ACO RxGain SAF only 3 15 2 INITIALIZATION PGM 450
164. 5 SMDI Port Interface SMDI dictates the Range 01 11 programmed in ipLDK 20 distribution of VM information HOLD SAVE Overflow Timer If the timer expires after a call is FLEX6 Seconds received in the group the call will be Range 000 600 routed to the overflow destination HOLD SAVE Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group will FLEX7 Value Destination VALUES continue to route until answered or Type STA Hunt 1 Station each station in the group has been Group VMIB Speed Bin refer 2 Hunt tried The call will remain at the last to VALUES HOLD SAVE 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Station in the group or will be passed to the overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin after the overflow timer expires Note Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 ipLDK 20 2000 2499 ipLDK 100 2000 4999 ipLDK 300 2000 6999 ipLDK 300E NA SO Ge ee IRA If the hunt group type is selected to PICK UP then the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 1 Dial 191 1 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM191 Description Procedure COMMENTS Auto Pickup If this value is set to ON and there is ringing at a hunt member FLEX1 1 On VALUES another hunt member can pickup the call automatically by HOLD SAVE 0 OFF pressing the MON button or going off hook 1 ON All Ring If this value is set to ON
165. 67 620 667 pLDK 300E 1 Group Pilot Number 620 634 620 634 620 634 620 634 620 634 620 634 620 634 620 634 ipLDK 100 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 620 629 ipLDK 20 501 535 501 535 01 35 01 85 01 35 501 535 401 419 501 535 ipLDK 300E 2 Internal Page Zone 3 IntemalAllCallPage 543543 HSS mm A 54S e Page RO P _ 5 _o _ o e O carimasa en e a e a le aa l 14 Call Forward SS Es a y 54 we Ke SLT Speed Dial Programming SLT 6 Message WalvCallback Enable ase ese jes fee T jes Te jee gt 109 SS IOLDkK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 TEE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 FLEX FIELD NUMBER NUMBER SET2 NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER GEI SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 SET7 SET8 107 20 SystemHoldd_______ 590 gn eC D n Joen 690 Ten 30 aen SIT 21 RESERVED SH T 561 Joe Ion 56t TE 22 RESERVED Je ae es 562 562 Jeng Tei 562 23 Programming Mode Enter Code s63 563 Tesis les a 8 s o oro 24 ACD Reroute 564 564 564 564 694 34 EE 2 GroupCallPickup J566 Tee SC OH ST M O S 2 le 98 Je 5689 5 Call Parking Locations 601 610 601 610 601 610 601 610 601 610 601 610 601 610 601 610 ipLDK 100 601 608 Ton 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 601 608 pLDK 20 6 Direct Call Pickup K dE KK EE ARS 801 872
166. 7 33 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 3 Holding and Parking 2 3 3 1 Hold Description A Station User can place a call on hold The following features are available depending on the desired result The result of the holding operation can be determined by ADMIN programming a Feature Descripti n__________ Svstem Hold Any Station can retrieve a held call Another station in the group can seize the CO Line to answer Only the station user who held the call can retrieve it Exclusive Hold Another station in the group cannot seize the CO Line Operation To place a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the HOLD SAVE button once or twice depending on Hold Preference 2 Toplace a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from a SLT depending on Hold Preference perform the following Steps 3 Hook flash and dial 5 6 O refer to Ref A To access a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from the DKTU where the hold was placed perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the CO button OR 3 Dial 8 and the CO Line number refer to Ref B To access a CO Line on Exclusive System Hold from the SLT where the hold was placed perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial8 refer to Ref C Condition 1 The CO Line placed on Exclusive Hold will flash at the Station and th
167. 85 cocccccccccccccnncnnococcccconononononocononnnnnnnanacnnennnnnoncnnnnnnnns 88 3 13 7 IP PHONE ATTRIBUTES PGM 296 88 3 13 8 RSG DKT RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 200 89 3 13 9 RSG DKT TX GAIN CONTROL POM 201 90 3 13 10 RSG SLT RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 207 90 3 13 11 RSG SLT TX GAIN CONTROL POM 393 ccccccccccccccccccccccccncccnononononononononononnnonononononass 90 3 13 12 RSG LCO RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 2041 91 3 13 13 RSG LCO TX GAIN CONTROL Ob 91 3 13 14 RSG IP PHONE RX GAIN CONTROL PGM 206 91 3 13 15 RSG IP PHONE TX GAIN CONTROL PGM 207 92 3 14 SMS Attributes REServed ccsccceeseeccenseeecenseeeeenseeneeaseecennseeeensseeneasseseonssessonseesees 93 3 14 1 SMSB ATTRIBUTES PGM 200 93 3 14 2 SMSB SETTING PGM 201 93 3 14 3 SMSB CO ATTRIBUTES PGM 202 94 3 19 OMer TAOS eegene ad etilo oia 95 3 15 1 NATION SPECIFIC PGM 400 A2 95 3 15 2 INITIALIZATION PGM A0 98 3 15 3 PRINT PROTECTED DATABASE PGM Ab 99 3 15 4 INIT DATABASE BY MPB VERSION PGM An 99 4 QUICK REFERENCE ADMIN PROGRAMMING TABLE 100 AA o Plai PP 100 A 1 1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN oasis erica 100 4 1 2 STATION PROGRAMMING 0ccc 0c0ccceccccds cesescesneedsesccceesssseececsccsessssasececteccessssenecscesceeusesevecss 101 4 1 3 ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING 102 4 1 4 FLEXIBLE BUTTON PROGRAMMING CODE 103 4 2 ADMIN Programming INdeX ooocnnccccnncncccnnnccccccononanoccnnnnnnonononanonnnnnnancrrnnnnnerennnannnrrennaaanns 104 DA AA 107 4 3 1 L
168. 9 4 4 0 0 O 01 04 00 21 00 00 00 01 Main 2618 0 0 0 0 0 00 05 00 00 00 00 Main 3629 6 1 5 0 O 02 58 00 23 00 00 00 14 00 03 Main o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 18 2 Call Reports Description ipLDK system supports the following report to analyze the call status of the system Call Summary Report Monitor all day s call traffic and generate this report that shows call status of last hour today s peak time yesterday s peak time yesterday s total and today s total Call Hourly Report Analysis of call overload by showing the last 24hour s per hour call This report provides the following information fields Analysis Start Hour Starting time of hour duration which the data is recorded Number of Calls Completed The total number of calls completed or answered during the listed hour Operation To print the Call Summary Report at main Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0125 To print the Call Hourly Report at main Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0126 Ex Site Name Report Type Call Summary Report Date 02 12 04 13 14 Analysis Start Hour Number of Calls Completed Last Hour 13 00 14 Today Peak 10 00 141 Yesterday Peak 10 00 119 Today Total 413 Yesterday Total mn 970 182 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 F
169. ABX does not provide CO Dial Tone Instead loLDK system provides it PABX CO Ring Back Tone YES NO NO If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides CO Ring Back Tone Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Ring Back Tone Instead ipLDK system provides it PABX CO Dial Tone provide CO Error Tone Instead loLDK system provides it If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides CO Busy Tone Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Busy Tone Instead loLDK system provides it PABX CO Error Tone YES NO If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides CO Error Tone PABX CO Busy Tone YES NO Otherwise PX or PABX does not 120 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 HC E AA A E PABX CO Announce Tone YES NO If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides CO Announce Tone Otherwise PX or PABX does not provide CO Announce Tone Instead ipLDK system provides it CO Flash Timer 000 300 This value provides the length of time limit of CO Flash timer Otherwise the CO Line is oi vat 10msec base a Open Loop 100msec base aa bedengt Length SS SHORT This feature is used to distinguish length is too variable SAF only o Pre EF answered after this timer expires DISA Delay Timer 1 9 After this timer DTMF Receiver is attached after DISA line answered CIS only 17 RESERVED DANI EOS 18 BUSY ERROR CPT Detect Nor If this value is set ON a
170. ANS PGM button at a Station during a conversation The transferred call is placed on exclusive hold 2 The Transferring Station then dials the Station number of another Networked System to transfer the call and goes on hook 3 The transferring station goes idle and the call will ring at the transferred to Station in the other System 4 The transferred caller and the transferred to Station will be connected when the transferred to Station answers the call Condition H both transferred Stations and transferred to Stations are located in the same system the Networking CO line that is used for the transferring voice path is not needed That is the transfer call will be setup as an intercom call The net transfer will be canceled when the transferring Station User presses the flashing TRANS PGM button After the transferring Station goes on hook the net transfer call will not recall to the transferring Station though the transferred to Station fall CO lines are in use an error tone will be heard when a net transfer is attempted If the call is transferred to a busy station the busy tone will be heard Admin Programming E Networking Basic Attributes PGM 320 E Networking Supplementary Attributes Transfer Mode PGM 321 E Networking CO Line Attributes PGM 322 E Networking Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 2 16 5 Net Call Forward Description A Station User can forward Net Calls over the network to any ne
171. AREA CODE Ifthe CLI MESSAGE WAIT ADMIN program 114 FLEX 4 is set to ON the unanswered CLI data will be save at the station memory refer to Ref A Condition Up to 12 digits will be displayed on DKTU as a CLI number Though the power of system is off the stored CLI messages are not erased The CLI can be shown at SLT which has a CLI display LCD But secondary SLT of 2B DKTU can t display CLI information Reference A CLI Message Wait 2 14 2 3 Admin Programming NH CLIP LCD Display PGM 114 FLEX 1 ECLI Name Display PGM 114 FLEX 11 NH CLI Message Wait PGM 114 FLEX 4 ECLI Print PGM 200 FLEX 3 E My Area Code PGM 200 FLEX 9 E My Area Prefix Code PGM 200 FLEX 10 2 14 2 2 Outgoing CLI Service Description When a station of ipLDK system makes an outgoing CO call it can send the telephone number Figure 2 14 2 2 describes an example of outgoing CLI process in ipLDK system In the figure the outside CO caller is defined the called party and the station 100 of ipLDK system is defined the calling party The calling party station 100 makes an outgoing CO call to the called party and ipLDK generates the CLI of station 100 and transmit it to the called party For example the CLI of station 100 is 04313283100 This CLI data is combined with three parts The start digits of CLI are 0431 it is generated from the My Area Code feature PGM 200 FLEX 9 The insertion omission
172. Access 2 2 1 Basic Access Description Each station is allowed or denied access based on particular CO Lines or CO Groups Station users may use Flexible buttons which are assigned as a CO button or CO Group button including the POOL and LOOP buttons According to the Numbering Plan station users can access individual CO Lines by dialing CO Access Codes Feature IL Description____ Operationmethod_________ Accesscode Idle Line Access Automatically selects Dial the idle Line Access 8801 8816 ipLDK 20 88 CO Line an idle CO Line from Number 9 or press a 8801 8840 ipLDK 100 number the assigned CO CO Line button 88001 88200 ipLDK 300 Groups 88001 88400 ipLDK 300E CO Group Access Selects an idle CO Line Dial the CO Group Access 801 808 ipLDK 20 8 CO Group from the number and a CO Group 801 824 ipLDK 100 number corresponding CO number or press a CO 801 872 ipLDK 300 300E Group Group button A user can dial 9 refer to Ref A to access the first idle line in their CO group refer to Ref D A user can dial 8801 refer to Ref B to access CO Line 001 if it is idle A user can dial 801 refer to Ref C to access the first idle CO Line in CO Group 1 Operation To access a CO Line from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the desired CO Line POOL button or LOOP button OR 3 Dial the individual CO Line Access Code CO Group Acce
173. Admin Programming Manual September 2008 WTIB RX Gain PO A E 1 WTIB DKT 00 63 26 o O 2 WTIB SLT 00 63 88 a wri wru oes e 5 WTIBACO _ 00 63 Z 38 TI e wmBcrRcO Je 129 A CI 3 S l eo WTIBVMIB 00 63 IT 9 EC TI 10 WTIBMTONE _ 00 63 19 TI JI WTIB MUSICA 00 6329 12 WTIB MUSIC2 00 6329 Bo NT Me Corp es __ _ _ 404 ACOBRXGain___ ACB 0 CA A E AS s omo oe 0 a a z moo 0088 5 ACOBWMIB_ 00S 9 ACOBDTMF 00S 10 ACOBTONE _ me JI 11 AacoBmUSICI Bs 00 6384 413 ACOB MUSIC3 00 6382 CE EOS EC o o J JDCOBRXGain_________ EE 2 DCOBSLT EA S 5 DCOB ACO 00S D DCOB CTRCO_ 00 63 15 NotinipLDke0 AA 00 63 32 S o 8 DCOBVMIB 00S 9 DCOB DTMF OBS 10 DCOBTONE OBS 11 DBOBIMUSICA me II 12 DCopiwusic2 00 82 43 DGODMUEICH 00 63 IT AS A A y 407 WMIBRXGain________ MBIT o o e 2 AMS 00S 4 ES S l 5 VMIBACO 00S HP 6 WMIB ICTRCO 00 68 29 NotinipiDk20 Jupp 00S 5 WMIBMUSIC me II oo 408 DTMFRCGain CI PI 0 63 C 2 DTMF AcO OB 8 TAI 96 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PT PAGE Gan LI o xT PAGE BT woa a 2 JEXTPAGESLT 00682 4 EXTPAGEWTU me fag EXT PAGE ACO 00 63 e Ba PAGEICTROO we mum 7 EXTPAGEIDCO 00 63 EE 8 EXTPAGENMIB 00 63 Ir 9 EXTPAGE MUSIC1 00 6387 o 10 EXTPAGE MUSIC2 00 63 TI Ieren os aroo 4o CPTGain______ Ooo G O r LT AAA CEA ETS EA 2 _ CPT CTRCO OB 15 NotinipLDk20 _______ A e e AAA A
174. B n ipLDK 100 300 300E DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature Admin Programming E RS 232C Port Setting PGM 174 190 IpLok 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 19 4 MODEM Description The ipLDK MPB software can be upgraded through Modem interface by ipLDK upgrade program in remote PC Operation To upgrade the Modem software perform the following Steps 1 Run the ipLDK PC Upgrade program 2 Select the ipLDK System to be upgraded 3 Click on the OK button oystem Selection Upgrade LDK Seres system RE x Select the System C LDK 300 LDK 300E LDK 100 LDK 20 Cancel 4 Select the port type Modem Connection 5 Click on the Select button AAA Connection Type Upgrade LOK Series System xX Static C ISON Connection TCP Connection C Serial Connection Remote Site Info System Dial Mo Admin Password Serial Port Oh Baud Rate 9200 gt File Info Binary File EI Browse Quit Settings Test Method 191 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Click on the Next button Select your Modem Type in the Modem Configuration dialog box Click on the Start button the ipLDK MPB software upgrade will begin 0 When the ROM file is finished downloading the ipLDK System will erase the previous R
175. BASE PROGRAM SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 104 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DON _ ITEM System Timers 1 S System Timers Il 182 System Timers III In Room Indication Chime Bell Attribute DCOB DCOB System attribute 8 DCOB CO Line Attribute 187 190 TABLES 222 223 224 225 NETWORKING VOIB RSG STATION GROUP Station Group Assign Station Group Attribute LCR Attributes LCR Leading Digit Table LCR Digit Modification Table LCR Table Initialization Toll Exception Table Allow A Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Deny A Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Allow B Entry no 01 30 Toll Exception Table Deny B Entry no 01 30 Canned Toll Table Allow Entry no 01 10 Canned Toll Table Deny Entry no 01 10 Emergency Code Table Authorization Code Table Customer Call Routing Executive Secretary Table Flexible DID Table System Speed Zone Weekly Time Table Voice Mail Dialing Table Mobile Extension Incoming CLI destination table Local Code Table Enblock Prefix Table Networking Basic Attribute Networking Supplementary Attribute Networking CO Line Attribute Networking Routing Table VOIB IP Setting GK Setting Not Supported yet VOIB Slot For RSG IP RSG IP No Assign RSG IP Attribute RSG Attribute 1 RSG Attribute 2 RSG Alarm Attribute IP Phone Attribute RSG DKT RX GAIN RSG DKT TX GAIN RSG SLT RX GAIN
176. Buffer 050 300 ms Used for setting the Jitter buffer of VOIP board 17 ON OFF Used for setting the Voice Monitor of VOIP board reserved H 323 Mode jl Normal This ADMIN program selects H 323 Mode 19 Eady H245 _ ON OFF_ ON 1 _ Determines if Early H 245 Mode is used _ 21 TOs Preference 0 7 o This ADMIN program sets TOS Precedence AH La SETTING 1 Gatekeeper Usage ON OFF__ OFF Determines if Gatekeeper is used TS e lc Mode Reroute VOIP board to Gatekeeper VE Gatekeeper Open ON OFF Determines if H245 port is opened H245 Tunneling granted ARQ Pee eS Band Flash PA pg eem Live Address SKIP Address SKIP i0 Gatekeeper Find Port 0 9999 1718 11 Gatekeeper RAS 0 9999 1719 Set GK RAS signal port Signal Port e Gatekeeper Signal 0 9999 1720 Set GK call signal port Port 13 VOIB Gatekeeper ID 23 Characters ss SetuniqueGKID Ji VOIBH323ID_____ 23 Characters SetuniqueVOIBID ____________ 15 VOIBE164 Address 23Digis SetstationnumberunderGK ______ 116 _____ VOIB Terminal Alias 20Digits Reserved ____________________ 4 3 28 SIP Setting PC Admin Only IS 500 TI SIPSETTING sip o a 00 sat SP Prony acres 2 SIP Proxy Server Port 50600 Set SIP Proxy signaling port 3 Proxy Registration Timer 12909 Set Proxy Registration Timer value _ 4 Use Outbound Proxy 0 14 1 Determine outbound proxy usage 5 PrimaryDNS Address li Selen DNS address
177. CO call is dropped when a CPT is detected from the CO This is applied to CO to CO call and normal incoming or outgoing call also To detect a tone from the CO line a CPT detection board is required eye DELAY COUNT After sending Long Distance Code automatically Pause Time will be added CIS aea CS Ory 143 ISDN CO Line Attribute COLP Table Index 00 50 Not Assigned 73 En GS ne know connected party number information CLI refer this value If this value is set to 50 the CLI of this CO Line refers to PGM114 FLEX5 Else if this value is set to 00 49 the CLI of this CO Line refers COLP Table PGM201 CLIP Table Index 00 50 Not To know calling party number Assigned information CLI refer this value If this value is set to 50 the CLI of this CO Line refers to PGM114 FLEX5 Else if this value is set to 00 49 the CLI of this CO Line refers COLP Table PGM201 W Type of Calling Number IS This value is used to set the call type of ISDN CO line CLI DID Conversion Type When CO Service Type is set to ISDN DID MSN PGM140 this value is used to decide DID digit conversion type If this value is set to 0 incoming digits are converted as PGM146 If set to 1 no digit conversion occurs if the caller dials valid station number the station gets the call If set to 2 it refers Flexible DID Table PGM231 121 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual Septem
178. COS Each station is assigned a Class Of Service FLEX1 DAY 2 VALUE COS that determines the Station toll COS Range 1 11 FLEX1 DAY restriction for day and night operation refer to HOLD SAVE FLEX2 NIGHT Table On a particular call the CO COS is combined with Station COS to determine the FLEX2 NIGHT 2 restriction COS for all stations at day and COS Range 1 11 night operation are 1 as default The HOLD SAVE weekend COS is the same as night COS Station COS Table StationCOS _____________ Remak O No restrictions are placed at the station for dialing 2 The assignments in the Exception Table A are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers The assignments in the Exception Table B are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers The assignments in both Exception Tables A amp B are monitored for Allow and Deny numbers The leading digit dialed can not be a long distance code The dialed digits can be longer than 7 digits There is no restriction for the number in Canned Toll Table The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code Only eight digits maximum can be dialed There is no restriction for the number in the Canned Toll Table Intercom and paging calls are allowed No dialing allowed on CO lines ICM boxes are assigned with this COS The assignments in the Exception Table C are monitored for allow and deny numbers The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers The ass
179. Caller hears busy tone Condition This feature does not work when CO direct Ring Assign feature to station PGM144 is set Admin Programming m P MSG DND PGM 113 FLEX 16 2 4 44 DID DISA Call Routing of DND Station Description DID DISA call is routed to specific destination when calling station is DND state And if some station is set Pre selected Message DND operation in this case DID DISA call also will be routed through DND destination There are three destinations Tone Attendant Hunt Group These flows is same at DID DISA the others Destination PGM 167 DND P MSG rerouted flow is same with busy reroute flow Operation Rerouting destination is Tone 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX is DND or Pre Selected MSG SET state 2 Caller hears busy tone Rerouting destination is Attendant 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX is DND or Pre Selected MSG SET state 2 This call will be routed at Attendant Rerouting destination is Hunt Group 1 Call to Station XXX and Station XXX is DND or Pre Selected MSG SET state 2 This call will be routed to assigned hunt group 75 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition f P MSG DND Admin is off route operation doesn t work even tough station is Pre Selected MSG state This Admin is added at PGM167 F4 so previous admin VMIB PROMPT USAGE admin and others Rerouted Destination admin
180. Characters refer to Figure 2 4 21 4 Press HOLD SAVE to accept changes 1 Blank 2 H ES o Figure 2 4 21 Keyset Map 57 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To access Dial by Name perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button twice 2 Dial the desired directory 1 3 refer to values 1 Intercom 2 Station Speed Dial 3 System Speed Dial 3 A confirmation tone should be heard 4 The stored names in the speed bin are displayed in alphabetical order NOTE The up and down arrows can be used to locate the desired name To search a name by entering a character perform the following Steps 1 While two names are displayed on the LCD enter alpha numeric data refer to Figure 2 4 21 2 The LCD displays 2 names which start with the entered character the cursor will point to the first name in the LCD 3 When entering more alpha numeric data then LCD will display names that start with the updated input NOTE To delete the last letter of input press the CALLBK button The up and down arrows also can be used to locate the desired name 4 When the appropriate name is displayed move the cursor to point at the name 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to make a call To search a name by scrolling perform the following Steps 1 While two names are displayed in the LCD window 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to locate t
181. D SAVE 0 6 Unknown International National Network Spec Subscriber Abbreviated Reserved Numbering Plan Numbering plan identification of FLEX6 VALUE VALUES called number HOLD SAVE 0 6 Unknown ISDN Data Numbering T elex National Standard Private Reserved 3 10 11 Incoming CLI Destination Table PGM 237 DID incoming CO call destination can be assigned by incoming CLI If some CLI number is registered at Incoming CLI Destination Table all of DID call with these CLI will be routed to registered specific places ICLID Table Incoming CLI Destination Table has two fields one is CLID field and the other is Destination Index field Destination Index field is represent index number of DID Conv Table PGM 231 PGM 237 COMMENTS Incoming CLI Number Registered Field for Incoming CLI Bin number 001 100 FLEX1 CLI Number upto 20 digit HOLD SAVE Conversion Table Index This value is Conversion table index Bin number 001 100 number PGM231 FLEX2 Index DID Conversion Table Index HOLD SAVE 19 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 3 11 Networking PGM 320 324 3 11 1 NETWORKING BASIC ATTRIBUTES PGM 320 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 320 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Pem3eo ________Description_______ Procedure COMMENTS
182. DK 100 DSS DLS MAP A Station Ports 232 279 ipLDK 300 300E Only 3 1 2 STATION ATTRIBUTES I PGM 111 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 111 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM111 Description_________ Procedure _ COMMENTS Auto Speaker Select If this value is set to ON the Station User can FLEX1 0 OFF access a CO line or make a DSS call by HOLD SAVE pressing the appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting handset or pressing the MON button Call Forward If this value is set to ON an incoming call can FLEX2 0 OFF VALUES be forwarded to the other destination HOLD SAVE If this value is set to ON an incoming call can FLEX3 0 OFF be denied HOLD SAVE Data Line Security If this value is set to ON override and camp FLEX4 1 ON VALUES on from other stations are prohibited when HOLD SAVE 0 OFF this station is busy 1 ON 6 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 COMMENTS Howling Tone SLT If this value is set to ON System gives a FLEX5 0 OFF howling loud error tone when phone is in the HOLD SAVE off hook state without action for an extended period of time Intercom Box Signaling If this value is set to ON Station can receive FLEX6 1 ON
183. Day Zone3 Issue 1 0 September 2008 FLEX1 Monday FLEX2 Tuesday FLEX3 Wednesday Each time of day zone can use different LCR setting each time of day zone1 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 NOTE ipLDK accepts 24 as 00 if input is 24 as starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting each time of day zone1 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 NOTE ipLDK accepts 24 as 00 if input is 24 as starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM Each time of day zone2 can use different LCR setting each time of day zone1 can be grouped up to 3 zones The time not belonging to any zone will be considered as zone 1 NOTE ipLDK accepts 24 as 00 if input is 24 as starting value and vice versa 10 13 means 10 00 00 AM 01 00 00 PM FLEX3 FLEX1 VALUE2 Time Zone 1 OLD GAVE FLEX3 FLEX2 VALUE Time Zone 2 HOLD SAVE FLEX3 FLEX3 VALUE Time Zone 3 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 Day Zone 2 FLEX1 VALUE2 Time Zone 1 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 FLEX2 Seats Time Zone MOLDE PLENA FLEX3 DA Time Zone EE LEE Day Zone 3 FLEX1 VALUE2 Time Zone 1 HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX1 VALUE2 Time Zone 2 HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX1 VA
184. Dial Station number Hang up the handset and go on hook HIS To deactivate Attendant Forward 1 In an idle state press the DND FOR button 2 Inn off hook state press the DND FOR button and dial Condition If the attendant assigns unconditional call forward to SLT or WHTU the forwarded to station only serve incoming calls as attendant call attendant recall and others The forwarded to SLT or WHTU cannot activate attendant features Reference A Unconditional Call Forward 2 3 1 1 125 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 4 Attendant Intrusion Description When an attendant has an urgent message for a station on another CO call the attendant can intrude upon the call and converse with the Station and the CO line party The Figure 2 13 4 describes that the attendant converses with the other two CO parties after an attendant intrusion conversion conversation l IT d r conversation les Ine PY Ceres E CO line y intrusion eonversion O Attendant attendant Figure 2 13 4 Attendant Intrusion Operation To intrude on a CO call when attendant is receiving the intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the programmed ATD INTRUSION FLEX button 2 After intrusion tone converse with the CO party To assign ATD INTRUSION FLEX button 1 Press TRANS PGM 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigne
185. Display Queued call count QUE Group NO Queue count 88 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 LED Indication The DSS LED of the ACD Group will flash as the number of queued calls O Off 01 3 60 IPM 4 6 120 IPM more than 7 240 IPM Supervisor Supervisor Login Logout It is assigned by the Admin Program Each UCD group can be assigned a separate supervisor Supervisor Monitor The supervisor monitor provides a means for an UCD Supervisor to monitor an agent s call in progress or to provide assistance When used a Supervisor may intrude onto an agent s call to listen only or to use the conference mode this feature is available with or without warning tone Reroute Queued Call The supervisor can reroute a queued call to another destination with or without answer Database Assignment The supervisor can change the overflow destination overflow time and wrap up time DKT with flexible buttons must be programmed Supervisor Status button TRANS PGM FLEX TRANS PGM 8 Group NO HOLD SAVE ACD Statistics Report 1 Press the Supervisor Status button 2 The Status Control Menu is shown as below 1 ACD STATUS 2 ACD DATABASE 3 ACD DUTY ACD PRINT ACD call queue status display 1 Dial 1 for ACD call statistics ACD Group Total Calls Average Call Time Average Ring Time Busy Count and Ti
186. E 01 24 Flex Buttons Assignment FLEX 01 44 Each Flexible Button in a station can be assigned as desired User can program by button programming procedure empty TI 01 User PES 02 RE Button 03 CO Line Group Button 04 LOOP Button 01 16 ipLDK 20 01 40 ipLDK 100 001 200 ipLDK 01 08 pLDK 20 01 24 ip_LDK 100 01 72 ipLDK 300 300E TI o 104 LOOP Button J 05 STA xxx Button STA No hn Station No 06 STA PGM Button 11 99 2 Station Programming Code T AAN 07 STA SPD xxx Button __ STA SPD Bin No Speed Bin 08 SYS SPD xxxx Button SYSSPDBinNo SystemSpeedBin_____ 09 FLEXNUM_____ Num PlanCode Num PlanCode 110 Networking DSS Button NetworkingNo Networking DSS Number 11 MSN Button MSNNo JMSNNo 4 3 12 STATION BASE PROGRAM AH an ee ee Wes Station COS Day ETA 1 DayClass Of Service Day Class Of Service Of Service Wl eg COS Night a Night Weekend Class Of Service E CO Line Group Internal Page Zone Access Conference Page Zone Access 01 08 ipLDK CO line Group Toggle 20 01 08 ipLDK 20 01 24 ipLDK 01 24 ipLDK 100 300 300E 100 300 300E Fete A JEE CO line Group Toggle 25 48 ipLDK 300 300E M MO CO line Group Toggle 49 72 pLDK 300 300E Each station can be assigned to internal page zone Toggle Each station can be assigned to internal page zone Toggle Ea
187. EE 56 e LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2421 Staton Name esencia a O Ea EAE 57 2 4 22 Station Programming coooccccncccconncnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnns 59 2 4 23 Station Relocation ro lied eco laser 60 2 4 24 Station Dell Re UE 61 2 4 25 Time Date Setup Digital Network 61 ZO OS OVET dois 61 E AA N 2 E 62 2 4 28 Automatic Fax Transfer rico oa dae 63 2 4 29 Mobile EXTENSION asin cilednanvedwenraecedsetuamsannandeticatecdeasisubacdededacscedvens 64 2 4 30 Remote control with Mobile Extension 66 2431 Extend OC 16 C O CONNECTION KEE 66 2 4 32 Forced Hands free OC aa croacia sean rasca 67 ZA TOU DOSK senievcicinonicraien dnwuaiicemueindvedowencieambintioniinudied anni ins 67 2 4 34 Analogue CLI Display oooocccccccooccnonccoconononnnnonnoncnnnnncnnnnnnnononannnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonannnnnnononananss 68 PA S TN E A eee 69 24 30 STOOP e e CORIO NEE 70 AE o EE 70 2 AO EMErJENCY INTUS O EE 11 2 4 39 Forced Trunk Uisconnect r nr nr ena rnnrnnnn 12 LAAG PROG Metales 12 2 441 Station Gall COVES caicconenoncosos iria il ici iva ln albanil esoo TEASEE NESSE 73 2442 Galon Porn BIOCKINO DE 74 2 4 43 DND Operation of Pre selected MSG Station oocccccoocccnnccooncnnccooconncconcnnnonancnncnnanonnnonanos 75 2 4 44 DID DISA Call Routing of DND Station coooccccccconcncccconcnnconoccnncon
188. ENTERAUTHO CODE C BIWALKNGCOS ENTERAUTHO CODE SS 14 COS CHANGE D O O Tank DAT REGISTER 3 JAUTH MOBILE EXT auth CHANGE ooo S S IB REG MOBILEEXT O OOO SS A ACTIVE MOBILE EXT Il TS REG MOBILE EXT CL Te ACTIVE MOBILE HUNT A SETWAKE UPTIME ONCEJPERMANENT 2 WAKE UP DISABLE Il 4 TIME CONF ROOM 8 ACTIVE CONE ROOM Il TA DEACTIVE CONFE ROOM Il E TEO SO 2 DELAY RING CYCLE DEET PRESELECTED MSG 00 10 BIMESSAGE SET CUSTOMS None R RECORD USER GREETING Il 2 USTEN TIME DATE Il IBJLISTEN STA NUMBER Il 6 ANNOUNCE TA LISTEN STA STATUS Il TS RECORD PAGE MSG TS ERASE USER GREETING Il 7 ERASE PAGE MSG MBU VERSION DISPLAY Beem OoOo n REGISTER STANAME O O 2 FLEXISLT _ C5 SPK HEADSET SPEAKER HEADSET 7 SUPPLEMENTARY MI6JHEADSET RING MODE SPEAKER HEADSETIBOTH 7 WTU STA NUM REYR 18 SERIAL NUMBER 9 PO PHONE LOCKKEY II P USB AWYS CALL REG TT S IO ATTENDANT Il 1 AT ONLY RENIER ADMIN o ADMIN OM DIR LOCATION OUT Il 2 RELOCATIONIN II SYSTEM 3 REGISTER BLUETOOTH Ti 4 BLUETOOTH USAGE TI 0 HOTDESK LOGIN _ _ Ti _ HOTDESKLOGOUT OOOO 59 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To enter programming mode 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The Main Menu should display 3 Use the Up and Down arrow keys to view other choices
189. ER mode TRUNK mode finds user agent IP address by proxy sever configuration REGISTER mode receives incoming call using REGISTER method 2 21 3 The rule of SIP Incoming Call is same as 2 1 How To Get Incoming Call Operation Example m Trunk mode Make Station 1000 1009 receive incoming call from SIP server sip trunk com 1 Set Station number as 1000 1009 at ADMIN 105 Set CO Service type as DID at ADMIN 140 Set COLP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set CLIP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set Call Type as SUBSCRIBER at ADMIN 143 Set DID CONV Type as 1 at ADMIN 143 Set ISDN Enblock Send as ON at ADMIN 143 Set Networking CO Line Type as SIP at ADMIN 322 9 Set VOIB Mode as SIP at ADMIN 340 10 Set Proxy Server Address as sip trunk com at SIP Attribute 1 11 Set Domain as sip trunk com at SIP Attribute 1 gt When there s an incoming call the Station 1000 1009 can receive call by SIP URI number COND Om BW bh m REGISTER mode Make Station 1000 receive incoming call from SIP server sip reg com 1 Set Station number as 1000 at ADMIN 105 Set SIP User ID Table Index as 1 at SIP Attribute 2 Set CO Service type as DID at ADMIN 140 Set COLP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set CLIP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set Call Type as SUBSCRIBER at ADMIN 143 Set DID CONV Type as 1 at ADMIN 143 Set ISDN Enblock Send as ON at ADMIN 143 9 Set Networking CO Line Type as SIP at ADMIN 322 10 Set VOIB M
190. EX 4 or FLEX 14 Max 5 SMDR long distance codes are available SMDR long distance code is 1 or 2 digit number Default SMDR long distance code is 0 MSN Print On SMDR ON OFF If this value is set to ON the SMDR output eye AA Number ft If this value is set to ON the GEES caller number is printed at incoming call SMDR HN vnia SMDR Save ON OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is stored in Off line SMDR ICM SMDR Save ON OFF If this value is set to ON ICM call data is printed in On line SMDR 19 SMDR Interface Service ON OFF If this value is set to ON SMDR data is saved and sent when there s SMDR data request from application software When using SMDR interface service normal Off line SMDR cannot be saved or printed 20 I SMDR Connection LAN SIO This program determines Service Type port to be used for printer when SMDR interface service Is set TH 4 ee in sequence ex In ae 11 30 enter 1130 System Date Setting 6 his Month Day Year in sequence ex for 27 January 2004 enter 270104 178 133 e TAL DK 20 100 300E version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _ PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 179 1 Review Linked Station Pairs 1000 1599 The linked station pair is ED KGa gegen 100 399 ipLDK linked station pairs can be 300 accessed at flexible button 1 100 227 ipLDK sub menu Registration and delete of the 109 linked station pairs can be s
191. EX1 Station Range VALUES SMS from the CO line or not VALUE HOLD SAVE View SMS Receive Shows the Stations that receive eS Station SMS from the CO line SMS Outgoing CO If this feature is set to ON SMS Ee VALUE oo can be sent through selected HOLD SAVE 0 OFF CO line 1 ON Non CID SMS If this feature is setto ON SMS FLEX4 VALUE Korea Only can be received when it is HOLD SAVE serviced through non CID PSTN line 94 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 15 Other Tables 3 15 1 NATION SPECIFIC PGM 400 423 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 pemn fone DTIB SLT 00 63 30 3 DTIB CTR SL 00 63 Not in ipLDK 20 ES DTIB WTU 00 63 Not in ipLDK 20 DTIB ACO 00 63 20 A O O DTIB DCO DTIB VMIB DTIB DTMF DTIB TONE DTIB MUSIC1 DTIB MUSIC2 DTIB MUSIC3 oe po o wex ows e S S S S 2 SUBS C O A AE E A e 4 SLIB WTU 00 63 Not in pLDK 20 ipLDK 100 Default 27 e ES ioLDK 100 Default 16 6 SLIB CTRCO 00 68 20 MotinoDk n RER EEGEN s eem Ss o pmm wos e w moe 0680 II foo 1 SEET pos e is pews os o IN ETE O OOo TS SOS Oman Dm P a omawm mem CO 5 oseaaen men 7 mam Dm mn S oseauue mem S forsomme DR Ja oo fo OTRSLOTONE 63S DN SET e o O ON 12 oTasL2music2 DR o o is forrsiamusics oze Jo O OO OOO O o OSOS 95 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda
192. Each group can be programmed to allow or FLEX2 VALUE VALUES Access deny calls to other groups HOLD SAVE pLDK 20 100 FLEX1 FLEXS5 toggle for ICM TENANCY GROUP 1 5 ipLDK 300 300E FLEX1 FLEX15 ICM Tenancy Group Flex Buttons FLEX ITEM RANGE DEMARK _Z __ __ _ O_o i Attendant STA No Attendant station of assigned ICM tenancy group Access Group FLEX 1 5 20 100 ICM tenancy groups allow access to assigned groups FLEX 01 15 LKD 300 300E 3 1 11 ICM PRESET CALL FORWARD PGM 121 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 121 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS ICM Preset Call Forward If the station does not answer the incoming Forward to Station VALUES CO call within the Preset Call Forward timer 1 Station Station Default None then the call is forwarded to a preset Number 1 Station destination No station is assigned as default HOLD SAVE 2 Hunt Group Forward to Hunt Group 2 Hunt Group Hunt Group Number HOLD SAVE 15 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 12 IDLE LINE SELECTION PGM 122 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 122 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as liste
193. Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To use Last Number Redial at a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the REDIAL button OR 3 Press the SPEED button and dial 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept To use one of the recently dialed numbers in the Last Number Directory by scrolling ata DKTU with an LCD panel perform the following Steps 1 When the last dialed number is displayed press the UP or DOWN button to find the desired phone number up to 10 last dialed numbers can be stored in the directory 2 To make a call press the HOLD SAVE button when the phone number is displayed To use Last Number Redial at an SLT perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 5 5 2 refer to Ref A OR 3 Press the REDIAL button Condition When the used CO Line is busy an idle CO Line in the group is accessed and the last dialed number is dialed The last dialed number directory allows duplicated phone numbers If you use Last Number Redial while the Auto redial is activated the auto redial is canceled Reference A Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual SLT Last Speed Dial Code PGM 106 FLEX 12 2 2 8 3 Save Number Redialing Description Any dialed number can be saved temporarily and used at any time This number is saved until a new number is stored Operation To save a number
194. GES _ REMARK SMDR Recording Call Type LD ALL Call If this value is set to LD only long distance outgoing CO call is sent via SMDR If this value is set to ALL all outgoing CO call is sent via SMDR The long distance call is defined that the call satisfies the condition of PGM177 FLEX 4 or FLEX 14 4 SMDR Long Distance Call 07 15 The long distance call is Digit Counter defined that the call satisfies the condition of PGM177 FLEX 4 or FLEX 14 If digit counters of the outgoing CO call are more than this value it is considered as long distance call W Print Incoming Call a E If value is set to ON all incoming calls are printed Print Lost Call ON OFF If value is set to ON lost calls are printed The lost call is defined that the call is unanswered 7 Records in Detail ON OFF Due to limited system memory size in places where many calls take place the SMDR record buffer can easily saturated So if the customer doesn t need the detailed call information but total call total metering count and total cost for individual station then it is possible to save only the total accumulation rather than the whole detailed records If this value is set to ON not only total call total metering count and total cost for individual station but also the detail call records are saved maximum 5000 If this value is set to OFF only total call total metering count and total cost for individual station informa
195. GM 186 COMMENTS R2 ANNOUNCE PROMT If R2 outgoing call is made and the FLEX16 Value USAGE ANNOUNCE signal is received if the HOLD SAVE destination number is invalid or etc the caller will hear the error announce to call again If there s no available VMIB the system error tone is heard DCO Gain FLEX20 Value VALUES HOLD SAVE 1 63 3 6 2 DCOB ATTRIBUTE II PGM 187 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 187 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 187 COMMENTS IN Digit Type Select the incoming digit information FLEX1 CO Line Range signaling type of DCO Type dot Range 0 2 HOLD SAVE OUT Digit Type Select the outgoing digit FLEX2 CO Line Range information signaling type of Type 1digit Range 0 2 DCO HOLD SAVE CLI Digit Number Set the digit numbers received FLEX3 CO Line Range for CLI Value 2digits Range 01 15digits HOLD SAVE DCOB TYPE Select DCO CO line service FLEX4 Value 1digit type According to the country Range 0 4 HOLD SAVE 0 Sweden Cyprus DCO CO service type is 1 Italy different 2 Korea Australia 3 Brazil 4 India SEND S BLOCK If this value is set to ON the FLEX5 Value 1digit VALUE COMMAND DCO line send S Block Range 0 1 HOLD SAVE 0 OFF command to PX 1 ON 92 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programm
196. HOLD button Condition Only ETSI protocol is implemented FLASH HOLD and CONF or SUPP HOLD SUPP CONF keys are needed for this feature SUPP CONF key can be made by pressing the Code TRANS PGM 7 HOLD Related Standards MEN 300 196 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Generic functional protocol for the support of supplementary services MEN 300 188 1 3 PTY Supplementary service 144 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Call Barring ATD only ipLDK 20 Only CFU Italy national protocol Description This feature enables the adjustment of the COS Class of Service of ISDN CO lines in ipLDK 20 The COS can be changed from C5 all outgoing calls are possible to C2 outgoing calls only for specific numbers and vice versa ITEM FEATURE CODE REMARK Call Barring Code FLASH 20 National only NOTE Flexible button programming is available Operation To decrease COS from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for Call Barring OR 3 Press FLASH key 2 0 4 Call service will be accepted and or rejected by PX and display during off hook state Or service rejected and or rejected by PX and display during off hook state 5 The Call barring key and CO Key will be illuminated and the LED will flash 50 IPM To increase COS from the
197. IB announcement can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 4 F scher oy 1 Location Assigned when the VMIB Announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 00 70 00 Not Used to play the VMIB announcement 2 Location Assigned when the VMIB Announce 2 timer expires This second VMIB announcement can be played repeatedly according to PGM191 FLEX 5 and 6 value 5 VMIB Announce 000 999 000 sec Used to repeat the VMIB Announce 2 2 Repeat timer when the timer expires 000 Not assigned CO ill cr 2 Repeat E D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 7 Overflow The call to a station in the group will Destination continue to route until answered or each station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin after overflow timer expiring The overflow timer can be set at PGM191 FLEX 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 sec If this timer expires after a call is received in the group the call is routed to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be set at ADMIN program 191 FLEX 7 Wrap up Timer 002 999 002 sec A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value after the end of received call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap up time 140 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 Po ITEM D SUB ITEM_ RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
198. LD SAVE Auto FAX transfer CO If Auto FAX CO line is programmed the system answers and detects the FAX calling tone 1100Hz 0 5sec ON 3sec OFF repeat tone from an incoming analog CO line The system will route this call to the last SLT port on basic MBU extension 17 extension 15 in compact type KSU when tone is detected within programmed time If this value is set to ENABLE the LED indication of the CO or DSS button is blocked ex LED does not flash even if there is an incoming call to the assigned CO Line or Station This feature does not apply for direct te such as DID DISA NO DSS Indication UK Billing Mode If this value is set to ON the UK Billing Mode UK Only is applied COS 7 When Authorization Fail If this value is set to ON the Station COS will temporarily be changed to 7 when an invalid authorization code is entered at the Station COS can be recovered by activating COS RESTORE If not assigned the day night COS in PGM 116 will be changed to 7 when an invalid authorization code is entered at the Station To recover COS day amp night COS should be reassigned If this value is set to ON Authorization code is programmed as 5 digits fixed length Under this mode 5 digits of the authorization code should be entered when related features are activated If this value is set to OFF Variable Authorization code 3 11 digits is used If this value is set to ON pLDK system first checks if the CO
199. LE the station user can use group listening While you are talking on handset by pressing the MON button other people around you may hear the conversation through the speaker Although the voice of other people is not sent by Mic user can override CO Call Digits number of CO Call is not showed on SMDR record Pye TT EN DIS DISABLE If this value is set to ENABLE the station user can talk alternately a call to the other call PC a Line HOT WARM WARM If this value is setto HOT the station user can use Hot Line Refer to PGM122 Otherwise in Warm Line state Warm Line Timer starts when the user lifts handset or presses the MON button wt If this value is set to ON the station user A Et Retrieve must enter password to retrieve VMIB Md M essage W If this value is set to ON Date and time o iia or alarm signal e E Bee get mute ring a ei Minutes based o em A S O O 2 O E mode H AutoFonwardio MR ONOFF ON e Port Block ee If this value is set to LE station is blocked Disable so it s impossible to use that station S MSG DND If this value is set to ON then when Pre selected Message feature is set at this SES station CO and ICM ring is treated just like DND feature 4 3 10 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE PGM_ FLEX EN RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 114 CLIP LCD Display ON OFF 7 If this value is set to ON the CLI is displayed on the station LCD If this value is set to ON the
200. LEX11 or FLEX12 or FLEX13 for entering reroute destination 1 Choose FLEX1 FLEX3 Range FLEX1 FLEX3 2 Enter the appropriate Destination value BN ZZ ___Description________ Destination Type COMMENTS Busy Destination If CCR destination is busy then call can be F1 Tone Tone is just disconnected routed to Busy Destination F2 ATD ATD is Ring assigned F3 Hunt Group destination Hunt group is each Hunt Error Time Out If CCR destination is error or user did not F1 Tone Destination enter any digit in proper time then call can F2 ATD be routed to Error Time Out Destination F3 Hunt Group No Answer Destination If CCR destination is No answer then call F1 Tone can be routed to No Answer Destination F2 ATD F3 Hunt Group NZ JL Description Procedure COMMENTS Station If the CCR destination type is the 01 Station Number Station the call will ring at the HOLD SAVE designated Station Hunt Group If CCR destination type is the Hunt 02 Hunt Group number Group the call will ring at the HOLD SAVE designated member Station in the group VMIB If CCR destination type is the VMIB 03 VMIB Announcement the designated VMIB announcement Number HOLD SAVE will be played to the caller VMIB Drop If CCR destination type is the VMIB 04 VMIB Announcement Drop the designated VMIB Number HOLD SAVE announcement will be played to the caller and the call will be disconnected after the VMIB
201. LI when the outgoing CLI is generated If the entry of CLIP COLP TABLE PGM 201 is set and if the CLIP TABLE INDEX PGM 143 FLEX 2 is set to the front entry number then it can be used as the middle part of CLI when the outgoing CLI is generated Ifthe CLI RESTRICTION PGM 114 FLEX 14 is set to ON CLI transmission is restricted Condition Though the System power is OFF the stored CLI messages is not erased Admin Programming CLIP COLP Table PGM 201 MCLIP Table Index PGM 143 FLEX 2 EH Call Type PGM 143 FLEX 3 BISDN CLI of STATION PGM 114 FLEX 12 MISDN CLIR PGM 114 FLEX 14 E My Area Code PGM 200 FLEX 9 m My Area Prefix Code PGM 200 FLEX 10 136 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 2 3 CLI Message Wait Description When a call exists through ISDN DID line calling line identification CLI of the incoming call will be displayed on the LCD of the station And if the DID external party hangs up before an Attendant or called station answer the CLI provided by the digital network will be stored in the CO message wait queue of the original called station Operation CLI message wait feature summary CALLBK None RetrieveClimessage oo VOLUPIDOWN SeenextCllmessage A HOLD MakearecallaccordingtoCLlmessage ooo CALLBK CST Toggle CLI message and SPEED Name SPEED B
202. LT Ring Phase Timer SLT Select the ring phase Only cadence of SLT 5 sec 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF 2 Station Auto Release Timer 020 300 3 digits 060 sec If a station hears ring back tone and no action is taken this timer is assigned When this timer is expired the station is released 137 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _ PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Unsupervised Conference 00 99 2 digits 10 min Select the amount of the time that an unsupervised conference can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited the conference Timer 7 Wake Up Fail Ring Timer 00 99 2 digits 20 sec After a Wake up fail ring invokes on system attendant the alarm ring exists during this timer If this timer expires the alarm ring will be disappeared 8 Warm Line Timer 01 20 2 digits 05 sec User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing the MON button and this timer is expired then idle line selection for warm line is executed Wink Weg 010 200 3 digits 010 10ms The time duration of seize acknowledge signal to DID line Enblock WE Timer 01 20 2 digits sec This timer is used at the enblock dialing sending feature If station user make a call at the enblock dialing mode and if station user doesn t dial within this time then the enblock dialing is executed IT pe Time Out Timer 000 30
203. LUE 100 incoming ringing signals so that active ringing msec 3 digits Range 001 can be retained in the System until the timer 150 HOLD SAVE expires CO Ring On Timer Controls the time necessary to detect an FLEX21 VALUE 100 incoming CO call ringing into the System msec 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE CO Warning Tone Timer Determines the amount of time before FLEX22 Seconds 3 Korea Only receiving a warning tone as a reminder of the digits Range 060 900 elapsed call time on an outgoing CO line HOLD SAVE conversation 3 5 2 SYSTEM TIMERS II PGM 181 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 181 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table _PGM181_ Descriptin_______ Procedure COMMENTS Call Forward No Answer If value is set for no answer call forward FLEX1 Seconds 3 digits Timer when the Station does not answer then the Range 000 255 call will be routed to the assigned forward HOLD SAVE destination following expiration of the timer DID DISA No Answer Used for DID or DISA call routing If the FLEX2 Seconds 2 digits Timer station doesn t answer a DID DISA call Range 00 99 during within the time allowed the call willbe HOLD SAVE routed to the assigned ADMIN program 167 FLEX 3 value VMIB User Record Timer Designates the maximum time a Station user FLEX3 Seconds 3 digits can reco
204. LUE2 Time Zone 3 HOLD SAVE 62 FLEX4 Thursday FLEX5 Friday FLEX6 Saturday FLEX7 Sunday Value2 Zone 1 3 1 Digit VALUES FLEX1 Time Zonet FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 Value2 Time HH HH 4 Digits VALUES FLEX1 Time Zonet FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 Value2 Time HH HH 4 Digits VALUES FLEX1 Time Zonet FLEX2 Time Zone2 FLEX3 Time Zone3 Value2 Time HH HH 4 Digits SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 3 8 2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE PGM 221 The Leading Digit Table LDT is used to check if digits dialed by the User are LCR Coded ADMIN PGM221 FLEX 2 the digits will be converted and a CO line will be secured according to DMT ADMIN PGM 222 In the ipLDK System up to 250 LDT entries can be programmed Each LDT entry has six sub attributes LCR type LCR code DMT index for day zone 1 2 3 and Check password FLEX em Default Remark Value FLEX 1 LCR Type BOTH BOTH Look up this entry for both INT and COL INT Look up this entry for internal dialing COL Look up this entry after dialing 3 way toggle FLEX 2 LCR Code Up to 12 digits To be compared with the dialed digits by a user FLEX 3 DMT index for Day Zone 1 None FLEX 4 DMT index for DAY Zone 2 6 digits FLEX 5 DMT index for Day Zone 3 In this program mo
205. Line EE 8 ass Universal Answer UNA EE 8 22 Vhs Le lee e UE 10 A MMM 10 222 Cal Time RESTICUON A 11 22 COILING A A Eege 12 224 CO Step Gall Analog ONIY E 12 2 2 5 Emergency Call Service aser 13 2 2 0 OL LING S Wam BE TE 13 2 2 Least Call Routing CH 14 22 0 Memory Dialing E 17 nn A 23 2 2 10 Dialing Service by Prefix code for Ukrame 23 223 TS OU ONIN io ias 24 201 Gal PON ropita 24 PAS MM WANN STO o ri 32 2ko Roding and Paracas dotes dic 34 AS Po ye e Eo A 37 o ne DE 39 2G ANN PAGANI e APP A scant neeteuas cesneness Gaeeaeseenetesieeigeaes 40 BAN Absent Text WSS Le x25 siecs sey ores nsbane cane oxic qccegaeemsbe via mide gute gone nade odoueacaobsandstansaesosuyntetescatecetosesens 40 E PNA a aca 42 ZO FARO Malo Te oe opaco 42 244 BGM Background MUSIC BE 43 PRES un e Te E O M0 OE E E E 44 O eee ee eee eee nee eee 45 2 Ar Dala LNE CC WY EE 45 O EIERE 46 249 DINE DO No DIS ua 47 2 4 10 One Time DND Do Not Disturb 47 o AP APP A 48 y VA A AS 48 PASS m 2 A nn ayoreunceuentecanesdeneaes 50 2 4 14 Intercom Signal Mode ccccccccoccnccncccccnoncnnccononcnnnnnonnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannns 51 2 4 19 Intercom Tenancy GIO WD EE 52 2 4 16 Message Wait Call Back 53 2 4 17 MOH Music On Hold A OOOO E A 54 2A TOMU i A E E E A I E 56 2 4 19 MWI Message Wait Indication SLT Feature ooncccccccccnnccccccccnnccnncononnncnncnnnonnnnnnononanenns 56 E 2 ln Die eet el ne
206. MEMO TEL Activation Normal OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 5 Normal Activation 4 Service will be accepted by PX and display as during off hook state or service will be rejected by PX and display as during off hook state 5 When the station returns to an on hook state the normal LCD will be displayed To change Memo Tel Timer 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for MEMO TEL Timer Code OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 6 Change Timer 4 Service will be accepted by PX and display as during the off hook state or service will be rejected by PX and display as during the off hook state 5 When the station goes on hook the normal LCD will be displayed To deactivate Memo Tel 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for MEMO TEL Deactivation OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 4 Normal Deactivation 4 Service will be accepted by PX and display as during the off hook state or service will be rejected by PX and display as during the off hook state To check the current state of Memo Tel service 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for MEMO TEL Interrogation Code OR 3 Press the FLASH key 2 8 147 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 4 Service will be accepted by PX and an announcement about the current memo tel activation type and applied timer will be heard or service will be rejected by
207. MIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH ioLDK 100 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 6 VMIB MOH 7 11 SLT MOH loLDK 300 300E 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 7 VMIB MOH 8 12 SLT MOH VALUES 0 OFF VALUES Group Name Assign Group Name can be assigned at FLEX18 VALUE this Admin field HOLD SAVE 55 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Sie UCU GIO ATIRIBUTE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB announcement will be played if the call continues to wait beyond the expiration of the 2 announcement timer VMIB Announce 1 Used to play the VMIB Location announcement when the VMIB announce 1 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Used to play the VMIB Location announcement when the VMIB Announce 2 timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Timer Used to repeat the VMIB Announce 2 when the timer expires VMIB Announce 2 Used to enable or disable the Repeat Enable Disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to the overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin after the overflow timer expires Overflow Timer If timer expires after a call is received in the group the call will be routed to the overflow destination Wrap up
208. OCATION PROGRA cositas 107 432 Ee EE E KEE 107 4 3 3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT tesselen eege Eege 108 UCA ARSOAA o P a Aiari 108 4 3 5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE crac dee dE 108 4 3 6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN oo cecccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeessesaeaseeeeeeesesasaaseeeeees 109 ES ae RE E ere ere A AP 112 4 3 8 STATION RE EC E NEE 112 4 3 9 STATION ATTRIBUTE Pi Wap tien 112 43 10 WON STAHON ATIRIBU TE estonio ibid 115 4 3 11 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT oooccccccnnncnnccononoconococccccnnnncononononcononnnononnnnnnonnnnononononacenons 117 4 3 12 STATION BASE PROGRAM q lt s lt sccccscceeeeeseeenesdeccssessesiencecteseeesesteceieccossrseneeceseccceesseeeees 117 43 13 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM E 119 dos ASEO Eege 123 43 15 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM uti A EE EEE EEE REE EE 124 Ao odo TEN TIMER ie I Alison posean EE 134 A A AS 139 43 18 DCOB ATTRIBUTE Sege 139 e DNK WR TREIE LEE E 140 4 3 20 STATION GROUP PROGRAM casette doren siete 140 Eh DE Eege 145 4 3 22 LCR TABLE EI EC 147 4 3 23 TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT ocooococcccnnnccccccooncccnnnnnonnnoncncnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnns 149 MOZA A E E E E eee 150 4325 POTN SMO ATTRIBUTE eerror ina aap a EE conocia ES ar S EEE TEESE 153 43 26 NETWORKING ATTRIBUTE sotana E A i aaia 154 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4327 OM INET Eege 156 e O An 157 A nn e O o UR supboxiuammmecamboet radu 158 4 3 30 NATION SPECIFIC
209. OM data and start to fill ip LDK ROM area with the received ROM file SS IN Condition When the line is released while upgrading process retry the ipLDK PC Upgrade program again While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ipLDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again f the ROM files you want to send are invalid pLDK MPB software upgrade will not be started n ipLDK 100 300 300E DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature Admin Programming E Modem Assignment ASC Device PGM 170 192 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sucio Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 20 SIP Description There are many applications of the Internet that require the creation and management of a session where a session is considered an exchange of data between associations of participants The implementation of these applications is complicated by the practices of participants users may move between endpoints they may be addressable by multiple names and they may communicate in several different media sometimes simultaneously Numerous protocols have been authored that carry various forms of real time multimedia session data such as voice video or text messages The Session Initiation Protocol SIP works in concert with these protocols by enabling Internet endpoints called user agents t
210. ON ON Demand print format is not used only Periodic format can be printed le Ze A e A ene D se fc BD ce H 0c H 2 1 Total call counter ss 3 Unanswered call counter SSS OOO 4 L Albusycounter gt o Carriage Return 0x0D To go to the Main Menu 1 Press HOLD SAVE button then go first step as below 1 ACD STATUS 2 ACD DATABASE 3 ACD DUTY ACD PRINT To re route queued calls with answer Assign a flexible button as ACD Group button During the flashing the DSS LED of the ACD Group button press the ACD Group button The first queued incoming CO call is answered by supervisor If the Supervisor lifts handset the preferred line will be answered The following operation follows the normal operation for the DSS button feature assigned to station group E eS 91 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To re route queued calls without answering 1 Assign a flexible button as ACD Group button the DSS LED of the ACD Group button will flash when there are queued calls 2 A supervisor presses No answer reroute code 564 and destination station number or DSS in order to reroute first queued call To monitor an Agent s conversation at ACD supervisor 1 Call the busy agent and receive the busy tone 2 Press the ACD flexible button 3 The Supervisor can monitor the agent but will not send audio to the age
211. Operation Example Set Station number as 1000 at ADMIN 105 Set SIP User ID Table Index as 1 at SIP Attribute 2 Set CO Service type as DID at ADMIN 140 Set COLP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set CLIP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set Call Type as SUBSCRIBER at ADMIN 143 Set DID CONV Type as 1 at ADMIN 143 Set ISDN Enblock Send as ON at ADMIN 143 Set Networking CO Line Type as SIP at ADMIN 322 10 Set VOIB Mode as SIP at ADMIN 340 11 Set Proxy Server Address as sip reg com at SIP Attribute 1 12 Set Domain as sip trunk com at SIP Attribute 1 13 Set Asserted ID or Remote Party ID Usage as ON at SIP Attribute 1 gt When there s an outgoing call the INVITE message include P Asserted Identify or Remote Party ID header field O OO YO OA Gobh A Condition 1 P Asserted Identity and Remote Party ID can t used at the same time 2 P Asserted Identity enable Id Privacy Type at SIP Attribute 2 User Privacy 3 Remote Party ld enable Privacy at SIP Attribute 2 User Privacy If this value is set the INVITE message include Privacy full If this value is off the INVITE message include Privacy off 4 This Private Extension makes URI by the Station not by User ID at SIP Attribute 2 Admin Programming m CO Service Type 4 2 1 PGM 140 COLP Table Index 4 2 4 1 PGM 143 FLEX 1 CLIP Table Index 4 2 4 2 PGM 143 FLEX 2 Call Type 4 2 4 3 PGM 143 FLEX 3 DID CONV Type 4 2
212. RSG SLT TX GAIN RSG LCO RX GAIN RSG LCO TX GAIN IP Phone RX GAIN IP Phone TX GAIN SMS Attribute SMS Setting SMS CO Attribute DTIB Rx Gain Control SLIB Rx Gain Control ACOB Rx Gain Control DCOB Rx Gain Control 105 a oo lA gt lor S SMS ATTRIBUTE 290 291 292 NATION SPECIFIC 187 190 zz 223 aa H A A oo 290 291 292 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM Ir DEN O 415 420 Differential Ring Frequency Distinct CO Ring Frequency 423 424 Singular Table Korea Only INITIALIZATION DB INIT 450 452 gt A gt N N N al NO PRINT DATABASE 451 Print Port Database 106 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 Default Values 4 3 1 LOCATION PROGRAM PGM FLEX ITEM DEFAULT REMARK 100 Nation Code Max 4 digits Customer Site Name PT Max 24 digits 4 3 2 RACK SLOT ASSIGNMENT pom FLEX em RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 101 Slot Assignment Refer to Note 2 Refer to Note 1 In case of PRIB assignment it is possible to program logical port number NOTE1 f the DIP switch of the manual board detection Pole 8 of DIP Switch pLDK 100 300 300E Pole 4 of DIP Switch ipLDK 20 is ON system will detect the installed board type automatically If the Pole 8 4 in pLDK 20 of DIP switch is OFF the board type code must be entered at each slot After manually settin
213. RSGLCORXfromMUSIC2_ 00 63______ 3 RSGLCORXfromRSG_DKT_ mua 14 RSG_LCORXfromRSG_SLT 00 63 J gt 15 RSGLCORXfromRSG_1CO oa d6 Dao LCORXfromIP Phone 00 63 J gt 395 RSG LCOTXGain A RSG_LCO TX to DKTU 00 63 160 e IOLDk 20 100 300E Version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _PGM FLEX ITEM _ RANGE DEFAULT _ REMARK 2 _ RSG_LCOTXtoSLT 00 63 3 RSG LCOTXtoCTR_SLT 00 63 gt 4 RSGLCOTXtoWKT_______00 68____ 5 RSGLCOTXtoACO 00 63 J i y O 6 RSG_LCo Txt CTR ACO oe RSG _LCO TX to DCO 00 63 RSG_LCO TX to VMIB EE 63 P Phone AX Gain Prone fom Toa O i tom St __ 00_ 3 Ce E a RESERVED E E AS oes 6 RESERVED 7 oeoo ae 8 _____ IP Phone RX from VMIB 00 638 9 IP Phone RXfromDTMF 00 638 TI 10 IP Phone RXfromTONE 00 68 11 gt IP Phone RXfromMUSIC1 00 68 12 IPPhoneRXfromMUSIC2 oe S 13 RESERVED JJ 4 D a a aee a ee a a 15 RESERVED Fi IP Phone PX fom o UP Phone TX Gain LL 1 IPPhoneTXtoDKTU_ moi 2 IPPhomeTXtoSIT oe TI 3 RESERVED LL 4 RESERVED il o A S AA 6 RESERVED 7 Phone DUO BOO e 8 IPPhonmeTXtoVMIB________00 63_____ S 4 3 30 NATION SPECIFIC Pom FLEX TEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK gt 400 Po DTIBRXGan___ KoreanVersin O Z o Z o O 00 63 s po 2 peer oe a s preo we e GEES e mus os EE e mm bos bB O 00 63 ERR E nm mue me EE 2 premus os 29 13 DTIB MUSIC3 00
214. Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE VALUES 1 INT look up this entry only for internal dialing 2 COL look up this entry only after dialing CO Access Code 3 BOTH look up this entry for both INT and COL Because day zone 1 has 3 different available time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected Because day zone 2 has 3 different available time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected Because day zone 3 has 3 different available time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 8 3 DIGIT MODIFCATION TABLE PGM 222 Digit Modification Table DMT is used to convert dialed digits and seize an outgoing CO line In the pLDK System up to 100 DMT entries can be programmed Each DMT entry has six sub attributes Added digit stream Removal position Remove Number Add position CO Line Group and Alternative DMT index In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 1 Dial 222 1 Enter the appropriate index DMT Table Range 00 99 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGm22 IL Description___________ Procedure LC COMMENTS Added Digit Stream This value is used to add digit stream for FLEX1 VALUE up to VALUES user dialed digi
215. Reference A Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 12 Admin Programming ECO Line Name Display PGM 142 FLEX 1 ECO Line Name Assignment PGM 142 FLEX 2 2 1 7 Universal Answer UNA Description If the CO Line is programmed for UNA any user can pick up incoming CO Calls by dialing the Universal Answer code 569 refer to Ref A regardless of the pick up group If there are incoming CO Calls Station B can pick up the call even though Station A and B do not belong to a pick up group Operation To pick up a call perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 The intercom dial tone should be heard 3 Dial 5 6 9 for the Universal Answer code 4 The call is connected o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition f there isn t an incoming CO Call Universal Answer Code is dialed from a station an error tone will be heard If External Night Ringing is set to On the call is routed to External Page refer to Ref B by LBC1 refer to Ref C Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Universal Answer Code PGM 107 FLEX 4 B External Page 2 8 1 C Loud Bell 2 10 3 Admin Programming E Universal Answer PGM 141 FLEX 8 E External Night Ring PGM 160 FLEX 7 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 Outgoing Call
216. Ring mode 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial code 7 6 3 The Station Answer mode should be displayed on the LCD 4 Dial the applicable code 1 Speaker ring only 2 Headset only 3 Both Condition The intercom signaling mode HF TN PV TRANS PGM 1 2 can be set in Headset and Speaker phone mode In Headset mode the User can select an incoming ring mode to hear ringing with the speaker headset or both by Admin programming The station will receive paging with the Station speaker To answer an intercom call in Tone mode the User should press the MON button When an intercom call is received in Privacy mode the station will be muted automatically User should press the MUTE button to answer the intercom call Admin Programming E Headset Ring Mode PGM 111 FLEX 10 E Speakerphone Headset PGM 111 FLEX 11 50 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 14 Intercom Signal Mode Description Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals Stations equipped with a speakerphone can select one of the available 3 signaling modes HF Hands Free The station user upon hearing a tone burst and voice announcement over the speaker can reply hands free TN Tone A standard tone ring notifies the party of an incoming intercom call The called party answers by lifting the handset or
217. S BE CA 8_ VMIBMUSICt 00 63 32 A TN CI 2 408 DTMFRCOGain LI ones a o aoo 2 mmer DTMF ACO zs 63 s bmo we a 409 EX PAGE Gan ECT E E e ECON E E EXT PAGE ACO 00 63 e E AAA AAA 8_ EXTPAGENMIB___ 00 63 97 9 EXTPAGEMUSIC1 00 63 37 AE AAA 410 L IT Gan EE S O A O E EA 411 y MODEMGan_____ A A A AA 412 L fortSUBoan O SAF Only 413 omg Spoan o y O SAF Only 163 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM FLEX DEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 414 A AAA a shotaco Joe Jm SAFOny EE A E ShortACOGan CO E ICE E Long SLIB GC ara es LongACOGain Il O E O O 2 LongsuIB os s Th 3 Fase o s Ip SMSB RX Gain Reg 00 63 2 FromCTRACO Joe 3 Fomore SMSB TX Gain 00 63 32 e 00 63 S 00 63 420 IN CEC l ro E 4 28 eats EE 421 preening eee 422 Distinct Ring Frequency fe O O 423 ACNR Tone Cadence Ill O OFF 100 OFF 025 Opee e eer OFF 012 aS a ee OFF 000 424 DTIBRxACO Gain SAF only Short ACO 00 63 2 Long AO 00 63 164 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 31 INITIALIZATION _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT A ___ m A AAA Flexible Numbering Plan POS POMO PERT PGM106 PGM107 Initialization Station Database PGM110 PGM111 PGM1 12 Initialization PGM113 PGM114 PGM 116 PGM117 PGM118 PGM119
218. SAVE Skip gateway address of the SMS board digits HOLD SAVE Skip subnet mask of the SMS board digits HOLD SAVE Default 255 255 255 0 12 LAB Only SERVER Address This ADMIN program is used for setting the FLEX4 DNS Address Skip f IP address of TFTP BOOT Server digits HOLD SAVE Trace Password This ADMIN program is used for setting the FLEX5 VALUE 10 password of the SMS board Characters refer to Keyset Map HOLD SAVE Keyset Map 1 Blank K2 3 3 14 2 SMSB SETTING PGM 291 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 291 em CC Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table a Fee Center Number This number is dialed when we submit a FLEX1 VALUE 8 digits Short Message max HOLD SAVE SMS Center CLI This number should be matched with FLEX2 VALUE 8 digits the Caller ID of an incoming SMS call to max HOLD SAVE receive the Short Message 93 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 14 3 SMSB CO ATTRIBUTES PGM 292 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 292 3 Enter appropriate CO Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table ll PGm2i____Description_____ Procedure COMMENTS SMS Receive Station A Station can decide to receive FL
219. Slave Extension PGM 231 2 16 11 CO Transit Out Description The CO Transit Out increases efficiency of CO lines and reduces call costs by routing outgoing CO calls to the nearest appropriate point on the networked System The System should be provided sufficient digit translation and string analysis options to enable the switch to route the call correctly Figure 2 16 11 and the Call Flow Table describe the CO TRANSIT OUT operation on the networking connection environment At the first step the station 202 of the slave system dials the CO TRANSIT OUT code that is registered the network numbering plan table ADMIN program 324 The term of CO TARNSIT OUT code is that a station of slave system can seize the PSTN CO line of the master system At the second step the slave system seizes a CO line that is preprogrammed for transmitting the CO TRANSIT OUT code to the master system And the dialed code is transmitted to the master system At the third step the master system seizes a CO line that is preprogrammed to serve the lend request by the CO TRANSIT OUT code After seizing the PSTN CO line the master system sends the digit information to PSTN that is dialed from the station of the slave system At the fourth step the called user of PSTN receives the ring The caller and called users can make a conversation when the called user is answered 169 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual Septem
220. Station 100 dials 202 but hears BUSY tone Station 100 press CALL BK button and goes to IDLE Call back ring to station 100 when 202 is IDLE lt Station 100 lifts handset then station 202 is ringing Operation To activate CCBS perform the following Steps 1 Dial a Station on another networking System 2 Ifthe busy tone is provided press the CALLBK button a confirmation tone will be heard and the call will be disconnected 3 When busy Called Station returns Idle the Caller will receive a call back ring 4 When the Caller answers the call back ring a new call will be initiated to the Calling Station Condition CCBS is not supported on all LG NORTEL CO LTD ISDN terminals Stand alone IP Phones that support H 450 can activate the CCBS feature A new Call Back request left at a Station will cancel any previous callback messages A voice message cannot be left even though the VMIB is installed in a local system When the originator does not answer the call back ring within net timer the call will be cleared There are two CCBS modes Connection Mode and Disconnection Mode This can be selected at PGM 320 Admin Programming E Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 2 16 9 Do Not Disturb DND Description Net Calls to a Station can be rejected using the DND mode the Calling Station will hear a busy tone Operation To activate DND mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the DND button at the Station 2
221. T41 nr roads 20 3 2 3 ee RTE WR RES BRENNEN 21 3 2 4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 14321 23 3 2 5 CO RING ASSIGNMENT PGM 144 ccecccccececescscseseseeceeecececececverereececesevevevevevecavevererenenenen 25 3 2 6 CO LINE ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY PDOGMTIAbl 25 3 2 7 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES II PGM 146 ccccecccccsccscssecesececececerercecececececevevevevevevevevrerenenenen 26 3 3 Slot Base Program PGM 155 scccssssssssscccssnnsseeseeesnnnsseseeennnssseseeennnnsseeeeeensaeses 27 3 3 1 BOARD ATTRIBUTES PGM MD una acta 27 3 4 System Data POM 160 184 wrssiciscccsdascectasesscvessssaccesnsrecssiecsexsseveseassacesscsseucesesiewvensuavens 28 34 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES PGM 160 errata 28 3 4 2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I PDOGMIent 30 3 4 3 ADMIN PASSWORD PGM 162 ooccccccccnncccccccccccccnncoconocononcconancnonononononnnnnnnonononnnnonarennnncnanonns 31 3 4 4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES PGM 163 said 32 3 4 5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT PGM 1G4 ENEE 32 3 4 6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNOUNCEMENT PGM ebe 33 234 7 CO TOCO COS POM EE 33 3 4 8 DID DISA DESTINATION PGM IB 34 3 4 9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT PGM 168 occccccncccnccccccoccccnncccoocccnncnconoccnncccononnnnnnonononoss 36 3 4 10 LCD TIME DATE LANGUAGE DISPLAY MODE PGM ep 37 3 4 11 MODEM ASSIGNMENT PGM 170 37 3 4 12 MUSIC ASSIGNMENT PGM 171 38 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3413 PBXACCESS CODE POM T72 essenicconelo pio mitad E
222. TMF RLS Timer PGM 181 FLEX 13 WSMDR Local Code Table PGM 204 120 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 12 1 AOC Advice Of Charge Description The AOC service provides outgoing call charging to the user in public ISDN According to the ADMIN programming the saved and printed information is provided to the PC or user s LCD This function is applicable to the most European countries Operation During the conversation or after release a CO call the ISDN facility IE carry the AOC information User can see it with SMDR print after a call CHARGE NOT AVAILABLE al 08 02 01 02 01 23 05 00 FREE OF CHARGE al 0a 02 01 02 01 23 30 02 81 00 NORMAL CHARGING al 20 02 01 02 01 23 30 18 30 16 al 05 81 03 a2 07 81 05 Y Y Dee YY 82 01 01 82 01 01 The rule is changed in each call 00 It means charging current unit IA5 Y Y Y It means real current value displayed with You can see it with SMDR print after the call Condition ltis displayed on the LCD instead of call timer and changed based on the receipt of each call charging information The information of AOC includes the Unit or Currency Admin Programming E Advice Of Charge PGM 200 FLEX 1 E SMDR Attribute PGM 177 121 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2
223. Test Method 8 Click the Next button 9 Click on the Start button the ipLDK MPB software upgrade will begin 10 When the ROM file is finished downloading the ol Dk System will erase the previous ROM data and fill the ipLDK ROM area with the new ROM file Condition When the line is released while upgrading process just dial the phone number again If the line was properly disconnected it will be connected immediately While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ipLDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again If the ROM files you want to send are invalid ipLDK MPB software upgrade will not be started In ipLDK 100 300 300E DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual IP Setting for MPB PGM 108 188 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 19 3 SERIAL COM port Description The ipLDK MPB software can be upgraded through RS 232C interface by ipLDK upgrade program in the PC Operation To upgrade the SERIAL COM port perform the following Steps 1 Connect the RS 232C cable between ipLDK system and PC 2 Run ipLDK PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ipLDK system to be upgraded oystem selection Upgrade LDK Seres system E x Select the System C LDK
224. The REGISTER method is used by a user agent notify a SIP network of its current Contact URI IP address and the URI that should have requests routed to this CONTACT SIP registration bears some similarity to cell phone registration on initialization Registration is not required to enable a user agent to use a proxy server for outgoing calls It is necessary however for a user agent to register to receive incoming calls from proxies that serve that domain unless some non SIP mechanism is used by the location service to populate the SIP URIs and Contacts of end points Operation Example 1 Set Station number as 1000 at ADMIN 105 Set SIP User ID Table Index as 1 at SIP Attribute 2 Set CO Service type as DID at ADMIN 140 Set COLP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set CLIP Table Index as 00 at ADMIN 143 Set Call Type as SUBSCRIBER at ADMIN 143 Set DID CONV Type as 1 at ADMIN 143 Set ISDN Enblock Send as ON at ADMIN 143 9 Set Networking CO Line Type as SIP at ADMIN 322 10 Set VOIB Mode as SIP at ADMIN 340 11 Set Proxy Server Address as sip reg com at SIP Attribute 1 12 Set Domain as sip trunk com at SIP Attribute 1 13 Set User ID as 1000 sip reg com at SIP Attribute 2 14 Set Contact Number as 1000 at SIP Attribute 2 15 Set User ID Register as ON at SIP Attribute 2 16 Set User ID Usage as ON at SIP Attribute 2 gt Station 1000 send REGISTER message after reset system COND OO BW bh Condition 1 If you set U
225. Timer call will be held in a busy state following expiration of the timer Alt If No Member If a member is not on duty intercom calls will be dropped and CO incoming calls will be routed to the designated overflow destination or will ring at the assigned Station if the overflow destination is not assigned 96 Designates the amount of time a FLEX1 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE FLEX2 Seconds Range 000 999 HOLD SAVE FLEX3 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 Seconds Range 00 70 HOLD SAVE FLEX5 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX6 1 ON HOLD SAVE FLEX7 Value Destination Type Value STA Hunt Group VMIB Speed Bin HOLD SAVE FLEX8 Seconds Range 000 600 HOLD SAVE FLEX9 Seconds Range 002 999 HOLD SAVE FLEX10 1 ON HOLD SAVE Issue 1 0 September 2008 COMMENTS VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during the timer the System will play the VMIB announcement that is programmed VALUES 000 Not Assigned 001 999 VALUES 0 OFF 1 ON VALUES 1 Station 2 Hunt 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Note Assigned 4 System Speed 2000 2499 ipLDK 20 2000 3499 ipLDK 100 2000 4999 ipLDK 300 2000 6999 ipLDK 300E Issue 1 0 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 September 2008 Admin Programming Manual COMMENTS Music Source ACD Warning Tone Al
226. UES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group PGM 167 Flexible button 5 VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group PGM 167 Flexible button 6 VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group PGM 167 Flexible button7 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 9 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT PGM 168 FLEX TEM VALUE DEFAULT REMAK ao Feco s Me EE Third Contact Not in ipLDK 20 9 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 Not in ipLDK 20 Fourth Contact Not i in ipLDK 20 5 Ext 3 Not in ipLDK 20 Fifth Contact Not in ipLDK 20 6 Sixth Contact Not in ipLDK 20 Seventh Contact ipLDK 300 300E In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 168 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Loud Bell Control LBC If an External Control Contact is FLEX1 Range VALUES assigned to LBC it is activated FLEX1 FLEX4 1 1 LBC STA During night mode LBC1 may be Station Number 2 Door programmed to provide external HOLD SAVE 3 Ext 1 night ringing In this case LBC1 does 4 Ext 2 Not in ipLDK 20 not follow the associated Station 9 Ext 3 Not in ipLDK 20 ring Door Open External Control Contact can be FLEX1 2 VALUES used when programmed to open a HOLD SAVE 1 LBC STA
227. VALUES Status RAS signal port signal port HOLD SAVE 4 Digits Port Number mer HOLD SAVE Up to 23 characters HOLD SAVE Up to 23 characters bie E164 Address Used to set the Station number FLEX15 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE Up to 23 characters HOLD SAVE 20 Digits 81 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 12 3 SIP Attribute 1 PGM 500 The SIP Attribute 1 Program is used to set the Proxy Server DNS and other items for each VOIB only available in PC Admin PGM50_ Description_____________________COMMENTS _ _ _ Address requests to User Agent servers and SIP responses to User Agent clients Proxy Registration SIP proxy server registration timer when 0 65535 sec Timer the ipLDK sends a register request it may suggest an expiration interval that indicates how long the client would like the registration to be valid Use Outbound Usage of SIP outbound proxy OFF ON Proxy Primary DNS IP address of primary DNS to find SIP proxy Max 32 digits lil string of IP address e g Address XXX XXX XXX XXX Secondary DNS IP address of secondary DNS to find SIP Max 32 digits _ string of IP address e Address proxy XXX XXX XXX XXX Domain SIP user domain name when a user makes Max 32 digits character string e a SIP outgoing call this domain name is domain name com added to the dialed digits ex lt dialed digit gt domain name com
228. VALUES an intercom box signal HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON No Touch Answer If this value is set to ON the station can FLEX7 0 OFF VALUES respond to a transferred CO call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF automatically when station mode is Hands 1 ON free or Privacy mode Page Access If this value is set to ON Station can page FLEX8 0 OFF VALUES another Station HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Ring Type If this value is not O OFF the selected ring FLEX9 1 Ring VALUES type is heard at the eg party Station ofan Type 0 OFF intercom call HOLD SAVE 1 Ring Type 2 Ring Type 3 Ring Type 4 Ring Type Speaker Ring Determines if an incoming call will ring to the FLEX10 1 VALUES speaker the handset or both Speaker 1 Speaker S HOLD SAVE 2 Headset H 3 Both B Speakerphone If this value is set to ON Speakerphone can FLEX11 0 OFF VALUES be used HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Slot Up to 3 VMIB cards could be installed in main FLEX12 0 VMIB VALUES system ipLDK 300 300E This ADMIN order to use Not used at ipLDK 20 program can assign the VMIB card by HOLD SAVE 0 1 ipLDK 100 entering sequential value O to 2 according to 0 2 ipLDK their VMIB slot order 300 300E ICM Group Intercom This feature selects the intercom Tenancy FLEX13 02 VALUES Tenancy Group Group 01 15 this station belongs to Group Number 01 05 ipLDK 20 100
229. VALUES s CLI information is restricted by the PX HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 0N 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 ll PGM114 Description_________ Procedure _ _ COMMENTS DID Restriction If this value is set to ON the station is FLEX16 1 ON VALUES 1 ON DID Call Wait If this value is set to ON another DID call FLEX17 1 ON VALUES could be received at the busy Station HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON CLI Type Designates CLI type Station CLI Long Max FLEX18 1 LONG VALUES wf 12 or Short for a Station with a normal CLI HOLD SAVE 0 Short Max 4 1 Long Long Station CLI If outgoing CLI is activated and CLI type is FLEX19 VALUE EXT Station this value is used as the max 12 digits outgoing CLI Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE MSN Wait If this value is set to ON a busy station can FLEX20 1 ON VALUES receive a Call waiting signal when another HOLD SAVE 0 OFF MSN call is received 1 ON Long CLI1 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1 FLEX21 VALUE Long CLI 1 is sent max 16 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE Long CLI2 If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 2 FLEX22 VALUE Long CLI 2 is sent max 16 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE 3 1 6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT PGM 115 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 115 3 Enter the appropriate Station Ran
230. VALUES SIGNAL TYPE 01 50 Hz Notin ipLDK 20 HOLD SAVE 02 12 KHz Not in ipLDK 20 03 16 KHz Not in ipLDK 20 04 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 05 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 06 No Polarity Reverse NPR Line Drop using CPT If this value is set to ON CPT checks FLEX4 1 ON Call Progress Tone the incoming CO Line when answered HOLD SAVE and if CPT detects a dial tone the System should drop the line for toll restriction CO Distinct Ring If this value is not set to 0 the FLEX5 1 VALUE 0 4 designated ring tone is heard at the HOLD SAVE Station when it receives an incoming ADMIN 422 CO Call so that the user can distinguish incoming CO Calls and ICM Calls with the different ring tones SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 CO Line MOH PABX CO Dial Tone PABX CO Ring Back Tone PABX CO Error Tone PABX CO Busy Tone PABX CO Announce Tone CO Flash Timer Open Loop Detect Timer Line Length DISA Answer Timer If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides the CO Dial Tone otherwise the ipLDK system provides it If this value is setto YES PX or PABX provides a CO Ring Back Tone otherwise the pLDK system provides it If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides a CO Error Tone otherwise the ol Dh system provides it If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides
231. When the DISA retry count is over the call will be routed to CCR Busy reroute Destination If the dialed digit is invalid or user did not dial any digit in proper time the caller can attempt to redial up to DISA retry count PGM 160 Flex4 When the DISA Retry Counter is exceeded the call will be routed to CCR ERROR reroute Destination If Destination is no answer the call will be routed to CCR No Answer reroute Destination DISA retry count can be applied by each CCR announcement VMIB announcement 01 70 may be used for CCR Call routing will be operated with previously programmed VMIB announcement The maximum CCR depth is 10 The external user can dial alternate digits while the VMIB announcement is being played or the digits should be entered within the Inter digit Time 5 sec after the announcement is ended f the caller does not dial any digits within the Inter digit Time 5 sec the call will be routed to the Assigned Ring Station or disconnected following an error tone Hauser presses the button while CCR is in operation CCR will return to the first step of Operation Hauser presses the button while CCR is in operation CCR will return to the previous step The call will be dropped directly after the VMIB announcement if VMIB Drop is selected at the CCR Table fa callis routed to System Speed Dial the call will be routed to the applicable Speed Dial destination If the CO Call is assigned
232. X 7 2 3 3 2 Hold Preference Description Preferred Hold type is set by ADMIN programming When a User presses the HOLD button the preferred type of Hold is activated If the user presses the HOLD button twice the other type is activated toggle Operation 1 If System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the user presses the held the HOLD button once the call is held by System Hold refer to Ref A 2 If System Hold is set as preferred Hold and the user presses the held the HOLD button twice the call is held by Exclusive Hold refer to Ref A 3 When Exclusive Hold is assigned another station in the group cannot seize the held call 4 When System Hold is assigned another station in the group can seize the held call and answer Reference A System Hold Exclusive Hold 2 3 3 1 Admin Programming E Hold Preference PGM 160 FLEX 8 2 3 3 3 Automatic Hold Description When a station is connected to a CO Call the Station User can make another intercom call just by pressing the DSS button In this case the previous CO Call is automatically held Operation To use Automatic Hold while on a CO Line call perform the following Steps 1 Press a CO button 2 When the new CO Line is connected the previous CO Call is placed the Admin Programmed preferred Hold state Admin Programming E Automatic Hold PGM 112 FLEX 2 E Hold Preference PGM 160 FLEX 8 35 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1
233. ad of the called party IE The key pad facility dialing is executed when pressing the programmed flexible button as Keypad Facility Operation 1 When pressing the programmed Keypad Facility flexible button after seizing a CO line ISDN the system will send the dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE instead of Called Party Number IE in INFORMATION message to the network 2 When a ISDN terminal user sends using Keypad Facility IE with subsequent digits after seizing a CO line ISDN the system will send all dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE to network even if the codes are matched with internal supplementary service code Ex to hold CO line 3 Keypad Facility IE Sending will be stopped automatically when user releases the CO line ISDN or pressing the programmed Keypad Facility flexible button during dialing digits 140 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To assign Keypad Facility flexible button perform the following Steps 1 Press TRANS PGM 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 8 9 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition 1 The Keypad Facility Access Authority ADMIN program 114 FLEX 6 should be set to ON to use this feature This feature can be activated by pressing the Keypad Facility flexible button after seizing an ISDN CO line When this feature is ac
234. additional device is connected directly to a primary station with a 2B module There are 3 kinds of 2B module that can be used with some LKD model stations DTIU SLIU One type DTIU allows of the addition of a second DKTU the other SLIU allows of the addition of SLT devices station fax answer microphone or modem Operation Because the second device required the additional power a small power supply is needed at the 2B module when the distance between primary station and second device is long Figure 2 17 describes that the second devices connect to primary station with 2B module BLE r i Si DO aad ETA 100 ET 101 GE STA 102 STA 103 Figure 2 17 Second Device Connection to Primary Station Condition This feature is available at LKD model stations with 8 30 44 button and SLIU DTIU 2B option modules are needed The maximum station capacity of the system is the same even if the 2B phone is used In ipLDK system one station is designed as one voice channel To use 2B feature the primary station should be connected to an odd port When DKTU with 2B option is installed the next port should not be used The second station operates as the same with a normal station But the second SLT is not available for the message wait lamp 179 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 18 Traffic Analysis Description The system can monitor and
235. age FLEX4 No Answer Prompt Usage FLEX5 Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual PGM 167 No Answer Prompt Usage Attendant Transfer Prompt Usage Reroute Busy Destination Reroute Error Destination Reroute No Answer Destination If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available the No Answer announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the No Answer Destination If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available the Attendant Transfer announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Attendant When a DID DISA call is rerouted by the no answer forward CCR and if rerouted destination is busy calls will follow the Reroute Busy Destination NOTE Only Supported at ISDN CO Lines When a DID DISA call is rerouted by the no answer forward CCR state and if the rerouted destination returns an error calls will follow the Reroute Error Destination NOTE Only Supported at ISDN CO Lines If No Answer Destination is busy the call will be rerouted to Reroute No Answer Destination Tone Attendant Hunt NOTE Only Supported at ISDN CO Lines 35 FLEX5 FLEX4 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX5 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX6 FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX7 FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX8 FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE Issue 1 0 September 2008 COMMENTS VAL
236. age Waiting Indication MWI 172 2 16 13 Absent Text Message eessen ee EEGENEN 173 2 16 14 Attendant Call Service CA 173 2 16 19 Centralized Otter 174 216010 BUSY Lamp Field BLF orere g ico setool cobs gaceoes liecccdo said lo cero piecbcicadl 174 2 16 17 Net Follow Me Forward cccoocccccoccncccccnccononoconocncococononononononnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnannnonanos 176 2 16 18 Centralized SMDR for Transit Call oococcccocccncnnccoconononnnonnonccnnnocononnnononnannnnncnnnnnns 177 2 16 19 DECT Mobility carito dirt iio 177 AAA a 178 2 16 21 Security of Transit Out Code with registered IP coconnccnncccccnnncncccconncnnncnnononnnnnnnnns 178 2 1 2B FUNCION sarao iii 179 2 19 Lame Anal SIS piola cia 180 A on 181 2 102 CAL ee E 182 LISO OS oi 183 2 18 4 Hardware Unit Reports EE 184 EU E TC 185 O ME 185 A A a 187 ZO SERIAL CONDON tds 189 2 OA MODEM ino isond 191 220 Ur O AO 193 o E 194 Ae o A A a ee eee eee 195 A eee re ee ea ee ee eee 196 220 Private E e sent arnet 197 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 l INTRODUCTION This Programming Manual is designed to provide general system features and ADMIN Programming using a DKTU and PC for the ipLDK This manual contains the following sections 1 1 Manual Usage This section is a functional listing of features with the description and operation of each The structur
237. al TRANS 2 Station Relocation Retrieve 3 The station will be relocated all Station attributes are copied to the current Station location Condition All information for the port of the destination Station will be retained so that it may be copied or relocated to another port lf a different Station type is plugged in at a location preprogrammed DSS buttons are not guaranteed DKTUs must be relocated to another digital port DKTUs cannot be relocated to an SLT port Reference A Class of Service 2 5 4 60 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 24 Station Serial Call Description Using DSS flexible buttons Users can place consecutive Intercom calls without returning the line to an idle state no need to hang up between calls Operation To use serial calling perform the following Steps 1 Press the appropriate DSS flexible button the old call will be disconnected and a new call will be established 2 4 25 Time amp Date Setup Digital Network Description In an outgoing call the ISDN network will send the appropriate time 8 date in the CONNECT message when the called party answers Operation To set the time amp date using the Digital Network perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 DialO 46 and 1 Yes 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition This feature may be set at the Attendant Station and using Ad
238. al the System Speed Dial bin If desired press the CO Line or Group button Dial the desired phone number and include these special codes up to 24 digits NS 21 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 CALLBK Insert Pause key If stored as the first digit its function is Display Security Otherwise its function is Pulse to DIMF Switchover DND FOR If CO Dial Tone Detect refer to Ref A is ON and it is stored as the first or second digit and the accessed CO Line is behind the PBX mode its function is Dial Tone Detect Otherwise its function is Pause FLASH Inserts a Flash into the speed number lfthe accessed CO Line is analog its function is Flash to PX or PBX lfthe accessed CO Line is ISDN line refer to Ref B and it is stored as the first digit it makes the remaining digits sent with envelope information not in the Calling Party Number IE but in keypad facility Press the HOLD SAVE button If desired enter the name up to 16 characters by dialing 2 digits for each character Press the HOLD SAVE button To store continuously repeat this procedure from Step 3 oo a To make a call using System Speed Dial from a DKTU 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin To make a call using System Speed Dial from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the Sp
239. all is queued Muted ring is given only one time during 0 4 sec Group Name Assign Group Name can be assigned at FLEX23 VALUE this Admin field HOLD SAVE 3 7 2 8RING GROUP ATTRIBUTE If the hunt group type is selected as RING then the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 191 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table A PGM19 Description ______ Procedure COMMENTS VMIB Announce 1 Timer If the call is not answered during the FLEX1 Seconds timer the System will play the VMIB Range 000 999 announcement that is programmed HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Timer The second VMIB FLEX2 Seconds announcement will be played if Range 000 999 the call continues to wait beyond HOLD SAVE the expiration of the 2 announcement timer VMIB Announce 1 Location Used to play the VMIB FLEX3 Seconds announcement when the VMIB Range 00 70 announce 1 timer expires HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Location Used to play the VMIB FLEX4 Seconds announcement when the VMIB Range 00 70 Id Announce 2 timer expires HOLD SAVE VMIB Announce 2 Repeat Used to repeat the VMIB FLEX5 Seconds VALUES 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 COMMENTS o announce 2 when the timer Range 000 999 000 Not Assigned E Lindo A VMIB Announce 2 Repeat U
240. alog CO line port mapping 7 Fast CID Mode ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON system provides a ring signal to SLT and CID will be displayed after 1 ringing 4 3 18 DCOB ATTRIBUTE Not available in ipLDK 20 LE FLEX ME DM DEFAULT DEFAULT REMARK _ 186 SCH System Attributes a DCOB CO Type MS pe This ADMIN program is moved to PGM187 FLEX 4 2 Metering Type 01 Jo Select DCO call metering signal type 3 R2 OUT Manage Timer T 50 _ In R2 DCO signaling maximum time for waiting for forward signal from PX 1 sec based In R2 signaling maximum time for waiting for forward signal from PX 1 sec based E Disaneeat A A ee 1 sec based Sa eS GE In R2 signaling time duration to send pulse typed R2 signal 20 msec based 7 R2Ready Timer 000 500 7 Omsecbased 8 Dial Tone Delay Timer___ 01 30 9 Line Status 19 6 meine 1410 Calling Category 19 f Userno priority 11 DNIS Service ON OFF Request the CID to the calling party is CLI S i Number 01 10 D Reserved Reserved O ae R2 outgoing call is failed a If R2 outgoing call is made and the error signal is received then the caller hears the error announce via VMIB D a OS ae If R2 outgoing call is made and the busy signal is received then the caller hear the busy announce via VMIB Usage announcement signal is received then the caller A eg the error announce via VMIB 17 DCOGain 187 DCOB CO Line Attributes
241. ame can be displayed on LCD according to the ADMIN program of CLI NAME DISPLAY PGM114 FLEX1 ON PGM114 FLEX11 OFF or ON LCD of USER A LCD of USER A PGM200 FLEX9 0431 My Area Code Or LG Nortel If speed 001 8502824 LG Nortel is programmed 8502824 Area Code Removed by PGM200 FLEX9 mmm ISDN Calling party USER A 100 g DSZ ES AE AS Sos x lt pe as GS Sa A USER B 101 Figure 2 14 2 1 incoming CLI process 134 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation In ipLDK system the various operations about the incoming CLI is provided according to the ADMIN program setting Ifthe CLIP DISPLAY ADMIN program 114 FLEX 1 is set to ON the incoming CLI is displayed on station LCD If the CLI NAME DISPLAY ADMIN program 114 FLEX 11 is set to ON the incoming CLI digit display can be replaced to the matched station speed dial data name If the CLI print ADMIN program 200 FLEX 6 is set to ON the incoming CLI can be printed to RS 232C port If the MY AREA CODE ADMIN program 200 FLEX 9 is set and this value is matched with the start digits of the incoming CLI then the matched digits are removed automatically If the MY AREA PREFIX CODE ADMIN program 200 FLEX 10 is set it can be used at the operation 4 with combination of MY
242. anual September 2008 2 3 4 Pickup Description A station user can pick up a call received at another Station The following pick up types are available Type Description Directed Call Pick up To pick up a call ringing at another station within the accessible Intercom Tenancy Group refer to Ref A Group Call Pick up To pick up a call ringing at another station in the same pick up Group Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 PGM 120 2 5 2 1 Directed Call Pick Up Description A station can pick up a call ringing other station by dialing the direct call pick up code refer to Ref A and the ringing station number Operation To answer a call ringing at another station 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dial Direct Call Pick up code 7 refer to Ref A OR 3 Press the programmed Direct Call Pick up button 4 Dial the Intercom number of the ringing Station To assign DIRECT CALL PICK UP button at a flexible button perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Dial 7 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes zech Condition 1 When several calls are queued at a station or hunt group the pick up depends on the Pick up Priority ADMIN 173 Queued callback and private line cannot be picked up An intercom call cannot be picked up at a Station in Hold or Park mode When the same types of CO Lines are queued the first que
243. ard type After manually setting logical slot assignment the user should reset the system manually 4 3 5 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE a STA RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ipLDK 20 ipLDK 300E ipLDK 300 ipLDK 100 Se ae As the basic type Number Set the 1 digit of Type 1 10 37 1000 1599 100 399 100 227 a should be 1 4 The station Number Set number can be Type 2 10 37 1000 1599 100 399 100 227 a 799 Number Set 49 _ 37 1000 1599 100 399 100 227 997 Type 3 ell Set 700 727 7000 7599 700 999 700 827 ype 4 Number Set 200 227 2000 2599 200 499 200 327 Type 5 Type 1 Max Station Ports 60 ed Set 10 37 10 79 10 79 10 79 Stations above Max ports will be displayed Max Station Ports Number Set e Type 7 100 127 1000 1299 100 299 100 227 Stations above Max ports will be displayed The station Number Set number can be Type 8 10 37 1000 1599 100 399 100 227 changed within 999 108 Ki IOLDkK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 6 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN FLEX FIELD NUMBER NUMBER SET2 NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER GEI SET3 SET4 SET5 SET6 GET SET8 100 399 100 399 100 227 100 227 l 10 35 10 35 10 79 10 35 700 725 200 225 21 45 100 125 10 35 10 99 ipLDK 20 620 667 620 667 620 667 620 667 620 667 620 667 620 6
244. ation 10 37 ipLDK 20 To call an another station 100 227 ipLDK 100 100 300 ipLDK 300 100 399 ipLDK 300 1000 2599 ipLDK 300E SMDR Account Group Assign 00 23 ipLDK Stations can be assigned as a 20 100 00 Not member of call account group 00 99 ipLDK Ce on SMDR A station belongs to 300 300E only one group 01 05 ipLDK The assigned DSS button can 20 100 be copied to another station or 01 15 ipLDK ICM group 300 300E O E A To seize a CO Line Copy DSS Button Copy DSS to station Copy DSS to ICM Group AAA A 126 Kol Station IP List 01 28 i Only for ipLDK 20 118 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 ROM ANGE DER AU ee REMAK COS stands for Class of Service It means defends on Display Station Number by the grade of COS the service COS could be limited The certain COS of station could be checked HIS ION IO Oo day COS a A a by assigned night COS 01 09 ipLDK 20 System can display station by Display station number by 01 25 ipLDK 100 CO access group CO access Group 01 73 ipLDK 300 300E 4 3 13 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK e Service Type In this program mode you can program the following items _ Type 1 Normal 1 Normal 2 RESERVED ipLDK 20 sears ip LDK 100 300 300E ISDN DID MSN RESERVE ipLDK 20 TIE ip_LDK 100 300 300E 5 DCO DID
245. attendant which is busy the calling attendant will hear the busy tone and can make camp on refer to Ref C to called attendant H attendant activates unconditional call forward refer to Ref D the calls to attendant will follow the call forward process Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 B MOH Music On Hold 2 4 17 C Camp on 2 4 5 D Call Forward Unconditional 2 3 1 1 124 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Main Attendant Assignment PGM 164 MMOH Type PGM 171 FLEX 2 E Intercom Group Attendant Assignment PGM 120 FLEX 1 E Attendant Call Queuing RBT MOH PGM 160 FLEX 1 2 13 3 Attendant Forward Description The attendant can forward Unconditional Call Forward a call to the other station see Ref 1 The forwarded to Station will substitute for the attendant temporarily while the attendant is in forwarding state Figure 2 13 3 describes that forwarded to station serves attendant functions during Attendant Forward gt unconditional call forward LA bi SE y attendant Forwarded to station serve attendant functions temporarily Figure 2 13 3 Attendant Forward Operation It is the same procedure as the Unconditional Call Forward To activate Attendant Forward Lift the Handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 1 Unconditional Call Forward
246. ault 1 Station is routed to the Secretary HOLD SAVE 1 Highest level regardless of the Executive state only 12 Lowest level ICM calls from other Executives of the same or higher level can directly call the Executive 69 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 4 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE PGM 231 In the ipLDK system a maximum of 1000 Flexible DID Table entries can be programmed Each Flexible DID Table entry has five attributes In this program mode the following items can be customized 9 Press the TRANS PGMI button 10 Dial 231 11 Press FLEX1 Enter the appropriate VALUE FLEX1 Input FLEX2 Initialize FLEX3 Delete 12 Enter the DID Conversation Table number Range 000 999 13 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS DID Name Used to save the name of incoming FLEX1 DID Conversation Table Range 000 DID calls and display incoming DID 999 FLEX1 Name Up to 11 Characters call information at the Station LCD refer to Keyset Map HOLD SAVE KEYSET MAP 1 Blank K2 K3 In this program mode the following items can be customized 14 Press the TRANS PGMI button 15 Dial 231 16 Press FLEX1 17 Enter the appropriate VALUE FLEX1 Input FLEX2 Initial FLEX3 Delete 18 Enter the DID Conversation Table number Range 000 999 19 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM231 Descrip
247. ber 2008 Figure 2 16 11 The CO TRANSIT OUT operation Call Flow Station 202 dials CO transit code of PGM 324 Dialed digit goes to master system Master sizes the real PX CO line and dials Outside party rings Additional Programming Master PGM 322 BTN 1 Net Col Group 02 for PSTN Lines BTN 4 Net CO Type PSTN PGM 324 BIN 10 FLEX 1 Usage PSTN FLEX 2 Net Code 9 transit code gt Delete 1st CO Group access code FLEX 3 Net CO Group 02 170 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Pete Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Slave PGM 324 BIN 10 FLEX 1 Usage PSTN FLEX 2 Net Code 9 transit code gt Delete 1st CO Group access code FLEX 3 Net CO Group 01 FLEX 4 CPN 192 168 23 21 FLEX 7 DGT Repeat YES Operation To activate the CO Transit Out 1 Dial the CO Transit Out code from a Station on another networked System 2 The Networked System will secure a CO line that is preprogrammed for transmitting the CO Transit Out codes to the Master System 3 The Master System will secure a CO line that is preprogrammed to receive the CO Transit Out codes 4 After seizing a PSTN CO line the Master System will send the digit information to place a call 5 The Called Station will ring and the call will be connected when it is answered Condition To use CO Transit Out the networked system user must
248. ber 2008 Pye Enblock Send ON OFF If this value is set to ON Enblock Sending Mode is applied to outgoing CO calls Transit CFW 0 When using networking If this Otherwise the call forwarded Station CLI is sent rerouting service is available 10 Reserved ISDN Call Proc ON OFF mm oF Tisai Orban If this value is set to ON Inband Inband Message info In call proceeding is available 144 Po Ring Assignment STA Range Delay 0 9 Hunt Group VMIB Message ee HUNT VMIB NET STA VMIB VMIB NET STA PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK value is set to ORI the originate TT Plan ID F1 0 7 Calling Party Called Party F2 0 7 Numbering Plan ID setting F1 Calling NPI F2 Called NPI LONG CLI TYPE If this value is set to 0 the CLI is made as before refer to PGM200 PGM114 If this value is set to 1 or 2 the CLI is same as Long CLI Station Long CLI 1 or 2 Night STA_R HUNT VMIB VMIB NET STA 4 Lunch STA_R HUNT VMIB VMIB NET STA 5 DID Remove No 00 99 Not Assigned If this value is not 0 and the CO Line is DID Line the system discard the incoming DID digits up to amount of this value e g If this value is set to 02 and the outside caller dialed 01245 then the first 01 is removed caller s CLI is sent for CLI SS CD CR 0 No Service ISDN call deflection or call 1 Call Deflection 2 Call mn eng Call Rerouting 1 Enable Enable If this value is
249. ber It is possible to make CO line Intercom Transfer between two pairs Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C DND 2 4 9 D Call Forward 2 3 1 E Attendant 2 13 Admin Programming NH Linked Station Pairs PGM 179 104 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 10 External Device Control 2 10 1 Door Open Description Relay in ipLDK can be used for the Door Open feature ipLDK 20 MBU 2 Relays MPE 2 Relays PERIS MISB 4 Relays ipLDK 300 300E GE ir Se pLDK 20 ipLDK 100 ipLDK 300 300E ST tstDoorOpen 2 E2 EA md DoorOpen po HH Bd Door Open po E4 OEA th Door Open po SthDoorOpen A HH th DoorOpen E E th Door Open Operation To Registered Door Open perform the following Steps 1 Dial the Door Open code or press the programmed DOOR OPEN button Press the TRANS PGM button Press the desired FLEX button to be assigned Type 1 1st Door open Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes St 2 eS Ze Admin Programming E External Control Contact PGM 168 E Door Open Timer PGM 181 FLEX 5 E Door Open Enable Disable PGM 112 FLEX 22 105 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 10 2 Door Phone Description A convenient intercom box can be connected to the system The intercom box can receive page announce
250. ber Broadsoft server 4 3 29 RSG IP Phone Setting DON FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT _ REMARK 380 _ VOIB Slot For RSG IP _ 1 SltAssign Channel Assign 0 8 A einen 20 0 24 ipLDK 1 SOP No Assign _ 0 o ee 1008007006 50 18 LD pLDK 20 00 96 Ee 100 300 300 A o RSG IP Attribute P Pesem A e E e poese Lai emos Rere A i a RSG IP Phone eer ONOFF ON SE Type G 711_ALAW 0 Na 711_ALAW 0 G 711_ULAW 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 G 729A 4 6 FirstAccessRSGCO ONOFF_ ON _ S l O 7 L ing Without CO RingAssign ON OFF JON TI Pp RSGAttibutet ss 1 Set MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 IP Address Display 0000 TI B e TAL DK 20 100 300E version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 __PGM 1 FLEX ITEM PAM DEES DEFAULT Seen 3 PORT View Port Number a Port number used when system communicates with RSG Display NAT Port Number NAT Port number used when system communicates with nx 2 2 384 RSG Attribute o hel o 8 o o o 2 Estemal MOH RTP Pot 188 MOH Type Music Hold Tone Hold Tone Musto Soares Jeti o SSS 5 ExternalContactt_________ LBC DoorOpen NA o Jo 6s ExternalContact2_ Ss LBC DoorOpen NAF 7 Alarm Enable ON OFF OFF 8 _ AlamContat Close Open____ Close o Mode _Marin Boor Bell ty 10___ Alarm Signal___ RepeatOnce _ Repeat_ SC Ss assigned in RSG 0
251. ble 48 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Flexible Numbering Plan Code Any Feature with a dialing code Paging Account code Call Park etc can be assigned to a flexible button User Programmable Speed Dial Automatically dials Speed Number System Station Saved Number Redial Last number Redial User Programmable Group Access Hunt Group pilot number User Programmable Pool Group Access Some or all outside lines can be grouped pressing this button accesses the highest numbered unused CO line in that group User Programmable Loop sed to answer a transferred call on line for which a user does not have a button assigned User Programmable Station Assignment Allows assignment of stations and complete flexibility within the system numbering plan A station can be assigned a number 100 399 4 8 button Feature code assign Telephone Number Automatically dials an outside Telephone Number It is possible on LDP DKTU which 3 soft key Feature Button Feature Code Call Back DND Forward MON 6 Operation The Flexible buttons are programmable individually at each keyset and are used by pressing the applicable FLEX button To assign a flexible button 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGN button 4 Type the Feature Code refer to Flex Button Programming Codes in the
252. ble SMDR Save Enable If this value is set to ON maximum of FLEX1 1 ON VALUES ell 1000 SMDR data can be recorded in HOLD SAVE 0 OFF the System memory 1 ON If this value is set to ON SDMR data FLEX2 1 ON VALUES can be printed real time through the HOLD SAVE 0 OFF serial MODEM LAN port 1 ON Long Distance All Call If this value is set to LD only long FLEX3 0 CALL VALUES Recorded SMDR distance outgoing CO calls will be HOLD SAVE 0 ALL CALL Recording Cal Type recorded in the SMDR If this value is 1 LD set to ALL all outgoing CO calls will be recorded by the SMDR A long distance call is defined as a call that satisfies the condition of FLEX 4 or FLEX 14 SMDR Long Distance Call Outgoing calls are measured to see if FLEX4 VALUE Range 07 VALUES Digit Counter the digit counters are exceeded If so 15 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 or the call is considered a long distance FLEX14 Call Print Incoming Call If value is set to ON all incoming calls FLEX5 1 ON VALUES can be printed HOLD SAVE Print Lost Call lf value is set to ON lost calls are FLEX6 1 ON printed Lost calls are defined as calls HOLD SAVE that are unanswered Records in Detail If this value is set to ON not only total FLEX7 O OFF calls total metering count and total HOLD SAVE cost for individual Station but also the detailed call records are saved up to a maximum o
253. bles PGM 227 236 ccccceeseeecenseeecenseeneenseeneenseecenaseeeonsseeeoasseseosseseoaseeseenseesonas 67 3 10 1 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE PGM 2201 67 3 10 2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING PGM 228 oocconncccionicciinccnaricononaconananararoraro ro ronca ari rr 68 3 10 3 EXEGUTIVE SEGRETARY TABLE PGM EE NEE 69 310 4 FLEXIBLE DID TABLE POM 23T beet 70 9310969 TEMPE ZONE POM 232 od 71 5 10 60 WEEKLY TIME TABLE deenen 72 3 10 7 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE PGM 234 73 3 10 8 MOBILE EXTENSION Du EE 74 3 10 9 LOCAL CODE TABLE PGM 204 74 3 11 Networking PGM 320 328 ooooccccononocicconccccccococanccnonnnnncnonnnnnnnnennnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrnnannnnrenanananos 76 3 11 1 NETWORKING BASIC ATTRIBUTES PGM 220 76 3 11 2 NETWORKING SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTES PGM 2211 177 3 11 3 NETWORKING CO LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 2221 17 3 11 4 NETWORKING ROUTING TABLE PGM 2241 78 ENISIIZHZZETIAKI TEL ONE 79 3 12 1 VOIP IP SETTING PGM 240 79 3 12 2 Gatekeeper Setting PGM 241 81 3 12 3 SIP Attribute 1 PGM POOL 82 3 12 4 SIP Attribute 2 PGM PO 83 3 13 RSG IP Phone PGM 380 397 EEN 84 3 13 1 VOIB SLOT ASSIGNMENT RSG IP PHONE PGM 2001 84 3 13 2 RSG IP PHONE PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT PGM 291 84 3 13 3 RSG IP PHONE PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT PGM 29721 85 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 BE Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 TAR oGMATIRIBUTES POM 383 taa aaa aio 86 3 13 5 EE RRE EIER KR AE ET circle 87 3 13 6 RSG ALARM ASSIGNMENT PGM 3
254. c Procedure as listed in the Table POL Description___________ Procedure _____COMMENTS CO line Group Each CO Line must be a member of a CO Line FLEX1 02 CO Line VALUES Group Groups may be assigned according to Group HOLD SAVE 00 73 ipLDK 300 300E the CO type and Class Of Service 00 25 ipLDK 100 00 09 ipLDK 20 Group 00 private group Group 73 not used 25 at ipLDK 100 09 at ipLDK 20 COS is assigned to each CO line FLEX2 02 COS VALUES HOLD SAVE 1 No restriction 2 Exception Table A governs 3 Exception Table B governs 4 Restricts Long Distance Code 5 overrides Station COS 2 3 4 and 5 6 DISA Account If this value is set to ON when the incoming CO FLEX3 01 ON Code caller tries to access another CO Line by dialing HOLD SAVE a CO Line access code the caller will be prompted to enter an authorization code This is applied only when this CO Service type is DISA CO Line Assign If this value is set to ON Polarity Reverse FLEX4 01 Pol VALUE is applied to the CO Line otherwise Loop HOLD SAVE 0 Loop Start Loop Start is applied 1 Polarity Reverse Pol HOLD SAVE 0 CO 1 PBX Type HOLD SAVE 0 PULSE 1 DTMF Analog CO Lines GROUND 0 LOOP only HOLD SAVE 1 GROUND UNA Universal If this feature is set to ON Universal FLEX8 1 ON VALUE 1 0N CO Line Group If this value is set to ON the CO Line user FLEX9
255. call the Station User must dial the destination Station number without seizing a CO line After the Station User makes a Net Call the ipLDK system will access an idle CO line to send the Net Call request to the destination Station But if there is no selectable idle CO line then the User will hear an error tone A received Net Call will ring in the Terminal Answer Mode regardless the Intercom answer mode setting Hands free Terminal Privacy When system detects a fatal error from the Network the System will send the digit stream to the Network using the alternate speed dial bin In this case the Call is not a Networking Call The Net Call is also applied to the CO Call Restriction Timer PGM 180 FLEX17 Admin Programming E Networking Basic Attributes PGM 320 E Networking CO Line Attributes PGM 322 E Network Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 2 16 2 VOIP Networking Description Two ipLDK Systems can be connected through the VOIB The networking CO line connects the networking Systems and it is used for the network signaling message and voice path To use the networking CO line the service type must be set to DID MSN at ADMIN program 140 And to receive the net call digit information correctly the appropriate DID conversion type must be set at ADMIN program 143 FLEX 4 In this example DID TYPE 1 satisfies the situation To configure the net CO line connection the net CO group and type must be set to 01 and NET a
256. call is rerouted to destination by reroute no answer destination AE LBC STA 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 P Ext 3 jos LCD Time formats are o 12 hour Military 24 hour mode Two LCD date formats are Day Month Year DDMMYY or Month Day Year MMDDYY mode LCD Language Display Mode 00 15 2 Korean The LCD language format can be selected 129 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 EC FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Modem Associated Device Modem service is available only when there s MODU on MPB Station Number 10 37 ipLDK 20 STA37 This value means the Modem 100 227 ipLDK me ip LDK 20 associated station To use 100 300 ipLDK 300 STA 227 Modem line flexibly associate 100 399 ipLDK 300 ip LDK 100 one station with Modem Then 1000 2599 ipLDK STA 399 incoming CO Call is connected 300E pl LDK 300 to Modem device if the station STA 2599 gets the call CO Number 01 16 ipLDK 20 01 40 ipLDK 100 001 200 ipLDK 300 001 400 ipLDK 300E ipLDK 300E The last station is assigned as Wm Type 0 12 ipLDK 300 300E 1 0 11 ipLDK 100 0 8 ijpLDK 100 r Modem associated station as Type 0 13 ipLDK 300 300E 0 12 ip _LDK 100 0 9 i pLDK 20 If CO Line is associated with Modem All of the incoming CO Call through this Line is connected to Modem The Modem associated CO Line cannot be used to outgoi
257. calls cannot be picked up 3 A station can answer an intercom call placed to an ICM box using group call pick up 4 When several calls are queued at a Station or Hunt Group the pick up order depends on Pick up Priority ADMIN 173 5 When the same types of CO Lines are queued the first queued CO Line is picked up 6 Group call pick up is allowed within the intercom tenancy group A Station cannot pick up any call to the station that belongs to a denied Intercom Tenancy Group refer to Ref C Reference A Pick up Attribute 2 3 4 B Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Group Call Pick Up Code PGM 107 FLEX2 C Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 Admin Programming E Pick up Attribute PGM 190 FLEX 2 E Pick up Group Attributes PGM 191 PLA Priority Setting PGM 173 Pick up Priority 38 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 5 IP Phone Rerouting Description loLDK provides a rerouting service when IP phones IP hard phone soft phone phontage are not available line disconnected or Network environment failure for any reason the call can be routed to his voice mail box or mobile extension Operation Condition 1 Hunt group call does not follow this reroute service 2 Only IP Phone is working this reroute feature Reference Admin Programming E Auto Forward to VMIB PGM 113 F2 F14 E Forward to VMIB timer PGM 181 F20 E Mobi
258. calls which answered by attendant and placed on hold state by attendant Time Available The time duration which the attendants don t answer the calls but are available to handle new calls Measured with minutes Time Talk The total time during measuring interval the attendants are active or converse with a CO line Talk time is not started until the call is answered by attendant The duration of time between call termination and answering at attendant is not accumulated as Time Available or Time Talk Time Held The total amount of time which attendants have calls on hold Time No Answer The average amount of time that calls in queue and or ringing at attendant before the caller hangs up Speed of Answer The average elapsed time from when a call is terminated by attendant to when the call is answered by an attendant Type Type of attendant system or main or intercom tenancy group Operation To print the Attendant Traffic Report at main attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0124 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Ex Site Name Report Type Attendant Traffic Report Yesterday Total 181 Date 02 12 04 13 14 Atd Meas teen Calls ammm Time Time Speed Atd No Hour Total Ans Abnd H Abd Held Avail Talk Held NoAns Ans Type 2629 9 3 6 0 0 02 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sys 4807 8 6 2 0 0 04 21 00 13 00 00 00 09 00 04 Main 361
259. can be started with beef tone If user do not want to hear beef tone but want to hear call recording start announcement this announcement can be recorded system announcement 099 ADD and REWIND feature are not working on previous VMIB board These are working on VMIBE board Admin Programming WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 m MIB User Record Timer PGM 181 FLEX 3 MIB Valid User Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX Ai E Station Group Assignment and Attributes PGM 190 and 191 2 11 2 Remote Control Description An outside caller through DID DISA refer to Ref A can access VMIB after calling a station which is in VMIB Forward mode Entering VMIB controlling mode the user can retrieve received messages change user greeting release Call Forward to VMIB etc An ICM caller also can access VMIB after calling a station which is in VMIB Forward mode Entering VMIB controlling mode the user can retrieve received messages change user greeting release Call Forward to VMIB etc All operation is same as previous CO remote Control Operation To enter Remote VMIB Control mode perform the following Steps 1 Dial the station number forwarded to VMIB from an external party with DID DISA or an another extension 2 The User greeting should be heard 3 While the user greeting is playing press the key Enter your password is heard 4 Enter the password authorization code and press the key if authorization code is lon
260. ce the second call and announce the conference 4 Hook switch and connect to the first call within 2 seconds hook switch again to establish a conference 94 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 7 2 Paging Conference Description During a page by conference page zone the second originator can page along with the first originator Operation When a Conference Page is being activated Keyset User 1 Lift handset and press CONF button SLT User 1 Lift the handset to answer the page 2 Hook flash and dial 58 conference page join code Condition Page Timer is not applied to Paging Conference Group Ifthere is the second page originator it is impossible to Meet Me Page If the first originator goes on hook the conference group paging connection is released The second originator can make paging regardless of page access privilege Admin Programming E Paging Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX 4 E Paging Access PGM 111 FLEX 8 E Conference Page Zone PGM 119 E Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual SLT Conference Page Join Code PGM109 FLEX 5 2 3 Conference Room Description This feature allows internal users or CO callers to join a conference without being invited by the conference supervisor This conference feature has the conference join codes and each conference room has an own join code room number A DID DISA and trans
261. ceeeeseeuceeessaeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseaaseeeeeseasanees 130 2 13 10 ICM Box MUSIC Gelechon ce ccccceeseceeeesseeeceeseeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeseegeesteaseceeteegeseeseaaeees 131 21311 Statlo n PCA CANCE nacida 131 29 12 BDS DES CONS OS dee 132 2 14 ISDN Service ia aaa 133 2 14 1 Call Deflection REOUting eccccccccsescccccceeeseceeeceeeeeeceeeceeeeceeesseseaeeeesseaeeeeeeessaasaeeeesesaaaaes 133 2 14 2 CLI Calling Line Identification Presentation cccccccecsseccceeceeseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaaeees 134 A A A 140 2 14 4 COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation ccccccceseecceeceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeees 140 A A 140 2 14 6 Malicious Call ID 142 2 AT MSN SUD Addr ssSing EE 142 ZNO DON lie En E CT sosa edison 144 2 14 9 DID Call Destination with Incoming CTT 148 ZS VON OCS ios 150 2 15 1 Call by IP ad lt hr ere eee ene nen eee ene ey eee 150 2102 Cal DY ROUNO Ma uri 151 219 0 No mal ast Mode Tolf e E ut tod a ais 151 A A O PP PA en 152 A en ee E 152 A A 152 ZO DU OV Ti Pen 154 A A A A 156 E VOIP E ele O sitios 157 210 10entlicalon Se e ce 159 2 16 4 Net e EC 159 20 INGE all OIA e ricas 161 2 100 Nel COME CIN E ara E E ea 164 e LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 A A E E A E E E eee doneitesynmnas deuce 165 2 16 8 Call Completon 166 2 16 9 Do Not Disturb 8 D TRA 167 A A 168 SE EE LEE e dee 169 2 16 12 Mess
262. cess the next accessible CO Line Group Wm Warning Tone ON OFF If this value is set to ON page paging starts HE SE is protected from override regardless of Station Override Privilege PGM113 FLEX 4 Privacy Warning Tone OS mh this value is set to ON privacy a O ames tone will be heard when the call is overridden Single Ring for CO Call YES NO The cadence of ICM ring is set to 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF The cadence of CO ring is set to 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 4 sec OFF If this value is set to YES the ICM ring cadence and the CO ring cadence is reversed each other released ee emer e o ze Print is available ACD Print Timer 001 255 ACD database is printed per 3 digits desired time interval 10 sec or j hour based PGM161 FLEX 14 ACD clear Database after ON OFF If this value is set to ON ACD Print database is initialized after printed out VMIB PROMPT GAIN 00 31 This value is gain of VMIB Announcement Prompt Whenever VMIB Announcement is played this value is applied e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 E _ ITEM RANGE __ OREA REMARK ___ CLI Information of VM SMDI ON OFF If this value is set to ON CLI is added when Voice Mail information is printed through RS232 port by SMDI 14 ACD Print Timer Unit HOUR SEC This value determines the unit of ACD Print timer ADMIN 161 1 hour or 10 seconds 15 Set
263. ch station can be assigned to conference page zone 01 05 i pLDK 20 01 10 ipLDK 100 01 24 ipLDK 300 300E 25 30 ipLDK 300 300E Zone 06 10 ip LDK 20 Zone 11 15 io_LDK 100 Zone 31 35 ip LDK 300 300E 117 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM_ FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ICM Tenancy Group Number Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be operated independently and the stations in the group can be assigned an individual CO Line Group to use Each group can be assigned with attendant and can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other groups ICM Tenancy Group Each ICM group may have Attendant one attendant Day Night Mode of ICM Group is set by ICM Group attendant ICM Tenancy Access Group Each group can be 01 15 ipLDK GROUP 1 oo pee or deny 300 300E SS ICM Preset Call Forward When this feature is programmed if the station does not answer the incoming CO call within Preset Call Forward timer then this call is forwarded to preset destination No station is assigned as default IDLE LINE SELECTION This feature assigns the destination of Hot Line and Warm Line pt Flex Button 01 44 ia activate a feature on a flex button as if ia Je CO Line 01 16 ipLDK 20 01 40 ipLDK 100 001 200 ipLDK 3 CO Line Group 01 0 8 ipLDK 20 To seize a CO Line Group 01 24 ipLDK 100 01 72 ipLDK 300 300E 4 St
264. coming Call CO Line Queued Call Operation If there s multiple CO Calls ringing at a station and the call is answered at one of the stations the call with the highest priority automatically will be answered first o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition Automatic Speaker Select feature should be enabled The Priority of CO Line for PLA can be changed by Admin Programming Admin Programming m Preferred Line Answer PGM 112 FLEX 7 m Automatic Speaker Selection PGM 111 FLEX 1 m PLA Priority Setting PGM 173 2 1 3 Direct Inward Dialing DID Description This feature allows CO incoming calls to access a specific destination This feature enables the caller direct access to a desired Station Hunt group VMIB announcement Speed or Page bypassing the Attendant There are 3 types of DID Conversions that can be set by ADMIN Programming ADMIN 143 FLEX 4 Type 0 In an incoming DID call select digits which are received by ADMIN Programming the selected digits will be converted using DID Conversion type ADMIN 146 FLEX 5 FLEX 6 Type 1 The incoming DID digits are the destination number there is no conversion Type 2 With result of DID Conversion type 1 convert by the Flexible DID table ADMIN 231 additionally Operation Ex 1 To make a DID call by DID Digit Conversion DID type 0 perform the following 1 Check if DID
265. criolla 39 34 14 PLA PRIORITY Sel TING PGM 173 usina nadaa diana 40 3 4 15 RS 232C PORT SETTING PGM 241 40 3 4 16 PRINT PORT SELECTION PGM 1 41 3 4 17 PULSE DIAL RBATIOIDOGMI7EI rran 41 3 4 18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES PGM IZ 42 34 19 SYSTEM TIME DATE SETTING PGM 178 hinata ainda 44 3 4 20 LINKED STATION PAIRS PGM 179 pesa pta 44 3 4 21 CIDU SETTING PGM 18pI anna anar nr arar 45 d System Timers PGM1S0 18 EE 46 Sab geb RH ee CAIN WOO us risa 46 A AAA acta ibastunesteasaudiateomente dulce eave earnaanetcies E AE 47 gt LE IE Tee EE 49 3 5 4 IN ROOM INDICATION PGM 192 50 3 5 5 CHIME BELL PGM 1841 50 3 6 DC OB FU iaa ida 51 3 6 1 DCOB ATTRIBUTE PGM 1861 51 30 2 DOCOB ATTRIBUTE IHPOGM POM paraa iaa 52 3 7 Station Group PGM 190 PGM 197 cocccoccnnccconocccccnonncnncncnnnnnnonononancnnnnnnnnnnenonnnnnrenananenns 53 3 7 1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT PGM 190 0occccccccnoccnccccccocccnncccconcccnncononoccnnononononnnnnnnonanoss 53 3 7 2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM moi 53 3 7 3 COLP TABLE PGM 2011 60 3 8 LCR PGM 220 223 EEN 61 3 8 1 LCR ATTRIBUTES PGM 220 61 2 0 2 LEADING DIGIT TABLE POM 2 EE 63 3 8 3 DIGIT MODIFCATION TABLE PGM 222 64 3 8 4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION PGM 223 ccccconcococcccconcccccccconacooccnonnnoocncnconnnorocnnonanaranoronaanros 64 SKERGIURCIION GECKEN 65 3 9 1 TOLL EXCEPTION TABLE PGM 2241 65 2732 CANNED TOLL TABLES POM EE 66 3 9 0 EMERGENCY SERVICE CALL POM 220 sesionar n 66 3 10 Ta
266. cription PROCEDURE ME Normal CO Used for Analog Lines or DISA service FLEX1 1 HOLD SAVE ANALOG DID Used for Analog DID service FLEX1 2 HOLD SAVE EEE in ipLDK 20 Ce ISDN DID MSN Used for ISDN or VOIP Lines FLEX1 3 HOLD SAVE TE FLEX1 4 HOLD SAVE Not in ipLDK 20 DCO DID Used for E1 Lines FLEX1 5 HOLD SAVE Not in ipLDK 20 CO Type Table CO TYPE SUB ATTRIBUTES COMMENTS DISA Service FLEX2 VALUE1 Ring Mode VALUE1 FLEX1 VALUE2 ON OFF Flex1 Day Flex2 Night Flex3 Weekend Flex4 Lunch Flex5 On Demand VALUE2 1 ON 0 OFF DISA VMIB FLEX2 VALUE1 Ring Mode VALUE1 Announcement FLEX2 VALUE2 00 70 Flex1 Day Flex2 Night Flex3 Weekend Flex4 Lunch Flex5 On Demand VALUE2 VMIB Message Number 00 not assigned Analog DID Signal Type FLEX2 FLEX1 VALUE VALUE Not in 1 Immediate Start joLDK 20 2 Wink Start 3 Delayed Dial Start Number FLEX2 FLEX2 VALUE VALUE 00 70 00 not assigned TIE ben Type FLEX2 VALUE VALUE Not in 1 RD Korea Only joLDK 20 2 LD India 3 EM C 4 EM D 5 EM I 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 2 2 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES I PGM 141 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 141 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specifi
267. d 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 8 6 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition n order to use this feature Auto Privacy should be OFF ADMIN PGM161 and Override Privilege ADMIN PGM113 FLEX 4 of the attendant should be enabled Admin Programming E Auto Privacy PGM161 E Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 E Override Privilege PGM 113 126 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 5 Attendant Override Description A station in DND state refer to Ref A can not generally receive an incoming call The attendant however can temporarily invalidate the DND state Therefore the attendant can call and transfer to the station in DND state The Figure 2 13 5 describes that the attendant can call the station in DND state after Attendant Override y In DND Intercom call transfer etc Atten Figure 2 13 5 Attendant Override Operation To override DND state at a Station while the Attendant is receiving a DND tone perform the following Steps 1 Dial or the last digit of the dialed station number OR 2 Press the programmed Camp On FLEX button 3 The DND warning tone will be changed to the Intercom ring back tone at the Attendant Station 4 The Attendant can call a Station in DND state To assign the Camp On FLEX button 1 Press TRANS PGM 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Press t
268. d in the Table A Pemi2a Descriptin____________ Procedure COMMENTS Idle Line Designates Hot Line or Warm Line 1 ITEM refer to Table RANGE 1 4 digits refer to table HOLD SAVE Idle Line Selection Flex Buttons RR A A 001 400 ipLDK 300E bra Ges P To secure a CO Line 01 16 ipLDK 20 01 72 ipLDK 300 300E 01 24 ipLDK 100 To secure a CO Line Group 01 08 ipLDK 20 1000 1599 ipLDK 300E Station ee A SS cion To call an another station 10 37 ipLDK 20 3 1 13 CTI STATION ATTRIBUTE PGM 123 Not in pLDK 20 In this program mode the features modes are set when the CTIU8 30 or CTI module is connected at a Station Refer to the TAPI NT User Guide 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 123 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table _ PONI23 Description _ Procedure COMMENTS CTI Station Mode Determines the CTI station mode FLEX1 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE O Inactive 1 CTI Mode 2 At Mode CTI Station s Baud Rate Determines the baud rate of the CTI Station FLEX2 VALUE HOLD SAVE 16 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 14 SMDR ACCOUNT GROUP PGM 124 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 124 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as
269. d through LAN or SIO 1 LAN I SMDR Author Index If this value is set to ON SMDR data include FLEX19 VALUE VALUES Authorization code index HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON 43 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 19 SYSTEM TIME DATE SETTING PGM 178 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 178 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 178 COMMENTS System Time Sets the System time Hour Min in FLEX1 VALUE 4 digits sequence ex for 11 30 enter HOLD SAVE 1130 System Date Sets the System Date FLEX2 VALUE MMDDYY Month Day Year in sequence ex HOLD SAVE for 27 January 2004 enter 270104 3 4 20 LINKED STATION PAIRS PGM 179 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 179 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 179 COMMENTS Linked Station Pairs Review of the programmed linked Review Linked Station Pairs VALUES Station pairs can be accessed at FLEX1 FLEX1 VIEW flexible button 1 sub menu FLEX2 INPUT Registration and delete of the linked Linked Station Pair Registration 100 147 Station pairs can be set at flexible FLEX2 Master Station Number button 2 sub menu If linked pairs Slave Station Number are assigned to a wired DKT or HOLD SAVE SLT and wireless s
270. de the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 221 2 3 Enter the appropriate index LDT Table Range 000 249 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Meaning of 6 digits each pair 2 digits is the index to the DMT for the each time Zone 1 2 3 The SPEED button is used to validate the remaining index Pam2a IL Description_______ _ Procedure TI COMMENTS LCR Type LCR Code DMT index Day Zone 1 DMT Index Day Zone 2 DMT Index Day Zone 3 Check Password Used to select the LCR type If digits dialed by the User are equal to determined value the digits will be converted and a CO line will be secured according to DMT ADMIN PGM222 Used to set the table index DMT ADMIN PGM222 of the day zone 1 Used to set the table index DMT ADMIN PGM222 of the day zone 2 Used to set the table index DMT ADMIN PGM222 of the day zone 3 Because day zone 2 has 3 different available time zones all three table indices of each time must be selected If this value is set to ON the pLDK System will request the User account code when dialed digits match the LCR code 63 FLEX1 VALUE LCR Type HOLD SAVE FLEX2 VALUE 2 digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX3 VALUE DMT Index 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE FLEX4 VALUE DMT Index 6 digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE FLEX5 VALUE DMT Index 6 digits
271. describes the BLF operation on the networking configuration with the gate keeper In the figure there are four ipLDK networking systems Among them Stations 4100 5111 and 6210 have the BLF button assigned to the Station 1100 The Networking System of Station 1100 transmits the status of the Station to the Gate Keeper periodically And the gate keeper is also periodically multi casts the status of Station 1100 to the 174 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Networking System The BLF button of Stations 4100 5111 and 6210 updates the status of Station 1100 to its BLF LED a Luz u unas STN 4100 LI HE P a Bi j o Fo a STN 5111 o ee E EEE gt STN 6210 CH ot pg Gate Keeper Figure 2 16 16 The BLF Operation including Gate Keeper Operation BLF is automatically updated in the following coordinating ways 1 The BLF manager software periodically receives the status of Stations from whole system 2 The BLF manager software sends broadcast messages to whole the System when the status changes 3 When a Station button LED is illuminated it signifies a station not in the idle state NOTE The UDP port will be used to send the status information and TCP port will be used to send other information
272. dial the CO transit out code the CO Transit Out service is not activated by pressing a CO Line button The Station COS of the networked system is applied for toll restriction At the Master System the Attendant must have CO access authority to make a public connection For CO Transit Out any code will be available using NET Routing Table PGM 324 If there is a conflict between NET Routing Table and System Numbering Plan the System Numbering Plan will have the highest priority If the CO Transit Out code is programmed in the Network Numbering Plan Table then the type value of this entry must be set to PSTN ADMIN program 324 If the Networked System isn t connected to the Master System directly the CO Transit Out code can be transmitted through the other networked Systems transparently by setting the PGM 324 At the Master System the PSTN CO lines must be set PGM 322 If Autho Code COS Usage Option ADMIN program 324 is set when system user of other part dial transit out code password request dvu message will be played Then according to password transit out COS is determined from Autho Code Table If old autho code is used 5 digit authorization code Co to CO COS will be applied When master system set Autho Code COS Usage Option in salve system transit out code and autho code dialed number will be printed in SMDR If Admin of slave system want to hide this number in SMDR Admin can use SMDR Dial Hidden Option If this option is
273. during a conversation There are 2 kinds of call transfer Screened and Unscreened Transfer as described in the following table Feature Transferring method Screened Transfer With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party Transfer is completed without an announcement After dialing the destination and hearing the ring back tone the originator can replace the handset Unscreened Transfer Without Announcement 2 3 2 1 Call Transfer to CO Line Description A Station User may transfer a connected call to a new CO call If an external ISDN party does not answer the transferred call within the designated Transfer Hold Recall time the transferring Station will receive a recall ring If the call remains unanswered the attendant will receive a recall ring for Attendant Recall time After that the CO Line will be disconnected and returned to an idle state Operation Unscreened CO Line Call Transfer perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Intercom dial tone should be heard and the previous call is placed on hold 3 Seize a CO Line and dial the number of the external party that will receive the call 4 Replace the handset and go on hook Screened CO Line Call Transfer Press the TRANS PGM button The Intercom dial tone should be heard and the previous call is placed on hold Seize a CO Line and dial the number of the external party that will receive the call When th
274. dvice of Charge The AOC is the call cost information service that is provided by public ISDN According to the country the standard of AOC type is different This value is used to set AOC type 2 CO ATD Code Max 2 Digits This value is used when ISDN DID call incoming and outgoing case If the received DID digit is matched this value then the call is routed to attendant station If PGM114 FLEX 5 is set to CO ATD and the station makes an outgoing CO call then this value is used as the outgoing station e CLI data 3 Reserved rie GE 5 Reserved CLI Print oR ao value is used to execute the EE print about the incoming CO call If this value is set to ON the CLI of the incoming CO call will be sent to serial MODEM LAN port International Access Max 4 digits This value is used to modify the received CLI Code of the international incoming CO call If this value is set and if station receives the international incoming CO call then this value is inserted in front of the CLI Reserved 8 7 My Area Code Max 6 digits This value is used to set My Area Code The combination of this value and PGM200 FLEX 10 is compared with the received CLI and the received CO call can be judged the local call or the long distance call This value is also used the outgoing CLI data when station makes an outgoing CO call 11 My Area Prefix Code Max 4 digits This value is used to set the My Area Prefix Code normally ze
275. e Choice vc Round In seizing a CO Line among CO line group if this value is set to LAST CHOICE Last available CO Line is seized Otherwise CO line is seized round robin choice DISA Retry Counter When the DISA user fails to call a station or access a feature then DISA user can retry other calls or features within this retry counter If DISA user cannot access appropriately within this counter this call is routed according to DID DISA destination PGM167 e ICM Continuous Dial Tone CONT DISCONT CONT This value sets whether ICM dial tone is continuous or not CO Dial Tone Detect ON OFF When the speed dial is activated if this value is set to ON system detects dial tone using CPT instead of pause timer OFF External Night Ring ON OFF If this value is set to ON when CO incoming call is received and UNA service is activated the call is sent to LBC1 Hold Preference There are two types of Hold System Hold and Exclusive Hold If a call is held as System Hold any station can retrieve that call Otherwise only holding station can retrieve that call If this value is set to ON a conference with multi CO lines is Multi line Conference ON OFF available Print LCR Conversion Digit ON OFF OFF If this value is set to On LCR converted digits are showed on LCD and SMDR data Otherwise original dialed digits are showed WW 8 SYS EXEC ON OFF If this value is set to ON other members will hear warning t
276. e LED of CO Line will light at other stations 2 The CO Line placed on System Hold will flash at all Stations 3 When Exclusive Hold is set in a Station the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer will be initiated After the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is expired the original Station will receive a recall for the duration of the l Hold Recall Timer 4 When a System Hold is set at a station the System Hold Recall Timer will be initiated After the System Hold Recall Timer expires the original station will receive a recall for the duration of the I Recall Timer 5 When the I Hold Recall Timer is expired the Attendant will receive a recall for the duration of the Attendant Recall Timer If the call remains unanswered for after the Attendant Recall time expires the call will be disconnected Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual System Hold Code PGM 106 FLEX B Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Held Individual CO Line Code PGM 107 FLEX 11 C Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Access Held CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX 10 34 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Hold Preference PGM 160 FLEX 8 E Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 1 E Exclusive Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 4 E Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 5 E System Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 6 E Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 FLE
277. e This ADMIN program is used FLEX12 VALUE for selecting whether the HOLD SAVE mode of VOIP board is H 323 SIP or DUAL If it is set to DUAL selected VOIP board serves both H 323 and SIP automatically Used to select the Silence FLEX13 VALUE Detection of VOIP board If HOLD SAVE this value is set to ON VOIB will not send data during periods of silence Echo Canceller If this value is set to ON the FLEX14 VALUE VALUES Echo on the line will be HOLD SAVE detected and cancelled out DTMF Mode Used to set the DIMF mode FLEX15 VALUE of VOIP board HOLD SAVE Silence Detection Inband DTMF 3 RFC2833 DTMF 4 Outband DTMF 1 SIP 2 H 232 VOIP board so very little HOLD SAVE 050 300 sound distortion is apparent Voice Monitor When this value is set to ON FLEX17 VALUE VALUES the System will monitor voice HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Not Used 1 ON H 323 Fast Mode This ADMIN program selects FLEX18 VALUE VALUES 1 FAST Early H 245 This ADMIN program FLEX19 VALUE VALUES determines if Early H 245 HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Mode will be used 1 0N H 245 Tunneling This ADMIN program FLEX20 VALUE VALUES determines if H 245 HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Tunneling will be used 1 ON TOS Precedence This ADMIN program sets FLEX21 VALUE TOS Precedence HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 2 3 bit precedence 3 1 bit Delay 4 1 bit Throughput 5 1 bit R
278. e a Station Hunt Group or VMIB announcement The Ring assignment is applied separately by Day NightWeekend Lunch On Demand Ring Mode by pressing FLEX 1 5 Ring Assignment to Station FLEX ITEM DEST TYPE DEFAULT TYPE 1 Station Range Delay TYPE 2 Hunt Group Station 101 Attendant Station is assigned with TYPE 3 Voice Message delay 0 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 1 Dial 144 1 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed i in the Table A PGM144 _____Description________ Procedure COMMENTS Ring Assignment to To assign a call to the station the delay value FLEX1 Day 1 STATION Station must be entered If a delay value is set the RANGE Value Delay Time call will begin to ring after the delay time has Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE expired To receive incoming calls instantly delay value should be set to 0 To delete a programmed CO ring assignment press the SPEED button instead of entering a delay value Ring Assignment to Hunt Used to assign ring to a Station during night FLEX2 Night 2 HUNT Group mode GROUP 620 629 HOLD SAVE Ring Assignment to VMIB Used to assign a ring to Station during FLEX3 pence 3 e HOLD SAVE Ring Assignment to Used to assign ring to a Networking System FLEX3 Weekend 4 HOLD SAVE 3 2 6 CO LINE ASSIGNMENT DISPLAY PGM 145 In this program mode the f
279. e called party answers announce the call transfer Replace the handset and go on hook Gi NS Condition 1 For this feature CO Lines transferred CO Line and transferring CO Line must be able to detect loop lost or disconnection condition 2 If transferred and transferring CO are analog lines and if the transferred CO Line doesn t have answer information analog CO recalling will not be presented when it is not answered And the call will be disconnected after the Unsupervised Conference timer expires 3 If the transferred line is an ISDN CO call a recall ring will be presented to the CO Line after Transfer Hold Recall time while the line is released 4 If you press the original incoming CO Line button while making transfer to an external number Screened Transfer the outgoing call is disconnected and the original incoming call is connected Admin Programming E Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 7 WI Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 5 E Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 1 E Open Loop Detect Timer PGM 142 FLEX 13 E Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX 6 32 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 2 2 Call Transfer to Station Description A Call can be transferred to another station within the system The transfer can be screened announced or unscreened to an idle busy station or Hunt Group The transferred call
280. e from the programmed CO Group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming Direct CO LCR After dialing a CO Line or CO group code 9 or 0 depending on the nation you are calling from or pressing a CO Line or CO group button LCR can be activated If the dialed digits are matched with a COL LCR code the system will secure a CO Line from the programmed CO group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming When a user selects a CO Line and dials a destination number the system checks the LCR programming and sends the call according to the least cost route according to the ADMIN program Figure 2 2 7 Network A ae 001 i 002 Network B FEA Caller dials 9 phone number ES 008 850 1234 Network C Figure 2 2 7 LCR Routing 850 1234 Assuming the LCR code is 9 the Network A 001 is least cost during the daytime and Network B 002 is least cost during the night The Caller dials the same number and the System automatically routes it through the least cost network Operation To activate Internal LCR perform the following 1 Dial the internal LCR Code after lifting the handset or pressing the MON button on hook dialing can also activate LCR 2 Itis an internal LCR Code if the code is programmed with internal or both in the Leading Digit Table To activate Loop LCR perform the following 1 Dial COL LCR code after dialing the first accessible CO Line or CO Group acce
281. e is divided into 5 parts as listed Description explains the nature of the feature Operation describes how to use the feature Condition explains any requirements or constraints of the feature related to its configuration Reference lists related topic information to aid in understanding the feature Admin Programming descriptions and instructions for setting up System and features o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 SYSTEM FEATURE 2 1 Incoming Call 2 1 1 Ring Assignment Description A pre assigned destination receives incoming calls through the CO Line The destination refer to Figure 2 1 1 can be a Station Ex 1 Hunt Group Ex 2 VMIB Announcement Ex 3 or Net Station Ex 4 If a destination station is busy the incoming call returns a muted ring signal so the station user can pickup the incoming CO Call as needed Station Station VMIB announcement Or Net Station Figure 2 1 1 Ring Assignment Destination Operation Ex 1 When there s an incoming CO Call through CO Lines 1 8 during Day mode the Stations 100 105 as available start to ring instantly If one of the stations answers the call other stations stop ringing After 9 seconds if the call is still not answered station 110 Attendant starts to ring 1 Set CO Service Type as Normal at the ADMIN 140 menu
282. e other station within 3 seconds SLT with MSG wait lamp can also transfer VMIB messages The transferred station should have allowance of VMIB access A user has a possibility to add an additional voice message when he transfers a voice message to another station LDP 6000 7000 with 3 soft keys Admin Programming WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 2 11 7 VMIB Message with CLI Description When an outside caller leaves a message the CLI is saved with message The CLI will be displayed while hearing the message and the station user can make a callback for the CLI Operation Call back during hearing a message 1 Press the soft button CALLBACK 2 Then system dials the displayed CLI automatically Condition This only works with a DKTU that has a 3 soft buttons Though a user makes the callback for the CLI the VMIB message is not deleted 116 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 11 8 No Answer Call to VMIB Description A CO or ICM Call is routed to a station and this Call is not answered by someone while predefined NO ANS TO VMIB time the Call is rerouted to the station s Voice Mail Box Operation 1 Call to Station 100 2 No answer at Station 100 3 NO answer to VMIB timer expired 4 Recording announcement is played 5 After confirm tone is heard the caller can record voice message Condition If a Destination is forwarded
283. e removed ISDN Enblock Send If this value is set to ON Enblock FLEX6 1 On VALUES Sending Mode is applied to outgoing HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Overlap Sending CO calls Mode 1 ON Enblock Sending Mode 23 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 COMMENT CLI Transit If this value is set to ORI the caller CLI FLEX7 1 ORI VALUES will be sent for CLI otherwise the call HOLD SAVE 0 CFW send CLI as the forwarded station CLI is sent call forwarded station s CLI 1 ORI send CLI as the originate caller s CLI Numbering Plan Id This value is used for the Numbering FLEX8 FLEX1 VALUES Plan ld of ISDN calls and the calling FLEX1 CALLING O unknown party number refer to VALUES FLEX2 CALLED 4 ISDN Telephony l ISDN TELEPHON 2 Not Used Y HOLD SAVE i SC 5 Not Used 6 National Standard 7 Private ISDN Call Deflection If this value is set ISDN call deflection FLEX9 1 CALL VALUES Rerouting or rerouting service is available DEFLECTION 0 No Service HOLD SAVE 1 Call Deflection 2 Call Rerouting ISDN 1Digit Remove If this value is set to ON the first digit is FLEX10 1 ON VALUES removed Italy only HOLD SAVE ISDN Call Proc If this value is set to ON Inband info FLEX11 1 ON o eech For call proceeding is available HOLD SAVE taly only CLI Type If this value
284. e set to 00 Message wait reminder tone is not heard at a busy station Message wait reminder tone will continue until all the messages are retrieved When a station attempts to leave a message at a station which has already 5 messages and one of those is not equal to the attempting station error tone will be heard When VMIB access is allowed in the station after recording VMIB message it turns to normal message in the station In this case error tone will not be provided in the attempting station Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Message Wait Callback Enable Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 13 B Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Message Wait Callback Enable Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 14 C Intercom Signaling Mode 2 4 14 D DND 2 4 9 2 4 17 MOH Music On Hold Description When a CO call is placed on hold refer to Ref A the external party will hear music MOH is supplied through various music sources Music can be played to any party on hold The following music sources are available Internal Music External Music SLT MOH Operation The following values are associated with MOH ip LDK 20 ipLDK 100 ip LDK 300 300E O Not assigned O Not assigned O Not assigned 1 Internal Music 1 Internal Music 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 2 4 External Music 2 4 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 5 6 VMIB MOH 5 7 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH 7 11 SLT MOH 8 12 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone 12
285. e system sends the appropriate alarm signal to assigned stations To terminate the alarm signal while the line is in an idle state 1 Dial 5 6 5 a confirmation tone should be heard 2 The alarm signal will be terminated at all assigned stations Condition An external contact should be connected to the alarm input The alarm contacts should be dry no voltage current source connected SLT cannot receive alarm signals Alarm Reset can be programmed on a flexible button When the Alarm Mode is set to Door Bell in PGM163 F3 irrespective of the Once Repeat setting it will only call the assigned keyset keysets for 3 seconds at every operation of the door contact and does not require the Alarm Reset code to be dialed Admin Programming E Alarm Enable PGM 163 FLEX 1 E Alarm Contact Type PGM 163 FLEX 2 E Alarm Mode PGM163 FLEX 3 E Alarm Signal Mode PGM 163 FLEX 4 E Station Alarm Attribute PGM 113 FLEX10 2 4 3 Automatic Privacy Description Automatic privacy allows a Station User to suspend automatic privacy for an existing CO line conversation without invitation By default all conversations that take place on CO lines the Intercom and Conferences are protected by privacy Automatic privacy NOTE ADMIN programming ADMIN program 161 FLEX 5 is required to enable or disable this feature If automatic privacy is enabled when pressing a busy CO line button a busy tone will be heard If auto
286. eat When the value is set to YES FLEX7 VALUE2 the PSTN is not connected HOLD SAVE with the PSTN line directly but connected by another networking system CO ATD Code CLI Used to determine the CLI FLEX8 VALUE VALUES number sent to PX HOLD SAVE 0 NO 1 YES Firewall Routing This ADMIN program FLEX9 VALUE2 determines that this table is HOLD SAVE local network or different network AUTHO Code COS Use When the value is set to YES FLEX10 VALUE COS of Transit out call will be HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 NO 1 YES determined by password of Autho Code Table COS SMDR DIAL HIDDEN When the value is setto YES FLEX11 VALUE Transit Out Code and Dialed HOLD SAVE Number in SDMR data will not be printed at slave system VALUES 0 NO 1 YES 78 0 LOL Dk 20 100 300E Version 3 8 er Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 12 VOIB PGM 340 501 3 12 1 VOIP IP SETTING PGM 340 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 340 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table ll Pcm3aso IL Description____ Procedure COMMENTS IP Address This ADMIN program is used FLEX1 IP Address 12 VALUES for setting the IP address of digits HOLD SAVE Skip VOIP board Gateway Address This ADMIN program is used FLEX2 IP Address 12 Skip for setting the gateway digits HOLD SAVE
287. eature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 18 3 CO Reports Description ipLDK system supports the following report to analyze the traffics of CO line group CO Traffic Summary Report Analysis of traffic status of the CO group by showing applicable statistics Choose one of the following time duration today s peak time yesterday s peak time last hour yesterday s total and today s total It provides the following information fields Peak Hour for All CO Groups The time duration hour in a day that has the largest total usage when summed over all CO groups Group Number A number that identifies each CO group associated with the displayed data Group numbers are displayed in numeric order beginning with the lowest number and continuing to the highest one Number of CO The number of CO line in the group Analysis Start Hour The time 24 hour mode taking the measurement Total Usage Total usage for all CO lines in the CO group It represents the total time that the CO lines are busy during the measurement period Total usage measures each time when a CO line is seized for use by an incoming call or an outgoing call Total Attempt The number of incoming and outgoing call attempt in the CO group Incoming Attempt The number of incoming call attempt in the CO group Outgoing Attempt The number of outgoing call attempt in the CO group Group Overflow The number of calls offer
288. ed FLEX1 0 OFF VALUES Presentation CLIP LCD onthe station s LCD HOLD SAVE Display Connected Line If this value is set to ON the connected party FLEX2 1 ON VALUES identification Presentation CLI is displayed on the Station LCD HOLD SAVE 0 OFF COLP LCD Display 1 ON CLI Redirect If this value is set to RED the forwarding FLEX3 1 RED station no is sent Otherwise the original CLI HOLD SAVE is sent when using networking forward feature CLI MSG Wait If this value is set to ON the Station can FLEX4 1 ON VALUES MS receive CLI messages from an incoming CO HOLD SAVE 0 OFF call when the Station doesn t answer 1 ON EXT or CO ATD If this value is set to ATD CO ATD code is FLEX5 1 ATD VALUES used for outgoing CLI information Otherwise HOLD SAVE 0 EXT the Station number is used as CLI information 1 ATD ADMIN 200 Keypad Facility If this value is set to KEYPAD ISDN Station FLEX6 1 KEYPAD VALUES sends digits in the Keypad Facility after a call HOLD SAVE 0 DTMF is connected Otherwise DTMF is used 1 KEYPAD Long Short If this value is set to LONG the ISDN Station FLEX7 1 LONG VALUES 1 LONG CPN Type Designates the Called Party Number CPN FLEX8 1 Send VALUES type If this value is set to 0 all SO stations of Station number as CPN 0 Do not send CPN the S port will be ringing HOLD SAVE to S0 1
289. ed from a Station 1 Press the flashing DND FOR button or Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 5 land the desired number 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button 40 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To cancel LCD Messages Custom Pre selected from the System Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial0 52 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference A Attendant 2 13 Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Numbering Plan PGM 106 2 4 1 2 Pre selected Message Description A User can choose from pre selected messages 1 to 10 to be shown on the calling party LCD Detail information is entered by each User e g Time Date or Station number The pre selected messages include Message 01 LUNCH RETURN AT HH MM Message 02 ON VACATION RETURN AT DATE MM DD Message 03 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN TIME HH MM Message 04 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT DATE MM DD Message 05 OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN Message 06 CALL Telephone No Up to 17 digits Message 07 IN OFFICE STA XXXX Message 08 IN A MEETING RETURN TIME HH MM Message 09 AT HOME Message 10 ATBRANCH OFFICE Operation To activate LCD Messages Custom Pre selected from a Station or from the System Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial5 1 3 Dial the 2 digit message code 00 or 01 10 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To canc
290. ed to a CO group that are not carried Rejected calls for authorization will not be included Percentage All CO Busy The percentage of time that all CO lines in the CO group are simultaneously in use during the time interval Percentage Fail to Attempt Outgoing The percentage of offered calls that are not carried on the CO group It will not be included unauthorized calls which are denied on the CO group or uncompleted calls carried on the CO group unanswered calls CO Traffic Hourly Report Analysis of CO traffic patterns by showing per hour CO traffic for the past 24 hours Operation To print the CO Traffic Summary Report at main Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0128 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To print the CO Traffic Hourly Report at main Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0129 3 Enter the CO group number 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Site Name Report Type CO Group Summary Report Yesterday Total Date 02 12 04 13 15 Peak Hour For All CO 10 00 Grp Num Anal Total Total Inc Out Grp No COs Hour Usage Seize Seize Seize Ovfl ACB FAO 1 62 1319 1050 269 781 0 0 183 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 18 4 Hardware Unit Reports Description ipLDK system supports the following report to analyze the usage o
291. eed Dial access code 5 5 8 refer to Ref C 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin Condition 1 The CPTU should be installed for dial tone detect 2 System Speed Dial is restricted by Station COS 3 There can be a maximum of 24 digits in a System Speed Dial number including other applicable digits and special function codes 4 Ifyou dial an empty system speed bin an error tone will be heard 5 If you select a CO Line before dialing a System Speed Dial bin number the selected CO Line is used regardless of if there is a programmed CO Line in the System Speed Dial bin number 6 Ifthe speed dial is programmed to access a specific CO line and the line access by the speed dial is busy the system seizes another Co line registered in the same CO line group 7 If all CO Lines in the group are busy a busy tone indication should be heard when attempting to access a System Speed Dial number 8 System Speed Dial numbers are protected when the system is powered OFF Reference A CO Dial Tone Detect ADMIN 160 FLEX 6 B ISDN 2 14 C Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Access Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 15 Admin Programming E Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX 9 E System Speed Zone PGM 232 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX 6 22 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 9 Private Line Description CO Lines in the syst
292. el LCD Messages Custom Pre selected from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the flashing DND FOR button OR 2 Press the TRANS PGM button 3 Dial 5 land the desired number 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition Ifastation assigns call forward while a pre selected message is activated the pre selected message is canceled automatically refer to Ref A Users can leave a message at a DKTU or SLT When leaving a message at the SLT a DND warning tone will be heard when the handset is lifted as a reminder of the message waiting When a pre selected message is selected in a DKTU the DND FOR button will flash as applicable Reference A Call Forward 2 3 1 Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Numbering Plan PGM 106 41 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 2 Alarm Description The system can be programmed to recognize the status of an external contact from a relay open or closed When activated the System will signal programmed Stations with a single tone repeated per 1 min interval or a continuous tone This capability is commonly employed to provide remote alarm signals When used as an alarm the assigned Stations receive the programmed signal To stop the signal the alarm should be deactivated reset from a Station assigned to receive the alarm signal Operation At detecting the Alarm contact th
293. eliability 6 7 Not Used FAX MODE This ADMIN program sets FLEX22 VALUE VALUES FAX Mode HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON 80 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 12 2 Gatekeeper Setting PGM 341 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 341 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGm34a_ Description_____ Procedure COMMENTS GK Usage Used to determine if Gatekeeper FLEX1 VALUE VALUES will be used HOLD SAVE Not Used GK Call Mode Used to set the Call Mode FLEX2 VALUE VALUES 1 GK Reroute GK Open H245 Determines if the H245 port will FLEX3 VALUE be opened HOLD SAVE GK H245 Tunneling Designates if H245 Tunneling will FLEX4 VALUE VALUES be used HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON GK Pre granted ARQ Determines if the endpoint device FLEX5 VALUE VALUES will attempt to initiate a call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON GK Out of Band Flash Will notify using Flash if FLEX6 VALUE Gatekeeper is Out of Gg HOLD SAVE Not Used message HOLD SAVE 3 Digits 0 250 Keesen Address Used to set the Gatekeeper IP VALUES A to register HOLD SAVE 12Digits IP Address GK Find Address Gatekeeper will locate the FLEX9 VALUE VALUES E Used o a HOLD SAVE 4 Digits Port Number GK RAS Signal Port Used to set the Gatekeeper FLEX11 VALUE
294. em 4 If a speed bin is programmed in a Flexible button you may press the Flexible button instead of dialing the speed bin number 5 Toll restriction will be based on the COS of outgoing CO Line 29 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 1 8 Call Forward Follow Me Description Follow Me Call Forward can be activated at the Station or from any Station in the system with Call Forward access lt must be programmed from the Station that you will be forwarded to and a user password must be entered at the User Station first Forwarding Station Operation To activate Follow me Call Forward from any Station 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 0 Dial forwarding Station number from which calls will be forwarded Dial forwarding Station authorization code Replace the Handset and go on hook Or M w To deactivate Follow me Call Forward from the Station User Station Only 1 Verify the line is in an idle state 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 In off hook state 4 Press the DND FOR button and dial To register the authorization code in a station 1 Press TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 31 3 Enter the desired Authorization Code 5 digits 4 Press HOLD SAVE button to save Condition 1 Authorization code should be registered to use Follow me Call Forward Admin Program
295. em can be assigned for exclusive use by one or more DKTU users Private lines are assigned to CO Line Group 00 and an appearance Flexible CO button is required at the DKTU Loop or Pool keys cannot be used Operation A private line will operate as a normal CO Line except access is limited to assigned stations Condition 1 Private line cannot be picked up Admin Programming ECO Line Group PGM 141 FLEX 1 2 2 10 Dialing Service by Prefix code for Ukraine Description When a user dials the number a system checks the prefix code and then if it matched with the prefix code the call is made by the table correspond to prefix code Operation 1 A user dials the co access code and he hears the dial tone from the system 2 If a user dials a System analyzes the dialed digit according to Prefixed Table related to CO line 3 If it matched the prefix code and sending complete option is OFF the Setup message is made by the table corresponds to prefix code 4 If it matched the prefix code and sending complete option is ON the Setup message is made by the table corresponds to prefix code after a user dials max digits 5 If a Max digit is not same as Max digit Enblock inter digit timer is applied within Max digit 6 If it does not match the prefix code the call follows the normal outgoing flow Condition 1 This is applied about only ISDN line 2 Prefix code includes number 0 9 and any digit D with DND but
296. em speed zones jpLDK 300E can be assigned to each station 100 399 ip LDK 300 100 227 ip LDK 100 E 37 ipLDK SA mea If this value is set to ON the speed dial of this zone is checked by the toll table Neen E check Wf If this value is set the station user must enter this value to use the speed dial of each system speed zone 233 Weekly Time Table This ADMIN program is used at the ring assignment feature refer to the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 1 1 The Weekly Time Table can manage ring mode changes automatically and is executed by the system attendant and each intercom tenancy group attendant Up to 16 Weekly Time Tables exist The first table is for the system attendant and others are for the intercom tenancy group attendant The table consists of 7 days Monday Tuesday Wednesday T hursday Friday Saturday Sunday On each day the time zone of DAY NIGHT WEEKEND Lunch Start Lunch End mode can be programmed For example office work starts at 9 00 AM and finishes at 5 00 PM during week day And the weekend starts at 5 00 PM from Friday to Sunday In this case the Weekly Time Table can be set as the following ADMIN program value 1 DayStartTime 0000 2859 0900 gt SSS 2 NightStartTime 0000 2359 1800 gt SSS 3 Weekend Start Time 0000 2359 o o oS 4 Lunch Start Time 0000 2359 J o ooo 5 Lunch End Time 0000 2859 152 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version
297. en responding to the Station the User can answer messages left on the Station in sequential order up to 5 messages Call Back A station can initiate a call back request on a busy station Once that station becomes idle the station that left the call back request will be signaled A station with a message waiting can receive periodic audible reminders of a message waiting This tone is sent to Stations only while idle and is presented over the speaker Operation To leave a message wait at an idle station that does not answer or is in DND mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the CALLBK button a confirmation tone should be heard 2 The CALLBK button LED at the receiving station will flash 3 To answer a message wait perform the following Steps 1 Press the flashing CALLBK button 2 The station that left the message will receive an intercom ring To leave a call back at a busy station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CALLBK button a confirmation tone should be heard 2 Replace the handset 3 When the receiving station hangs up the current call the station leaving the message will receive an intercom ring 4 When the intercom call is answered the callback request will be removed To leave a message wait at a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Hook flash 2 Dial 5 5 6 refer to Ref A a confirmation tone should be heard 3 Replace the handset To answer the message wait perform the follow
298. ence room is activated but there is no member m OFF The conference room is deactivated m Flash 60 IPM The number of members are 1 to 3 E Flash 120 IPM The number of members are 4 to 6 E Flash 240 IPM The number of members are more than 7 n case of Analog Line which is set to a valid Open Loop timer PGM142 FLEX13 a DISA and transferred CO call can be a member of conference PGM 160 FLEX11 option is used as Conference feature Entering and Leaving tone are controlled by PGM 160 FLEX11 Admin Programming WPGM 160 FLEX11 Conference Warning Tone 96 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 8 Paging feature 2 8 1 Internal External All Call and Meet Me Page Description Stations can individually be allowed or denied the ability to make pages This applies to all internal zone paging and all external zone paging A station denied access to paging may still answer a Meet Me Page announcement There is one External Paging Zone available External paging requires an externally provided amplifier and paging system External page can have a relay contact associated to it There are ten internal paging zones available A station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all Stations not assigned to a page group can still make page announcements if allowed in station programming Stations can be assigned to a page group in order to
299. er Designates the amount of time allowed joLDK 20 Only to connect a call when a FAX tone is detected from FAX CO line the call will attempt to be routed to the appropriate FAX Station FLEX14 Minutes 1 digit Range 1 5 HOLD SAVE 49 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 5 4 IN ROOM INDICATION PGM 183 The Supervisor Station can set the In Room Indication for all members in the same Group up to 10 bins can be programmed and each bin has at most 20 members excluding the Supervisor In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 183 3 Enter bin number 01 10 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS In Room Indication The Supervisor Station can Turn ON FLEX1 Station Number Supervisor or OFF the In Room Indication button HOLD SAVE of every member in the same bin In Room Indication Each Member can see the status of In FLEX2 Station Range Member Room Indication button according to HOLD SAVE the Supervisor settings 3 5 5 CHIME BELL PGM 184 The Chime Bell feature enables the Executive Station to call the corresponding Secretary Station by pressing a Chime Bell programmed feature button The Secretary Station will present the Chime Bell ring which cannot be answered This feature is intended for use by the Executive to summon the Secretary to his office I
300. er to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illustrated example of Networking Admin This ADMIN program is used to select CO line group for networking call If networking call number corresponding Networking Numbering Code is entered the networking call route to the destination through this CO Line Group refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illustrated example of Networking Admin CPN information for ISDN IP address for VOIP CPN info 1 CPN info 4 Refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illustrated example of Networking Admin e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PEM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Alternate Dial Bin 2000 2499 Alternative Dial Number System SPD Bin when the networking path has a fatal problem refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illustrated example of Networking Admin Destination MPB ID IP Address IP Address of destination system to support DECT mobility service refer to Refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 17 for DECT mobility service is explanation 7 Digit Repeat YES NO NO If this PSTN number is not connected with PSTN line directly but connected by another networking system set the Digit Repeat to YES refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illust
301. er to Table in Section 2 13 8 of the Feature Description and Operation manual NA Wednesday A Thursday A rr AA Saturday FLEX DEN DEFAULT ______REMARK__ Day Start Time Day ringmode start time HH MM Night Start Time Night ring mode start time HH MM Weekend Start Time Weekend ring mode start time HH MM Lunch Start Time P Lunch ring mode start time HH MM Lunch End Time Ll Lunch ring mode end time HH MM In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 233 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM233 Description____________ Procedure ______ COMMENTS Weekly Time Table Use of the Weekly Time Table is VALUE1 table bin VALUES executed by the System Attendant and VALUE2 Day Mode Range VALUE1 each intercom tenancy Group FLEX1 FLEX7 0 5 ipLDK 20 100 Attendant System Attendant follows VALUE3 Day Night Weekend 00 15 ipLDK 300 300E table O Mode Range FLEX1 FLEX3 VALUE4 Start Time VALUE2 Time zone of DAY NIGHT WEEKEND HH MM HOLD SAVE Flex1 Monday Flex7 Lunch Start Lunch End for 7 days is Sunday programmed VALUES Flex1 Day Flex2 Night Flex3 Weekend Flex4 Lunch Start Flex5 Lunch End VALUE4 4 digits Start Time 12 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 7 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE PGM 234
302. erence room number 571 579 2 Enter 5 digits password for entering conference room optional To join a conference room in case of DID DISA call in using of DID type 2 DID destination is assigned conference room 1 DID DISA call is routed to conference room To Transfer a CO Call to conference room 1 Press the TRANS PGM button at attendant 2 Dial the activated Conference Room Number 571 579 3 Dial the password for entering the conference room optional To check Conference Room status from the Attendant Station 1 At the Attendant Station dial a conference room status code TRANS P GM 2 Dial0 4 7 3 Enter conference room number 1 9 to monitor 4 The Attendant LCD will show the number of members joining the conference room To delete Conference Room forcedly by Attendant 1 Dial a conference room forced delete code TRANS PGM 048 2 Enter the Room number and press HOLD 3 When erasing Conference room at ATD station password is not needed Condition The Maximum number of conference rooms is 9 Up to Maximum 15 3 in pLDK 20 members can enter each room same present conference feature Assigning and entering a password is Optional CONF ROOM status can be checked by ATD how many members are joining the conference room For CO party only ISDN line can enter a conference room If system attendant has a conference room button she can check the status of conference room with LED ON Confer
303. ernal party release the line during that a station is ringing after the VMIB announcement the CLI Message Wait will be remained at the first ringing station Though the call is routed to the station A that is forwarded to the other station B the CLI Message Wait is provided to the original station A The basic rule for CLI Message Wait follows the rule of Message Wait feature If there is no buffer following warning message will be printed out through RS 232C WARNING CLI MESSAGE WAITING BUFFER FULL If the CLI number is programmed in the SPEED BIN No Table with the name and the CLI name display ADMIN programmed then the name will be displayed in the LCD The CLI number and CLI user name is toggled by pressing CALLBK button When a user try to delete the all CLI message at his station and some VMIB voice message wait exist together with CLI message the all CLI delete feature can not be activated Because the priority of the message wait is as following VMIB message wait gt CLI message wait gt VM Group message wait If the duplicated CLI messages are left at a station LCD of the station will display the CLI message with the CLI duplicated counter max 15 and the latest message left time f CLI print admin program set CLI and Station Number are printed through RS 232C port 138 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008
304. erring station and the attendant will receive a recall ring if the call remains unanswered To make an unscreened transfer by SLT perform the following Steps 1 Press and release the hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard 2 The CO Line should be placed on exclusive hold and the Transfer Recall timer will be activated 3 Dial the Station number the call will be transferred to 4 Replace the handset and go on hook To make a screened transfer by SLT Press and release the hook switch the intercom dial tone should be heard The CO Line should be placed on exclusive hold and the Recall timer will be activated Dial the station number the call will be transferred to When the station answers announce the call being transferred Replace the handset and go on hook aoe Condition 1 When the attendant has a DSS and a station of programmed in DSS receives transferred call the LED of DSS button in attendant will flashing 2 When the SLT user is in the screened transfer mode and tries to converse both transferred station and CO Line the user can activate brokers call with hook flash 3 Itis impossible to transfer a call to another busy SLT from a SLT When receiving busy tone SLT user can be connected to the CO Line with hook flash Admin Programming E Transfer Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 7 E Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 5 E Attendant Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 1 NW No Touch Answer PGM 111 FLEX
305. ess the desired destination directly by dialing the Station or Hunt Group number refer to Ref C Operation When a call is answered by a system programmed with CCR a VMIB announcement should be heard by the caller VMIB announcement gives a choice of destination the caller may select a destination based on the information presented in the VMIB Announcement To program the CCR Table as described in Figure 2 1 5 perform the following Steps 1 Select CCR Table 01 to match with the VMIB announcement number at ADMIN 228 2 Press FLEX 1 to set the Sales Dept The Flexible button number should be the same as the dialing digit number Select Destination Type as Hunt Group by dialing 2 Enter the desired Hunt Group Number 620 Press FLEX 2 to set the Technical Dept Select destination type as VMIB by dialing 2 or 3 and enter Announcement Number 02 Press FLEX 10 to set the Operator Select the destination type as Station by dialing 1 and enter the desired Station Number 101 e a NOTE If Destination 04 VMIB Drop is selected the call will be dropped after the Announcement is played JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Pete Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To use DISA CCR perform the following Steps E Ee Verify the CO Service Type is set to Normal at ADMIN 140 Press FLEX 1 Verify the DISA Service is set to ON at ADMIN 140 Press FLEX 2 refer to Ref C Set VMIB Message Number t
306. et 10 37 ipLDK 20 at flexible button 2 sub menu PA Linked Station Pair Delete 2 STA E 4 3 16 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM DON FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 180 Attendant Recall Timer 00 60 2 digits 01 min If a recalled call arrives at the attendant Station the attendant may not answer the call The system will disconnect the call if the attendant does not answer the call This ADMIN program sets the amount of time before system disconnects the call Call Park Recall Timer 000 600 3 digits 120 sec Setting the amount of time before a call placed in a call park location will recall at the station placing the park Camp on Recall Timer 000 200 3 digits 030 sec When a station transfers to busy station by Camp On if the transferred to station does not answer the call the call will recall to the transferring station after the set time passes This ADMIN program set the appropriate time Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 300 3 digits 060 sec Select the amount of time before a call placed on system hold will recall the station placing the hold l Hold Recall Timer 000 300 3 digits 030 sec When a recalled call is not answered the call will recall to attendant after setting time passes Therefore This ADMIN program set the appropriate time Select the amount of time before a call recalls the attendant System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 3 digits 030 sec Determines the am
307. etworking CAS Enable Enable Centralized attendant in master FLEX6 VALUE VALUES system CAS should be disabled HOLD SAVE Networking VPN Enable Reserved FLEX7 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Networking CC Retain Mode This value is used to set the networking supplementary signaling type of the call completion If this value is set to ON the signaling of call completion retain mode is executed 76 FLEX8 VALUE HOLD SAVE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 11 2 NETWORKING SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTES PGM 321 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 1 Dial 321 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table DON ZIL Description__________ Procedure COMMENTS Networking Transfer Mode Used to select the signaling FLEX1 VALUE refer to VALUES type for networking transfer VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 JOIN mode 1 REROUTE BLF messaging Range 0000 9999 Default 9000 HOLD SAVE BLF messaging Range 0000 9999 Default 9001 HOLD SAVE for the BLF manager Address 12 digits HOLD SAVE BLF status messaging Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE Used to set the multicast IP FLEX6 Multicast IP MO address for BLF service Address 12 digits HOLD SAVE Net Trans Fault Recall Used to designate the FLEX7 Seconds 3 digits Timer amount of time for the Ra
308. eue Count 18 Group Name Maxi Group name can be assigned Assign digit VMIB Announce 000 999 3 015 sec If the call is not answered during this timer the system will play the VMIB announcement that is programmed at PGM191 FLEX 3 UCD Group 1 Timer VMIB Announce 000 999 3 000 sec The second VMIB announcement can be played if the call continues to wait beyond the 2 announcement timer The played VMIB announcement can be programmed at PGM191 FLEX 4 VMIB Announce 00 70 00 Not This is used to play VMIB announcement Location 1 Assigned when the VMIB announce 1 timer expires Location 2 VMIB Announce 00 70 00 Not This is used to play VMIB announcement Assigned when the VMIB Announce 2 timer expires This second VMIB announcement can be played repeatedly according to PGM191 FLEX 5 and 6 value This is used to repeat VMIB Announce 2 2 Repeat when the timer expires 000 Not repeat i ill ee 2 Repeat E D VMIB Announce 2 Repeat 141 Ion 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 Po ITEM Le SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK The call to a station in the group will continue to route until answered or each Station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin Overflow Destination Overflow Timer 00
309. f 5000 If this value is set to OFF only total calls total metering count and total cost for individual Station information will be recorded SMDR Dial Digit Hidden If this value is set non zero value the FLEX8 VALUE Range 0 VALUES printed digits from right or left will be 9 HOLD SAVE 0 9 replaced with a symbol up to the designated value The direction of right or left can be set at ADMIN program 177 FLEX 13 SMDR Currency Unit For easy identification of call costs the FLEX9 VALUE 3 currency unit can be entered with 3 characters refer to Keyset alphabet characters to be printed in Map HOLD SAVE front of call charge amount 42 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 e Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Keyset Map 1 Blank K2 K3 SMDR Cost Per Unit The metering pulse used to measure call cost per unit FLEX10 001000 HOLD SAVE SMDR Fraction This value means the decimal position point of the FLEX11 VALUE cost per unit pulse Range 0 5 HOLD SAVE CO call more than this value time is served SDMR Range 000 250 HOLD SAVE SMDR Hidden Digit If this value is set to RIGHT SDMR digit hiding is FLEX13 0 Left VALUES executed in the right to left direction ex dialed HOLD SAVE number 1234567890 would be shown as 12345 If this value is set to LEFT SDMR digit hiding is executed to left to right direction ex dialed number 1
310. f HW unit resources of the system such as Tone Receiver and VMIB H W Usage Summary Report Analysis of whether the system has enough H W unit resources such as DTMF Receiver VMIB and CPTU by showing the statistics Choose one of the following time duration today s peak time yesterday s peak time last hour yesterday s total and today s total It provides the following information fields Type The type of H W unit being measured Number of Unit The total number of installed H W unit Analysis Start Hour The starting time of the last hour or the hour with the highest Peak Req measurement Total Requests The system wide total number of requests by call processing for DTMF CPTU VMIB during the listed hour It is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request Total Demand The system wide total number of requests that are denied because there is no available H W unit during the listed hour Operation To print the H W Unit Usage Summary Report at main Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0127 3 Select Measurement Time type 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Ex Site Name Report Type H W Unit Usage Summary Report Yesterday Total Date 02 12 04 13 15 Unit Num Anal Total Total Type Unit Hour Req Denied VMIB 4 ms 27 0 DTMF 13 is 27 0 CPTU 12 is 27 0 184 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 19 S
311. f the ROM files you want to send are invalid pLDK MPB software upgrade will not be started n ipLDK 100 300 300E DRAM should be installed on the MPB to use this feature 186 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 19 2 LAN Description The ipLDK MPB software can be upgraded through LAN interface by ipLDK upgrade program in a remote PC Operation To upgrade the LAN software perform the following Steps 1 Connect the LAN cable to the PC LAN card 2 Run the ipLDK PC Upgrade program 3 Select the ipLDK system to be upgraded 4 Click on the OK button system Selection Upgrade LOK Series System E E x Select the System C LDK 300 LDK 300E LDK 100 e LDK 20 Cancel 5 Select the port type TCP Connection 6 Click on the Select button Connection Type Upgrade LOR Seres System i xX Static C EEN Connection pm C Serial Connection C Modem Connection onnection ou selecte Your PC must have LAM card Or you cant progress this work Terminate 7 Enter the ipLDK IP Address Admin Password and path of the Binary File 187 O JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Pete Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 User Information Upgrade LOK Seres system Remote Site Info System IP Address Admin Password serial Port Ou File Info Binary File 1 BIN Quit Settings
312. f this value is set to OFF the station gets the incoming call directly Tone is not heard Line Length SHORT This feature is used to distinguish the line SHORT Short 0km length when the distance between the LONG FAR Long 0 3km stations and the station boards is too Far 3 7 5km variable SAF only pre PT This value means the scroll speed of SMS vsa senor speen SCROLL SPEED or broadcasting notice message Only for LKD 30DH Ee Ae Bess SLT blocked after pressing FLASH button I TIME RST ON OFF If this value is set to ON the conversation time of incoming CO call is limited After Call Cut Off Timer PGM113 FLEX12 is expired the call is forced to disconnected eo pmm Account wal If this value is set to ON an authorization code is required when she accesses CO line ere EES t If this value is set to ON CLI type 2 is RESERVED serviced for CID SLT a DEE mer open the door using the door SE code can login at the dummy station ll i bedengt bg If this value is set to ON this station can station If this value is set to ENABLE the assigned station users can program ADMIN EN DIS DISABLE ADMIN Database This feature is only available at DKTU STA 100 Enabled as default es em veer ee user can use VMIB 114 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 MC FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Group Listening EN DIS DISABLE If this value is set to ENAB
313. ferred CO call can be a member of conference This feature terminates when the deactivation code is dialed or Forced Delete PGM code by Attendant When a user enters a conference room previous entered member can hear warning tone This warning tone will be presented to All members included as CO Conference Room Members When a user exits a conference room other room members will hear a warning tone also Entering Tone is same as Conference feature tone and Leaving Tone is another Leaving beep tone is provided to each Station and CO If this tone feels unpleasant PGM 160 F11 CONF WARN TONE option can be made OFF Each Conference Room can be assigned to a DSS button each Conference Room button will flash or illuminate steady according to the number of conference room members LED flashing is enabled for All Stations as well as the ATD Station 95 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To activate the conference room feature perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM 2 Dial4 3 3 Dial the Conference Room Number 1 9 4 Dial 5 digit password optional 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to save changes To deactivate a conference room 1 Press the TRANS PGM 2 Dial 4 4 3 Dial Conference Room Number 1 9 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To join a conference room in case of an internal call 1 Dial the activated conf
314. fers to the call originator The Forwarded Station the new destination of the call is rerouted to the Forwarded to Station by a Forwarding Station the Station forwarding the call In Figure 2 16 5 1 the outside caller is the forwarded Station the forwarded to Station is Station 202 and the Forwarding Station is Station 100 Refer to Operation for a detailed description of using the Feature Call Flow Stee Fow O Station 100 sets forward to 202 Outside Caller dials in Station 100 Call is forwarding to Station 202 Station 202 rings instead of 100 Conversation PSTN oriISD EN nn A nan i t _ Internet gt E E i m P m Step 4 Figure 2 16 5 1 Unconditional Net Call Forward Operation Operation To activate Net Call Forward 1 Press the MON button and the DND FOR button 2 Dial the Net Call Forward code 1 and dial a Station number on another networking system the DND FOR button will flash and a confirmation tone will be provided 3 If there is an incoming call to the net call unconditional Forwarding Station the call is immediately routed to a Forwarded to Station and the Forwarded to Station will ring 4 When the Forwarded to Station is answered the Call Forwarded and Forwarded to Station will be connected 162 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation
315. g CO to CO calls using DISA or off net call forward 66 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend Enable PGM 160 FLEX18 E Unsupervised Conference Timer Extend Code PGM 109 FLEX 6 E Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM182 FLEX 6 2 4 32 Forced Hands free Mode Description A DKTU caller can temporarily change the answering mode of the called party DKTU tone mode gt hands free mode Operation To activate forced hands free mode perform the following Steps 1 During a tone mode call to a DKTU 2 When the user hears a ring back tone dial the forced hands free code 3 The called party DKTU will stop ringing and the speaker and microphone will be activated operate as hands free mode Condition Ifthe DKTU is changed to hands free mode the connection tone will be provided and the voice path is connected lf the called party DKTU is set to linked pair station the answer mode of the called party will be not changed If the calling party DKTU is set a linked pair station the calling party DKTU can use the forced hands free mode If called party DKT is set a Mobile Ext this feature will be not applied Only the calling party DKT of which value of PGM 111 19 is ON can use this feature After connection related feature with hands free mode is not applied ex call back
316. g Rack Slot assignment the user should reset the system manually NOTE2 Board Type Code Table Board ID for ipLDK 100 300 300E ee BEA ME ee MON BUE DTIB12 PRIB DTIB24 BRIB SLIB6 LCOB4 33 SLIB12 LCOB8 34 WTIB DIDB 35 SLIB2E BWDIDB 36 DSIB TLIB 37 SLIBC EMIB CSLIB12E AC15 39 DCOB VOIB NPRIB 42 ipLDK 100 NBRIB 8 43 ipLDK 100 NBRIB 4 44 ipLDK 100 CLCOB8 RDIB EMIB8 CLCOB4 Board ID for ipLDK 20 STA CODE CODE STA amp COL CODE Etc CODE STIB2 52 STIB1 53 NOTE ipLDK 20 has WDIB WDIB is combination of DTIB4 and WTIB User should assign DTIB4 by code 11 and WTIB by code 15 manually 107 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 3 WTIB PORT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT FLEX mem RANGE Ger IpLDK 300 300E ipLDK 100 ipLDK 20 WTIB Port 008 192 08 80 00 16 When ipLDK 100 has one 102 Number Multiple of 8 Multiple of 8 rack 08 40 Assignment 4 3 4 LOGICAL SLOT ASSIGNMENT Pen FLEX mm DEFAULT REMARK _Z _ 103 1 COL Board RefertoNoe 2 L IABoand RefertoNote 3 VWMIB_ Assigned O o NOTE If the DIP switch of the manual board detection Pole 8 of DIP Switch ipLDK 100 300 300E Pole 4 of DIP DIP Switch is ON the system will detect the logical slot assign in sequence with increasing order automatically If the Pole 8 of DIP Switch 4 in ipLDK 20 is OFF the logical slot assignment must be entered at each bo
317. ge 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM115 Description Procedure COMMENTS Flex Button Assignment Each Flexible Button in a station can be 1 FLEX1 03 VALUE assigned as desired refer to Table TYPE No Range 01 1 F01 F24 11 02 Group 2 F25 F48 Number HOLD SAVE Button Type for Flexible Button Assignment we DB N E a een 1 User Key User can program by button programming procedure empty 2 CO xx Button 001 400 001 200 01 40 01 16 COLine CO Grp xx 01 72 01 72 01 24 01 08 COLine Group koor Coo eee eee 1000 1599 100 399 100 227 10 37 EGSA TEC ECON EEE ETE E E 00 99 00 99 00 99 00 99 SYS SPDxxxx 2000 6999 2000 4999 2000 3499 2000 2499 FLEX NUM Num Plan Code Numbering Plan Code of ADMIN 106 amp 107 AAA Net DSS Button When using Networking feature MSN Button MSN No MSN Number 12 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Initial Button Configuration FLEX 12 Button Digital 24 Button Digital 4 CO 4 CO 4 8 CO 8 CO 8 EX CT COS a REENEN 3 1 7 STATION COS PGM 116 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 116 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM116 Descriptin_____________ Procedure COMMENTS Station
318. ge return If line feed mmmm VM port number H Action code for recording xxxxxxxxx extension which try to record b ascii space Condition During the recording feature is enabled the RECORD button will flash at 240 ipm and if it is disabled the RECORD button will be extinguished Itis not available to SLT Recording operation is canceled when station goes off hook press RECORD button again press FLASH button or CO party hangs up This feature is available on SMDI mode only not DTMF mode Not available to intercom call recording If the system has VMIB the conversation will be recorded to VMIB If Pole 3 of DIP SW1 of MBU is set to Off down position and system has VMIB the conversation will be recorded to VMIB in ipLDK 20 If Pole 5 of DIP SW of MPB is set to Off down position and system has VMIB the conversation will be recorded to VMIB in ipLDK 100 300 300E Admin Programming m Two Way Recording PGM 112 FLEX 10 112 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 11 3 2 Two way Recording via VMIB Description This feature allows a station to record a conversation on the mailbox by pressing a RECORD button while the station is talking with CO party The Figure 2 11 3 2 describes the operation of Two way Recording Ex CO Incoming Call n Se m LEE lt P
319. ger than 5 digits the key is not needed 5 A message should be heard describing the number of messages present in the inbox 6 Press the appropriate number refer to values 1 to retrieve voice messages 2 to listen or change user greeting 3 to release Call Forward to VMIB mode to exit remote VMIB Control mode To listen to the received messages 1 Dial 1 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode 2 The recorded time date and recorded message should be heard 3 Press the appropriate dial number refer to values 110 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 to listen to the current message again to listen to the next message to delete the current message to delete all received messages 1 2 3 4 To change the user greeting 1 Dial 2 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode 2 While the User greeting is being played press the key to record a new user greeting 3 Record the new user greeting 4 Press the key when the recording is finished and then the step will go to the main menu To release Call Forward to VMIB mode 1 Dial 3 in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode 2 The VMIB forward mode of the station is released To exit VMIB Control mode 1 Dial in the main menu of Remote VMIB control mode Condition Pressing key while operating in a sub menu the system will go to the main control menu
320. going Access Description The Attendant can take a particular CO line out of service CO calls will not be able to be made through the CO line incoming CO calls are not affected Operation To set a CO line in out of outgoing service from the Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 DialO7 3 3 Press the desired CO line FLEX button a confirmation tone will be heard when the status in or out of outgoing service of the selected CO line is changed 4 Press the MON button to return to idle Condition Any attendant can use this feature The LED of CO line FLEX button which is out of outgoing service is flashing in attendant station but lightening in other stations To release the out of outgoing service press the flashing CO line FLEX button in attendant station Though the desired CO line is busy the attendant can still make the CO line out of outgoing service The out of outgoing service feature will take effect after the CO line goes to idle 130 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 10 ICM Box Music Selection Description The attendant can select the music channel source to provide the intercom Box Operation To select the music source from the Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial O 7 5 3 Dial the music source 00 12 music source will be heard bu
321. groups Stations in a Group are allowed access to other Stations based on the allow access of the calling Group FLEX DEFAULT RANGE ______ REMARK Attendant Station of assigned Intercom Tenancy 1 STA No Group FLEX1 5 ipLDK 20 100 Intercom Tenancy Groups allow to access for the 2 GROUP 01 FLEX1 15 ipLDK 300 300E assigned groups When a call to another intercom Tenancy Group is allowed CO line or Station calls pick up and transfer features are activated Condition When a call to another Intercom Tenancy Group is denied call pick up cannot be activated It is not allowed for stations to have the same station numbers regardless of if belong to different intercom tenancy groups The attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group can be any station in the system and it is not affected by Intercom Tenancy Group access When the Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group sets the Day Night Weekend mode it will affect only their assigned Intercom Tenancy Group Reference A Pick Up 2 3 4 Admin Programming E Intercom Group Number PGM 111 FLEX 13 E Intercom Tenancy Group PGM 120 52 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 16 Message Wait Call Back Description Message Wait A station user can notify another Station User that he wishes to talk to the user The notified station user can return the call or a message left at the station Wh
322. h FLEX10 VALUE EN MOD this port Range 1 11 oia HOLD SAVE _COMS5 MISB CTI CTI can be connected through this FLEX11 VALUE EE port Range 1 11 07 TELNET2 HOLD SAVE 08 TELNET3 Remote Diagnostic Remote Diagnostic data can be FLEX12 VALUE printed through this port Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE 09 ISDN 10 NET PCAdmin 11 NET PCAttendant 12 NET CTI 13 NET Remote 3 4 17 PULSE DIAL RATIO PGM 176 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 176 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 176 COMMENTS Pulse Dial Ratio Pulse dial speed ratio is set only for FLEX1 0 refer to VALUES 10 PPS VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 10PPS 60 40 1 10PPS 66 33 2 10PPS 50 50 Not in pLDK 20 41 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 18 SMDR ATTRIBUTES PGM 177 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls As an assignable database option if All Call Record is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are all provided If only Long Distance is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed will be connected In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 177 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Ta
323. h security dialing 1 Press SPEED button 2 Enter the Speed dial bin number which was programmed with dialing security Condition Dialed phone numbers with Dialing Security are included in SMDR information refer to Ref B This feature applies to transferred or recalled CO calls This feature applies to redial calls refer to Ref C Reference A Speed Dialing 2 2 8 B SMDR 2 12 C Redial 2 2 8 46 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 9 DND Do Not Disturb Description Placing a station in DND eliminates incoming outside line ringing intercom calls transfers and paging announcements While in DND the station will not receive calls on CO lines The Attendant can override a station in DND see Ref A Stations in DND can continue to make normal outgoing calls Station users can individually have the ability to place their station in DND ADMIN program 114 By default DND is available at all stations Operation To activate DND from a DKTU 1 Press the DND FOR button To deactivate DND from a DKTU 1 Press the DND FOR button again Condition Pressing the DND FOR button during call forward or a pre selected message will not activate DND call forward or the pre selected message will be released When a Station assigned to preset call forward is in DND mode and an incoming call is received at the next station by ring ass
324. hange Condition This feature is only available in National Keypad Protocol This feature can only activated by using a preprogrammed flexible button f the CFU feature is activated the CFU Activate with Destination key LED will flash at 30 IPM This feature is supported only on an access basis only the Attendant Station can activate this feature if another Station attempts to activate this feature an error tone will be heard If this feature is activated incoming CO Calls will be unconditionally transferred to the predefined destination 146 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 8 4 Memo Tel pLDK 20 Only CFU Italy national protocol Description Memo Tel is a feature used for transferring incoming CO Calls to the MSG Storage System of the PX when the CO Line is busy or there is no answer This feature can be selectively activated for normal cases busy or no answer or only for no answer calls The User can check messages left in the PX ITEM Feature Code A REMARK ___ Memo Tel Normal Deactivation Code FLASH 24 National only Memo Tel Normal Activation Code FLASH 25 NOTE Flexible button programming is available LNR Idle No Answer MSRS Message Storage and Retrieve System Operation To activate Memo Tel from an Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the CO key 2 Press the programmed key for
325. has a flexible numbering code 2 as its Pick Up code then Station numbers that start with the digit 2 can not be used The destination IP address is needed to route E PGM 324 FLEX 4 is used to set the IP address of the destination System s VOIB E Configure the VOIP Networking between System A amp B as listed At system A Enter ADMIN program 105 SPEED 100 199 HOLD At system B Enter ADMIN program 105 SPEED 200 299 HOLD Admin Programming ECO Service Type PGM 140 E ISDN CO Line Attributes DID Conversion Type PGM 143 m DID Receive Digit and DID Digit Mask PGM 146 E Flexible DID Table PGM 231 E Networking CO Line Attributes Group and CO Type PGM 322 158 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 3 Identification Service Description Between Networking Systems a Station Name can be transmitted via the networking signaling messages Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP the name of a Station is transmitted when an outgoing call is made Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP the name of station is transmitted when an incoming call is answered If the opposite side Networking System is received the name of station then it is displayed on LCD Operation 1 CNIP and CONP operation is executed whenever the station of networking system makes a call and it answers the incoming call Condition
326. he TRANS PGM button 4 Dial 8 5 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition f the attendant with a transferred CO call overrides a station in DND state and the station has the CO or LOOP button attendant can transfer the CO call to the station in DND state f the transferred to station has no the CO or LOOP button the CO call will be recalled to the attendant immediately Reference W DND 2 4 9 127 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 6 Attendant Recall Description If the recalled CO call transfer hold is unanswered by destination station the CO call will be directed to the attendant refer to Ref A Ref B The Attendant will receive the recall ring for a time equal to the Attendant Recall Timer ADMIN program 180 FLEX 1 If the attendant doesn t answer the CO call for a time equal to the Attendant Recall Timer the CO call will be disconnected Condition If the attendant of intercom tenancy group is not assigned the CO call is recalled to the System Attendant When a call in exclusive hold is recalled to the Attendant the call is placed on system hold refer to Ref A Private CO line will not be recalled to attendant refer to Ref D Reference A Hold 2 3 3 1 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 D Private Line 2 2 9 Admin Programming E Attendant Recall Time
327. he Deny Table the number is restricted Otherwise the number is allowed General Conditions f Incoming CO Call Toll Check is set the COS rule is applied when the station dials digits after answering incoming CO calls Admin Programming E Station COS PGM 116 ECO line COS PGM 141 FLEX 2 E CO to CO COS PGM 166 E Toll Exception Table PGM 224 EH Canned Toll Tables PGM 225 E incoming Toll Check PGM 161 FLEX 16 81 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 5 5 System Speed Zone Description Up to 10 speed number zones can be defined Speed bins amp Stations can be allocated to these zones Toll checks based on COS can be applied to zones refer to Ref A Only Stations allocated to zones can access these bins Speed bins not allocated to zones can be accessed by all Stations and no toll checks are applied Reference A COS 2 5 4 Admin Programming E Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX 9 E System Speed Zone PGM 232 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX 6 2 5 6 Walking COS Description This feature allows temporarily override of the toll restriction and allows toll call from previously toll restricted phones The authorization code refer to Ref A can be used as a verified account code for SMDR refer to Ref B Operation To activate Walking COS from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2
328. he binary file and the password for upgrade And press the Next button User Information Upgrade LOK Series System E ioj xj Remote Site Info System ISDN Dial Mo Admin Password serial Port File Info Binary File Test Method 7 Inthe Next window press Start button You can see the ipLDK MPB software upgrade process 8 When the ROM file sending is finished in the PC ipLDK will erase the previous ROM data and start to fill ipLDK ROM area with the received ROM file Condition The ISDN card in the PC should support CAPI Common ISDN Application Programming Interface 2 0 which is a standard interface specification devised to use ISDN channels in the PC Also it should support HDLC as a B channel protocol And CAPI2032 DLL should be found in the System directory of Windows which means that the CAPI driver for Windows is properly installed If the line is DID type you should make a call to any station or station group except ISDN station S port Only the call in this case will be accepted by ipLDK system When the line is released while upgrading process just dial the phone number again If the line was properly disconnected it will be connected immediately While upgrading process other features do not work in the system When the ipLDK MPB software upgrade is finished without completing you can retry to upgrade by doing the whole process again I
329. he desired name 3 When the appropriate name is displayed move the cursor so it points directly at the name 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to make a call To register the name in SLT perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 5 6 3 refer to Ref A a confirmation tone should be heard 3 Dial 7 4 Name Register code 4 Enter the name up to 12 letters refer Figure 2 4 21 5 Hook flash to save Condition Dial by name is only available on a DKTU with LCD The name must be registered to use Dial By Name f an invalid Group is dialed an error tone will be heard In SLT and DKTU with no LCD only the station name can be entered The speed dial without name will not be listed by Dial By Name Reference A Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Programming Mode Enter Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 20 58 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 22 Station Programming Description The system supports multiple hierarchical menus based on station programming Users can program Stations by selecting the desired menu refer to table The Attendant also can program a station and the Attendant Station the same way refer to Ref A Station Programming Menu AYTO AO 18 SMS MSG DISPLAY 1 RING A ENBLOCK MODE ONO JI Tepic BELL IP Keysetony 8 CO BELL IP Keysetomty EFC TACOS DOWN ee gt lt 12 COS RESTORE
330. he ring mode is used to supply a different destination of CO call except Day mode Night mode Weekend mode There are two way of changing ring mode as followings Automatic change of ring mode can be set in Weekly Time Table PGM 233 Manual change of ring mode can be set in ATD station The ring mode in Automatic Ring mode is classified as Day mode or Night mode or Weekend mode or Lunch mode according to Weekly Time Table ADMIN program 233 Only attendant can change the ring mode If a user presses the DND FOR button at the attendant station user can select 1 to 6 Day to Lunch Operation To change Day On demand Night Weekend Automatic Ring mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the DND FOR button at the Attendant Station and choice ring mode 1 to 6 1 DAY 2 NIGHT 3 ON DEMAND 4 WEEKEND 5 AUTO RING MODE 6 LUNCH To activate automatic ring mode in the Attendant Programming Mode 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 07 4 3 Dial 5 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to activate Automatic ring mode To deactivate automatic ring mode with Attendant Programming mode 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0 7 4 3 Dial 1 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to deactivate Auto ring mode the type of time will be changed to DAY mode Condition The default value of Weekly Time Table is as follows entry number 00 The first table entry 00 is for main attendants and others 01 15 are for intercom tena
331. hold state R Direct call DID to a station but the call was disconnected before the station answers Or direct call to station A but station A does not answer and the call was forwarded to station B The call was disconnected before station B answers Operation To print the lost call count of record perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0117 at Attendant station 3 The lost call count of record is printed in the PC connected in the system To clear the lost call count of record 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 0118 at Attendant station The lost call count is cleared is printed and the lost call count time is restarted Condition 1 This SMDR record is sent to RS 232C automatically as soon as the event takes place 2 The SMDR record about lost call is not saved Only the records are counted 3 To activate this SMDR record the SMDR field must be set in ADMIN programming Reference A Hunt Group 2 6 Admin Programming BSMDR Print Enable PGM 177 FLEX 2 E Long distance All Call Recorded PGM 177 FLEX 3 E Print Lost Call PGM 177 FLEX 6 122 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 Attendant Service Description An attendant properly controls the incoming calls by transferring calls and accessing the unanswered calls etc Attendants can change simple settings of whole system or
332. ices will be routed using the DID route table The rules and conditions of DID and still apply to ISDN Called Number service on ISDN lines The bearer channels B channels transport voice information to and from the Central Office The data channel D channel controls all signaling information for the bearer channels 2 14 1 Call Deflection Rerouting Description ipLDK system is supporting ISDN SS CD CR ISDN Supplementary Service Call Deflection Rerouting The protocol standard about CD CR can be referred the ETS 300 202 204 205 206 207 Operation To activate ISDN SS CD CR about CO lines perform the following Steps 1 In ADMIN program 143 enter the CO lines range for ISDN SS CD CR 2 Press the FLEX button 9 3 Set ISDN SS CD or CR field value to ENABLE Station Off net Call Forward at Station Press On Off Press DND FWD Dial 5 or 6 Enter the Speed Dial Bin Press the Hold Save button NOTE If there is an ISDN incoming call through the CO line that sets ISDN SS CD CR ADMIN PGM 143 FLEXO9 then the call deflection rerouting request message is sent with the station number saved in the speed dial bin to use the new divert destination Sel Condition 1 This feature can be used within only the ISDN network that supports ISDN SS CD CR service Admin Programming ISDN SS Call Deflection Rerouting PGM 143 FLEX9 133 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operatio
333. ignment refer to Ref B Attendant can override a station which is in DND by Camp on or Intrusion refer to Ref A Attendant may cancel DND for one or all stations Reference A Attendant Intrusion Override 2 13 4 2 13 5 B Ring Assignment 2 1 1 Admin Programming E Do Not Disturb PGM 111 2 4 10 One Time DND Do Not Disturb Description One Time DND allows a Station User to turn off muted ringing that occurs when off hook handset or MON while on another call The station while off hook depresses the DND button which eliminates muted ringing When the station goes on hook the DND button is extinguished and DND is cancelled Operation To activate One time DND from a DKTU 1 While in an off hook state or connecting a CO line or intercom call press the DND FOR button 2 The station is in DND the DND FOR button LED should light 3 When the station goes to an idle state DND is released at the station the DND FOR button LED will be extinguished Admin Programming E Do Not Disturb PGM 111 FLEX 3 47 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 11 Flash Description CO Flash Provides station users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call without hanging up A FLASH button is located on each DKTU The flash type and duration of each CO line are assigned by the system Flash on ICM Call T his featu
334. ignments in the Exception Table C amp D are monitored for allow and deny numbers The assignments in the Exception Table A B C 8 D are monitored for allow and deny numbers 13 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 8 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS PGM 117 In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 117 Enter the appropriate Station Range Press Flex button at ipLDK 300 300E Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table o o No CO Line Group Each station has accessibility to the CO Line VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE1 Group which could be changed by Admin Range FLEX01 Flex1 Check 01 24 Programming Accessibility is default for all FLEX24 Flex2 Check 25 48 Stations and is available for multiple CO Line Toggle Flex3 Check 49 72 Groups HOLD SAVE IPLDK 300 300E Only VALUE2 FLEX01 ON access CO Group 1 3 1 9 PAGE ZONES PGM 118 119 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button Dial PGM Number 118 or 119 Enter the appropriate Station Range Press Flex button at ipLDK 300 300E Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table St gt SS mn o PomM Description __________ Procedure IT COMMENTS PGM 118 Internal Page Each station can be assigned to internal VALUE1 VALUE2 VALUE1 Zone page zone toggle HOLD SAVE
335. igure 2 9 1 Ringing in Executive Secretary pairs Operation To activate unconditional Executive Secretary Transfer 1 To transfer every calls to a Secretary unconditionally press the DND FOR button from the Executive s DKTU 2 In Korea or Israel or India every ICM call to an Executive is forwarded to his Secretary automatically even if the Executive is in idle state 3 If CO Call To SEC feature is set to ON CO incoming call is automatically forwarded to Secretary 4 If Call EXEC If SEC DND feature is set to ON and the secretary is in DND state see Ref 1 incoming call is not forwarded see Ref 4 to Secretary 5 In Korea or Israel or India only the other Executive of equal or higher grade can make an ICM call directly to the idle Executive 101 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition Secretary can pass a call to Executive when in DND state refer to Ref A using the camp on feature refer to Ref B One Executive can have multiple Secretaries within maximum pairs and one secretary can be assigned to multiple executives within maximum pairs When the executive is in DND the Secretary can transfer a CO line call or make camp on refer to Ref C It is possible to make a chain to assign Executive Secretary pairs It means that a Secretary may be an Executive of another Executive Secretary pair If an Executive and the Secretary which ha
336. in CONF LEON Delete current CLI message SO ONO SIS DeleteallCiimessage ao AtATD TRANS PGM 055 __Delete all CLI message at ATD station To activate CLI Message Wait perform the following Steps 1 CLIP should be programmed as ON 1 2 The message contents will be shown on LCD MSG CLI 3 To retrieve a CLI Message 1 Press CALLBK button 2 The message contents CLI number date and time the calling count from the same CLI will be shown on the LCD According to admin date LCD display format the DATE will be display as MM DD or DD MM TIME is always displayed in 24 hour mode 03434507902 DATE TIME CNT xx To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one 1 Press CONF button 2 The Station User can see the next CLI message and the current CLI message will be deleted To delete all CLI messages 1 Press CALLBK button 2 Press DND button and HOLD button To initiate a call back 1 Press HOLD button 2 The System will secure an available CO line in the first accessible CO group and dial it similar to speed dialing To see the next or previous CLI message 1 Press the UP DOWN keys 137 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To delete all CLI messages at Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 055 3 Dial the Station range 4 Press HOLD button To program the SPEED BIN numbe
337. in at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin after overflow timer expires The overflow timer can be set at PGM191 FLEX 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 sec If this timer expires after a call is received in the group the call is routed to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be set at PGM191 FLEX 7 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 sec A station in a hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value after the end of received call and outgoing call for the Lt forthe assigned wrapuptime JI wrap up time e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Po ITEM FLEX SUB ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK If music source is assigned calling user will be heard music instead of ring back tone 10 Music Source 00 13 ip _LDK 300 300E 00 12 E 100 Ga H 20 Max Queued 00 99 This value is the maximum call count that Call Count can be queued If the total queued call count is this value the next queuing tried call will be disconnected Pe CC ee SE station forward ON not receive Hunt Call Display member can check the Queue Count Assign digit VM Group E Wrap up Timer 002 999 3 002 sec A station in a Hunt group is maintained in a busy state during this timer value after the end of received call and outgoing call for the assigned wrap up time lo E O one
338. in the Main Menu Sub Menu and the corresponding options To select a menu perform the following Steps 1 Dial the number of the desired menu item 2 Ifthe selected menu is a programming item 3 If there is available sub menu selectable menu is displayed on the LCD NOTE Press the TRANS PGM button to move the top menu Press the REDIAL button to move the previous menu Condition After a menu is programmed the previous menu list is displayed on the LCD Pressing a flexible button in the Main Menu mode will activate the flexible button programming mode Admin Programming E Refer to the ipLDK Admin Programming Manual Station Programming Section 4 Quick Reference Admin Programming Tables E Refer to the ipLDK Admin Programming Manual Attendant Programming refer to Section 4 Quick Reference Admin Programming Tables 2 4 23 Station Relocation Description The Station Relocation Feature lets a user unplug their station and plug it into another location Dialing a code brings all the station attributes including station number button mapping speed dial and class of service see Ref A to the new location Operation To store the station attributes to a temporary buffer perform the following Steps 1 Dial the feature code TRANS 1 Station Relocation Backup 2 Unplug the station To retrieve stored station attributes perform the following Steps 1 Plug the phone in at another properly wired jack 2 Di
339. in the Save Number Redial buffer from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button twice while on a conversation with an external party 2 Replace the handset or go on hook To dial a number from the Save Number Redial buffer from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Press the button 18 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition 1 When the used CO Line is busy an idle CO Line in the group is accessed and the saved number is dialed 2 The stored save number is not deleted when the system power is OFF 3 If you press SPEED button twice after accessing a CO Line and dialing then pause the save number redial bin will be erased 2 2 8 4 Station Speed Dialing Description A DKTU user can store up to 100 frequently used station numbers to Station Speed Bin 000 099 Station numbers consisting of up to 24 digits including pauses Flash commands pulse to tone switchover and no display characters pause is automatically inserted after a flash MODEL Speed dial of system ipLDK 20 ip LDK 100 1500 ip LDK 300 3000 ipLDK 300E 5000 Operation To make a call using Station Speed Dial from a DKTU perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 000 099
340. ing Manual September 2008 3 7 Station Group PGM 190 PGM 191 3 7 1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT PGM 190 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 190 3 Enter the appropriate Hunt Group Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table A PaGmiso Description_____ Procedure COMMENTS Group Type Assigns the Hunt Group type FLEX1 Group Type VALUES circular terminal UCD ring VM p refer to VALUES 0 Not Assigned ick up networking VM HOLD SAVE 1 Circular 2 Terminal 3 UCD 4 Ring 5 VM 7 Networking VM Pick up Attribute Assign the pick up attributes for FLEX2 1 ON the Hunt Group All types of HOLD SAVE Hunt Groups can be assigned the optional pick up attribute except for the pick up hunt group Member Assignment This member assignment FLEX3 Station Number process can be executed in two HOLD SAVE 10 37 ipLDK 20 ways 100 227 ipLDK 100 Assigning individually by pressing the Flexible Button 100 399 ipLDK 300 and the desired User to assign 1000 1599 ipLDK 300E and then enter the Station number The other way is to successively assign by first entering the Station number and last Station number NOTE When there are too many Stations to see you can scroll data using the volume up down keys 3 7 2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 If the Hunt Group type is selected at ADMIN PGM 190
341. ing PLA priority is set exclusively for call Answer Priority QUE INC gt VALUES handling in relation to Transferred REC XFER Default 1 Calls Recalled Calls Incoming FLEX1 4 FLEX2 3 1 XFER Calls and Queued Calls FLEX3 2 FLEX4 1 2 REC HOLD SAVE 3 INC 4 QUE 3 4 15 RS 232C PORT SETTING PGM 174 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 174 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table RS 232C Port Setting Used to designate port settings COM1 VALUES and assign Baud Rate CTS RTS FLEX1 FLEX1 7 38400 COM1 COM5 Refer to P Break and LPP Baudrate HOLD SAVE Table FLEX 1 FLEX4 Refer to COM2 Table FLEX2 FLEX1 6 19200 Baudrate HOLD SAVE PORT Description Table EZ HHHA AMA A 11 COM1 Port Setting Ces COM2 Port Setting CEIC A EE COM3 MODU Port Setting FLEX 1 4 CS NotinipLDK 20 COM4 MISB Port Setting FLEX 1 4 ipLDK 300 800EOny 5 COM5 MISB Port Setting FLEX 1 4 IpLDK 300 300E Only PORT SETTING FLEXIBLE BUTTON TABLE FLEX ITEM VALUE DEFAULT REMARK 0 N A 1 N A 2 1200 Baud 3 2400 Baud BAUDRATE 7 Note1 19200 4 4800 Baud 5 9600 Baud 6 19200 Baud 7 38400 Baud OFF 2 CTS RTS ON OFF Ces P BREAK EE ES SE A LE 001 199 TA 40 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4
342. ing Steps 1 Lift the handset an indication tone should be heard 2 Dial 5 5 7 refer to Ref B 3 The station leaving the message will receive an intercom ring NOTE TIf a voice message is recorded on a pulse type SLT PGM 110 the recorded message will be played by dialing message wait retrieval code 5 5 7 The played message will be deleted automatically after being played When more than one message is recorded after the first message a warning tone will be heard to indicate remaining messages To retrieve another message dial 5 5 7 again The callback will ring with Tone mode regardless of intercom signaling mode refer to Ref C To queue a call back on a busy SLT perform the following Steps Hook flash Dial 5 5 6 while busy tone is heard Confirmation tone should be heard replace the handset When the SLT returns to an idle state the intercom ring is received RUPS 53 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition A Station can leave only one callback or message a new request will override the previous one Message wait data will be protected with power failure When dialing the station number instead of pressing the CALLBK button to answer a message wait the message wait will be canceled in the calling station Message wait reminder tone is programmable from 00 to 60 min If you don t want to present the tone the timer may b
343. ing the Keypad Facility IE H is not printed or saved in SMDR information when sending Keypad Facility IE Admin Programming E Keypad Facility Access PGM 114 FLEX 6 141 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 6 Malicious Call ID Description ipLDK system is supporting ISDN SS MCID ISDN Supplementary Service Malicious Call ID The protocol standard about MCID is referred to in the EN300 130 Operation To program a MCID Request button at a Station perform the following 1 Press Trans PGM 2 Press the FLEX button 3 Dial 0 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To use the programmed MCID Request button A station answers an incoming ISDN call While the Station is on the call or receiving a disconnect tone press the MCID button IpLDK system sends MCID request message to the central office According to MCID return message value the ipLDK System provides a confirmation tone in the case of success or a congestion tone in the case of failure A E e Save and Print Out the MCID Request Result 1 The result of a MCID request is printed as SMDR print data MT is printed for successful entries and MF for failed entries 2 If SMDR save ADMIN program is enabled MCID result is also saved Condition t can be used within only ISDN network that supports ISDN SS MCID service Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK I
344. intercom tenancy groups LCD date time format etc There are 2 types of attendants in the ipLDK system The types of attendant and feature of each attendant type are Main Attendant max 5 stations can be defined as main attendants Main attendants control the whole system And operation of main attendants effects on whole system The first main attendant is called the system attendant The system attendant can be changed but can t be removed Intercom tenancy Group Attendant each intercom tenancy group refer to Ref 1 can have its own attendant The intercom tenancy group attendant controls the stations belonging to the intercom tenancy group And operation of intercom tenancy group attendants can effects on only intercom tenancy group which belongs to Generally the attendant of a station is the intercom tenancy group attendant which the station belongs to If the intercom tenancy group attendant of the station doesn t exist the main attendants will supply the station with attendant services Figure 2 13 describes the arrangement of Attendants within the System son ea El gt Main Attendant 1 PEA d EE x STA 101 Default System Attendant 4 Main Attendant Main Attendant Main Attendant ls R d D s intercom tenancy group ES Main Attendant Main Attendant Intercom tenancy group Figure 2 13 Attendants of ipLDK system Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group
345. ion A station can be assigned Hot Line or Warm Line with Admin Programming ADMIN 113 FLEX 7 If there is no Flexible Button at the station the number is operated as a Speed Dial Number The set value of the Warm Line Timer should be less than that of the Dial Tone Timer A Flexible Button may be assigned as an Idle Line Selection button When lifting the handset or pressing the MON button the system will be activated as a predefined button is pressed ltis possible to activate Hot Line Warm Line at an SLT station Admin Programming E Warm Line Timer PGM 182 FLEX 8 E Warm Line PGM 113 FLEX 7 E idle Line Selection PGM 122 13 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 7 Least Call Routing LCR Description LCR is a system programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive available route when an outgoing CO call is made This programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier There are three ways to activate LCR Internal LCR If dialed digits are matched with an internal LCR code the system will secure a CO Line from the programmed CO Group and send the modified digits according to LCR programming Loop LCR When dialing the first accessible CO Group Code 9 or 0 or pressing the Loop button if the dialed digits match with a COL LCR code the system will secure a CO Lin
346. ions to HOLD SAVE 100 227 ipLDK 100 see you can scroll data using the volume 100 399 ipLDK 300 up down keys 1000 1599 ipLDK 300E Toll Checking If this value is set to ON the speed dial of FLEX3 VALUES this zone is checked by the toll table VALUE ON OFF 0 OFF HOLD SAVE 1 ON Authorization Check If this value is set the Station User must FLEX4 VALUE VALUES enter the value to use the speed dial of each ON OFF HOLD SAVE 1 ON 0 OFF System Speed Zone Default OFF 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 6 WEEKLY TIME TABLE PGM 233 The Weekly Time Table can manage ring mode changes automatically The use of WEEKLY TIME TABLE is executed by the system attendant and each intercom tenancy group attendant The first table is for the system attendant and the others are for the intercom tenancy group attendant The table is consisted of 7 days Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday On each day the time zone of DAY NIGHT WEEKEND mode can be programmed For example the office work week starts at 9 00 AM and finishes at 5 00 PM during each weekday And the weekend starts at 5 00 PM from Friday to Sunday In this case the WEEKLY TIME TABLE can be set as shown SAMPLE WEEKLY TIME TABLE D 09 00 N 17 00 W D 09 00 N 17 00 W D 09 00 N 17 00 W D 09 00 N 17 00 W E D 09 00 N W 17 00 D N W 00 00 D N W 00 00 gees ITEM Ref
347. ipLDK 300 300E All stations are assigned to Internal FLEX1 Zone01 24 Page Zone 1 by default FLEX2 Zone25 30 ioLDK 100 FLEX1 Zone01 10 ioLDK 20 FLEX1 Zone01 05 VALUE2 FLEX01 ON access Zone 1 PGM 119 Conference Each station can be assigned to five FLEX1 FLEX5 toggle VALUES Page Zone different conference page zones 06 HOLD SAVE DEFAULT None 10 All stations are assigned to None by ipLDK 300 300E default Zone31 35 ioLDK 100 Zone1t1 15 ioLDK 20 Zone06 Zone10 14 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 10 ICM TENANCY GROUP PGM 120 Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be operated independently and the Stations in the group can be assigned an individual CO Line Group to use Each group can be assigned to an attendant and can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other groups ipLDK 20 700 supports 5 ICM Tenancy Groups 15 at ipLDK 300 300E and Tenancy ATDs In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 120 3 Enter the appropriate Group Number 1 5 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM120 Description__________ Procedure COMMENTS ICM Tenancy Group Each ICM group may have one attendant Day FLEX1 ICM Attendant Assign Night Mode for ICM Groups is set by the ICM TENANCY GROUP Group Attendant ATD Attendant HOLD SAVE ICM Tenancy Group
348. is example of Each Agent Statistics ACD GROUP INFORMATION 620 Date 05 15 02 Time 05 42 24 AGENT_NO TOTAL_CALL UNANSWERED_CALL AVE_RING_TIME AVE_SVC_TIME If PGM 161 F9 ACD PRINT ENABLE is ON ON Demand print format is not used Only Periodic format can be printed as below 1 2 3 4 5 cr lf Field s tilt Means start of ACD statistics and is always located at first column equal Delimiter between each meaningful data 1 Each Agent number Total call counter Unanswered call counter 90 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To print ACD Statistics 1 Press a programmed ACD Status button 2 1 Status 2 Dbase 3 Duty Print 3 Dial ACD Statistics Reporting Code f 4 Inthe reporting status 1 the supervisor can initialize all stored reporting database by pressing MUTE button before hang up When press ACD button in any sub state station goes to 2 state The following information is example of Group Statistics ACD GROUP INFORMATION 620 GRP Date 05 15 02 Time 05 40 07 Total Calls 2 Unanswered Calls 2 All STA Busy Count 2 Average Ringing Time 00Min OOSec Average Service Time OOMin 00Sec All STA Busy Time 01Min 17Sec Calls in Queue Now 0 Periodic Print ACD Statistics The ACD Statistics format is used PGM 161 F9 ACD PRINT ENABLE is ON If this option is
349. is taken within the designated digits Range 020 300 time the Station will be released HOLD SAVE Designates the amount of the time an FLEX6 Minutes 2 digits unsupervised conference can continue Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Unsupervised Conference Timer after the initiator of the conference has exited Wake Up Fail Ring Timer Designates the amount of time a Wake FLEX7 Minutes 2 digits up Fail Ring will ring at the System Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE Attendant Station Warm Line Timer Designates the amount of time before a FLEX8 Seconds 2 digits warm line state exists on an idle line after 01 20 HOLD SAVE lifting handset or pressing the MON button Wink Timer Designates the amount of time needed FLEX9 VALUE 10 msec 3 to acknowledge a signal on a DID line digits Range 010 200 HOLD SAVE Enblock Digit Timer Designates the amount of time allowed FLEX10 VALUE 10 sec 2 before enblock dialing is activated when digits Range 01 20 the User is making an enblock dialing HOLD SAVE mode call activated Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE call routing of DID type 2 is executed Range 01 20 cir e aa FAX Tone Detect Timer Designates the amount of time allowed FLEX13 Seconds 2 digits 5 sec is joLDK 20 Only to detect a FAX tone from the FAX CO Range 01 10 HOLD SAVE suggested line before the call is routed to the ring assigned Station for FAX CO line FAX CO Call Tim
350. it 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To assign the Activate Deactivate Mobile extension button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 34 Press the HOLD SAVE button g E ds To register the mobile extension CLI number in DKT 1 Press the PGM 35 2 Dial the mobile CLI number 3 Press the HOLD button To use the mobile extension in case of Hunt group member 1 Press the PGM 36 2 Dial the 1 to activate or 0 to deactivate 3 Press the HOLD button To assign the Use in case of Hunt member button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 36 Press the HOLD SAVE button MARINES To use Voice Message Notification to Mobile 1 Press the PGM 37 2 Dial the 1 to activate or OU to deactivate 3 Press the HOLD button Incoming call through DID ICM or Transferring call 1 The call to the extension which has the preprogrammed mobile extension is routed to both an extension and a mobile extension 64 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 When incoming call is answered at an extension or a mobile extension the other will stop ringing 3 If mobile extension answers an extension goes to Mobile Ext In Used State IN USE AT MOBILE EXT Under the Mobile Ext I
351. king System To execute the net transfer the Station 100 presses TRANS PGM button and dials 202 After hearing the ring back tone Station 100 goes idle Station 202 receives the net transfer ring and answers at the fifth step 159 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Call Flow SEN 100 answers and converse 4 ato 100 transfor te callo pe Conversation S OO em uu y z eae ee EELE U Y St Ke o l Step 3 eege Step 6 N at sues ee eee eek ee ee ee pipa gt Internet Step 4 Figure 2 16 4 Unscreened net transfer Operation Screened Transfer 1 Press the TRANS PGM button during a conversation The transferred call will be placed on exclusive hold 2 Dial the Station number in another Networked System to transfer the call the transferred to Station of another System will receive a ring signal 3 When the transferred to Station answers the voice path is connected between the transferring and the transferred to Stations 4 Both Stations can talk with one another the transferred call will remain on hold 5 Once the transferred to Station answers the transferred call will be connected 160 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Unscreened Transfer 1 Press the TR
352. l Music 3 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH 1 5 9 Hold Tone VALUES 0 NO 1 YES VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX VALUES 0 NO System 1 YES PBX VALUES Default NO 0 NO System 1 YES PBX VALUES 0 SHORT 1 LONG 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 DISA Delay Timer After this timer DTMF Receiver is attached FLEX16 CIS only after DISA line answered CIS only VALUE 1 digit Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE SMDR Print If this value is set to ON SMDR is printed FLEX17 VALUE VALUE 1 ON HOLD SAVE BUSY ERROR CPT If this value is set ON a CO call is dropped FLEX18 VALUE VALUE Detect when a CPT is detected from the CO This 1 ON is applied to CO to CO call and normal HOLD SAVE incoming or outgoing call also To detect a tone from the CO line a CPT detection board is required LD Delay Count After sending Long Distance Code FLEX19 VALUE VALUE automatically Pause Time will be added 1 digit range0 5 Added Pause Count CIS Only HOLD SAVE 3 2 4 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 143 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 143 3 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM143_ Description TC Procedure COMMENT _ COLP
353. l will be put on hold and the ICM dial tone should be heard Make a Net Call to a Station on another Networking System Press the CONF button when the second Called Station is answered the call will be put on hold and an ICM dial tone should be heard 4 Press the CONF button again the conference voice path to all members will be connected Gg To cancel a Conference 1 Any Station on a net conference call can hang up during the conference 2 The net conference will be ended and the network path will be cleared Condition An IP phone can not be the master station in the Net Conference When an IP phone sends a Net Conference Invite Setup message to a Non IP phone the message will be rejected When a Non IP phone sends a Net Conference invite to an IP phone the normal Setup message should be sent to the IP phone instead of the Invite Setup message Admin Programming E Networking Basic Attribute PGM 320 E Network Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 164 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 7 Call Offer Description Call Offer is the same service as Camp On except that the Camp On is executed in a Networking connection environment at the H 450 protocol standard specification When a Station User initiates a Net Call to a busy Station that is located on another networking system a busy tone will be heard At that time the caller can
354. le extension PGM 236 39 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 Call Handling 2 4 1 Absent Text Message 2 4 1 1 Custom Message Description Each station can select from ten 11 20 available custom messages to display on the DKTU LCD These messages are programmed by the System Attendant refer to Ref A for System wide use Individual users may program message 00 as their own custom message When setting the selected message is displayed on the User Station LCD panel Operation To program Custom Message 00 from a station 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 5 2 Ref B 3 Enter the message refer to Figure 2 4 1 1 up to 24 characters 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone should be heard 1 Blank RE we S Figure 2 4 1 1 Keyset Map To program Custom Messages 11 20 from the System Attendant or Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial O 5 3 and the message number 11 20 3 Enter the message refer to Figure 2 4 1 1 up to 24 characters 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone is heard To activate LCD Messages Custom Pre selected from a Station or from the System Attendant perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 5 1 3 Dial the 2 digit message code 00 or 11 20 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel LCD Messages Custom Pre select
355. led digits to the Range 1 9 HOLD SAVE outgoing CO line after the designated time forwarded to a predetermined Station digits Range 00 99 HOLD SAVE SLT DTMF Release FLEX13 Seconds 2 Timer digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE 3 SOFT Auto Release In the 3 soft button menus if no digits are FLEX14 Seconds li Timer pressed within the designated time the digits Range 01 30 3 soft BTN DKTU Only DKTU will return to an Idle state HOLD SAVE msec 2 digits Range 01 99 HOLD SAVE Transit Connect Timer Designates the amount of time before the FLEX16 VALUE 2 digits master system sends a connect message to Range 01 30 the slave system when using a pulse analog HOLD SAVE trunk VMIB Message Rewind Designates the amount of time the system FLEX17 VALUE 2 digits Timer will wait for the Station User to press the Range 01 99 REWIND button while listening to VMIB HOLD SAVE messages LCO Connect Timer If this timer expires after starting outgoing FLEX18 VALUE 2 digits dial the system regards that line as Range 01 20 connected So if there are any extra digits HOLD SAVE after this timer expires the Pause is automatically added before the first added digit NOTE CIS onl LCO CPT Detect Timer To check LCO status after LCO is connected FLEX19 VALUE 2 digits system assigns CPT periodically with this Range 01 20 timer HOLD SAVE To activate this CO CO XFER CPT detect
356. led number for emergency code is the same as station number or LCR number the call is operated according to preference The preference of programmed dial number which is sent to external CO line is LCR table gt Station Number gt Emergency Call code When emergency code is the same as station number or LCR number if COS 7 Station only dials this number station call is operated Admin Programming Emergency Service Call PGM 226 2 2 6 Hot Line amp Warm Line Description A station user can instantly make an outgoing call by lifting the handset or pressing the ICM if the user has previously stored the destination The destination can be a CO Line or CO Line Group the function can be setup on a Flexible Button or at another Station Hot Line can be activated immediately when the Station is in the off hook state Warm Line can be activated after the Warm Line Timer has expired If the user dials other number prior to the Warm Line Timer expiration the call will activate as a normal call not as a Warm Line call Operation To activate a Hot Line perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset at a station where Hot Line is assigned 2 The assigned Hot Line feature is immediately activated To activate Warm Line perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset at a station where Warm Line is assigned 2 The assigned Warm Line feature is activated if no dialing has been done while the Warm Line Timer is running Condit
357. lement to the called endpoint The fastStart element consists of a sequence of OpenLogicalChannel structures describing media channels which the calling endpoint proposes to send and receive including all of the parameters necessary to immediately open and begin transferring media on the channels Admin Programming E Normal Fast Mode PGM 340 F18 151 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 15 4 Early H 245 Description The early H 245 option allows the H245 channel to be setup earlier and hence speeds up the call setup When early H245 is turned on the H245 channel address is also supplied in the Setup message This speeds up the call because the H245 channel negotiations can proceed in parallel to H225 Admin Programming E Early H 245 PGM 340 FLEX19 2 15 5 H 245 Tunneling Description Entities in the signaling path such as gatekeepers may perform functions such as divert on no reply or other advanced call control that results in representing to an endpoint a Q 931 call state that is different from the actual call state at the other endpoint Such intermediate entities shall ensure that H 245 messages encapsulated in Q 931 messages are forwarded to the other endpoint even if the Q 931 message in which the H 245 message is encapsulated would be consumed and not forwarded to the other endpoint This is accomplished by transferring the encapsulated H 245 message
358. line 2 The user hears busy tone and dial forced trunk disconnect code 3 Busy line goes to idle and he hears a dial tone Condition Forced Trunk Disconnect Feature is only possible when station is set to Emergency Supervisor In some countries it is not possible to release the network connection from the destination line because the call is controlled by the originating party In this case Emergency Supervisor feature supported about only outgoing call Admin Programming E Emergency Supervisor PGM112_FLEX24 2 4 40 Barge In Description Barge in permits an authorized extension to intrude into other existing outside internal calls Between intruding extension and parties on initial calls a conference call is established There are Two Barging In operations E Monitor The intruding extension can listen to the existing conversation E Speech The intruding extension can join to the existing conversation Operation Monitor 1 Call to the busy station and user hears the busy tone 2 Press the MONITOR button on 3 soft buttons Use Navi gt Key to Display 3 Caller can listen to the existing conversation The others hears Warning Tone Speech During caller listen to the existing conversation press the JOIN button on 3 soft buttons Caller can join the conversation The others hear Intrusion Tone Supervisor can cancel the conversation with DROP button on 3 soft buttons Supervisor can exit f
359. listed in the Table COMMENTS SMDR Account Group Stations can be assigned as a member of a VALUE VALUES call account group on SMDR A station HOLD SAVE 00 99 ipLDK belongs to only one group 300 300E 00 23 ipLDK 20 100 3 1 15 COPY DSS BUTTON PGM 125 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 125 3 Enter the appropriate Station Number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 125 Description Procedure COMMENTS Copy DSS Button The assigned DSS button can be copied to Copy DSS to Station VALUES another station or ICM group FLEX1 Station DELETE CONF Number Button HOLD SAVE Copy DSS to ICM Group FLEX2 CM Group Range 1 5 HOLD SAVE 3 1 16 STATION IP LIST PGM 126 ipLDK 20 In this program mode an IP Address can be programmed for each station This IP Address is used to service first CT through LAN 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 126 3 Enter Bin number for Station Number 01 48 4 Enter IP Address 12 Digits NOTE This PGM number is not supported on the ipLDK 100 300 300E system 17 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 17 DISPLAY STATION NUMBER BY COS or CO ACCESS GROUP PGM 130 131 In this program mode the following items can be shown 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial PGM Number 130 o
360. ll be routed to the DID no answer destination the no answer timer of the ipLDK system is shorter than GSM This feature applies only to ISDN DCO SIP Lines ICM call and transferred call The message wait or call back feature is not supported on mobile extensions The networking feature is not supported on mobile extensions When on a mobile extension conversation through the ipLDK the DTMF receiver is dedicated to the mobile extension Mobile extension can transfer the call to the other extension or their own extension If he tries to seize CO line or to dial the Hunt Group or dial other destination except extension an error tone will be provided lf the Transfer recall timer is expired a call is not routed to the extension associated with mobile extension Outgoing call from mobile extension is restricted by internal station s COS Mobile extension can receive the Calling Party number or his own extension CLI number as CLI according to PGM 143 FLEX7 CLI Transit ORI CFW To use Transferring call outgoing call from mobile extension feature CO line connected with the mobile extension should be set to DID line When a mobile extension calls his own DID number of ipLDK system to make CO call ipLDK system checks the CLI of the mobile extension number If the CLI is matched with Mobile Extension Number or Mobile CLI which registered to his extension the system provides CO dial tone and allows to make CO
361. ll be routed to the same WHTU of B system Condition DECT mobility information is sent through LAN port of MPB The physical port number of WHTU should be same on whole systems Reference A Register on WHTU to more than two systems Refer to DECT INSTALLATION MANUAL Admin Programming E Network Destination MPB IP 4 12 4 6 PGM 324 FLEX 6 177 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 20 NET Firewall routing Description ipLDK supports networking feature regardless of local network or different network Operation In the same network configuration If the networking system use the same network and then Firewall Routing should be set as OFF Local IP address will be used for networking feature In the different network configuration If the networking system use the different network and then Firewall Routing should be set as ON Firewall IP address will be used for networking feature Condition A user can program Firewall Routing feature with each net numbering plan table Admin Programming E Firewall Routing PGM 324 FLEX 9 2 16 21 Security of Transit Out Code with registered IP Description When system receives setup packet for Transit Out feature from VOI CO line system can check setup packet with registered IP whether this packet is valid or not If TRANSIT OUT SECURITY admin is set received IP in all of received se
362. lowed toll pass digits or not Allow table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6 Deny Table 01 20 Max 14 digits This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits or not Deny table of canned toll is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 5 or 6 kel WE Emergency service call Max 14 digits MN Maximum 10 emergency codes can be 01 10 programmable 149 e Ip DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Peers Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 24 OTHER TABLES PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 227 Author Code Table 0001 2000 Authorization code table entries consist of ip LDK 300E 0001 1000 ipLDK 300 each station password and extra account codes The table entries from 001 to the maximum capacity of station numbers are saved the password of each station And the remains are the extra entries CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access until a matched Authorization code is 001 500 ipLDK 100 001 200 ipLDK 20 Table Entry 001 200 3 11 digits Not Assigned entered In this case DND warning tone is provided when the CO Line Group access code is dialed If the dialed Authorization code is verified you will hear CO dial tone Otherwise you will hear error tone and cannot access the group Stations or ADMIN programming can enter the authorization codes Below MPB ver 2 0A A
363. lowing Steps 1 Enter PGM 2 Press 450 3 Press FLEX 15 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 2 2 Pre programming Pre programming for the following should have been done immediately following Installation of the pLDK System refer to Installation Manua Location PGM Nation Code Site Name PGM100 Numbering Plans System IP Settings 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 ADMIN PROGRAMMING 3 1 Station PGM 110 131 eee In Station Programming the values of each Station can be customized using program numbers When programmed using Station Ranges all stations within that range will have the same programmed values 3 1 1 STATION 8 DSS DLS MAP ID PGM 110 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 110 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM110_ Description________ Procedure COMMENTS Station ID Then Station ID can be changed to the FLEX1 01 Station ID VALUES Assignment desired value which is different from the HOLD SAVE ipLDK 20 default value e normal DKTU normal 01 DKTU SLT 05 ICM BOX 06 WHTU 07 SLT DTMF 08 SLT PULSE 09 RESERVED 10 RESERVED 11 ISDN Phone 12 SLT CID FSK 13 SLT CID DTMF 14 IP PHONE ipLDK 100 01 DKTU 05 ICM BOX 06 WHTU 07 SLT DTMF 08 SLT PULSE
364. lt is not provides dial tone in case if analog CO is seized for LCR dialing If no dial tone the call is rerouted to Alternate DMT Index ADMIN Password 4 Digits ADMIN password can be assigned to enter ADMIN Programming mode for only Administrator who knows the EE Enable A Alarm Contact Type ICLOSE OPEN CLOSE Alarm Mode H ALARM BELL ALARM assigned by default If this value is set to a Alarm IS a 126 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 sats Admin Programming Manual September 2008 _PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 Alarm Signal Mode RPT ONCE RPT If this value is set to REPEAT the Alarm Signal is repeated until Alarm Reset 164 1 5 Attendant Assignment STA No 1 10 Maximum 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendants and System Attendant The system attendant is different from main attendant in aspect of the call handling and system management priority The system attendant has more powerful priority than main attendant The system and main attendants can be assigned to each 1 and maximum 4 So the sum of system and main attendants should be less than 5 As default the System Attendant is assigned to Station 101 and others are not assigned User may set the number of the VMIB announcement for auto Auto Attendant attendant 1 Auto Attendant Usage ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON Auto Attendant is activated 2 Auto Attendant VMIB 00 70 00 This value is the
365. ly allows login operation all other operations are not allowed Logout operation is only allowed for dummy Stations where a user has logged in Total number of Users is restricted by the System Station capacity The total number of hot desk Users the total number of Stations Installed number of Stations 1 A hot desk User must have own password Saved User database information includes Station Number Station Attributes PGM 111 124 CO Routing Ring Assign DID routing Hunt Group Membership Voice Mail If user tries to log in at another station without logging out of a dummy Station the previous used Station return to the dummy state automatically The hot desk will automatically log off there is no activity at the DKTU within the Auto Log Out Timer f Hot desk logged out with the forward type of No Call Forward the call will be forwarded to Attendant The button map of the hot desk will not be changed even though a User logs on to a different type of DKTU it is recommend that the same type of DKTU is used for Hot Desk Station Only DKTUs with more than 12 button and WKTs can be used as dummy stations The modem associated with the Station cannot log in PGM 170 When the System reset happens all login agents are automatically logged out Admin Programming E Dummy Station ON OFF PGM 112 B TN 23 E Authorization Code Table PGM227 E Number of Agents PGM 250 FLEX 1 E Assign Station Number of
366. matic privacy is disabled when pressing a busy CO line button the Station is connected to the conversation in progress Condition When Automatic Privacy is disabled privacy is still activated for Intercom and Conference calls A Station can only override a privacy disabled Station The Station will present an Intrusion tone when another Station accesses the line 42 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming E Auto Privacy PGM 161 FLEX 5 E Privacy Warning Tone PGM 161 FLEX 6 E Override Privilege PGM 113 FLEX 4 2 4 4 BGM Background Music Description A user can listen to BGM through the speaker while handset is on hook and the line is in an idle state Music from the source is heard over the station speaker and will be automatically shut off when a call or paging announcement is received or when the station is off hook Operation To assign background music at a station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 7 3 the available music should be heard To transmit background music on an external page port at the Attendant Station perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Dial O 7 6 External port Dial the background music channel number the selected background music should be heard Press the HOLD SAVE button After hearing the confirmation tone the station should
367. mber will hunt CO LINE 1 Hunt Group Call ee A110 CO Hunt Group Call LINE 2 Mies 0009050 STA11 corr P STA115 A j STA114 e d gt lt e wl Y 0 00 z C id Srs T se e De oe Se OPO SE Se Figure 2 6 2 Terminal Group 2 6 3 Circular Group In Circular Hunt calls to a station in the group or a pilot number will go to the station or an idle station in the group If unavailable or unanswered in the hunt no answer time the call is directed to the next station in the group The call will continue to route until each station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last Station in the group or will be passed to the assigned overflow station or the assigned overflow group A circular Hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number Hunt group number and only calls to the pilot number will hunt co Hunt Group Call pon ee LINE 2 Hunt Group CO LINE 1 e STA115 Y STAI14 e gt 4 e y gt gt Oo Oo z CR Fa Se z ga DE 8 ir Ee OS SF ESE Figure 2 6 3 Circular Group 85 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 6 4 Ring Group All the stations in the group receive ring simultaneously for a call of Hunt group until one of stations received ring answers the call If call is not answered until overflow timer it will be sent to an overflow destination if as
368. me Number of calls in queue Average and Longest Queued Time Unanswered Call Count Access to the ACD Routing Database 1 Dial 2 for ACD Database Code 2 Select database item scrolling with the VOL UP VOL DWN button Overflow Destination station group Overflow Time xxx seconds Wrap Up Time xxx seconds 3 Enter new data 4 Press the SAVE button 89 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Agent Status and Control 1 Dial 3 for Agent Status 1 DUTY STATUS 2 DUTY ON OFF 3 DUTY PRINT To view Agent Status 1 Dial Agent Status Code 3 1 duty status AGENT XXXX TOTAL CALLS AVE CALL TIME AVE RING TIME UNANSWERED CALLS 2 Press the key or key for a next agent selection 3 Press VOL UP or VOL DOWN key for Number of ACD calls served Number of unanswered ACD Calls Average ring time before answer Average ACD call service time after answer To control Agent duty status 1 Dial ACD Agent Duty feature Code 3 2 duty on off 2 Press the key for agent selection 3 Dial 0 or 1 0 Off Duty 1 On Duty To output Agent Statistics Report 1 Dial ACD Statistics Reporting Code 3 duty print 2 Press the key or key for a next agent selection 3 Press the MUTE button to initialize the database this eliminates overlap of future reports 4 Below information
369. ments and intercom calls And the intercom box can signal assigned stations in the system Any combination of DKTUs or intercom boxes can be arranged in the system The Figure 2 10 1 describes the operation of Door phone Ex ICM BOX Door Phone Reception Reception Call D al 7 Door Open 2 10 1 Door Figure 2 10 1 Door Phone Operation To call an intercom box perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dial station number of intercom box or press the flexible button for the intercom box 3 After hearing a warning tone announce the call To place a call from an intercom box 1 Press the CALL button and assigned station will ring To answer an intercom call at a station assigned for intercom box signals DKTU 1 Press flexible button for intercom box 1 Go Off Hook To place intercom box to DND mode refer to Ref A 1 Press the DND button Condition The intercom Box cannot attend a conference refer to Ref B The CO call is not received at intercom box An intercom box can be a member of page zone group refer to Ref C To receive intercom box call set intercom Box Signaling value 111 to ON ADMIN program FLEX 6 In case of DKTU DSS of intercom box should be assigned on its flexible button f Nation code is TELKOM or ISRAEL DSS button for ICM Box should be assigned to the SLT ADMIN program 115 SLT or WHTU can receive only one call from in
370. min Programming The time amp date can be set to a default value or changed based on seasonal time changes 2 4 26 Voice Over Description This feature provides voice announcements at a busy station without interrupting the existing conversation The announcement is received over the existing conversation so that only the busy station hears both incoming parties The user can alternately talk back to both parties Operation To use Voice Over 1 A busy station is called and camped on by a new caller refer to Ref A 2 The busy station hears a warning tone over the current voice path indicating the camped on call 3 The busy Station can communicate with new caller by pressing HOLD SAVE button then previous caller can hear MOH and can wait 4 And if busy Station press HOLD button again busy Station can communicate with previous caller again and then new caller hear MOH again 5 Alternate between the new call and the current call by pressing the HOLD SAVE button the HOLD SAVE button LED should flash at 60ipm while Voice Over is in use 6 When placing each call on hold to converse with the other that call will hear MOH 61 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition Placing a station in DND will disable voice over function Attendant can activate voice over at the station in DND mode After voice over is activated both calls will be dro
371. ming E Allow Off net FWD PGM 111 FLEX 18 E Authorization Code Table PGM 227 E Call Forward PGM 111 FLEX 2 E Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX 1 E Off net Call Mode PGM 112 FLEX 12 E Unsupervised Conference Timer PGM 182 FLEX 6 2 3 1 9 SLT Call Forward Description A SLT User can forward calls to other stations CO Lines or System VMIB Operation To activate call forward from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 30 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Dial call forward code 5 5 4 refer to Ref A Dial the call forward type Dial the Station or Group speed number that will receive call OR 5 Press the key to forward to System VMIB 6 Replace the handset and go on hook gt AUS To deactivate call forward from a SLT 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the call forward code 5 5 4 and number OR 3 Dial 5 5 9 refer to Ref B 4 Confirmation tone should be heard then replace the handset Condition 1 Call forward is maintained until it is deactivated 2 Acall cannot be forwarded to a station in DND mode when trying to forward to the station an error tone will be heard 3 A call forwarding station cannot leave a VMIB message 4 The call forward feature may be canceled by code 5 5 9 the unified cancel code for DND Call Forward Message for SLT 5 Dial pulse SLT cannot be forwarded to VMIB Reference A
372. ming Manual September 2008 3 4 System Data PGM 160 184 3 4 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES PGM 160 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 160 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM160 Descripti n_____ Procedure COMMENTS Attendant Call Queuing If this value is set to RBT ring back tone FLEX1 1 RBT VALUES Ring Back Tone is provided to the Station when the HOLD SAVE 0 MOH the Station calls a busy Attendant Station user will otherwise the hold tone or VMIB MOH hear MOH hold ADMIN 171 FLEX2 is provided tone or VMIB MOH from the System database 1 RBT the Station user will hear ring back tone when calling a busy Attendant Station PGM 171 FLEX2 CAMP RBT MOH MOH or Ring Back tone is heard during FLEX2 1 RBT VALUES the camp on state HOLD SAVE 0 MOH 1 RBT CO Line Choice When securing a CO Line in a CO line FLEX3 1 Round VALUES group if value is set to LAST CHOICE Robin HOLD SAVE 0 AVAILABLE the last available CO Line will be seized LINE ORDER otherwise CO lines are secured in line 1 LAST CHOICE availability order DISA Retry Counter When the DISA user fails to connect with FLEX4 4 Retry a Station or access a feature the DISA Counter user can retry other calls or features HOLD SAVE within the programmed retry counter If the DISA user cannot make
373. n 2 Dial the code 0 6 3 Dial the appropriate message number when there is a recorded message in the number dialed the recorded message is played 4 Press the SPEED button while the message is playing to delete it To add additional message on VMIB message 1 Press the ADD soft button while listening to the message on LDP 6000 7000 2 Record additional message 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button To rewind the current message 1 Press the REWIND soft button the message is rewound with the VM MSG Rewind Timer on LDP 6000 7000 108 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 System Prompt Messages Fixed o No o Messages O Leave Message Prompt Reserved for Office version Wakeup Prompt Hotel version only 090 ATT 096 _Leave Message after Tone Prompt 099 CRS Announcement Prompt _ 100 100 Condition System Greetings message are 001 070 as default value User can select one of 70 messages System Prompt messages are 071 100 as default value The number is message and user cannot change the numbering plan arbitrarily but users can also modify those prompts by recording their own messages in the number System greetings and prompts can be recorded only at system attendant station There is no time limit to record system greetings and prompts at attendant station f the VMIB is not installed in the system it is
374. n To activate call forward when the line is busy or not answer perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward type code 4 4 Dial Station Group or VMIB number that will receive the call To assign CALL FORWARD button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press a flexible button Press the DND FOR button Assign the Call Forward type 4 Dial the destination that will receive the call Press the HOLD SAVE button PURAS To activate Call Forward 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of the DND FOR button should be flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button will be activated To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward Cancel Code 2 8 1 5 Call Forward Station Off net Unconditional No answer Description Stations allowed call forward access can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory number telephone number outside of the system When a call is received the system will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the user If a station assigned off net call forward receives a call from an internal and or external caller the call will be forwarded to off net unconditionally Code 5 or after No Answer Ring timer is expired Code 6 Note that if both incomi
375. n Manual September 2008 2 14 2 CLI Calling Line Identification Presentation Description The term of CLI is the telephone number of caller By using of this ipLDK station user can recognize the incoming CO caller s information and send the telephone number of the caller when he make an outgoing CO call 2 14 2 1 Incoming CLI Service Description When a station of ipLDK system receives an incoming CO call that has a telephone number of the caller the station user can see the telephone number of incoming CO caller on LCD of station The Figure 2 14 2 1 describes an example of incoming CLI process in ipLDK system In the figure the outside CO caller defines the CALLING PARTY and the station of ipLDK system defines the called party The calling party makes a call to ipLDK system and ipLDK system receives the CLI of this call as 04318502824 At first step ipLDK system check whether the start digits information is matched with the MY AREA CODE ADMIN program 200 FLEX 9 In this example my area code of 0431 is matched with the incoming CLI So ipLDK system is removing 0431 automatically from CLI data and the rest CLI data is sent to the called party station 100 The station 100 displays the incoming CLI 8502824 on the LCD if the ADMIN program of CLI display is set to ON see Operation 1 If the station 100 has the same speed dial data as the incoming CLI data 8502824 then the matched speed dial data n
376. n Used Sate extension could not receive any digit If another extension tries to call the extension of Mobile Ext In Used State busy tone is heard Call Waiting is not supported at the circumstance but user can leave a message wait to extension of Mobile Ext In Used State a Transferring call from the mobile extension through ipLDK system 1 Dial the transfer code during the talk state in Mobile extension 2 The mobile extension user hears the internal dial tone and the calling party hears the MOH 3 Dial the extension number 4 The call will be transferred after the mobile extension user goes on hook state 5 The mobile extension user can reconnect the call by pressing the code in case extension does not answer 6 Mobile Extension can transfer a call to another station s mobile extension To make outgoing calls from the mobile extension through the ipLDK system 1 The mobile extension user dials his DID number of ipLDK system the internal dial tone should be heard 2 The mobile extension can proceed to make an internal or outgoing call with CLI number of extension Condition f the extension is busy forwarded or in the DND state calls will not be routed to the mobile extension When making an external call from a mobile extension through the ipLDK system it sends the CLI number of the Station extension the mobile extension cannot use the transfer feature After the no answer timer expires a call wi
377. n hook The system will automatically retry the call at programmed intervals When the called party answers lift handset OR 5 Press the MUTE button to make the call et KE To cancel ACNR perform the following Steps 1 Press the flashing REDIAL button OR 2 Lift the handset OR 3 Press the MUTE button while a CO Line is accessed to cancel ACNR Condition 1 ADKTU that doesn t have a REDIAL button should be programmed with a REDIAL Flexible Button to use ACNR 2 TRANS PGM FLEX TRANS PGM 97 HOLD SAVE 2 or 8 Button only 3 The analog CO Lines in the system should be equipped with Call Progress Tone detection Units CPTU 4 When a predefined CO Line is busy in ACNR mode an available CO Line in the same group will be secured Admin Programming m ACNR Pause Timer PGM 180 FLEX 10 ACNR Delay Timer PGM 180 FLEX 8 HACNR Tone Detect Timer PGM 180 FLEX 13 applicable to analog CO Line only E ACNR No Answer Timer PGM 180 FLEX 9 HACNR Retry Counter PGM 180 FLEX 11 MACNR Tone Cadence PGM 423 2 2 8 2 Last Number Redialing Description The last dialed number on a CO Line can be stored up to 32digits in the station s Last Number Redial buffer The user may select to redial the last number dialed on the system Each DKTU with an LCD panel in the system has 10 individual last dialed number directory locations 17 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0
378. n number from the Networked Systems NET Number on CO Transit In and CO Transit Out calls Operation 1 The NET Number automatically will be included in the Centralized SMDR output for CO Transit In and CO Transit Out calls Condition Up to 4 digits can be displayed in the Station column Only applies to ISDN CO lines on the Master system Example SMDR Printout from the Master System Site Name MASTER EE NO STA CO TIME START DIALED ACT CNT COST ACCOUNT CODE 0027 200 001 00 00 05 02 02 01 05 46 085620140 0 0 0029 CO006 011 00 00 02 02 02 01 05 46 0200 0 0 0028 CO011 006 00 00 03 02 02 01 05 46 RING 00 01 Lines 0027 show the resultant printout for a CO Transit Out call from Station 200 on the Networked System Lines 0028 amp 0029 show the resultant printout for an incoming CO Transit In call to Station 200 on the Networked Systems ISDN Line 006 was used for the incoming call and VOIP Line 011 was used between Systems The NET Number 200 is displayed as the Outgoing Number from the Master System to the Networked Systems 2 16 19 DECT Mobility Description When one WHTU is registered more than two networked systems at the same time and the user of WHTU moves to another networking system the incoming call to WHTU will be routed to another networking system automatically Operation 1 Register one WHTU to more than two systems see Ref 1 2 Move WHTU from A system to B system 3 Call to that WHTU of A system wi
379. n this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 184 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 184 COMMENTS Chime Bell Station Pair Similar to Executive Secretary Pairs the FLEX1 Bin Number 01 14 Chime Bell Stations are linked as an Station Pair HOLD SAVE originating Station and receiving Station activated by pressing the Chime Bell programmed button Chime Bell Relay If Chime Bell Relay is assigned the FLEX2 Bin Number 2 external relay makes signal at the same digits Range 01 14 Relay time like Loud Bell Control number 1digit Range 1 4 HOLD SAVE Bell Timer Chime Bell Receive Station receives FLEX3 Value 2 digits Chime bell ring until this timer expires Range 01 20 seconds HOLD SAVE Bell Frequency Chime Bell Frequency can be adjusted FLEX4 FLEX1 FLEX2 by this feature Value 2digits Range 01 20 HOLD SAVE 50 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 6 DCOB Attribute NOTE Not available in ipLDK 20 3 6 1 DCOB ATTRIBUTE PGM 186 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 186 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Metering Type Use call metering signal FLEX2 Value VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ewer ee for wating for forward signal from PBX Range 0
380. ncy group attendants 129 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Date Day Start Time Night Start Time Weekend Start Time Lunch Start Time Lunch End Time 09 00 18 00 NI ESPE EA 09 00 18 00 IN EA ESSE Wed 09 00 18 00 ES EE E Thu 09 00 18 00 i Fri 09 00 18 00 18000 Saa lee po o ee Ls p EE EE ss On demand mode is not available in the Automatic Ring mode The attendants of intercom tenancy group can change ring mode as well as main attendants If an attendant of intercom tenancy group changes ring mode only the ring mode of intercom tenancy group which the attendant belongs to is changed But if a main attendant changes the ring mode ring mode of the system will be changed When the ring mode is set to Automatic Ring mode by main attendant the ring mode of the system will follow the first table entry entry number 00 of Weekly Time Table Ifthe system ring mode is changed from the night weekend on demand auto ring mode to day mode the ring mode of all Intercom Tenancy Group will change to the previous ring mode f external night ring is enabled and the system is in night mode the LBC 1 Contact will follow the incoming UNA assigned CO lines Reference A Ring Assignment 2 1 1 Admin Programming ECO Line Ring Assignment PGM 144 E External Control Contact PGM 168 m Weekly Time Table PGM 233 2 13 9 Disable Out
381. ned page zone Input 0 4 Press the HOLD SAVE Usage of PTT 1 Press the PTT button of WIT 300HE the user can talk to members of internal page zone assigned 2 IfPTT button is released paging will be ended Condition PTT follows the feature of internal call page except the Page Timer The Page Timer isn t applied The range of internal page zone for PTT follows internal page zone of each system except conference page zone 100 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 9 Linked Stations 2 9 1 Executive Secretary Description Stations in the system can be assigned as Executive and Secretary pairs When an Executive station is busy or in the DND state refer to Ref A intercom calls and transfer calls are automatically routed to the designated secretary Secretary can activate and deactivate the DND of EXEC station from her extension At secretary station EXEC DND button is made by pressing PGM flex button PGM 55 EXEC station number Figure 2 9 1 describes that there is CO call to executive station in Executive Secretary pairs f executive station is idle executive station will receive the call f executive station is busy or in DND designated secretary station will receive call Calls Exec CO STA 110 Lees ICM ES Da ALLA K O A SSE ENTERA Sa ee AS Sec STA 111 Executive Secretary pairs F
382. ng CO ICM Box Music Channel 0 12 ipLDK 300 300E 1 0 8 ipLDK 20 value and match the SLT station number of the SLT port not To assign external dial tone set Dial Tone Source ee d the SLT station number of the gned SLT port 0 not To assign external ICM ring ICM Ring Back Tone 0 5 SH back tone set the SLT station assigned number of the SLT port 0 not To assign external DID ring back 7 DID CO Ring Back Tone 0 5 S tone set the SLT station number assigned of the SLT port PBX Access Code Max 2 digits Maximum 4 PABX Access digit number By default PABX Access Codes are not assigned at all 2 Recalling CO ra a eege a a Queed CO A Call Codes can be assigned Each 173 PLA Priority Setting Po BLA priority is Set exclusively 174 RS 232 PORT Setting Baud Rate CTS RTS P Break LPP can be assigned at this feature to COM1 port COM2 MODU port When a CO line call is placed in the hold state system exclusive transfer conference etc the external party will hear music In this way the CO line party can be notified that the connection is still established PABX Access Code is 1 or 2 Transfer CO 130 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 aac FLEX ITEM a DEFAULT REMARK Baud Rate 19200 0 UNKNOWN 1 UNKNOWN 2 1200 BAUD 3 2400 BAUD 4 4800 BAUD 5 9600 BAUD 6 19200 BAUD 7 38400 BAUD 2 CTS RTS ON OFF
383. ng CO and outgoing CO are analog line the system will automatically disconnect the call after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired Operation To activate unconditional Off Net Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial the Call Forward code 5 Seize a CO Line if required Dial the Speed Dial bin number with the desired phone number Replace the handset and go on hook Ot aN 27 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To activate no answer off net call forward 1 Lift handset or press MON button Press DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 6 Seize a CO Line if required Dial a speed bin number with the desired phone number Replace the handset and go on hook D eN To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward cancel code 2 8 1 6 Call Forward Station Off net with Tel Num Unconditional No answer Description Stations allowed call forward access can forward intercom and transferred CO Line calls to a directory number telephone number outside of the system When a call is received the system will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the user If a station assigned off net call forward received a call from internal caller and external caller the call is forwarded
384. nge 001 300 Network Transfer Fault Recall HOLD SAVE timer Gatekeeper Reroute CO Used to set the CO group of FLEX8 VALUE Co Grp VALUES Grou atekeeper Range HOLD SAVE p SE EE ge 00 72 ipLDK 300 300E 00 24 ipLDK 100 00 08 ipLDK 20 3 11 3 NETWORKING CO LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 322 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 322 3 Enter the CO Line Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table lA Pem32 _ Description________ Procedure COMMENTS Networking CO Line Group Used to select the CO Line FLEX1 Net CO Line Group Group for networking calls Range 00 24 HOLD SAVE VOIB Mode This ADMIN program FLEX2 VALUE VALUES determines if H 323 or SIP is HOLD SAVE 0 H 323 used at each VOIP CO line 1 SIP Use Gatekeeper Check the usage of FLEX3 VALUE gatekeeper HOLD SAVE Networking CO Line Type Used to select the type of FLEX4 VALUE VALUES system that is connected HOLD SAVE 0 PSTN through the networking CO line 1 NET DTMF Mode This ADMIN program FLEX5 VALUE determines DTMF Mode at HOLD SAVE 2 INBAND DTMF each VOIP CO line 3 RFC2833 DTMF 4 OUTBAND DTMF 17 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 11 4 NETWORKING ROUTING TABLE PGM 324 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press
385. nked pair goes to DND or call forward or pre selected message display state refer to Ref D Ref E then linked station goes to the same state automatically Also if any station in a linked pair comes out of this state then the other comes out simultaneously If one of linked stations is busy the LCD of the other station will display IN USE AT LINK STA When a linked station is busy the other idle linked station will not receive ring for CO lines transferred ring or intercom calls 103 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sue o Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition ltis available to make 13 linked station pairs A station can be linked with only one station The intercom number of two linked stations is operated as one number for all features The presented number of linked pair is the first station number Master which is assigned by Admin Programming The station attributes of the second station Slave will follow the attributes of Masters Ex Day Night COS CO Warning Tone CO Auto Hold CO Call Drop Alarm Intercom box DSS DLS or ISDN phone cannot be linked with a station ltis operated with Tone mode in linked station pair regardless of intercom Answer mode STA program 1 2 Attendant station can t be linked with the other station But the linked station cannot use attendant features refer to Ref F A linked station can call his pair station by dialing their own num
386. ns is only applicable inside an administrative domain with previously A 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 A PGm50o0________ Description________ COMMENTS agreed upon policies for generation transport and usage of such information If this feature is set to ON Asserted ID service is Supported Privacy The presence of this privacy type ina OFF ON Privacy header field indicates that the user would like the Network Asserted Identify to be kept private with respect to the SIP entities outside the Trust Domain with which the user authenticated If this feature is set to ON Privacy service is Supported Use Extension This field set Contact Address header OFF ON Number field to the Extension number If this field set do not use SIP User ID SIP Attribute 2 for outgoing call 3 12 4 SIP Attribute 2 PGM 501 The SIP Attribute 2 Program is used to set the SIP user table each table bin includes settings for user ID password Contact number and etc only in PC Admin The maximum table bin number is 32 in ipLDK 20 64 in ipLDK 100 and 96 in ipLDK 300 300E PGm50t_ Description________ COMMENTS User ID This Admin is used to setting SIP user ID Max 64 digits of character string Set SIP user ID which is used From Header ex caller caller domain Authentication User This Admin is used to setting SIP Max 64 digits of character string Name Authentication User
387. nstallation Manual MCID Request Code PGM 109 2 14 7 MSN Sub Addressing Description When several ISDN devices are connected to a single ISDN port the numbering method of each station is as follows MSN Multiple Subscriber Number MSN provides the possibility for assigning multiple ISDN numbers to a single interface It allows dialing from a line connected to a public network directly to terminals connected to a basic access which has subscribed to MSN number The figure 2 14 3 describes the flow chart of MSN call process in ipLDK system Sub Addressing Sub addressing allows the called user to expand his addressing capacity beyond the one given by the ISDN number 142 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Pete Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Receive CO call via ISDN DID Search TEL field in PGM202 Yes Matched CO amp Tel No General DID Flow No Not Assign Matched w PGM202 B2 Provide call to stations which have same Tel no at MSN button Search PGM231 Table and Provide call to valid destination Figure 2 14 7 MSN Call Process Condition To use an ISDN line as MSN the CO Service type should be set to DID MSN The MSN can be assigned up to 250 ISDN numbers with MSN table MSN is carried from PX in CPN IE Called Party Number Information Element If the received CPN is not matched with MSN table the call will be operated as DID If a MSN call is
388. nt If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available the proper VMIB announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to each Destination If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available the Busy announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to Busy Destination If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available an Error announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the Error Destination If the value is set to ON and VMIB is available a DND announcement will be presented to the caller before the call is routed to the DND Destination or Reroute Busy Destination when the original destination is in DND mode 34 FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX2 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX3 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX4 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX1 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX2 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX5 FLEX3 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group VALUES FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group VALUE FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group VALUE FLEX1 Tone FLEX2 Attendant Ring Assign FLEX3 Forward to Hunt Group VALUE FLEX1 Busy Prompt Usage FLEX2 Error Prompt Usage FLEX3 DND Prompt Us
389. nt To Record an agent s conversation at ACD supervisor Call the busy agent and receive the busy tone Press ACD flexible button The Supervisor can monitor the agent but will not send audio to the agent Supervisor the presses the Two Way Recording button When two way recording is stopped recorded VMIB message is left at the Supervisor station GA Be gt To activate UCD DND manually 1 Assign UCD DND with UCD DND feature code Trans 87 Group NO on station 2 A UCD member user presses UCD DND button in order to go UCD DND mode 3 A UCD DND button turns steady on and that station goes UCD DND mode To deactivate UCD DND 1 Ifa UCD member goes into UCD DND mode a UCD DND button illuminates steady on 2 A UCD member presses UCD DND button Condition The supervisor should assign a flexible button for ACD TRANS PGMN Flex BTN TRANS PGM 8 ACD Group No HOLD SAVE The user can see the group status by ACD supervisor or by printing periodically to RS 232C print To print ACD statistics periodically set the ACD Print Enable PGM 161 F9 and the ACD Print Timer PGM 161 FLEX 10 10sec base The statistic information of Each Agent can be viewed and printed at the supervisor The agent can login and logout using Hot Desk feature If ACD Print Enable PGM 161 F9 is set to ON only periodical statistic is printed To print ACD Statistics on Demand and Agent Statistics on Demand ACD Print
390. o 01 ADMIN 140 and press FLEX 2 To use DID CCR perform the following Steps 1 Verify the CO Service Type is set to DID MSN at ADMIN 140 2 Press FLEX 1 3 Verify the DID Digit Receive Number is set to 3 at ADMIN 146 4 Set DID Conversion Type as 2 using Flexible DID Table at ADMIN 143 5 Press FLEX 4 D Setthe Destination Type as 3 VMIB 7 Select Announcement Number 01 for the Flexible DID Table at ADMIN 231 Condition To use the CCR feature for DID VMIB should be assigned for Flexible DID Destination ADMIN 231 The CCR feature is only supported for DID and DISA If a caller dials a full destination number the call will be directly routed to the desired destination by the system numbering plan If a caller dials one digit then pauses the ipLDK system will compare the digit with the CCR Table If a matching digit is found on the CCR Table and the bin number is the same as the VMIB Announcement the call will be routed to the programmed destination In PGM 228 CCR table if a CCR announcement has any valid destination call can be rerouted to CCR destination For example VMIB announcement 2 is assigned to DISA announcement PGM 140 Case 1 For announcement 2 any program is existed in PGM 228 call is routed to CCR destination Case 2 For announcement 2 any program is not existed in PGM 228 call is routed to DID DISA destination If Destination is busy the caller can attempt to redial up to DISA retry count
391. o check whether the dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits or not Deny table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4 3 Allow Table B 01 30 Max 14 digits This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4 4 Deny Table B 01 30 Max 14 digits This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 3 and COS 4 Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits or not Deny table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 3 or 4 A mg d This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 8 10 and 11 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not Deny Table C 01 50 This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 8 10 and 11 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not i pantas LO O This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 9 10 and 11 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not Le o This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 9 10 and 11 Station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not 225 STEET e E A Allow Table 01 20 ad 14 digits This ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 5 and COS 6 Station is matched with the al
392. o discover one another and to agree on a Characterization of a session they would like to share For locating prospective session participants and for other functions SIP enables the creation of an infrastructure of network hosts called proxy servers to which user agents can send registrations invitations to sessions and other requests SIP is an agile general purpose tool for creating modifying and terminating sessions that works independently of underlying transport protocols and without dependency on the type of session that is being established SIP is an application layer control protocol that can establish modify and terminate multimedia sessions conferences such as Internet telephony calls SIP can also invite participants to already existing sessions such as multicast conferences Media can be added to and removed from an existing session SIP transparently supports name mapping and redirection services which supports personnel mobility users can maintain a single externally visible identifier regardless of their network location Network Diagram Anpplinabon Sener Soft Phone es ee wm 3 a eyE BPF Sofiphons T h y inici ii A zi Media Sener a ag 193 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 20 1 Incoming Call Description ipLDK system can receive incoming call by two methods Two methods are TRUNK mode and REGIST
393. o select CO Line Group D org 3A for networking call 2 Reseved Eeer Use Gatekeeper wor mes if the Der E Cak I a will be used Networking Co Line Type 7 NET PSTN PSTN This ADMIN program is used to select the type of system that is connected through the networking CO line The system type can be separated two types NET that is the networking software installed private system and PSTN that is the public switching network system ee Mode H 323 SIP Determines which protocol is used H 323 or SIP at each VOIP CO line INBAND DTMF 3 RFC2833 L DTMF 4 OUTBAND DTMF T o P Networking Routing SN 71 Table o System Usage NET PSTN SE Networking 16 digits E Numbering Code 3 Networking 00 24 Number CO Line Group 4 CPN or IP 16 digits at Information QSIG 4 IP Address at VOIP 155 This ADMIN program determines DTMF Mode at each VOIP CO line Used to set the networking connection type of the selected table entries If PSTN is directly connected this value must be set to PSTN If the networking software installed system is directly connected this value must be set to NET refer to Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 1 for an illustrated example of Networking Admin Used to set the networking number code of the selected table entries means any digits can be inserted between 0 9 Digits followed by H is an internal station number ref
394. oSLT 00 63 TI 3 RSGDKTRXtoCTR SIT 00 638 4 RSGDKTRXtoWKT_____ 00 63 5 RSG_DKTRXtoACO 00 688 6 RSG_DKTRXtoCTR ACO 00 638 7 RSGDKTPXtoDCO 00 63 _ J o 8 _ RSGDKTRXtoDVY 00 63 392 DG ST IT o 1 RSG SLTRXfrom DKTU 00 63 J 2 RSGSLITRXfromSIT 00 63 gt 3 RSG SLT RXfrom CTR_SLT__ 00 63 TI 4 RSGSLTRXfromWkKT_ 00 63 5 RSGSLTRXfromACO 00 638 6 RSG SLT RXfrom CTR_ACO 00 63 TI 7 RSGSLTRXfrmDCO_ 00 63 8 RSG SLT RXfrom VMIB 00 63 J gt 9 RSGSLTRXfromDTMF_ 00 63 gt to RSG_SLTRXfromTONE 00 63 J gt d1 _ RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC1 00 63 12 RSG_SLT RX from MUSIC2_ 00 63 gt 13 RSG SLT RXfrom RSG DKT 00 63 TI Ji RSGSLTRXfromRSG_ SIT mua 15 RSG SLT RXfrom RSG LCO 00 63 J gt gt 16 RSG _SLTRXfromIP Phone 00 63 J 393 RSG SLTTXGain 1 RSG SLTTXtoDKTU 00 63 TI 2 RSG_SLTTXtoSLT 00 63 3 RSG SLT TXtoCTR_SLT____ 00 63 J gt 4 JSG SLTTXto WKT 00 63 5 RSGSLTIXtACO 00 63 6 RSG SLTTXtoCTRACO 00 63 J 7 JSG aan 00 63 8 RSG SLTTXtoVMIB 00 63 TI 394 DG LCORXGain 1 RSGLCOPXfromDKTU__ 0 0 2 RSGLCORXfromSIT____00 6882_ 2 RSG_LCORXfromCTR_SLT ou 4 RSG_LCORXfromWkKT 00 63 5 RSGLCORXfromAcO 00 638 6 RSGLCORXfromCTR_ACO 00 63 J gt 7 RSGLCORPXfromDCO_ 00 63 gt 8 RSG_LCORXfrom VMIB_ 00 63 9 RSG LCORXfrom DTMF 00 63 J gt 10 RSG_LCORXfromTONE 00 63 d1 RSG LCORXfrom MUSIC1 00 63 J gt J8
395. oconcnnnccnncnoncnoncnonnnnncnonons 75 2 4 45 Incoming CO Ring assignment to Networking System cccccccococcccccccconccnnncccooncnnnonnnoness 76 29C re 77 e EE 17 25 2 Authonzaton OO 78 2 5 3 Automatic Call HReleaee nn nr rr rnnrnnnnes 79 2 54 Class Of Service COS essa otto cido 80 ZOD o e 82 ARO VAIN COS rasca 82 A e o O CO E A 83 2 6 1 Common Hunt Group Features ccooncccccconccnccccononcconcnnnononcnnnnonononononnnnnnonnnnnononnnnnonannnnnonaneness 83 A o e Pe e AAA 85 AO a AAPP o o E 85 VAN OS ae E e POCA On oo Po eee ene eee ee eee ee 86 209 VOCE EE E te e ateos 86 2 6 6 UCD Group Unified Call Distribution 0 ccceceecceceeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseaeeeees 87 2 6 7 ACD Automatic Call Distribution 2 0 0 0 eee cccccceseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaaeneeeees 88 2 ERT 93 2 7 1 Conference SLT Brokers Call 94 EPA A 95 2 1 3 Conference ROM rem 95 AN AP A 97 2 8 1 Internal External All Call and Meet Me agoe 97 2 8 2 Pre recorded EE EE 98 O Pe eo 99 2894 Push to Talk PTT EE 100 2 9 Linked A e o PE US O A iaia 101 2 9 1 Executive Secretary csi reis 101 2 9 2 Linked Palr Sa ON titi rai ia liar 103 2 10 External Device Control E 105 AI O A PP An A 105 e LpLDK 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 210 2 DOO PRONO ricas 106 ZV Loud AAA 107 211 VOICE SEVICE area a i iaaii 108 2 11 1 Rec
396. ode as SIP at ADMIN 340 11 Set Proxy Server Address as sip reg com at SIP Attribute 1 12 Set Domain as sip trunk com at SIP Attribute 1 13 Set User ID as 1000 sip reg com at SIP Attribute 2 14 Set Contact Number as 1000 at SIP Attribute 2 15 Set User ID Register as ON at SIP Attribute 2 16 Set User ID Usage as ON at SIP Attribute 2 gt When there s an incoming call the Station 1000 can receive call by registration COND Om BW bh Condition 1 For using SIP CO Line VOIB Mode should be SIP or Dual mode 2 Both NOMAL and DID CO service type supported 3 MSN service applied in SIP CO Line 4 CLIP and COLP are applied in SIP CO Line 5 Mobile Extension features applied by SIP CO Line 194 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Admin Programming CO Service Type 4 2 1 PGM 140 COLP Table Index 4 2 4 1 PGM 143 FLEX 1 CLIP Table Index 4 2 4 2 PGM 143 FLEX 2 Call Type 4 2 4 3 PGM 143 FLEX 3 DID CONV Type 4 2 4 4 PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Remove Number 4 2 4 5 PGM 143 FLEX 5 ISDN Enblock Send 4 2 4 6 PGM 143 FLEX 6 CLIP COLP Table 4 8 2 PGM 201 Networking CO Line Type 4 12 3 2 PGM 322 FLEX 2 VOIB Mode 4 13 1 12 PGM 340 FLEX 12 SIP Attribute 1 PGM 500 SIP Attribute 2 PGM 501 2 20 2 Outgoing Call Description ipLDK system makes Outgoing Call same as rule of 2 2 How To Access Outgoing Call O
397. of the networking Mode JOIN transfer signaling two kinds of signaling type exist Reroute and Rejoin This value is used to select the signaling type of networking transfer TCP Port 4 digits 9000 The BLF is explained in the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 19 This ADMIN program is used to set the TCP port for BLF message UDP Port 4 digits 9001 The BLF is explained in the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 19 This ADMIN program is used to set the UDP port for BLF message BLF Manager IP 12 digits 0 0 0 0 The BLF is explained in the Feature Description Address and Operation manual Section 2 16 19 This ADMIN program is used to set the IP Address of BLF manager for BLF service 154 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Ion Issue 1 0 September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK The BLF is explained in the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 19 This ADMIN program is used to set the duration of BLF status message Duration of BLF Status o o a IN 12 digits 0 0 0 0 ae e Fault Recall Timer Pisce pr CO Group eames sory Attributes Multicast IP Address The BLF is explained in the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 16 19 This ADMIN program is used to set the IP oe of multicast for BLF service Used to set the CO group of gatekeeper Networking CO Line 00 24 This ADMIN program is used t
398. of this value is managed by the Call Type setting PGM 143 FLEX 3 The end digits of CLI are 100 it is generated from the ISDN CLI of station PGM 114 FLEX 12 At default this ADMIN value is set as the same value as the station number The middle digits of CLI are 3283 it is generated from the CLIP COLP Table value of CO line PGM 201 and 143 FLEX 2 135 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 PGM114 FLEX12 100 CLI of Station PGM143 FLEX3 2 National No PGM200 FLEX9 0431 My Area Code PGM143 FLEX2 00 Index 00 of PGM201 Calling party PGM201 ENTRYO0O 3283 gt 7 SSS DE q ES DEAD RAS gt y DD AA y Sa EAS D DS ya GAS Da A CSS USER A 100 GAGA PANY D oS Pan a pers DS 2 a DSa gt As LAR ES We D A SS JESS USER B 101 Station Number BIN 00 of PGM201 Area Code Figure 2 14 2 2 outgoing CLI process Operation In pLDK system if the Call Type setting PGM 143 FLEX 3 is set to NATIONAL the outgoing CLI is generated as illustrated figure 2 14 2 according to the ADMIN program setting Ifthe ISDN CLI of STATION PGM 114 FLEX 12 is set this value is used as the end part of CLI when the outgoing CLI is generated Ifthe MY AREA CODE PGM 200 FLEX 9 is set and this value is used as the first part of C
399. oftware Upgrade Description The ipLDK MPB software can be upgraded by ipLDK upgrade program in PC In order to upgrade by ipLDK upgrade program PC and ipLDK system should be connected through SERIAL ISDN LAN MODEM interface Then the software file in the PC is sent to the system at first and the MPB software is upgraded The Figure 2 19 describes that there are 4 types of the connection of ipLDK system and PC for ipLDK MPB software SERIAL ISDN LAN MODEM Ex Figure 2 19 Connection for Software Upgrade 2 19 1 ISDN Description The pLDK MPB software can be upgraded through ISDN BRI line interface by ipLDK upgrade program in remote PC Operation 1 Connect the ISDN phone line to the PC ISDN card 2 Connect the ISDN T interface line to a BRI port of ipLDK system 3 Run ipLDK PC Upgrade program 4 Select the ipLDK system to be upgraded and click on the OK button aystem selection Upgrade LUE Series system FE x Select the System C LDK 300 LDK 300E LDK 100 LDK 20 Cancel 185 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 5 Set the port type to ISDN Connection And press the Select button TCP Connection Serial Connection C Modem Connection ou selecte onnection Your PC must have IDN card Or you cant progress this work Terminate 6 Enter the ISDN phone number path of t
400. ollowing items can be customized Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 145 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range sch gt Oo N Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table CO Line Assignment Used to check the ring assignment destination FLEX1 VALUES Display of a CO line for each Day Night Ring Mode If HOLD SAVE FLEX1 Day CO Calls are assigned to the Station during Day FLEX2 Night or Night Mode the delay value can be viewed FLEX3 Weekend ex value 100 1 means station 100 will receive FLEX4 Lunch a ring with a delay value of 1 In Weekend FLEX5 On Lunch On demand mode Delay value is only 0 Demand NOTE When there are too many stations to see you can scroll data using volume up down key 25 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 2 7 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES li PGM 146 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 1 Dial 146 1 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table A PGM146 Descriptiom__________ Procedure _ COMMENTS Incoming prefix If this value is set to ON prefix code will be FLEX1 1 ON VALUES code Insertion attached in front of incoming CLI information HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Outgoing prefix If this value is set to ON prefix code willbe FLEX2 0 OFF VALUES code Insertion attached in front of
401. on Transferred calls to a Hunt group are not recalled When a call is received in a Hunt Group the call will be in the ring process before receiving the VMIB Announcement for the duration of the Hunt Group Announcement timer If no Hunt Group announcement is assigned the timer is ignored If the timer is set to O the call will receive the announcement prior to the ring process When a Hunt Group has guaranteed announcement the 1st announcement timer is set to 0 Overflow timer is stated and ring is provided after the announcement finishes playing Only the 1st announcement may be used for guaranteed announcement If all stations in the Group are busy when a call is received the call continues to wait for an available station in the Group If queued the call will be sent to MOH until the call is answered or disconnected If there is no available member in a Group because every member sets DND UCD DND or call forward all new calls to the Group and all queued calls in the Group are rerouted to another destination as programmed Overflow destination if assigned Alternative destination if the group is UCD group and it is assigned fa callis not answered when the Overflow Timer expires it will be sent to the overflow destination while the VMIB announcement is being played H overflow destination is not assigned the call will be dropped when overflow timer expires Han Announcement Timer is set and no VMIB number is assigned the anno
402. on 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 5 4 Class Of Service COS Description Each station and CO line may be assigned to have different classes to allow or restrict call service The level of COS assignments are programmed at each Station and CO line Applied dialing restrictions are the result of the interaction of COS assignments as listed in the Class of Service Table Class of service CO Line COS L Jr 1 Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 2 Table A Table A Table B Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 S Table B Unrestricted Unrestricted all ed d2 Unrestricted T Table A B Table A Table B sal an d2 Unrestricted T l Canned Canned Canned Canned Unresheed O Restricted 1 Restricted 1 Restricted 1 Restricted2 N Canned Canned Canned Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 Restricted2 Restricted2 Restricted2 C 7 Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom nerca on O Only Only Only Only y S Table C Table C Unrestricted Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 Table D Table D Unrestricted Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 10 Table C amp D Table C amp D Unrestricted Canned Unrestricted Restricted2 Table A B C amp Table A B C amp l Canned l D Unrestricted Restricted Unrestricted Canned Restricted1 Long distance call is not allowed Canned Restricted2 Long distance call is not allowed Maximum 8 digits can be dialed 0 cannot be dialed
403. on in a Group are Model Hunt Group Station in a Hunt Group pLDK 100 15 32 pLDK 300 48 64 pLDK 300E 48 64 Several VMIB announcements may be provided to each Hunt group If a call is not answered when the st Announcement Timer expires the second announcement will be provided if the call continues to wait The second announcement may be repeated until the call is answered or disconnected by the User A Hunt Group may be assigned as one of the following 5 types A call is routed to hunt group If first destination is unavailable or unanswered the Circular aaa call is routed to the next station in the group If the call is unanswered or unavailable it is directed to the next listed station in the Terminal group The call will continue to be routed until reaching the last station in the group UCD Unified Calls are routed to the station in the group that has been idle for the longest time Call an aa All stations in the group willringwhenacallisreceived This group is assigned for Voice Mail and only the SLT assigned as the member of Nara Mail the VM group 2 6 1 Common Hunt Group Features The Hunt Group features include VMIB Announcement ipLDK system supports first and secondary VMIB announcements for the Hunt Group When a call is received at the hunt group the pre assigned VMIB announcement will be played to the caller if the VMIB announcement is set and the timer expires If the call is not answe
404. one when a new member enters the conference If this value is set to On off net VMIB announcement prompt will be heard when the call is Off net call forwarded It is only applied to CO to CO Transfer If this value is set to ON dialing DTMF tone will be heard to the outside caller when the call is Off net call forwarded It is only applied to CO to CO Transfer Conference Warning Tone Off net Prompt Usage ON OFF ON OFF Off net DTMF Tone 124 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 i A SS CO Voice Path Connect IMM DGT If this value is set to IMM immediate voice path is connected immediately at the CO outgoing call Otherwise It is connected after dialing any digits 15 Transfer Tone RBT MOH MOH While a call is transferred to destination station if this value is set to RBT transferred station will be heard ring back tone Otherwise MOH will be heard a CO CO Transfer CPT Detect ON OFE GE TOS detect on CO to CO ACD Info Print sa Cae Timer Extend Conference Timer A E NUMBER List per stations Denel P Be gt 161 System Attributes II 41 18 1 system time date are set by the network time date Off Hook Ring Signal Type MUTE BURST MUTE The off hook ring type in the system can be set to mute or one burst ring Override 1 CO Line Group ON OFF If this value is set to ON if there is no available CO Line in the first CO Line Group system can ac
405. or CO group number if required 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition This feature is available at main Attendant The Printing of all summary service will generate attendant traffic report call summary report H W unit usage summary report and CO traffic summary report Reference W A Attendant 2 13 Admin Programming E Print Port Selection PGM 175 180 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 18 1 Attendant Reports Description IpLDK system supports the following report to analyze the attendant resource Attendant Traffic Report Choose one of the following time duration today s peak time yesterday s peak time last hour yesterday s total and today s total It provides the following information fields Analysis Start Hour Starting time of hour duration which the data is recorded Attendant Number the station number of attendant Total Calls The number of total incoming calls except CO ring group call hold recall ring Calls Answered The number of answered calls by all active attendants during the measuring hour Calls Abandoned The number of calls which ring at attendant and is dropped before answering at attendant Calls Held Abandoned The number of calls which is dropped while the call is in hold mode Held calls which is time out and recalled are included in this call count Calls Held The number of
406. or VMIB and enter the VMIB Announcement Number 01 5 Save the changed setting by pressing the HOLD SAVE button Ex 4 When there s an incoming CO Call through CO Lines 1 8 during Lunch mode the Net Station 200 start to ring instantly 1 Set CO Service Type as Normal at the ADMIN 140 menu item 2 At ADMIN 144 select CO Line Range 01 08 and press FLEX 4 for Lunch Mode 3 Dial 4 for the Net Station and enter the Net station Number 200 4 To save changes press the HOLD SAVE button Condition Any CO Line Ring Assignment can be programmed for multiple stations or all stations And each ring to station can be delayed by ADMIN programming The ring assignment is individually applied to ring modes Day Night weekend or On demand refer to Ref C Every CO Line must be assigned to an Attendant Station by default Ref D Reference A Hunt Group 2 6 B VMIB announcement 2 11 1 C Ring Mode 2 13 8 D System Attendant 2 13 Admin Programming WR CO Service Type PGM 140 FLEX 1 CO Ring Assignment PGM 144 Weekly Time Table PGM 233 E Hunt Group PGM 190 2 1 2 Preferred Line Answer PLA Description If PLA service is enabled and there are several incoming CO Calls Transferred Recalled Queued or Normal Incoming Call at the same time the first answered call can be chosen by setting the PLA priority NOTE The default setting for answer order is Transferred Call Recalled Call Normal In
407. ording System VMIB Anpnouncement 108 ek A REMO ORO a 110 ab TWO WaY TOC INO EE 112 2 11 4 Recording User VMIB Announcement coooccnccnnccnncccnncnnccnnncnnnnnncnnnononcnnnonncnnononcnnnonancnnnnnanes 114 2 11 5 VMIB Announcement for Auto Attendant 000annena0nnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrerensnnrnrenenrerenne 115 2 11 6 VMIB Message Troanster 116 ZE VMIB Message with Cll act ais 116 2 118 No ANS WerGalto VMI B ista 117 2 11 9 Direct Transfer to VMIB oonccnccconncccccnncoccconcnonoconcnnnooonnnnononnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnonanens 117 2 11 10 DID Call to Each Station Voice Mail Box 118 2 11 11 CCR Call to Each Station Voice Mail Box cccccccccccccssseeceeeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeesaaeees 118 2 12 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording coocccccconcnciconcccononcncocnnnarononancnnnananos 119 22121 AOC Advice Of CHANGE usaras adas 121 22 E E 122 2 19 Attendant oe VICO iia 123 2T TASSin Atendan tdci 124 2 13 2 Attendant Gall QUEUING iia 124 2 13 3 Attendant Forward ocooocccccccccccccnccoccncconononononononnnnnonononononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnninnnnnos 125 ZV PS AMI 1S OI EE 126 2 139 Attendant OVE le E 127 PAN A E E 128 2 13 7 Change LCD Date Time display 0 nn00000nnno0001nno00annnnoornnnnnoonnnrrnornnrnrrosrnrrrrrnnnnrrrrnnrrreenne 128 2100 Way INIGAL SEMI E cito ao tesis 129 2 13 9 Disable Outgoing Access ccceccccccsseseccceeceeeeceeeeeaeeee
408. orm the following Steps 1 Select the DISA Line you wish to use 2 When the tone or announcement is heard dial the desired station hunt group number 3 After a connection with the system is made dial the CO Access Code Ex 8801 to call again outside of the system by securing another CO Line Condition You can assign the VMIB announcement instead of the intercom dial tone on a DISA line fthe DISA Authorization Code is enabled for a DISA Line a DND warning tone or VMIB announcement is heard guiding the user to enter the DISA Authorization Code refer to Ref C the dial tone then should be heard Each DISA Line may be assigned as full time DISA or Night Mode Only Night mode DISA operates as a normal CO Line during Day mode If the VMIB announcement number is stored with the CO Line will be dropped after the VMIB announcement is played f the DISA Authorization Code is disabled the permission is determined by CO to CO COS amp CO COS refer to Ref D f the DISA Authorization Code is enabled the Authorization Code should be entered to access an outgoing CO Line If the Authorization Code is matched with the Authorization Code of the station the user may access the CO Line depending on STA COS amp CO COS If the Authorization Code is matched with the Authorization Code of system it is determined by COS of Authorization code 1 If using old System Authorization Code 5 digits the system CO to CO
409. orwarded to an alternate location Operation To activate call forward for when the line is busy perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward type code 2 4 Dial Station Group or VMIB number that will receive the call To assign the CALL FORWARD button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button Press a flexible button Press the DND FOR button Assign the Call Forward type 2 Dial the destination that will receive the call Press the HOLD SAVE button ol To activate Call Forward 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button is flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button is activated 25 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To activate Call Forward to VMIB Lift the handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial the Call Forward code 1 4 Dial VMIB selection code number that will receive the call Replace the handset and go on hook MEANS To deactivate Unconditional Call Forward 1 Press DND FOR button 2 Gooff hook 3 Press DND FOR button and dial To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial the Call Forward cancel code 2 3 1 3 Call Forward No Answer Description When the station
410. ot Number of DCOB RESERVED FLEX3 IP address HOLD SAVE DCO Gateway IP Address Gateway IP Address of E1IB Slot Number of DCOB RESERVED FLEX4 IP address HOLD SAVE FLEX5 Subnet mask HOLD SAVE DCO Server IP Server IP Address of E1IB Slot Number of DCOB RESERVED FLEX6 IP address HOLD SAVE DCO Master Clock Set this board as a Master party or Slave Slot Number of DCOB RESERVED party FLEX6 IP address HOLD SAVE 2 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 Hold Preference There are two types of Hold System Hold and Exclusive Hold If a call is held in System Hold any station can retrieve the call in exclusive hold only the holding COMMENTS FLEX8 0 Exclusive HOLD SAVE VALUES 0 EXCLUSIVE 1 SYSTEM Station can retrieve the call Multi line Conference If this value is set to ON conference with multiple CO lines is available Print LCR Converted Digit If this value is set to ON LCR converted digits are displayed on the LCD with SMDR data otherwise the originally dialed digits are shown Conference Warning If this value is set to ON other members Tone will hear a warning tone when a new member enters a conference Off net Prompt Usage If this value is set to ON the off net VMIB announcement prompt will be heard when a call is Off net call forwarded this only applies to calls
411. ount of time before a call placed on system hold will recall the station placing the hold Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 3 digits 030 sec Select the amount of time a transferred call will ring at the station receiving the transfer and how long it will recall the station transferring the call ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 3 digits 030 sec When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no available CO Line in the group ACNR trial is delayed for this timer 134 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Hi BA FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 2 digits 30 sec This timer is invoked after system detects CO ring back tone from CO party If the call isn t answered the system will disconnect the call ACNR i E activated value After trial of this retry counter ACNR is canceled ACNR No Tone Retry 1 digit This ADMIN program can set Counter the trial number of seizing the CO line for ACNR If the CO line isn t seized ACNR will be canceled 13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001 300 3 digits 030 sec This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO party is busy when the CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires Automatic CO Release 020 300 3 digits 030 sec Uncompleted CO line call will Timer be automatically released after this timer CCR Inter Digit Timer 000 255 3 digits
412. outgoing CO call time The Call Cut Off timer is not released when the call is placed on hold or is transferred Admin Programming CO Call Time Restriction PGM 112 FLEX3 E Call Cut Off Timer PGM 113 FLEX12 11 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 3 CO Line Queuing Description When a Station user receives a busy tone during an attempt to access a CO Line the user may request a call back queue call The station will receive a call back when the busy CO Line becomes available Operation To activate CO Line Queuing while receiving a busy tone perform the following Steps Press and release the hook switch if the station is a SLT Dial 5 5 6 refer to Ref A or press the CALL BK button When the confirmation tone is heard replace the handset Once the CO Line becomes idle the call back ring will be received at the station Lift the handset the CO dial tone should be heard to make a call AAA Ye Condition 1 ACO Line may have any number of queues at one time 2 When the queued CO Line becomes idle or a CO Line becomes available in the group the oldest queued station will receive the call back 3 A station can make only one CO Line queuing request at a time If the station tries to make another CO Line queuing the previous one is canceled and the newer one is activated 4 Ifthe waiting station is busy and the queued CO Line is a
413. ow the assigned Ring Assignment even if DID DISA destinations are forwarded to the Attendant The call will be transferred to the Attendant directly If the Network Routing Table has more than one table entry that is the same routing number but the destination is different the call will be routed to the default destination of the Network Routing Table To transfer incoming calls to another system via VOIB the User must not drop the call before hearing the Ring Back Tone DSS HUNT VMIB VMIB and System Speed can be the destination for the Flexible DID Table PGM 231 CLIP and COLP are not applied to VOIP CO Calls Admin Programming ECO Line Service Type PGM 140 ISDN DID MSN E VOIB IP Setting PGM 340 m DID Conversion Type PGM 143 FLEX 4 E Flexible DID Table PGM 231 used in case of DID Conversion Type 2 E Networking CO Group PGM 322 FLEX 1 Networking Routing Table PGM 324 2 15 3 Normal Fast mode for H 323 Description H 323 endpoints may establish media channels in a call using either the procedures defined in Recommendation H 245 or the Fast Connect procedure described in the below The Fast Connect procedure allows the endpoints to establish a basic point to point call with as few as one round trip message exchange enabling immediate media stream delivery upon call connection The calling endpoint initiates the Fast Connect procedure by sending a SETUP message containing the fastStart e
414. pe 2 Service If this value is set to ON a busy station can FLEX21 1 ON VALUES Not in pLDK 20 receive additional CID information from an HOLD SAVE 0 OFF analog PSTN line 1 ON Door Open If this value is set to ON the programmed FLEX22 0 OFF VALUES Station can open a designated door by HOLD SAVE 0 OFF dialing the assigned Door Open Code 1 ON Dummy Station If this value is set to ON a designated FLEX23 0 OFF Station can be used as a dummy station HOLD SAVE so a hot desk agent can login at that location Emergency Supervisor If this value is set to ON this station can FLEX24 0 OFF VALUES make emergency intrusion to other station HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON 9 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 1 4 STATION ATTRIBUTES III PGM 113 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 113 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed i in the Table PGM113 Description Procedure _ COMMENTS _ ADMIN If this value is set to ON the assigned Station FLEX1 1 ON VALUES DKTU Only Users can program the ADMIN Database HOLD SAVE Default ON for Attendant Station 0 OFF 1 ON use VMIB HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Group Listening If this value is set to ON the Station User can FLEX3 1 ON use group lis
415. peration Example ADMIN setting is same as 2 12 1 Incoming Call Example 1 Lift Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the desired CO Line POOL button or LOOP button 3 Or dial the individual CO Line access code CO group access code or the first CO Line access code from the accessible group 4 Press destination number and press FF If not press call sent by Enblock Digit Timer Condition 1 For using SIP CO Line VOIB Mode should be SIP or Dual mode 2 TRUNK and REGISER mode use same method 3 Both NOMAL and DID CO service type supported 4 MSN service applied in SIP CO Line 5 CLIP and COLP are applied in SIP CO Line 6 Mobile Extension features applied by SIP CO Line 7 SIP CO Line must use Enblock Send feature Admin Programming CO Service Type 4 2 1 PGM 140 COLP Table Index 4 2 4 1 PGM 143 FLEX 1 CLIP Table Index 4 2 4 2 PGM 143 FLEX 2 Call Type 4 2 4 3 PGM 143 FLEX 3 DID CONV Type 4 2 4 4 PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Remove Number 4 2 4 5 PGM 143 FLEX 5 ISDN Enblock Send 4 2 4 6 PGM 143 FLEX 6 Enblock Digit Timer 4 5 3 10 PGM 182 FLEX 10 CLIP COLP Table 4 8 2 PGM 201 Networking CO Line Type 4 12 3 2 PGM 322 FLEX 2 VOIB Mode 4 13 1 12 PGM 340 FLEX 12 195 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 m SIP Attribute 1 PGM 500 m SIP Attribute 2 PGM 501 2 20 3 Register Description
416. pped if the busy Station that receives the calls hangs up If either of the callers hangs up the HOLD SAVE LED will be extinguished and the remaining call will be connected as in the normal talking state following presentation of a confirmation tone The holding party will receive MOH if provided refer to Ref B The recall timer is not activated during voice over Every time the busy Station switches between the callers a confirmation tone should be provided If the busy Station is using the handset voice over will be activated via the handset Likewise if busy Station is using the speaker voice over will be activated using the speaker Voice over is operated when busy station has an allowance to receive voice over PGM 113 Flex 6 and a new caller has an privilege to make voice over PGM 111 Flex 22 Reference A Camp On 2 4 5 B MOH 2 4 17 Admin Programming E Voice Over PGM 113 FLEX 6 E Caller Voice Over PGM 111 FLEX 22 2 4 27 Wakeup Description Each attendant or station user can set an alarm as a wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate only once or to repeat daily If the user goes off hook during the alarm a special dial tone will be presented Operation To register a wake up time alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 DialO 42 3 Dial the station range to be alerted if a single station is to receive the alarm en
417. pressing the MON button PV Privacy The station user receives a tone burst and a voice announcement over the speaker The microphone is deactivated for privacy The called party must lift the handset or press the MUTE button to answer the call Operation To assign the Intercom Signal mode perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 1 2 the confirmation tone should be heard 3 Dial the signal mode type 1 HF 2 TN 3 PV 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone is heard Condition In Message Wait ICM Queuing Call Transfer Attendant Override the ring is received with TN mode regardless of the assigned Intercom Signal mode refer to Ref A Ref B Ref C Intercom signal mode will not affect the voice announcements from internal all call paging refer to Ref D Reference A Message Wait 2 4 16 B Call Transfer 2 3 2 C Attendant Override 2 13 5 D Paging 2 8 51 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 15 Intercom Tenancy Group Description A station can be assigned to one of the Intercom Tenancy Groups Each Intercom Tenancy Group can be operated independently and Stations in the group can be assigned an individual CO Group to use A maximum of 5 or 15 Intercom Tenancy Groups can be assigned Each group can be assigned by the Attendant and can be programmed to allow or deny calls to other
418. provides dial tone in case if analog CO is seized for LCR dialing If there s no dial tone the call is rerouted to Alternate DMT Index If LCR type is set to M13 LCR dial tone detect option is not applied When system receive setup packet for Transit Out feature from VOI CO line system can check setup packet with registered IP whether if this packet is valid or not If TRANSIT OUT SECURITY admin is set received IP in all of received setup packet for transit out feature will be checked with registered IP and if this IP is verified transit out feature will be operated 5 Digits Authorization Code Usage LCR Dial Tone Detect Transit OUT Security 3 4 3 ADMIN PASSWORD PGM 162 In this program mode the following items can be customized 7 Press the TRANS PGMI button 8 Dial 162 9 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Analog CO line Not served at ipLDK 100 300 300E FLEX18 0 Disable HOLD SAVE VALUES O DISABLE 1 ENABLE FLEX19 1 On HOLD SAVE VALUES OFF 1 ON FLEX20 VALUE HOLD SAVE FLEX21 Value HOLD SAVE FLEX22 Value HOLD SAVE FLEX23 Value HOLD SAVE Pcmi2 Descripti n________ Procedure _ COMMENTS ADMIN Password An ADMIN password can be assigned for entering ADMIN Programming mode as a security measure To delete the ADMIN Password 4 digits Range HOLD SAVE VALUES Defa
419. ps 1 When attempting CO line access a DND warning tone or System Announcement will be heard 2 Enter the authorization code and press the key if authorization code is set to 5 digits the key is not needed 3 If valid the CO line will be connected if not valid an error tone will be presented To register the authorization code on a Station 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Type 3 1 Authorization Code feature 3 For 3 11 digit codes Enter the desired authorization code and press the key 4 For fixed 5 digit codes Enter the desired Authorization Code and Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To change the authorization code at a Station 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Type 32 3 Enter the current authorization code Followed by if 3 11 digit or Hold Save if fixed 5 digit codes are in use 4 Type in the new authorization code Followed by if 3 11 digit or Hold Save if fixed 5 digit codes are in use Condition Up to 200 authorization codes can be programmed on the System Duplicate authorization codes cannot be assigned to more than one Station f Loop LCR ACNT is set on a Station the authorization code is required when the station dials the Loop LCR CO Access code refer to Ref A f you use authorization code for a DECT authentication you have to set 5 digits authorization for the DECT Reference A LCR 2 2 7 Admin Programming E Authorization Code Table PGM 227
420. r PGM 180 FLEX 1 E Hold Recall Timer PGM 180 FLEX 5 2 13 7 Change LCD Date Time display Description The attendant can change the LCD Date Time display format of stations in system Date MM DD YY DD MM YY ex August 4 2004 gt 08 04 03 04 08 03 Time 12H 24H ex eight thirty P M gt 08 30 PM 20 30 Operation To change LCD Date format toggle perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial0 44 To change LCD Time format toggle 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 045 Admin Programming CD Time Date Language Display Mode PGM 169 128 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 8 Day Night Service Description When a CO call comes into the system the destination of the CO call can be changed according to the time There are 6 ring modes Day mode Night mode Weekend mode Lunch mode On demand mode Automatic Ring mode The destination of a CO call can be set differently for each ring mode while a User sets the destination of CO call with ADMIN program refer to Ref A At Day mode Night mode Weekend Lunch mode the User can set the appropriate destination of CO call according to the situation day or night or weekend or lunch Lunch mode can be used among day mode same as the name So in weekly time table PGM 233 there are lunch start time and lunch end time On demand mode among t
421. r 131 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table EEN Description________ Procedure COMMENTS Display Station Number The LCD will show the Stations of a VALUE1 Day Night VALUE1 by COS PGM 130 designated Class of Service COS VALUE2 COS Range FLEX1 DAY FLEX2 Night VALUE2 01 11 NAVIGATION Next page Volume Up Down Key Display Station Number Station Numbers that access certain CO Line VALUE CO Line VALUES by CO Access Group Groups could be checked The LCD shows Group 00 73 ipLDK PGM 131 Stations that are assigned to access the selected CO Line Group 300 300E 00 25 ipLDK 100 01 08 ipLDK 20 NAVIGATION Next page Volume Up Down Key 18 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 2 CO Line PGM 140 146 CO Line features are covered in PGMs 140 to 144 When programming LCD and LEDs indicate current programmed data and programming status If the programmer enters data correctly then LCD and LEDs show the entered data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area 3 2 1 CO SERVICE TYPE PGM 140 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button Dial 140 Enter the appropriate CO Line Range Press FLEX 7 to set CO Line type Press FLEX 2 to set Sub Attributes Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table ST SH Se Ze Pemi4o Des
422. r with CLI message 1 Atthe retrieve CLI message LCD press the SPEED button 2 LCD display message changes as a usual station speed dial program except that it displays the CLI message using an indication ENTER SPEED BIN NO 001 CLI MSG USED 3 The User can press a Station speed bin number OR Press the HOLD SAVE button After entering the speed bin number CLI message using indication is displayed onto speed dial digit position It means that CLI can be entered pressing CONF button If user wants to assign the CO for speed it must be prior to CONF button pressing CLI MSG USED ENTER CO BTN DIGIT 001 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button to store the speed dial number Condition CLI display works about any type of co service if co line is ISDN But CLI message wait only works about DID MSN co service type of ISDN line The total number of CLI message wait is 500 in ipLDK 20 2000 in ipLDK 100 300 300E on System base Station without LCD can not receive CLI message wait even though CLIP is set to ON CLI messages are saved against power failure When the call is routed to Ring Group CLI Message is waited only the first member of Ring Group When the call is routed to a member of UCD Circular Terminal station group the CLI Message Wait will be provided to the first ringing station Ifthe external party releases the line during the VMIB announcement the CLI Message Wait is not saved to any stations But the ext
423. ram mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 170 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 170 COMMENTS The Modem associated station to be used as FLEX1 Station Number VALUES Modem line flexibly HOLD SAVE Default last Incoming CO calls will be connected to Modem station 147 device if the Station receives a call If a CO Line is associated with the Modem all FLEX2 CO Number VALUES incoming CO calls through the line will be HOLD SAVE 01 36 Analog CO connected via the Modem The Modem line associated to the CO Line cannot be used for outgoing CO calls 3 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 3 4 12 MUSIC ASSIGNMENT PGM 171 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 171 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 171 COMMENTS BGM Type FLEX1 BGM Type refer to VALUES HOLD SAVE MOH Type When MOH Type is assigned the external party FLEX2 MOH Type of a CO line call placed in the hold state System referto VALUES exclusive transfer conference etc should hear HOLD SAVE music FLEX3 Music Channel referto VALUES HOLD SAVE ICM Box Music Channel 38 VALUES ipLDK 20 O Not Assignment 1 Int Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH
424. rated example of Networking Admin CO ATD Code CLI YES NO NO During transit out this admin value determines which CLI should send to PX 9 10 AUTHO Code COS YES NO NO When the value is set to YES COS of Transit out Use call will be determined by password of Autho Code Table COS 11 SMDR DIAL YES NO NO When the value is set to YES Transit Out Code HIDDEN and Dialed Number in SDMR data will not be printed at slave system 4 3 27 VOIB NET ATTRIBUTES PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 340 VOB IP SETTING ff Address SKIP 12 digits 0 0 0 0 Used to set the IP address of VOIP board A esas leanne arte pay sierra o eoe eos PRE A eT ia pe to VOIP board for trace 6 Default Codec 0 G 723 1 Used to set the default codec of VOIP board Default CH Used to set the default codec of VOIP board A e will be delayed i ici iil a e a board is high or normal is high or normal VOIP board JN ge Mode Used for selecting the trunk signaling protocol of VOIP board and if the mode of VOIP board is H 323 SIP or DUAL If it is set to DUAL selected VOIP board manage both H 323 and SIP automatically oor H 323 1 SIP 2 Dual aie board is in use board is in use lees Mode e for setting the DTMF mode of VOIP board Inband DTMF 3 RFC 2833 4 Outband Ser 156 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Jitter
425. ration To activate Net Call Forward Follow Me perform the following Steps 1 From the Station that the calls will be forwarded to press the SPEAKER DND FOR button 2 Dial the Follow Me Forward code 0 the Station number that is to be Call Forwarded from another System 3 Dial the Authorization Code the key the DND FOR button will flash at the Forwarding Station and a confirmation tone will be provided 4 All calls to the Forwarding Station will be routed to the Forwarded Station To deactivate Net Call Forward Follow Me 1 Atthe User s own Station press the flashing DND FOR button 2 The DND FOR button will be extinguished and the Net Call Forward Follow Me will be cancelled Condition Authorization code should be registered to use Follow Me Call Forward Remote deactivation is not supported The confirmation tone will be provided even though Follow Me Forward may not be allowed by the other system Net Follow Me Forward is available within a VOIP networking environment only Among networked systems the same Authorization code mode 5 Digit Variable Authorization code Usage should be programmed Admin Programming E Authorization Code Table PGM 227 176 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 18 Centralized SMDR for Transit Call Description The SMDR call records from the Master System will include the statio
426. rbell instead of an HOLD SAVE 0 BELL alarm 1 ALARM Default Alarm Signal Designates if assigned stations will FLEX10 VALUE2 VALUES receive a repeating signal or single HOLD SAVE 0 ONCE burst ONCE as the alarm tone 1 RPT Default FLEX11 VALUE2 HOLD SAVE CTI Port CTI port to be assigned in RSG VALUES 0 NOT USED Default 1 DKTU in RSG 2 SLT in RSG RSG Nation Code Used to set RSG device gains FLEX12 Nation Code HOLD SAVE IPSEC If this feature is set to ON RSG uses FLEX13 VALUE2 VALUES IPSEC HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Default 1 ON 87 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 13 6 RSG ALARM ASSIGNMENT PGM 385 In this program mode the following items can be customized 5 Press the TRANS PGMI button 6 Dial 385 7 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS RTP Port number of The Station can receive Station Range RSG Bin Internal MOH alarm ringing when a RSG number FLEX1 FLEX8 alarm is detected HOLD SAVE 3 13 7 IP PHONE ATTRIBUTES PGM 386 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 386 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 386 COMMENTS Set MAC Address Used to register an IP Phone Bin number Range 01 16 to the System by entering its FLEX1 MAC Address Default 00 MAC Add
427. rd step At the fourth step the CO transit in DID call is ringing to the station 202 The caller can make a conversation when the station 202 is answered Call Flow Outside Caller dials a station in slave system 2 Call comes in master system and search networking numbering plan table Master transfers the call request to the found networking system Call is ringing to station 202 Figure 2 16 10 The CO Transit In Operation 168 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Additional Programming Master PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Conversion Type 2 PGM 231 Flexible DID Table Assign Slave extension Operation CO Transit In 1 When an incoming call is received from the PABX the call is automatically routed and a Network CO line is secured according to the DID conversion 2 The incoming call will ring with CLI at the Station being called the Caller will hear a ring back tone 3 Once the call is answered at the Station it will be connected Condition There are not timers affiliated with CO Transit In operation The Caller will hear a busy tone if a networking path is not available during transit Reference A Network Numbering Plan Table 4 12 4 Admin Programming E Networking Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 E DID Conversion Type PGM 143 E Flexible DID Table Assign
428. rd their VMIB announcement Range 010 255 HOLD SAVE VMIB Valid User If this value is set to 0 the VMIB FLEX4 Seconds 1 digit Message Timer announcement can not be recorded Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE designates the minimum time that a Station user must record their VMIB announcement Door Open Time Designates the length of time needed to FLEX5 VALUE 100 execute the door open relay msec 2 digits Range 05 99 HOLD SAVE 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM181 Description_____ Procedure COMMENTS ICM Box Timer Designates the ringing time of the ICM box at FLEX6 Seconds 2 digits a Station when the ICM box user press the Range 00 60 CALL button HOLD SAVE ICM Dial Tone Timer Designates the time when an off hook Station FLEX7 Seconds 2 digits will play the intercom dial tone before an error Range 01 20 tone is provided GCOS AVE digits before an error tone is provided Range 01 20 LDS AE MSG Wait Reminder Designates the amount of time between FLEX9 Seconds 2 digits Tone Timer repeated message waiting reminder tones to Range 00 60 the Station One Paging Timeout Timer Designates the maximum time for a page FLEX10 Seconds 3 The System will automatically disconnectthe digits EE page when the timer expires HOLD SAVE Pause Timer Used for speed dial or LNR the ipLDK FLEX11 Seconds 1 digit System sends the dia
429. re enables Station Users to utilize the FLASH button for terminating pages and intercom calls While paging or on an intercom call press the FLASH button to terminate the call and return to the intercom dial tone Operation To assign a Flash at flex button 1 Press the TRANS button 2 Press desired any flex button 3 Press the TRANS and Dial 94 4 Press Hold To perform a Flash while on a CO line call 1 Press the FLASH button To generate a flash while on a CO line from a SLT 1 Press the hook switch slightly 2 Dial 5 5 1 refer to Ref A Condition 1 The Flash command is not activated on ISDN CO lines 2 A Station that isn t permitted to access CO line cannot initiate a flash 3 During a flash the LED of CO line will flash Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Flash Command to CO Line Code PGM 106 FLEX 8 MH Flash Type PGM 141 FLEX 7 CO Flash Timer PGM 142 FLEX 12 ESLT Hook switch Bounce Timer PGM 182 FLEX 1 ESLT Maximum Hook switch Flash Timer PGM 182 FLEX 2 ESLT Minimum Hook switch Flash Timer PGM 182 FLEX 3 2 4 12 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customized by either ADMIN or station programming The programmable Flexible buttons include CO Line Automatically accesses the assigned line User Programmable DSS BLF Automatically indicates the assigned station and provides BLF for off hook and DND User Programma
430. receive pages but not allowed to make page announcements Stations to receive pages for a given zone are assigned to the zone A page warning tone if assigned will be provided to the page zone s prior to the audio connection The user is allowed to continue the page for a specified period After the time is expired the user is disconnected and the page zone s is returned to idle A user can respond to a page from any station and connect to the paging party for a private conversation The user should respond to the page in the Page Time out duration to connect the paging party Paging Codes po 546 Extemal Page Zone AA Extemal Page Zone3 po 548 Extemal Page Zone4 Operation To initialize a page perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dialthe desired paging code 3 If assigned after the page warning tone is presented make the desired announcement 4 Replace the handset and go on hook To assign Meet me Page at a FLEX button 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the desired FLEX button 3 Dial 5 4 4 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes To respond to a Meet me Page 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dial 5 4 4 Meet me Page code OR 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button in case of WIT 300HE dial Meet me Page code and press Send button 4 The call with the paging party is established and the zone returns to idle 97 JOLDk 20 100
431. received with an ISDN CO line and there are MSN table entries filled with the CO field value then only the MSN table entries of MSN CO programmed will be searched But if there is no MSN table entry filled with the CO field value then all MSN table entries will be searched Max 8 devices can be connected to a SO part It is required to have individual ISDN terminal power feeding to use them The sub address is carried from PX in CPSN Called Party Sub address Number IE Only one digit 0 9 can be used for sub addressing Admin Programming ECPN Type PGM 114 FLEX 8 ESO Sub address using Type PGM 114 E ISDN Calling Sub address PGM 200 MMSN Table PGM 202 E Flexible DID Table PGM 231 143 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 8 ISDN Supplementary 2 14 8 1 ETSI Conference jpLDK 20 Only Description The ISDN Supplementary Service ETSI Conference ISDN SS EC feature allows the user to make a 3 party conference using one ISDN B channel Operation To initiate a 3 party conversation perform the following Steps 1 Press the FLASH button then the CONF button while on an ISDN broker call one call should be on hold and another call should be active 2 Both calls should be active in a 3 party conversation or conference call To place a call on hold while engaged in a 3 party conversation 1 Press the FLASH button 2 Press the
432. recording when monitoring agent s conversation Queue Information of Queuing Call count is automatically displayed at Supervisor LCD as well as Agent LCD Operation VMIB Announcement The VMIB announcements can be assigned to provide different messages to each UCD groups The system UCD groups can be programmed to provide announcements to incoming calls to a group where all stations are busy Both primary and secondary announcements will be available and a guaranteed announcement may be assigned Agents The following features are available to Agents in a UCD group Agent Login Logout It is assigned by the Admin Program A UCD agent can contain more than one UCD group Agent On Off Duty Agent can be On Off duty by dialing the UCD DND Code Trans 87 Hunt No on the dial pad press the pre programmed flexible button Alternate UCD Group An alternate UCD group can be programmed so that if stations are busy the alternate will be checked for an available station Overflow Station Assignment An overflow station may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified time The overflow station may not be one of the UCD group stations The overflow station can be forwarded if enabled in the Admin program Mute Ring Service If 191 F22 option is set to ON Mute ring is served to UCD first Member when the call is queued The mute ring is given only one time in 0 4 second Display Queued Calls LCD
433. red when the second announcement timer expires this announcement will be played Also the secondary announcement can be repeated as its programming refer to Ref A Overflow Destination lf the overflow timer expires and the call is unanswered the call will be diverted to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be an extension a Group VMIB announcement or a system speed dial bin number Wrap up Timer When a member of the Hunt Group goes idle ipLDK system will not distribute calls to that member After the wrap up timer expires the member Station returns to a real idle state and ready to receive CO calls Music Source ipLDK system supports up to 8 kinds of music sources for Hunt Groups not including the ring back tone When a call goes to queue a caller will hear the pre assigned music source refer to Ref B Multiple Member Assignment A station can be a member of one or more Hunt Groups of the same type 83 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Hunt Group DND If Hunt group member have Hunt group DND button Hunt group member can set Hunt call DND or not This works toggle Hunt Group Name If call is routed to Hunt group and hunt group name is programmed already group name can be displayed at member s LCD Condition f group member is forwarded to another Group call can be received or not by hunt attribute member forward opti
434. ress refer to Button 00 00 00 00 00 HOLD SAVE Table BUTTON TABLE DIGIT_ BIN DIGIT AA IMUTE D DND r ER CC FLASH a LDP 7000 series Button Table DIGIT DIGIT JA Lon D Bo UU E In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 386 3 Enter the appropriate Bin number Range 01 16 i pLDK 20 01 96 ip_LDK 100 300 300E 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table 88 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM 386 mS IP Address Display Displays the IP Address of the A l IP phone Port View Once a connection is made to iio ION the System the current Station number will be displayed Port Number View Displays the Port Number of ID FLEX4 phone balsa ld O IP phone mowe eee e Numbers being used STUN Enabled If IP Phone is connected to FLEX7 ipLDK system This feature shows if the IP station use NAT of PAT Display Only None PAT NAT or NAT PAT CTI Port CTI IP Address to supports first FLEX8 VALUE VALUES party CTI HOLD SAVE 0 NOT USED 1 DKT 2 SLT IPSEC When value is set to ON VOIB FLEX9 VALUE VALUES uses IPSEC Default OFF HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Outside NAT Firewall If this value is set to ON the FLEX10 VALUE device will be located in HOLD SAVE NAT User ID Phontage can be registeredto
435. ro value The combination of this value and PGM200 FLEX 9 is compared with the received CLI and the received CO call can be judged the local call or the long distance call This value is also used the outgoing CLI data when station makes an outgoing CO call Maintain DID Name ON OFF OFF This value is used at the CLI display of incoming DID CO call If the incoming DID call has CLI it is displayed on station LCD only ringing time If this value is set to ON CLI display is maintained when the call is answered ie ee emm 4 emm This value is used the valid destination station ee a about PC application connection request COLP Table a 10 digits COLP table is used when makes the outgoing CLI The method of making CLI is explained in the Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 14 2 At this value the maximum 50 CLI data can be programmed at PGM143 FLEX 1 and 2 145 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 202 MSN Table Entry No 000 MSN Refer to Feature Description and 249 Operation manual Section 2 14 7 and 2 14 8 is defined one of ISDN CO line service In the ipLDK system maximum 250 MSN table entries can be programmed Each MSN table entry has MSN CO line number Index of flexible DID table Sub address number and Telephone number CO Line number 01 08 Used to set CO line
436. rogrammed long distance code as the first and second digit dialed or any number with more than maximum local call digit count it will be regarded as long distance call Max local call digit count is programmable and the default value is 7 The SMDR output records contain the following 5 digit Station call originator terminating for incoming field 3 digit used CO line field 8 digit call duration field HH MM SS 8 digit year month and day YY MM DD 5 digit time of day call originator field 1 digit call identification digit first digit in digit dial field 18 digit collected dial digit field 2 digit account group number field 5 digit pulse metering count field 10 digit call cost field 12 digit account code field 119 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 When the SMDR storage pools are almost exhausted the system gives Buffer full warning signal to the attendant And the LCD of attendant station will indicate how many SMDR records are remained to store for some intervals Some stations can be grouped to count the billing with a SMDR receipt using a SMDR account group SLT DTMF RLS TMR should be adjusted to reasonable value in order to print all digits that SLT dialed ICM SMDR is not supported for LOST CALL Only Calling Party NO is displayed at STA field Only the Station No which Getting ICM call is displayed at DIALED field ex E xxx
437. rogramming should have been covered in the joLDK 20B Hardware Description and Installation Manual Please refer to that manual to ensure you are prepared for Admin Programming of your ipLDK 20B System NOTE AU programming should be done at Station 100 Station port 00 using KD 36D LKD 30 44 or LDP 7024D digital key teleohone The System cannot be programmed with a large LCD DKTU The following Figure 2 0 is provided as a reference during Admin Programming It displays the LDP 7024D buttons commonly used for programming the System A more detailed description of these buttons is included in the LDP User Guide 3 Soft buttons Ring LED FLEX 1 FLEX 13 SR i e CA 8 E d Eoo a H eeeeeeoeeee E e aeeeeeeeeeee Ki s 56000000000 d EA e ER 0085 gt 000000000s SETE EEES i E aaron E D 5650000000000 D a 665000 ga z see 0 000000006 D ae eee oe Toe eo anno LEESE See abaaaa ebe FLEX 24 MIC Speaker phone Fixed button Navigation button Flexible button Figure 2 0 Keyset Button Diagram Phonebook 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 2 1 Entering Programming Mode To enter Programming Mode perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset OR Press the MON button on the ADMIN station The ICM dial tone should be heard Press the TRANS PGM button and dial Confirmation tone should be heard Enter the ADMIN password if a password has been
438. rom barge in by hang up the phone ADN 72 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition This feature is only supported for DKTU with 3 soft buttons This feature is only available for called party is talk state with CO Line or Station Barge In supervisor can see the other party of called station before monitor operation Admin Programming E Barge In mode PGM 113 FLEX 13 2 4 41 Station Call Coverage Description This feature permits the user a covering station user to receive ring and answer calls directed to a covered station A Flex button is assigned at the covering station for calls to the covered station A station can have multiple Call Coverage buttons each covering a different station and multiple stations can have a Call Coverage button for a covered station When a covered station rings the CALL COVERAGE button LED will flash and the covering station may receive ring immediate or delayed for the call The covering station can answer the call using the CALL COVERAGE button terminating ring at other stations Once answered the LED of CALL COVERAGE buttons for the station at other covering stations will extinguish Operation To assign Call Coverage button to flexible button program by call coverage station Press TRANS PGM button Press Flexible to program Call Coverage button Press TRANS PGM button and dial 46 Enter S
439. rompt is heard and the voice message FIFO or LIFO and Time amp Date prompt for the message is played 3 Pressing the CONF button the current message is deleted and the next message is heard For SLT and 2 8 BIN DKTU Dial 1 To delete a message For SLT and 2 8 BIN DKTU Dial 2 To listen to next message For SLT and 2 8 BIN DKTU Dial 3 To repeat a message 4 Pressing the ADD soft button you can record the additional message It can be possible LDP 6000 7000 which has 3 soft key 5 Pressing the REWIND soft button return to the beginning of the current message with VM MSG Rewind Timer LDP 6230 6212 with 3 soft keys 114 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition There is no time limit to record user greeting in a station When a caller leaves a voice message wait the recording time is controlled by Valid User Message Timer ADMIN program 181 FLEX 4 and VMIB User Record Timer ADMIN program 181 FLEX 3 When the recorded message shorter than Valid User Message time the message is not saved Also the User Record Timer expires confirmation tone is heard and the message is saved in the station If the station has several messages to be retrieved by pressing the CALLBK button the message only with station number will be retrieved at first Message wait with station number gt VMIB Message wait gt CLI Message
440. roviding service transparency cost efficiency and adaptability to your organization s needs Network Configurations The System can support various interconnected corporate network configurations via the Internet and up to 72 systems including itself can be combined on the network LAN LAN MPB Dm ME EE BRUN UD Li lr oi a aiH VOIP K K fi fff Ci a eo PENY Jee III LAN pe Es gt Ba BLF Manager Figure 2 16A H 450 over IP networking configuration BLF manager Networking Protocols The ipLDK System can support H 450 over IP for the basic networking functions and proprietary protocol for advanced networking functions P standard protocolH 323 for Call Control H 450 1 H 450 12 LG NORTEL CO LTD Proprietary protocol for advanced Function Requirements To use the networking features software lock key installation is required Each ipLDK system has its own unique software lock key To get the software lock key contact the distributor of your ipLDK system 154 o JOLDk 20 100 3
441. s then reconnect to the external party To assign an ACCOUNT CODE flexible button to access the account code feature 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Types 0 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes Condition While entering the account code the current call is put on mute mode The user may enter the account code before a call conversation is established Reference A SMDR Account Enter Code ADMIN 106 Flex 10 ADMIN Programming Werter to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual WE SMDR Account Enter Code ADMIN 106 Flex 10 77 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 5 2 Authorization Code Description If the Station or CO line is programmed to enter the authorization code by ADMIN programming the authorization code must be entered to access CO line An authorization code can be used for SMDR DISA account code NOTE Personal authorization codes should be kept secure by the System Attendant and individual Station Users to avoid fraudulent phone calls being made An authorization code is assigned as a fixed 5 digit or as 3 11 digits as applicable each station has a different authorization code NOTE Authorization Code Length set 3 11 or 5 digit in PGM161 F21 Operation To access a CO line using an authorization code perform the following Ste
442. s In band digit stream is sent to external VM after this timer 04 Master sends the connect 7 message to slave system after 16 Transit Connect Timer 1 30 Hor when the transil out CO type is a pulse analog trunk 17 VMIB Message 1 99 sec VMIB message is rewound as Forward Rewind this timer LCO Connect Timer 0 20 sec If this timer expires after starting outgoing dial the system regards that line as connected If there are extra digits after timer expires the Pause is automatically added before the first added digit CIS only 19 LCO CPT Detect Timer sec To check LCO status after LCO is connected system assigns CPT periodically with timer To activate timer CO CO XFER CPT detect PGM160 F16 should be set to ON 20 Forward To VMIB Timer 20 60 If Auto Fwd To VMIB feature PGM113 F14 is set to a station the call is automatically forwarded to VMIB after this timer expired so the caller can leave a voice message 1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce 01 25 2 digits 100ms Select the length of time that is Timer SLT Only needed to regard as a valid on hook or off hook 2 SLT Maximum Hook Flash 001 250 3 digits 6 10ms Select how long the user could Timer SLT Only press the hook switch in order for it to be considered a FLASH Timed Break Recall for SLT 3 SLT Minimum Hook Flash 000 250 3 digits 020 100ms The minimum bound time that Timer SLT Only system considers as hook flash 4 S
443. s CLI system recognize this purpose is to change Conv Table index field When admin user erase CLI field Conv Table index will be erased ICLID Table can be initialized by PGM450 F11 Initialization Other Tables If ICLID Usage option of CO line is off this CO line will not be checked with ICLID tables In other words only CO line with ICLID Usage option ON will be applied with ICLID feature PGM143 F 18 User can register wild card number in CLI field If is registered only registered numbers before the will be check with received CLI number And if all of numbers is matched before this call will be handled by ICLID feature AEA Admin Programming mICLID Table PGM 237 149 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 15 VOIP Service NOTE Under certain operating conditions this equipment cannot be relied upon to make emergency calls Alternative arrangements should be made for access to the emergency services 2 15 1 Call by IP address Description This feature is established by receiving IP numbers or dialing IP numbers directly Operation To make an IP call by address perform the following Steps 1 Press the desired CO line POOL or LOOP button OR 2 Dial the CO line or Group code 3 The dial tone should be heard then dial the IP address use the key in place of where the dots of the IP address would be u
444. s Mode 00 MOO LCR call is disabled The leading digits can be duplicated FLEX 2 and the DMT index make each entry unique The Leading Digit table is sorted by leading digits FLEX 2 in LDT INT COL BOTH and DMT index Internal LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of leading digits and FLEX 2 is INT or BOTH Loop LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of leading digits and FLEX 2 is COL or BOTH Direct CO LCR is applied if the dialed digits are matched with one of the leading digits and FLEX 2 is COL or BOTH and the secured CO Line belongs to the programmed CO Group in DMT To work Loop LCR and Direct CO LCR differently with the same leading digits there should be a leading digit entry for loop LCR prior to the leading digits for direct CO LCR It is possible if the DMT index for loop LCR is smaller than the DMT index for direct CO LCR While direct CO LCR is applied to ISDN CO an ISDN Information message with called party IE which includes only the numbering plan and numbering type is sent to the network when a user dials a digit It is for the network not to disconnect the line For direct CO LCR leading digits should be programmed in consideration with the dial tone time provided by the Network Direct CO LCR does not use an alternative DMT index if a CO Line is already accessed LCR always has the higher precedence than the flexible numbering plan table LCR can be applied in the following instances
445. s filled in the Called Party Sub address Number CPSN field of EE ee uuaa 10 Reserved __ 11 CLI Name Display O OFF SP this field is his faa ON he Sm the system checks whether the received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not If it is matched the speed dial name is displayed When outgoing CLI is active and CLI RESERVED type is EXT Station Progress Indication ore If this value is set to ON the Progress RESERVED Indicator can notice non ISDN device D IDN GEIR GINORI ae If this value is set to ON the CLI RESERVED information is restricted by PX ISDN COLR ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the connect party s CLI information is restricted by RESERVED PX DID Restriction ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the station is restricted to receive the DID incoming Call 17 DID Call Wait ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON when the station is busy another DID call could be waiting CLI rl _ This value selects This value selects CLI type This value selects CLI type Number type is EXT Station this value is used as outgoing CLI a Call Wait If this value is set to ON she receives A Ataca ng aN 21 LONG CLI 1 Max 16 digits If CLI type of outgoing CO line is set to 1 Long CLI 1 is sent EA De tee to 2 Long CLI 2 is sent 116 e In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 4 3 11 FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENT EN AI A A A
446. s its own Secretary are busy a call will be forwarded to the second Secretary of the Executive Secretary chain it cannot be a loop chain If an Executive has multiple secretaries and the first Secretary is busy a call will be forwarded to the next Secretary If an Executive has multiple secretaries a Secretary can forward a call to another Secretary but cannot forward a call to Executive If an Executive makes a call forward to non secretary station a call to Executive will be routed to assigned station refer to Ref D When both Executive and Secretary are busy camp on transferred calls messages are remained at the last Secretary station in the chain In Korea India or Israel every ICM call to an Executive is automatically forwarded to the Secretary even if the Executive Station is in an idle state only Executives of equal or higher level can make a direct ICM call to an idle Executive Station If CO Call to SEC feature is set to ON incoming CO calls automatically are forwarded to the Secretary If the Call Secretary DND feature is set to ON and the secretary is in the DND state refer to Ref A incoming calls are not forwarded refer to Ref D to the Secretary even if the Executive is in idle state Korea India and Israel only In SEC station to control the EXEC DND SEC station type must be DKT To check EXEC DND at SEC station SEC station must be only idle state Reference A DND 2 4 9 B Camp On 2 4 5 C
447. s only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 8 10 and 11 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 9 10 and 11Station is matched with the allowed toll pass NOTE Allow table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 9 10 and 11 Used to check whether the dialed digits by COS 9 10 and 11Station is matched with the denied toll pass digits NOTE Den table B is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 9 10 and 11 3 9 2 CANNED TOLL TABLES PGM 225 In addition to the basic toll restrictions stations within COS 5 or 6 are subject to dial restrictions based on the Canned Allow and Deny Tables This program permits entries in the Canned Toll Tables Both the Allow and Deny table have 20 bins up to 14 digits Issue 1 0 September 2008 COMMENTS FLEX6 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 50 Deny Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX7 VALUE refer to Allow Table Range 01 50 Allow Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE FLEX8 VALUE refer to Deny Table Range 01 50 Deny Number Max 14 Digits Range 0 9 HOLD SAVE VALID DATA FUNCTION LCD DISPLAY CS benitare EAN e CA In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 224 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Pam2a _ Description______ Procedure COMMENTS Allow Table Deny Table Used
448. s set to 0 4s on 0 2s off 0 4s on 4sec off released automatically HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ACD Automatic Call FLEX9 1 ON VALUES Distribution Print Enable available HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON ACD Print Timer ACD database can be printed per the FLEX10 002 3 VALUES desired time interval 10 sec or 1 hour digits Range 001 ADMIN 161 FLEX 14 base 225 HOLD SAVE Print database is re initialized after printing HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON VIMB MN Gain Used to designate the VMIB FLEX12 002 TTT e prompt gain Range 00 31 HOLD SAVE CLI Information at VM If this value is set to ON CLI is added FLEX13 1 ON VALUES SMDI Simplified Message when Voice Mail information is printed HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Desk Interface through RS232 port by SMDI 1 ON ACD Print Timer Unit This value determines the unit of ACD FLEX14 1 Hour VALUES Print timer HOLD SAVE 0 10 SEC 1 HOUR RANGE 1 hr 10sec ADMIN 161 FLEX 10 Set VM SMDI Type This value sets VM SMDI type FLEX15 1 Type Il HOLD SAVE Refer to the RS232 Spec Incoming Toll Check If this value is set to ON the System FLEX16 1 ON VALUES checks for tolls applied to incoming CO HOLD SAVE 0 OFF calls 1 ON 30 SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 FLEX17 CO Line This is available for Number Range 01 08 HO
449. scribes Net Call operation in the VOIP Networking connection E O O Er Er 101 E O ho Figure 2 16 1 Net call operation in VOIP networking connections Call Flow iis Station 101 dials 202 that is a station number of other system CAS System searches Networking Numbering Table 2 matches 202 2 means 200 299 For example 10 152 32 67 or 192 168 1 1 NOTE During a conversation all telephony features are available ex call transfer hold conference and etc 156 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Operation To make a Net Call perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button the dial tone should be heard 2 Diala Station number on another Networking System OR 3 Press the NET DSS button 4 The station will access a Network CO Line according to the Net Routing Table the System will send a digit stream that is modified by the Net Routing Table 5 The called System will receive a digit stream that is sent by the calling system and will analyze it using the Net Routing Table to determine the right destination Station 6 The call will ring at the destination Station 7 The COL flexible button LED representing the CO line for the Net Call will be extinguished when the Net Call is completed Condition To make a Net Call as an Intercom
450. sed Ex IP Address 156 147 3 201 Dialed number 156 147 3 201 4 Press the button to place the call If the Called Party is a User in the ipLDK System ringing will follow the pre defined Ring Assignment PGM 144 Condition When programming Speed Dial for Direct Call the key must not be used ex to assign 156 147 3 139 to Speed Dial enter 156 147 3 139 and not 156 147 3 139 In DISA incoming calls CO access is denied if the line seized by dialing Co access Code is a VOIB line Admin Programming NW CO Line Service Type PGM 140 VOIB IP Setting PGM 340 150 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 15 2 Call by Routing Table Description This feature is established by dialing Station numbers as programmed in the Network Routing Table PGM 324 Operation To use the Call by Routing Table 1 Dial the Station number included in the range from start range to end range in Network Routing Table 2 The System will select one VOIP CO line in the CO Group assigned in Network Routing Table 3 The User will hear a Ring Back Tone if this call is possible 4 In case of error busy or no answer the call will follow the DID DISA destination PGM 167 Condition For calls using the Network Table VOIB calls follow the ISDN DID Call Procedure DID Conversion Type Digit Conversion Table Flexible DID Table etc VOIP CO calls do not foll
451. sed to enable or disable the FLEX6 1 VALUES Enable Disable VMIB Announce 2 Repeat HOLDISAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Overflow Destination Calls to a Station in the group FLEX7 VALUE VALUES will continue to route until Destination Type 1 Station answered or each station inthe S A Hunt 2 Hunt Group VMIB Speed Bin 3 VMIB 00 70 00 group has been tried The call will remain at the last station in eine we Note Assigned the group or will be passed to 4 System Speed the overflow station group 2000 2499 ipLDK 20 VMIB System Speed bin after 2000 3499 ipLDK 100 LDK 300 he overflow timer expires 2000 4999 ipLDK 300 iia ili a 2000 6999 ipLDK 300E Overflow Timer H timer expires after a call is FLEX8 Seconds received in the group the call Range 000 600 will be routed to the overflow HOLD SAVE destination Wrap Up Timer Designates the amount of time a FLEX9 Seconds call will be held in a busy state Range 002 999 following expiration of the timer HOLD SAVE Music Source If a music source Is assigned FLEX10 VALUE VALUES User will be able to hear music Range 0 8 refer to 0 Not assigned by this instead of a ring back tone VALUES field HOLD SAVE ipLDK 20 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH ioLDK 100 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 6 VMIB MOH 7 11 SLT MOH loLDK 300 300E 0
452. sed to select LCR access mode MOO Each access mode is explained in Feature Description and Operation manual Section 2 2 7 MON J8 groupedinupto3 zones TUE 3 Ir woo o h o THURS ER E Ir A Set the Day of week IS 1234567 Each day can use a different LCR setting zone At this ADMIN program each day can be set the Time Zone of Each time of day zone1 can uses a different Day Zone 1 LCR setting At this ADMIN program each time of day zone1 can be grouped in up to 3 zones TimeZonet 00724 0024 Time Zone 00 24 Time Zone ASS 4 Set the Time Zone of TI Each time of day zone 2 can use different LCH Day Zone 2 setting At this ADMIN program each time of day zone1 can be grouped in up to 3 zones Time Zone 00724 OR Time Zone oa TI O Time Zone Jona IT 5 Set the Time Zone of TI Each time of day zone 3 can use different LCH Day Zone 3 setting At this ADMIN program each time of day zone1 can be grouped in up to 3 zones Time Zone oa 0024 meet A EA gt mm 221 einen Beie AF Despina Refer to ipLDK Feature Description and Operation Manual Section 2 7 1o Re ra 3 Thisvalueisusedto select the LCR type Wd KC Code eee If digits dialed by user are equal to this value ai digit the digits are converted and CO line is seized according to DMT PGM 222 Day Zone 1 DMT 6 digits This value is used to set the table index DMT PGM222 of the day zone 1 Because day zone 1 has 3 different time
453. ser ID Provision as Register REGISTER method will be sent after initialization 2 One SIP User ID cab be shared many extensions In this method all extensions can make call with only one registration Admin Programming WR CO Service Type 4 2 1 PGM 140 COLP Table Index 4 2 4 1 PGM 143 FLEX 1 CLIP Table Index 4 2 4 2 PGM 143 FLEX 2 Call Type 4 2 4 3 PGM 143 FLEX 3 DID CONV Type 4 2 4 4 PGM 143 FLEX 4 DID Remove Number 4 2 4 5 PGM 143 FLEX 5 ISDN Enblock Send 4 2 4 6 PGM 143 FLEX 6 Enblock Digit Timer 4 5 3 10 PGM 182 FLEX 10 CLIP COLP Table 4 8 2 PGM 201 Networking CO Line Type 4 12 3 2 PGM 322 FLEX 2 VOIB Mode 4 13 1 12 PGM 340 FLEX 12 196 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 m SIP Attribute 1 PGM 500 m SIP Attribute 2 PGM 501 2 20 4 Private Extension Description This Private Extension enable a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of end users or end systems and to convey indications of end user requested privacy The use of these extensions is only applicable inside a Trust Domain as defined in Short term requirements for Network Asserted Identity Nodes in such Trust Domain are explicitly trusted by its users and end system to publicly assert the identity of each party and to be responsible for withholding that identity outside of the Trust Domain when privacy is requested
454. set all of dialed numbers will not be printed for SMDR in slave system Admin Programming E Networking CO Line Type PGM 322 FLEX 2 E Network Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 171 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 12 Message Waiting Indication MWI Description The Message Waiting Indication MWI is the same service as the Calling Line Identification CLI message wait refer to Admin Programming A Station can leave a MWI message when a station receives a No Answer on another Networking System If MWI is enabled at the called Station software will cause the Station lamp to flash when a messaging is waiting Operation To retrieve MWI messages perform the following Steps 1 Press the flashing CALLBK button 2 MWI contents CLI number date and time the calling count from the same CLI will be shown on the LCD 3 Press the volume up down sl button the previous or next MWI is displayed depending on which volume button is pressed To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one 1 Press the CONF button 2 The current MWI message will be deleted a confirmation tone should be heard and the next MWI message will be displayed To place a Call Back from a MWI 1 Retrieve MWI by pressing the flashing CALLBK button and using the volume up down Ia sl buttons 2 Press HOLD SAVE button 3 Then System will
455. signed Ex CO LINE 1 Hunt Group Call 1st Hunt Group Call CO LINE 2 STA1 ee Mor 15 al 2a y STA114 a A CO C 27 y LINE 3 X Figure 2 6 3 Ring Group 2 6 5 Voice Mail Group This group is assigned for voice mail and only SLT Stations can be assigned as a member of the Hunt group External voice mail equipment is connected to the system through the SLT port and is assigned as a Voice Mail group When calling a VM group the system will use either Terminal or Circular Group type search to locate an idle member 86 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 6 6 UCD Group Unified Call Distribution Calls are sent to the group by dialing the pilot number Hunt group Number or assigning CO lines to directly terminate to the group Calls are directed to the station in the group that has been idle for the longest time If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received for the group the call may be routed to an alternate location or may continue to wait queue for an available station in the group Based on programming the queued call may be taken out of the group and directed to an overflow station The member of UCD group can assign DND A station on UCD DND will not receive calls Ex CO LINE 1 Hunt a Call 12 CO Hunt Group LINE 2 y STA114 CO LINE 3 Hunt Group Call 3rd Figure 2 6 4 UCD Group Operation To
456. signed to any station When Net Attendant is assigned at PGM 164 at first system attendant and other main attendant has to be assigned in own system and then Net Attendant has to be assigned at the end Admin Programming E Flex Button Assignment Station Programming Button PGM 115 E Attendant Assignment PGM 164 m DID DISA Destination PGM 167 ECO Ring Assignment PGM 144 2 16 15 Centralized VMS Description All voice mail within Networked Systems can be recorded in an external VMS Condition The centralized VMS should be assigned in Networked Systems and the number of the centralized VMS should use the representative number of mail accesses created in the Master System The Numbering Plan including the representative of mail access assigned in Master System should be included in the Numbering Plan of QSIG group in Networked System Admin Programming E Network Destination MPB IP PGM 324 E Station Group Assignment Centralized VMS Assign PGM 190 2 16 16 Busy Lamp Field BLF Description A Station on a Networked System can program the appearance of a Busy Lamp Field BLF status on other Stations in the Networked System The BLF button can also be used to make a Net Call to another Networked Station To use BLF service the manager software and PC application must be installed from a PC The Gate Keeper is the PC server that is installed with the BLF manager software for operational purposes Figure 2 16 16
457. sion 3 Fwd to DVU 4 cancel Fwd to DVU 5 Activate UCD DND Agent log out 6 Deactivate UCD DND Agent log in Condition Admin Programming NH Remote Mobile extension control code PGM 109 FLEX7 2 4 31 Extend CO to CO Connection When a call is made between two analog CO lines using DISA or off net call forward the call duration is limited by the unsupervised conference timer After the unsupervised conference timer expires the call will be dropped by the ipLDK system This feature is enabled to extend unsupervised conference time for as long as the caller wants If this feature is activated the DTMF receiver device is assigned to caller side CO lines Operation When the CO to CO unsupervised conference timer extend feature is activated two analog CO lines ona conversation will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the unsupervised conference timer expires and the call will be disconnected To extend call duration perform the following Steps 1 Dial the unsupervised conference timer extension code number and the extension time multiple digit data 1 9 2 The ipLDK system will re assign the unsupervised conference timer to the multiple of the entered digits Ex The unsupervised conference timer is set to 10 minutes and the entered digit is 3 then the timer will be extended to 30 minutes Condition To use this feature at least one IDLE DTMF device must exist This feature is only available on analo
458. ss Code or the first CO Line Access Code from the accessible group To access a CO Line from a SLT perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial the individual CO Line CO Group Access Code or the first CO Line Access Code from the accessible group To access a CO Line Group perform the following Steps 1 Lift the handset 2 Press 8 for the CO Group 3 Dial the CO Group number refer to Ref A To assign the LOOP button perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press FLEX 3 Press TRANS PGM 4 Dial84 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to accept changes 10 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Condition When the Override 1st CO Line Group is enabled the System will search for the next accessible CO group until a CO Line is available if there is no available CO Line by dialing the CO Line group access code 9 or 0 An error tone should be heard when a Station is not permitted to access a CO Line but the Station will still be able to receive a transferred CO Line call as applicable The CO Line choice Round robin or Last Choice is determined by Admin Programming ADMIN 160 FLEX 3 fthe CO Line is BRI when a user tries to secure B1 the System can change the CO Line to B2 if there is a B2 CO button or LOOP button Unused CO Lines should be assigned to unused CO Group to prevent being acce
459. ss code 0 or 9 or press the Loop button 2 Iltisa COL LCR code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in the Leading Digit Table To activate Direct CO LCR perform the following 1 Dial the COL LCR code after dialing a CO or CO Group Access code or press a CO or CO Group button 2 Iltisa COL LCR code if the code is programmed with COL or BOTH in the Leading Digit Table Ex 1 Add Prefix Digit The long distance call access code starts with 0 i e 02 031 051 if a cheaper carrier exists the user can access it with the carrier access code 082 and the long distance access code without 0 14 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 ipLDK system administrator wants to use this cheaper carrier for all long distance calls i e dial 0314502628 082314504628 ADMIN 220 ADMIN 221 LDT ADMIN 222 DMT LCR MODE Bin 000 Bin 00 M01 M02 M11 M12 LCR TYPE COL Remove Position 01 LOOP LCR enabled LCR CODE 0 Remove Number 01 DMT 00 00 00 Add Position 01 Add Digit 082 Ex 2 Select CO Group ipLDK system is connected with two carriers one carrier is carrier A the other carrier is carrier B Carrier B is used for international calls and Carrier A is used for all other calls The international call access code is 001 ipLDK system administrator wants to program Carrier B to be used for only international calls ADMIN 141 ADMIN 117 ADMIN 161 3
460. ssed by a station The first CO Line group 00 is the directed line group and can be used with the CO Line button Private Line Reference A Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access CO in 1st CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX 12 B Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access Individual CO Code PGM 107 FLEX 8 C Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Access CO Group Code PGM 107 FLEX 7 D CO Line Choice PGM 160 FLEX 3 Round Robin Last Choice Admin Programming ECO Line Choice PGM 160 FLEX 3 Winter dou Timer PGM 181 FLEX 8 ECO Line Group Access PGM 117 ECO Line Group PGM 141 FLEX 1 E Override 1st CO Line Group PGM 161 FLEX 3 2 2 2 Call Time Restriction Description The Call Time Restriction feature is used to restrict outgoing CO call time In Station programming the User can set the Call Cut Off timer whereas the call will be disconnected automatically when the timer expires The called and called parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the call is disconnected Condition This feature can be assigned on a station by station basis and is applied to just outgoing CO calls If the Call Cut Off timer is enabled on a Station the timer is still applicable when a call is transferred to another Station On the add on conference the Call Cut Off timer enabled Station will be restricted to the
461. ssue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 11 Voice Service 2 11 1 Recording System VMIB Announcement Description Attendant station in the system can record the voice announcements as system greetings and prompts System greetings should be recorded before use System prompts in user s language are contained as default in VMIB But users can also modify those prompts Prompts for date and time are contained in VMIB to be used for date and time stamping With the help of these prompts users can understand when the voice message has arrived Prompts for date and time are also built in and recorded in user s language Operation To record system greetings from Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and dial 0 6 2 Dial the message number Then you will hear the announcement Press the key to record If there is already a recorded message in the number dialed a corresponding message will be played 3 Dial Eto start recording Start the recording after hearing the announcement Record your message and hearing the confirmation tone 4 Or dial to record using an external music port on the MBU 5 Press the HOLD SAVE button to finish recording Then confirmation tone is heard and you can record the next one 6 Pressing the MON button while recording then the recording is stopped and the recorded message is saved To delete system greetings from Attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM butto
462. t 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned 4 VMIB 00 70 Drop 00 Not Assigned 5 SPD 2000 2499 ipLDK 20 2000 3499 ipLDK 100 2000 4999 ipLDK 300 2000 6999 ipLDK 300E 6 Net Number Network Station number 7 Station Voice Mail Box STA 3 10 5 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE PGM 232 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 232 3 Enter the appropriate Speed Zone number Range 01 10 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Pem232 Description_________ Procedure _ COMMENTS Speed Bin Range in The system speed zone can be grouped into FLEX1 VALUE Speed VALUES Zone up to 10 System speed zones bin range for Zone 2200 2499 ipLDK 20 About each system speed zone the HOLD SAVE 2200 3499 ipLDK 100 accessibility can be set ADMIN PGM232 2200 4999 ipLDK 300 FLEX 2 2200 6999 ipLDK 300E The toll check of each system speed zone can be set ADMIN PGM232 FLEX A And the account code to access each system speed zone can be set ADMIN PGM232 FLEX 5 The system speed bin section between 2000 and 2199 is defined as the toll free zone the System speed dial numbers within this zone are not checked by the toll table Station Range to The accessibility of the system speed zones FLEX2 VALUE Station VALUES Access Zone can be assigned to each station Number Range 10 37 ipLDK 20 NOTE When there are too many Stat
463. t ADMIN program 322 FLEX 1 4 4 At system A B PGM_ RANGE ITEM VALUE VOIB CO range CO service type DID MSN 3 PO RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE VOIB CO range DID conversion type PGM_ RANGE FLEX ITEM VALUE Net CO type NET 1 157 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 At System A Numbering plan CO group D VOIP Called Party Information 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 0 Numbering plan code Numbering plan CO group 4 VOIP CPN Information 1 2 3 4 note VOIB IP address of system B NOTE At the ADMIN program FLEX 4 maximum of 4 VOIP CPNs can be set The reason of multiple VOIP CPN is to assign a different IP address per each VOIB when the destination networking system has multiple VOIB At System B Po BIN FLEX TEM VALUE 3 NumberingplanCO group 0 NET 0 o kx Operation To enable the networking feature 1 The PGM 320 FLEX 1 must be set to ON at each System if the networking lock key is not installed this ADMIN program can not be enabled To satisfy the UDP condition 1 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM 105 must be programmed at each System At this ADMIN program the Station number range of System A can be changed from 100 to 199 100 199 and System B also can be changed from 200 to 299 200 299 NOTE The changed Station numbers must not conflict with the flexible numbering plan code for each System 1 If system A
464. t can direct the System to re route forward incoming CO Line calls to a directory telephone number outside the system When a call is received the system will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number assigned by the attendant Note that if both incoming CO and outgoing CO are analog line the system will automatically disconnect the call after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired Field ipLDK 20 ipLDK 100 ipLDK 300 300E CO Group Access 801 808 801 824 801 872 Individual CO Access 88XX 88XXX Retrieve Held CO Line Operation To activate incoming CO Line off Net at the Attendant 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward code 7 4 Dial CO Line group access code 9 801 8xx 8801 88xx or 8 for all CO Lines or press CO Line button Dial the Speed Dial bin number with the desired telephone number Replace the Handset and go on hook DM To deactivate CO Line Off Net Call Forward from the attendant Lift the Handset or press the MON button Press the DND FOR button Dial Call Forward code 7 Dial CO Line group access code 9 801 8xx 8801 88xx or 8 or press CO Line button Dial Call Forward Cancel Code ASIS Condition 1 If there is no idle CO Line Off net Call Forward is not activated 2 This feature is not applicable for DID lines 3 It is unconditional and forwarded immediately when the CO Line rings in the syst
465. t codes The table entry from 001 to the maximum capacity of Station numbers are saved along with the password of each Station CO Line Groups can be marked to deny access until a matched authorization code is entered In this case a DND warning tone is provided when the CO Line Group access code is dialed There can be no duplicate entries By default Authorization Codes are not assigned at all Authorization code length can be programmed as 5 digits or variable length 3 1 1digits If a 5 digit authorization code usage is programmed the authorization code works as 5 digits length in admin program or features Under the variable length mode the authorization code is flexible from 3 digits to 11 digits in MPB version 2 0 or below authorization code is fixed as 5 digits MODEL Number of Authorization Codes ip LDK 20 ipLDK 100 ipLDK 300 1000 ipLDK 300E 2000 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 227 3 Enter the appropriate Bin number 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table Authorization Code Table If the dialed Authorization code is FLEX1 Authorization Code VALUES verified a CO dial tone will be 3 11 digits Range 0 9 Default Not Assigned presented Otherwise an error HOLD SAVE tone will be heard and access to Authorization code can the group will be denied Stations be programmed as 5 or ADMIN programming can enter digits or fle
466. t if the music channel has no music source no music will be heard Channel 00 Music is not used Channel 01 internal music Channel 02 External music Channel 03 VMIB BGM refer to Ref A Channel 04 08 SLT MOH see Ref B 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference A BGM Background Music 2 4 4 B MOH Music On Hold 2 4 17 Admin Programming E Intercom Box Music Channel PGM 171 2 13 11 Station Feature Cancel Description The attendants can cancel features such as DND Call Forward and pre selected messages of other stations refer to Ref A B or C Operation To disable active features at a station from the attendant 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 07 1 3 Dial the desired station range 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Reference A DND 2 4 9 B Call Forward 2 3 1 C Pre selected Message 2 4 1 2 131 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 13 12 DSS DLS Consoles Description Attendants and other DKTU may be equipped with DSS DLS consoles which provide additional buttons for more convenient operation The consoles are arranged as flexible mapped units The DSS DLS consoles are assigned with programming as one of the 3 maps All buttons of any map are programmable The DSS DLS consoles each require a separate line connection to the KSU and take up a station number Condition 1 There is no limit to the n
467. t mapping Number Range 00 11 00 11 HOLD SAVE HOLD SAVE NONE CID Type 2 Usage If this value is set to ON CID type 2 service FLEX6 FLEX1 1 VALUES can be used HOLD SAVE 0 OFF NOTE Only CID type 1 is serviced 1 ON FAST CID MODE If this value is set to ON CID will be FLEX7 VALUE displayed after the 1 ring at a Station HOLD SAVE NOTE lIf the CID SLT does not support non standard CID there could be problems displaying correct CID information 45 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 5 System Timers PGM 180 184 3 5 1 SYSTEM TIMERS I PGM 180 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 180 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM 180 COMMENTS If a recalled call arrives at the Attendant FLEX1 Minutes 2 digits Station and the Attendant does not answer Range 00 60 Attendant Recall Timer within the designated time the System will HOLD SAVE disconnect the call Call Park Recall Timer Designates the amount of time before a call FLEX2 Seconds 3 digits placed in a call park location will recall at the Range 000 600 Station that placed the call on park HOLD SAVE Camp On Recall Timer When a call is transferred using Camp Onto FLEX3 Seconds 3 digits a busy Station if the transferred to Station Range 000 200 does not answer
468. ta Prit Too a pasose e a e O 15 LCD Message Print Se AAA o 15 Nation specific 00 ENG 01 ITA 02 FIN 03 DUT 04 SWE 05 DAN Language 06 NOR 07 HUN 08 GER 09 FRE 10 POR 11 SPA 12 KOR 13 EST 14 RUS 15 TUR 16 Quit Print AO 3 15 4 INIT DATABASE BY MPB VERSION PGM 452 PGM__ FLEX ITEM E DEFAULT REMARK e EES SE Station Name NotinipLDK 20 From Version 2 3 A NotinipLDK 20 From Version 2 5 po Not in ip LDK 20 From Version 3 0 po Not in ipLDK 20 6 FromVersion 3 2 po Not in ip LDK 20 From Version 3 3 po Not in ipLDK 20 8 rom Version 3 5 po Not in ipLDK 20 9 FromVersion 3 6 a ee From Version 3 7 POS E From Version 3 8 O A 99 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 QUICK REFERENCE ADMIN PROGRAMMING ABLE 4 1 Numbering Plan 4 1 1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN The following numbering plan can be changed by ADMIN Programming 104 107 and 109 depending on User needs _ NUMBER TEM REMARK _ 10 35 ipLDK 20 100 227 ipLDK 100 100 399 LDK 300 DESS 1000 1599 ipLDK 300E 620 629 ipLDK 20 620 634 ipLDK 100 Group Pilot Number 620 667 ipLDK 300 300E 501 510 ipLDK 20 501 515 ipLDK 100 Internal Page Zone 501 535 ipLDK 300 300E Du ntemalAliCallPage Dud Mee tMe Page 545 0 i Extermal Page Zonei o d O 546 Not in ipLDK 20 si External Page Zone 547 Not in ipLDK 20 External Page Zone3 o
469. tation WHTU the wired Station should be Linked Station Pair Delete assigned as the master Station FLEX2 Master Station Number NOTE When there are too many PGM NUMBER SPEED stations to see you can scroll data HOLD SAVE using volume up down key 44 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 21 CIDU SETTING PGM 185 This program defines the analog CO line CLI information when using a CID hardware device unit The ipLDK uses the CIDU to decode analog CO line CLI that is carried through the analog CO lines and provides the software for the related caller ID service In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGN button 2 Dial 185 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGmts ____ Descriptin___________ Procedure COMMENTS CID Usage If this value is set to ON CID can be FLEX1 1 ON VALUES provided HOLD SAVE CID Name Display If this value is set to 1 the callers name will FLEX2 1 NAME be displayed on the LCD HOLD SAVE 0 TELEPHONE If this value is set to 0 the caller s telephone number will be displayed on the LCD Serial Port Select Designates the port used for connecting to FLEX3 1 COM Port VALUES the external CIDU hardware device HOLD SAVE 1 NOTE When there are too many Cos to see you can scroll data using volume up down key Mapping line por
470. tation COS Down _ S G Station COS Restore ss IF G SMS Inbox ss Delete All SMS Messages Authorization Code Registration LI 32 Authorization Code Change _ _ o Registration Mobile Extension o Active Mobile Extension _ OOOO Register Mobile Extension CL 3600 Active Mobile Hunt 37 Msg Wat To Mobile Extension _ _ O S S M Wake up Time Registration One time Continuous 42 Wake up Time Cancel oS S O 43 Activate Conference Dom 44 i Deactivate Conference Room le 45 Call Coverage Usage ss 46 Register Call Coverage o S o O 51 PreselectedMSGAcitivation____________ 101 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 AA REMARK O Set Custom Message SO Record VMIB User Greeting le Listen VMIB Time amp Date Listen VMIB Station Number LI Listen VMIB Station Status OOOO Record VMIB Page Message Erase VMIB User Greeting OOOO ILIC OOD 99 gt mim nn AIRD 8156 O KQ 5 9 B lt J D Q a Relocation IN A Register Bluetooth AAA Bluetooth Usage AA 4 1 3 ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING NUMBER DEN REMARK 06 RecordWMIB System Greeting e Lustem Attendant 102 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 TEM HENARRK Prepaid Call G O 07 LCD Display Language 091 Set Call Forward Attendant WHTU Subscription oS 4 1 4 FLEXIBLE BUTTON PROGRAMMING CODE NUMBER DEM REMARK Ai Differential Ring o G O 21
471. tation number to coverage Press HOLD SAVE button Le a To set Cal Coverage Attributes station program by call coverage originated station Press TRANS PGM button Dial 45 Dial 1 to program call coverage mode Enter 1 to activate call coverage 0 to disable Press HOLD SAVE a os Call Coverage Delay Ring Cycle Press TRANS P GM Dial 45 Dial 2 to enter call coverage delay ring cycle Dial delay ring cycle 0 9 Press HOLD SAVE a ees Once the Button is assigned on the station and a call 1 The coverage station receives audible and visual indications after a programmable delay when there is a ring on the originating station 2 The ring tone is the normal internal or external ring tone cadence and the oldest call coverage button flashes faster than the others and the others flash the same as the incoming ring rate 73 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 3 The coverage station user presses one of flashing Coverage Flex Buttons on their station or presses ON OFF Button or lift the handset The call will be answered and will cease to ring and led flash at any other stations that may have the same coverage appearance The LCD display for internal incoming call is lt XXXX originator station YYYY caller gt CALL FOR STA XXXX CALL FOR STA XXXX FROM YYYY TIME FROM YYYY TIME lt when receives an call coverage ring gt lt
472. tation receives the incoming call directly whether the station is busy or not Ring Group Service This feature is used when a station ina FLEX14 1 ON Ring Group receives a DID DISA call HOLD SAVE If this value is set to ON the Ring Group the station belongs to will receive the incoming call If this value is set to OFF the station receives the incoming call directly Stop Camp on Tone If this value is set to ON Camp on Tone is FLEX15 1 ON VALUES not heard HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON Line Length This feature is used to distinguish the line FLEX16 1 LONG length when the distance between the HOLD SAVE stations and the station boards is too variable SAF only MSG Scroll Speed The scroll soeed of SMS or broadcasting FLEX17 0 FAST VALUES Korea Only notice message HOLD SAVE 0 Fastest 1 6 Slower by number 7 Slowest Block Back Call If this value is set to ON SLT recalling is FLEX18 1 ON VALUES blocked after pressing the FLASH button HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON I TIME RST Incoming If this value is set to ON the conversation FLEX19 1 ON CO call time Restriction time of an incoming CO call is limited After HOLD SAVE CO Call Restriction Timer is expired the call is forced to disconnect Forced Station Account If this value is set to ON a password is FLEX20 1 ON VALUES Code needed to access an outgoing CO line HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON CID Ty
473. tecting a FAX tone n order to transfer calls from the FAX to a FAX station do not assign CO ring to the FAX Station 17 fa CO line is programmed for DISA and for Automatic FAX Transfer as well incoming calls from that CO line are served as DISA calls So if a user wants to call the FAX station just call station 17 by exploiting DISA call When the FAX machine goes idle after a FAX call the associated CO line is released If the FAX CO line is disconnected during a FAX call the CO line is released and the FAX machine will return to an idle state Only Analog lines are enabled for using this feature Admin Programming E Auto FAX Transfer CO PGM 161 FLEX17 FAX tone Detect Timer PGM 182 FLEX13 E FAX CO Call Timer PGM 182 FLEX14 63 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 4 29 Mobile Extension Description A mobile user is able to use the phone as extension of the ipLDK system to receive incoming and make outgoing calls when the mobile phone number is registered to the ipLDK System Operation To register a mobile extension number in DKTU 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial33 3 Dial the mobile phone number that is being registered 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate deactivate a mobile extension perform the following Steps 1 Press the PGM button 2 Dial 34 3 Dial 1 to activate the extension or 0 to deactivate
474. tem assigns the Call Log list from the first available port in order Must enable CLI MSG Wait to be able to use the Lost Call Log Admin Programming E Call Log List Number PGM 160 FLEX19 NH CLI MSG Wait PGM 114 FLEX4 2 4 36 In Room Indication Description A supervisor can press the In Room Indication button and HOLD SAVE button when in an idle state then each Station s In Room Indication LED will illuminate 10 groups can be programmed Each group has at most 20 members excluding Supervisor To program a flexible button as the In Room Indication button 1 Press the TRANS PGM button and the flexible button to be assigned 2 Dial the code TRANS PGM 8 Room NO bin no 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Operation To Active or Deactivate In Room Indication button 1 Check if Supervisor station is the idle state and In Room Indication button is programmed 2 Press In Room Indication button and press HOLD SAVE button Condition H Supervisor station is not Idle In Room Indication button does not work fa station press the In Room Indication button but the station is not supervisor an error tone is heard f HOLD SAVE button is not pressed within 5 seconds after In Room Indication button pressed the station goes back to the Idle state Admin Programming E In Room Indication Supervisor PGM183 Flex1 E n Room Indication Member PGM183 Flex2 2 4 37 Chime Bell Description If
475. tening while on a handset call HOLD SAVE by pressing the MON button other people in the vicinity will be able to hear the conversation through the speaker NOTE Only the voice of the User on the handset will project their voice to the User on the other end of the call Override Privilege If this value is set to ON the station user can FLEX4 0 OFF VALUES override a CO Call HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON SMDR Hidden Dialed If this value is set to ON the dialed number of FLEX5 0 OFF VALUES Voice Over If this value is set to ON the busy Station can FLEX6 0 OFF VALUES talk alternately between two calling or called HOLD SAVE 0 OFF parties 1 ON Warm Line If this value is set to HOT the Station User FLEX7 1 HOT VALUES can use Hot Line Otherwise in the Warm HOLD SAVE 0 WARM Line state the Warm Line Timer will start 1 HOT when the user lifts the handset or presses the ADMIN 122 MON button VMIB MSG Retrieve If this value is set to ON the Station User FLEX8 1 ON VALUES Password must enter a password to retrieve VMIB HOLD SAVE 0 OFF Messages 1 ON VMIB MSG Retrieve If this value is set to ON Date and time will FLEX9 0 OFF VALUES Date Time be heard when VMIB Messages are HOLD SAVE 0 OFF retrieved 1 ON Alarm Attribute If this value is set to ON the Station will be FLEX10 FLEX01 0 VALUES able to receive alarm signals OFF HOLD SAVE
476. ter instead ofa second station number 4 Dial the desired time the alert should display 2 digit hour and minute 24 hour mode 5 Dial to have the alarm alert once only 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button To cancel a wake up alarm from the Attendant Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial0 43 3 Dial the station range that was to be alerted if a single station is to receive alarm enter instead of a second station 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button To register wake up time alarm from a Station perform the following Steps Press the TRANS PGM button Dial 4 1 Dial the desired 2 digit hour and minute for alerting Dial to have the alarm alert once only Press the HOLD SAVE button aS 62 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 To cancel a wake up time from a Station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 4 2 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition fa wake up alarm is registered at a station a is displayed in front of the present time on the LCD If VMIB is installed the voice message for the wake up time is heard 3 times and then MOH is heard f the wake up ring is not answered after 3 times it is canceled He System Attendant dials to wake up fail station to erase wake up fail ring the fail ring will disappear with confirmation tone But when the
477. tercom box The new intercom box LDP DPB has the CALL button only 106 o IpLok 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 beste D Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 Reference A DND 2 4 9 B Conference 2 7 C Paging 2 8 Admin Programming E ICM Box Signaling PGM 111 FLEX 6 E Station ID Assignment PGM 110 CM Box Music Channel PGM 171 FLEX 3 CM Box Timer PGM 181 FLEX 6 2 10 3 Loud Bell Description The LBC Loud Bell Control contacts are activated when the assigned station receives ringing from an incoming CO line if assigned ring transferred CO line or intercom call Model _ REMARK ipLDK 20 MBU 2Realys MPE 2Relays Penco MISB 4Relays pLDK 300 300E GE aes Condition LBC contacts can be assigned individually to the station All the contacts may be assigned to the same station but only the first contact will be activated in the intercom call The LBC 1 can be programmed to be operated as an external night ring contact as well as a LBC contact Inthe night mode LBC 1 will follow UNA refer to Ref A ring assignment and will ignore the station ring An external ringing device should be attached to the contacts Reference A UNA Universal Answer 2 1 7 Admin Programming E External Night Ring PGM 160 FLEX 7 E Universal Answer PGM 141 FLEX 8 E External Control Contacts PGM 168 107 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 I
478. ternate destination Supervisor Timer Supervisor Call Count ACD Queued Call If a music source is assigned User will be able to hear music instead of a ring back tone When a call is received in the Group and no Stations are available the call will be routed to the assigned destination When a call is received in the Group and no Stations are available the call will be routed to the assigned destination When a call is received in the Group and no Stations are available the call will be queued If the total queued call count is more than the supervisor call count ACD queued call ADMIN program value is set to ON and the queued time is longer than this timer then the counts of queued calls will be displayed on the Supervisor s LCD If the number of queued calls is more than Supervisor Call Count the supervisor timer will be started If this value is set to ON the count of queued calls can be displayed on the Supervisor Station LCD VALUES 0 Not assigned by this field FLEX11 VALUE Music Source HOLD SAVE ioLDK 20 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 External Music 3 VMIB MOH 4 8 SLT MOH 9 Hold Tone ioLDK 100 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 6 VMIB MOH 7 11 SLT MOH 12 Hold Tone loLDK 300 300E 0 Not assigned 1 Internal Music 2 4 External Music 5 7 VMIB MOH 8 12 SLT MOH 13 Hold Tone FLEX12 0 Off
479. the Station is unplugged or replaced The Call logs for incoming Outgoing Lost calls are available if a flexible button is programmed to be used for CALL LOG Operation To program a Call Log flexible button perform the following Press the TRANS PGM button Press the flexible button to be assigned Type the Call Log code then press the TRANS PGM button Dial 57 Press the HOLD SAVE button sh To use the Call Log feature of the DKTU perform the following 1 Press the programmed CALL LOG button 2 The User can scroll through the numbers by pressing the up down navigation buttons to locate received calls dialed calls and lost calls 3 When the CLI of the desired number is displayed press the OK key the System will establish a call to that number 4 Select the Lost Call Menu to view CLI MSG Wait numbers A number in the Lost Call list can be answered deleted or saved by pressing the Select soft button Condition To use this feature a flexible must be programmed for CALL LOG Administrator can program the Call Log List number in the range of 15 50 per Station PGM 160 FLEX19 When the Call Log List number is programmed the All Call Log database will be initialized Maximum Call Log List per system 900 ipLDK 20 69 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2000 ipLDK 100 5000 ipLDK 300 10000 ipLDK 300E The Sys
480. the call it will recall to the HOLD SAVE transferring station after the designated time expires Exclusive Hold Recall Designates the amount of time before a call FLEX4 Seconds 3 digits Timer placed on System hold will recall at the Range 000 300 Station that placed the call on hold HOLD SAVE l Hold Recall Timer When a recalled call is not answered it will FLEX5 Seconds 3 recall to the Attendant after the designated digits Range 000 300 time expires HOLD SAVE Designates the amount of time before a call FLEX6 Seconds 3 digits placed on system hold will recall the station Range 000 300 placing the hold HOLD SAVE Transfer Recall Timer Designates the amount of time a transferred FLEX7 Seconds 3 digits call will ring at a transferred to Station and Range 000 300 how long it will recall at the transferring HOLD SAVE Station available CO Line in the group Range 000 300 HOLD SAVE ACNR No Answer Timer The system detects a CO ring back tone the FLEX9 Seconds 2 digits CO party If the call is not answered the Range 00 50 System will disconnect the call HOLD SAVE ACNR Pause Timer When ANCR Pause Timer expires ACNR is FLEX10 Seconds 3 activated digits Range 005 300 HOLD SAVE timer expires ACNR is canceled Range 01 30 HOLD SAVE ACNR No Tone Retry Determines the number of attempts to secure FLEX12 VALUE 1 digit seized ACNR will be canceled
481. the gain of CID CAS data FLEX20 VALUE Not available in pLDK given to SLT HOLD SAVE So SG In DK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 COMMENTS This program sets FSK gain for CID SLT FLEX21 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE 00 20 If this value is set to ON the station can FLEX22 VALUE VALUES make Voice Over to busy station HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON CID SLT FSK Gain Not available in pLDK Caller Voice Over Not available in o Dk SIP User ID Table Index User ID table index for SIP outgoing call s caller ID information If 00 then pLDK system makes caller ID based on station number If 01 32 then programmed ID in user ID table PGM 501 is used FLEX23 VALUE HOLD SAVE VALUES 00 32 ipLDK 20 00 64 ipLDK 100 00 96 ipLDK 300 300 Listen Redial DTMF If this Se is set to ON DTMF tone is heard FLEX24 VALUE VALUES to the station user while redial HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON 3 1 3 STATION ATTRIBUTES II PGM 112 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 112 3 Enter the appropriate Station Range 4 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table BON IZ IL Description________ Procedure COMMENTS CO Warning Tone Used to restrict outgoing call time If this value is set to ON the station user will receive a warning tone during a
482. the wore malclaing tables aed A cn tables the VM member e Port 01 14 OM2 Simplified Message Desk Interface ipLDK SMDI determines the distribution a information of VM This value is used to ipLDK 100 set SMDI print port 01 10 ioLDK 20 Overflow Timer 000 600 3 180 sec If this timer expires after a call is received digits in the group the call is routed to the overflow destination The overflow destination can be set at PGM191 FLEX 7 7 Overflow The call to a station in the group will Destination continue to route until answered or each station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last station in the group or will be passed to this overflow station group VMIB System Speed bin after overflow timer expiring The overflow timer can be set at PGM191 FLEX 6 Pick up Group 1 ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON and if there is ringing hunt member other hunt member can pickup the call automatically only by pressing MON button or oft book All Group ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON and if a hunt group member receives an intercom call then all hunt group member is ringing To set this value Auto Pickup ADMIN program value must be set to ON Auto Pick up Member Ringing 144 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 21 ISDN ATTRIBUTES PGM FLEX DEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 200 1 A
483. tion are served SMDR Dial Digit Hidden If this value is set non zero value the printed digits from right or left will be replace io symbol up to this value The direction of right or left can be set at PGM177 FLEX button 13 SMDR Currency Unit 3 English Chars For easy identification of call cost the currency unit can be entered with 3 alphabet characters to be printed in front of call charge amount 10 SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse 6 digits This is the call cost unit per cost metering pulse which is sent from the Central Office 11 SMDR Fraction 0 5 This value means the decimal position point of the cost per unit pulse 132 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 MC ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SMDR Start Timer 0 250 If this value is set non zero value only the outgoing CO call more than this value time is served SDMR 13 SMDR Hidden Digit Right Left Right If this value is set to RIGHT SDMR digit hiding is executed the right to left direction At this case if dialed 1234567890 SDMR printed hidden digits are formatted bic twee If this value is set to LEFT SDMR digit hiding is executed to left to right direction At this case if dialed 1234567890 SDMR printed hidden digits are formatted 6 7890 14 SMDR Long Distance Codes FLEX 1 5 The long distance call is defined that the call meets the conditions of PGM177 FL
484. tion can be responded to the transferred CO call automatically when station mode Is H P page to other station to called party station of intercom call AA Ring 1 beer This feature determines the ringing path 2 Headset Speaker Phone whether Speaker or Headset and even 3 BOTH both a can be used WE VMIB Slot 13 ICM Group 8 8 feature selects intercom iiss ae Group which this station belongs to 112 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 MC La ITEM E EN SE e HENADK Error Tone for TAD ON OFF If this value is set to ON and TAD is used in SLT port when the caller hangs up busy tone will be provided to TAD instead of error tone SLT Flash Drop DISABLE O Disable Flash detected but Line Drop is disable Default already existing feature 1 Flash Drop Flash detected and Line Drop is disconnected already existing feature 2 Flash Ignore Ignore Hook Flash in any cases The line is disconnected only if user goes ON Hook 3 Hold Release Drop the holding line if system detects Flash and then On Hook Code enter Account Code to use Loop LCR message can play Oppositely in LIFO state the latest message DES forward can be used 1 een bn pr sen hands free mode forcedly CIDSLT CAS GAIN CAS gain for CID SLT CIDSLT FSK GAIN 00 20 5 FSK gain for CID SLT CALLER Voice Over ON OFF Facility to make Voice Over to busy station
485. tion of an outside CO call or internal call waiting camp on tone Operation To activate Camp on while receiving the Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Dial or the last digit of the busy station OR 2 Press the busy DSS flexible button or the flexible button assigned as Camp On To answer a Camp on call while receiving the Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the HOLD SAVE button the active CO line is placed on exclusive hold and the call waiting is connected 2 Press the HOLD SAVE button to alternately talk with both parties To activate Call Waiting on an SLT while receiving the Intercom busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Go Off hook then dial or the last digit of the dialed Station number 2 When answered the call should be announced OR 3 Replace the handset and go on hook To answer the call waiting camp on perform the following Steps 1 When the SLT station is busy the camp on tone is heard indicating a camp on call 2 Hook flash and dial 5 6 O refer to Ref A 3 The SLT Station should be connected to the camp on call 4 Hook flash and dial 5 6 O again to connect to the original Station call If original call is CO line this CO call can not be reconnected again Only intercom call is supported To assign the Camp On button at a flexible button 1 Press TRANS PGM 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Press the TRANS PGM button 4 Type85
486. tion______ Procedure COMMENTS Day Destination Used to set the destination FLEX2 Destination Type VALUES PE when routing DID calls during Range 01 11 refer to Destination Type the day ring mode VALUES HOLD SAVE 1 STA H Night Destination Used to set the destination FLEX3 Destination Type 2 Hunt when routing DID calls during Range 01 11 refer to 3 VMIB 00 70 00 Not Assigned the night ring mode VALUES in Day Destination 4 VMIB 00 70 Drop 00 Not HOLD SAVE Assigned Weekend Destination Used to set the destination FLEX4 Destination Type 5 SPD when routing DID calls during Range 01 11 refer to IpLDK 20 2000 2499 the weekend ring mode VALUES in Day Destination ipLDK 100 2000 3499 HOLD SAVE 70 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 nda Admin Programming Manual September 2008 Lunch Destination Used to set the destination FLEX5 Destination Type pLDK 300 2000 4999 when routing DID calls during Range 01 11 refer to ip LDK 300E 2000 6999 the weekend ring mode VALUES in Day Destination 6 Internal Page 01 10 HOLD SAVE 7 External Page 8 All Page 1 2 INT ALL 9 Net Number Network Station number 10 Conference Room 1 9 11 Station Voice Mail Box STA Reroute Destination Used to set the second FLEX6 Destination Type VALUES destination when the routed Range 1 7 refer to 1 STA DID call destination is busy VALUES HOLD SAVE 2 Hun
487. tivated the system starts to send Keypad Facility IE instead of Called Party Number IE regardless of CONNECT message from the network unless pressing Keypad Facility button to deactivate it So the system will continue to send Keypad Facility IE instead of DIMF tone even after CONNECT message is received from the network If the Speed Dial is stored with FLASH as the first digit for ISDN line and the station has the Keypad Facility Access authority the digits after FLASH command will be sent as Keypad Facility and the feature will be deactivated after sending all digits When any of the following features are encountered after the Keypad Facility is activated the feature will be deactivated automatically Pressing function keys as REDIAL TRANS PGM FLASH HOLD SAVE CONF Pressing CO keys as CO CO Group Loop Pressing Flex Buttons assigned some features as SPEED DSS Call Park Keypad Facility While On hook This feature may not be operated depending on the services that require handling two call references at the same time after B channel connection is made as Hold amp Retrieving Conference etc The Speed Dial Numbers started with FLASH display D send saved digits as Keypad Facility IE instead of Called Party Number IE After sending all Speed Dial Numbers this feature is deactivated automatically When the system receives a Called Party Number IE during sending Keypad Facility IE the system will stop send
488. to another destination another station hunt group VMIB then the timer will not be activated Hunt Call is not assigned this timer regardless No Answer to VMIB ON OFF option because Hunt individual call flow To correct working this feature VMIB ACCESS option must be ON PGM 113 FLEX2 If auser records the user greeting PGM 61 it will be provided before the recording announcement This is also applied when a user goes to busy state and call is queuing waiting for it to become free Admin Programming ENO Answer FWD to VMIB Timer PGM 181 FLEX20 E Auto Forward To VMIB PGM 113 FLEX14 WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 2 11 9 Direct Transfer to VMIB Description CO ICM Call can be directly transferred to a station s Voice Mail Box Operation Below operation is executed at transferring Station 1 Station is on the CO ICM Call Press TRANS button to transfer to another station Press CALL BK button Dial a destination Station number or Press DSS button of desired Station Hang Up when transfer is completed After transfer action is ended transferred party hear recording message and confirm tone can record voice ed ale al a Condition VMIB Access option must be ON PGM 113 FLEX2 Direct transfer to Net number s VM box is not allowed Direct transfer to ICM BOX is not allowed f VMIB channel is all used recalling is served to transferring station 117 o JOLDk 20 100 300 30
489. ton D used as any digit in Masked Prefix Table 3 When a user seizes the CO line to dial it is changed to BUSY state Admin Programming E Prefix Table Index PGM143 FLEX16 E Enblock Prefix Table PGM 205 23 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 Rerouting 2 3 1 Call Forward Description A Station User can forward calls to any Station Station Group or VMIB in the system by activating feature codes There are several types of Call Forwarding Unconditional Busy No answer Busy No Answer Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward with Tel Number No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward with Tel Number Incoming CO Off Net Call Forward and Follow Me Call Forward Operation To activate Call Forward follow Operation directions in each sub heading for this section To program Call Forward to a Flexible Button perform the following 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press the flexible button to be assigned 3 Press the DND FWD button 4 Assign the Call Forward type 1 Call Forward Unconditional 2 Call Forward Busy 3 Call Forward No Answer 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer 5 Unconditional Station Off Net Call Forward 6 No Answer Station Off Net Call Forward 7 Incoming CO Off Net Call Forward Deactivation Forward 5 Dial the destination
490. tone will be heard 5 If you select a CO Line before dialing a Speed Dial bin number the selected CO Line is used even though there is a programmed CO Line in the Speed Dial bin number 6 Ifthe speed dial is programmed to access a specific CO line and the line access by the speed dial is busy the system seizes another Co line registered in the same CO line group Reference A CO Dial Tone Detect ADMIN 160 FLEX 6 B ISDN Line 2 14 C Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Program Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 12 D Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Speed Dial Access Code ADMIN 106 FLEX 15 Admin Programming E Speed Dial Access PGM 112 FLEX 9 CO Dial Tone Detect PGM 160 FLEX 6 20 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 8 5 System Speed Dialing Description The System Speed Dial bins are programmed by the System Attendant Figure 2 2 8 5 These numbers are available for easy access by all stations allowed in the system Registration Staton Speed Dial Use Station Steed Dial Bech Station Racslriched by station COS Figure 2 2 8 5 System Speed Dial System Speed Dial Restricted by Station COS System COS COS 8 Operation To store a number in a System Speed Dial from the System Attendant Press the TRANS PGM button Press the SPEED button Di
491. transferred within the System If this value is set to ON the DTMF dial tone will be heard to the outside caller when the call is Off net call forwarded this only applies to calls transferred within the System If this value is set to IMM immediate voice path is connected immediately for CO outgoing calls otherwise calls are connected after dialing digits While a call is transferred to a destination Station if this value is set to RBT transferred Station will hear a ring back tone otherwise MOH will be heard Off net DTMF Tone Voice Path Connect Transfer Tone FLEX9 0 OFF VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON FLEX10 1 ON HOLD SAVE FLEX11 0 OFF VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON FLEX12 0 OFF HOLD SAVE FLEX13 0 OFF HOLD SAVE FLEX14 1 IMM HOLD SAVE FLEX15 0 RBT HOLD SAVE ACD Package Usage If this value is set to ON ACD Information is FLEX17 VALUE VALUES printable HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON CO CO Unsupervised If this value is set to on the conference call Conference Timer Extend user can extend the Unsupervised Conference Timer by dialing the UC Timer Extend Code Call Log List Number Sets the number of Call Log Lists per Station FLEX18 VALUE VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OFF 1 ON FLEX19 VALUE 2 digits Range 15 50 HOLD SAVE Cut ISDN Overlap Dial Cut the noise of ISDN overlap dialing FLEX
492. ts refer to Add Position 20 digits Range 0 9 CALLBK Pause PGM222 FLEX4 HOLD SAVE DND FOR Dial tone detection instead of pause enter FLASH Station Number Billing code Removal Position Used to set the removal position for user FLEX2 VALUE 2 dialed digits Some digits will be removed digits Range 01 12 from the designated position up to this HOLD SAVE amount Number of Removal Used to set the number of removal digits FLEX3 VALUE 2 digits Range 01 12 HOLD SAVE Add Position Used to set the add position for user FLEX4 VALUE2 2 dialed digits Some digits are added from digits Range 01 13 the designated position with Add Digit HOLD SAVE Stream CO Line Group Used when LCR calls secure the FLEX5 VALUE 2 VALUES outgoing CO line The idle CO line within digits Refer to VALUES ipLDK 20 01 08 CO Line Group of the determined value is HOLD SAVE ioLDK 100 01 24 seized for LCR calls pLDK 300 300E 01 72 Alternative DMT Index Used when LCR calls are unable to seize FLEX6 VALUE 2 an idle CO line within ADMIN PGM222 digits Range 00 99 FLEX 5 the LCR call will seize an idle CO HOLD SAVE within CO Line Group of this value DMT index 3 8 4 LCR TABLE INITIALIZATION PGM 223 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 1 Dial 223 1 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table
493. ts are added from this position with Add Digit Stream PGM222 FLEX 1 CO Line Group 1 24 1 This value is used when LCR call seize the outgoing CO line The idle CO line within CO Line Group of this value is seized for LCR call Alternative DMT Index 00 99 This value is used when LCR call can t seize the idle CO line within PGM222 FLEX 5 If LCR call can t seize the idle CO line within LCR CO Line Group LCR call seizes the idle CO within CO Line Group of this value DMT index eee eis table entry value to new value O proma p dimen DMT value of day Zone 1 to new value 5 aeren e A a DMT value of day zone 2 to new value Pp Prats fedas Weg DMT value of day zone 3 to new value A pa O es Group values of DMT entry to new value AA ee a Initialize Alternative DMT Index values of DMT entry to new value Initialize All LCR This ADMIN program initializes all LCR ADMIN data to default value 148 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 23 TOLL TABLE ASSIGNMENT PGM FLEX ITEM MEE DEFAULT m k 224 E Table Allow Table A 01 30 TT 14 digits Re ADMIN vale is used io check where ADMIN value is used to check whether the dialed digit by COS 2 and COS 4 station is matched with the allowed toll pass digits or not Allow table A is only used when the COS of dialed station is COS 2 or 4 2 Deny Table A 01 30 Max 14 digits This ADMIN value is used t
494. tup packet for transit out feature will be checked with registered IP and if this IP is verified transit out feature will be operated Verification is comparison with received IP in setup packet and registered IP system compare received IP number with all of registered CPN Info IP at NET Number table PGM324 If TRANSIT OUT SECURITY admin is set and if received IP in setup packet is not matched with chosen IP numbers then this call will be disconnected automatically Operation To set Transit Out Security Option 1 PGM 161 and Flex 23 2 User can set ON or OFF this admin Operation Step 1 Setup packet for transit out is arrived from VOI line 2 If transit out security option is set system searches for registered IP in Net Number tables 3 If received IP is not matched with all of registered IP in Net Number Table this call will be disconnected 4 When matched IP is found transit out feature will be operated Condition f user wants to set transit out security function user has to set Transit Out Security admin and has to set IP numbers at CPN Info in Net Number Table Transit Out Security Check is only used at VOI CO line Admin Programming E Transit Out Security PGM 161 FLEX23 178 JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 sucio Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 17 2B Function Description Allows the connection of secondary devices to a primary station To extend a primary the
495. tworked Station Station Group or VMIB in the System by activating feature codes There are two kinds of standard net call forward signaling methods in the H 450 protocol specification Join and Rerouting The ipLDK System supports both methods The main difference is how the connecting path is controlled among the forwarding forwarded forwarded to stations Condition To use Net Call Forward a Networked Station should be activated using ADMIN programming There are several types of Net Call Forwarding Unconditional Busy Busy No Answer and No Answer To deactivate Call Forward press the DND FOR button while it is flashing H both the Call Forwarded and Forwarded to Stations are located in the same System the networking path CO line is not needed that is used for the forward voice path the Forwarded Call will be initiated as an intercom call At the Forwarding System it does not check the status of the Forwarded to Station that is in DND CFW or Empty when it sets the Net Call Forward Admin Programming E Call Forward Attribute PGM 111 E Networking Basic Attributes PGM 320 E Networking Supplementary Attributes Transfer Mode PGM 321 E Networking CO Line Attribute PGM 322 E Networking Routing Table Numbering Plan PGM 324 161 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 16 5 1 Net Call Forward Unconditional The Forwarded Station re
496. ued CO Line is picked up Direct call pick up is allowed within the intercom tenancy group A Station cannot pick up any call to the Station which belongs to denied Intercom Tenancy Group ADMIN 120 A Station can answer an intercom call placed to an ICM box using directed call pick up ae oN DO Reference A Intercom Tenancy Group 2 4 15 PGM 120 Admin Programming E Refer to ipLDK Installation Manual Direct Call Pick up Code ADMIN107 FLEX 6 MPLA Priority Setting Pick up Priority PGM 173 37 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 4 2 Group Call Pick Up Description A station can pick up a call ringing at another station in the same pick up group Ringing intercom calls incoming CO Lines recalling CO Lines and transferred CO Lines can be answered by a station instead of the ringing Station if the Stations belong to the same pick up group refer to Ref A Operation To answer a call ringing at a Station in the same Pick up group 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Dialthe Group Pick up code 5 6 6 Ref B To assign a GROUP CALL PICK UP button at a flexible button 1 Press TRANS PGM button 2 Press the FLEX button to be assigned 3 Type 5 6 6 refer to Ref B 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Condition 1 An intercom call cannot be picked up at a Station in Hold or Park mode 2 Queued callback and private line
497. ult Not Assigned Ignore received digit 0 9 password press the SPEED button 31 bypass the digit 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 4 ALARM ATTRIBUTES PGM 163 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 163 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM163_ _ Description_______ Procedure COMMENTS Alarm Enable If this value is set to ON Alarm is FLEX1 1 On VALUES available HOLD SAVE S Alarm Contact Type FLEX2 0 Open VALUES HOLD SAVE 0 OPEN 1 CLOSE Alarm Mode FLEX3 0 Door VALUES Bell CIE 0 DOOR BELL 1 ALARM Alarm Signal Mode If this value is set to REPEAT the Alarm FLEX4 0 Once VALUES Signal is repeated until it is Alarm Reset HOLD SAVE 0 ONCE 1 REPEAT 3 4 5 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT PGM 164 A maximum of 5 Attendants can be assigned including the Main Attendant and System Attendant In this program mode the following items can be customized 4 Press the TRANS PGMI button 5 Dial 164 6 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table PGM164_ Ir Descriptin_________ Procedure COMMENTS System Attendant The System Attendant differs from the Main FLEX1 Station VALUES Assignment Attendant in regard to call handling and Number Default Station system management priorit
498. umber of DSS DLS consoles in a system 2 The default value for DSS DLS is as follows Flex 1 Intrusion Flex 2 All Call Page Flex 3 Call Park 01 Flex 4 Station Group 1 Flex 5 Camp on Flex 6 Internal All Call Page Flex 7 Call Park 02 Flex 8 Station Group 2 Flex 9 Group Call Pick up Flex 10 External All Call Page Flex 11 Call Park 03 Flex 12 Station Group 3 Station 100 135 MAP 2 Station 136 147 ipLDK 20 Station 136 83 ipLDK 100 300 300E Empty ipLDK 20 Station 184 227 ipLDK 100 Station 184 231 ipLDK 300 300E N A ipLDK 20 100 Station 232 279 ipLDK 300 300E N A ipLDK 20 100 Station 280 327 ipLDK 300 300E CO line 01 48 CO line 48 96 CO line 97 144 Admin Programming E Station ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX 1 m DSS DLS ID Assignment PGM 110 FLEX 2 132 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 14 ISDN Service ipLDK system Basic Rate Interface BRI Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN circuits The BRI provides two bearer channels and one data channel 2B D Calling Number and Called Number services are supported Calling Number services will be routed in the same way as Automatic Number Identification ANI calls using the DID route table The rules and conditions of ANI are the same and still apply to Calling Number service on ISDN lines Called Number serv
499. uncement will be ignored When the number of queued incoming calls are over the pre defined amount in UCD group incoming CO calls will be dropped Pick up Hunt Group is reserved for Intercom calls only ISDN phones can be a member of a Hunt Group but will only work when answering a hunt call Group pick up doesn t work with a call of Hunt Group pilot number an error ton will be presented ISDN phones can not be the first Hunt Group member entering two numbers for one ISDN phone is not permitted The Maximum hunt group name length is 12 In case of CO Hunt call all 12 characters can be displayed But In case of ICM Hunt call only 8 characters can be displayed because of display format Reference A Recording System VMIB Announcement 2 11 1 B ICM Box Music Selection 2 13 10 Admin Programming Hunt Group Assignment PGM 190 E Hunt Group Attribute PGM 191 84 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 6 2 Terminal Group Calls to a station in the group or a pilot number will go to the first station in the group If unanswered or unavailable the call proceeds to the next listed station in the group The call will continue to be rerouted until reaching the last station in the group where the call will remain or can be sent to an overflow station group A terminal Hunt group can be assigned with a pilot number Hunt group number and only calls to the pilot nu
500. up Account ON OFF OFF If this value is set to ON the CO Line user should enter authorization code to access this CO Line CO Tenancy Group This value means ICM Tenancy group number the station belongs to This station receives the CO Call If this value is set separated Day Night ring mode is applied to the incoming CO Call according to each ICM tenancy group attendant Ge E ring mode CO Line Attributes II 1 11 13 142 CO Line Name Display Soor OFF or n this value is set to eo Nadie and the CO Line Name is assigned the Name is displayed on the station LCD when the station gets the CO incoming call through this CO Line Wl Line Name Assign value means the name of the Line A fii Unit ee 06 Pe value determines the Unit used to perceive a pulse from CO TI e Line Drop using CPT a OFF If this value is set to ON CPT checks the incoming CO Line when answered and if CPT detects dial tone then system drops the line for toll restriction CO Distinct Ring If this value is not set to 0 the designated ring tone is heard at the station when the station gets the incoming CO Call so that the user can distinguish incoming CO Call and ICM Call with its different ring tone Each ring tone can be adjusted at PGM 422 This value is used at MOH of the CO Line CO Line MOH 0 9 ipLDK 20 0 12 ipLDK 100 0 Ca ipLDK If this value is set to YES PX or PABX provides CO Dial Tone Otherwise PX or P
501. urrent version Init Version 3 8A ipLDK 20 Init Version 3 8B ipLDK 20 Initialize DB added from V3 8A to current version ipLDK 20 Only 452 165 e In LDK 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Issue 1 0 Admin Programming Manual September 2008 4 3 32 PRINT PROTECTED DATABASE DON FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Print Protected Data 1 S Flexible Numbering Plan Print 2 Station Database Print STN P CO Line Database Print CO R System Feature Database Print 5 Station Group Database Print TI TRON Tables Database Pant 7 System Timer Database Print o ooo o o 8 Toll Table Database Print II 9 LCR Database Prit 10 Other Tables Prit y O A R Print T e Program Print SINR 13 Networking Data Prit OO E A 15 LCD Message Print NE AE ss 15 Nation Specific 00 ENG 01 ITA 02 FIN 03 DUT 04 SWE 05 DAN 1 Language 06 NOR 07 HUN 08 GER 09 FRE 10 POR 11 SPA 12 KOR 13 EST 14 RUS 15 TUR Co NORMAL 2 aten pe aten pe 1 LG GAP Co EA Quit Print pe 166
502. user does not answer within a predetermined amount time the call can be forwarded to an alternate location Operation To activate call forward for when there is no answer perform the following 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial a Call Forward type code 3 4 Dial Station Group or VMIB number to receive the call To assign CALL FORWARD button at a flexible button Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Press a flexible button 3 Press the DND FOR button 4 Assign the Call Forward type 3 5 6 Dial the destination that will receive the call Press the HOLD SAVE button To activate Call Forward 1 Press the assigned flexible button 2 The LED of DND FOR button is flashing and the function assigned to the flexible button is activated To deactivate Call Forward 1 Lift the handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FOR button 3 Dial Call Forward cancel code Admin Programming E Call Forward No Answer Timer PGM 181 FLEX 1 26 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 3 1 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer Description A User can direct the System to re route calls to another station group or VMIB when the Station is busy and or does not answer in a predefined No Answer time Incoming CO Lines transferred CO Lines and ringing Intercom calls are forwarded Operatio
503. uthorization code is fixed 5 digits Administrator can see and change station s password There can be no duplicate entries station physical number station physical number REG 228 Lee CCR Table AA A STA Determines if the call is ringing at station of this value ees Hunt Group HUNT A Determines if the call is ringing at member station of this value Hunt group VE heess A Determines if VMIB announcement of this value is played to the caller eT Determines if VMIB announcement of this value is played to the caller and the call is disconnected when VMIB announcement ended speed telephone number a See page zone of this value MO il OOOO E page zone of this value A O eeeeee zone A ll ee net station A A O Sli room ae a station voice mail box of this value 229 Executive Secretary 1 6 ipLDK 20 Not Assigned When the Executive designated Station is in Table 1 12 ipLDK DND state intercom and transfer calls will be 100 automatically routed to the designated 1 36 ipLDK 300 300E el Pp When the Executive Station is in DND state Pair calls automatically will be routed to the Secretary Station CO Call to Secretary ON OFF OFF If this feature is set to ON each incoming CO call to the Executive is automatically routed to the Secretary even when Executive is in DND state Secretary Station 3 Secretary DND ON OFF OFF In some locations Korea Israel India and Turkey e
504. vailable the available CO Line will be directed to the next queued idle station 5 If the waiting station is idle the queued CO Line will give a call back signal to the station for 15 seconds lf the signal is not received at the station the queue is canceled and the next station in the queue will receive the signal Reference A Message Wait Enable 2 4 16 Admin Programming ECO Line Queuing PGM 112 FLEX 5 2 2 4 CO Step Call Analog Only Description When a station receives a busy tone after accessing a CO Line the user can dial a CO Line number which has the same first digits as the called busy CO Line without dialing the full number Operation To use CO Step Call when receiving a busy tone perform the following Steps 1 Press the SPEED button and dial the last digit of the previously called number 2 The previous call is terminated and a new call is established Condition CO Flash Timer Depending on the Public Exchange it may be necessary to increase this timer in order to use the CO Step Call Feature Admin Programming CO Flash Timer PGM 142 12 o JOLDk 20 100 300 300E Version 3 8 Issue1 0 Feature Description and Operation Manual September 2008 2 2 5 Emergency Call Service Description The user can dial the Emergency Service Code regardless of lower station COS Condition An emergency call can be dialed by pressing an available CO Line at the station that is assigned to COS 7 Ifthe dia
505. very ICM call to the Executive is routed to the Secretary regardless of the Executive state However if Secretary Station 150 Ion 20 100 300E Version 3 8 Admin Programming Manual Issue 1 0 September 2008 PGM FLEX ITEM RANGE DEFAULT REMARK is set to DND each call to the Executive is not forwarded to the Secretary 8 Executive Grade O as DID Table Entry No 000 999 R S EEE Day Destination Night Destination Weekend Destination Lunch Destination highest 2 lowest J STA Hunt VMIB drop SPD Int Page Ext Page All Page Net Num Conf Room Station Voice STA Hunt Int Page Ext Page All Page Net Num Conf Room Station Voice STA Hunt Int Page Ext Page All Page Net Num Conf Room Station Voice Mail Box STA Hunt Int Page Ext Page All Page Net Num Conf Room Station Voice Mail Box STA Null ATD STA ATD STA ATD STA 151 In some locations Korea Israel India and Turkey every Ger call to the Executive is routed to the Secretary regardless of the Executive state only Stations of equal or higher level can directly call an idle Executive RN Used to save the name of incoming DID call This value is displayed on station LCD when station receive the DID call This value is used to set the destination when route DID call during day ring mode The eleven different destination types can be selected
506. wait gt VM group Message wait Pressing the CALLBK button at the calling station before user greeting is played the message wait with only station number is saved in the called station When a user calls a station which is forwarded to VMIB he will hear user greeting and beep tone After beep tone user can leave a voice message If all the VMIB ports are busy ring back tone will be provided instead of user greeting And VMIB Station Forward Timer is started to retry to answer User can leave and receive message wait using SLT with message wait lamp Individual user greeting and VMIB message wait are protected with system reset To retrieve left message wait the order of playing is changeable Originally TIME DATE and a left message are played If the ADMIN is set DATE TIME and a left message are played To retrieve left message wait the Message Wait Retrieve Password would be used by ADMIN If ADMIN PGM 113 FLEX 8 is set a user should enter that stations AUTHORIZE CODE to retrieve While retrieving messages the User can rewind messages as allowed by the Rewind Message Timer PGM 181 FLEX 17 Reference A Refer to ipLDK Hardware Description and Installation Manual Message Wait Callback Return Code PGM 106 FLEX 17 Admin Programming WVMIB Message Type PGM 111 FLEX 17 WVMIB Access PGM 113 FLEX 2 VMIB MSG Retrieve PASSWORD PGM 113 FLEX 8 V MIB MSG Retrieve Date Time PGM 113 FLEX 9
507. will ring and provides an Exclusive Hold flashing indication to the receiving party s DKTU If the receiving station does not answer the call in the Transfer Recall time the transferring station and the transferred station will receive recall If the call still remains unanswered the attendant will also receive a recall for the Attendant Recall time After that the transferred call will be disconnected Operation To transfer to an idle station unscreened perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Intercom dial tone should be heard and the previous call will be placed on exclusive hold 3 Dial the station number that will receive the transfer 4 Replace the handset or go on hook To transfer to an idle station screened perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Intercom dial tone should be heard and the previous call will be placed on exclusive hold 3 Dial the station number that will receive the transfer 4 When the station answers announce the call being transferred 5 Replace the handset or go on hook To transfer to a busy station perform the following Steps 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 The CO Line automatically should be placed on exclusive hold and the ICM busy tone should be heard 3 The transferred station will receive a muted transferred CO Line ring 4 Ifthe call is not answered within the designated Transfer Recall time the CO Line will be recalled to at transf
508. xible length 3 authorization codes The 11 digits refer to Administrator can see and PGM161 FLEX21 change Station passwords no duplicate entries Day COS of Authorization Day COS of Stations can only be FLEX2 Class of Service viewed only COS for extra entries Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE ON can also be assigned Night COS of Night COS of stations can only be FLEX3 Class of Service Authorization Code viewed Night COS for extra Range 1 11 HOLD SAVE entries can also be assigned 6 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 10 2 CUSTOM CALL ROUTING PGM 228 The caller can select the destination according to the options outlined in the VMIB announcement In the pLDK system up to 70 VMIB announcements can be used and 11 different destination types can be selected When CCR call is routed to each destination and the destination is busy error or no answer case call can be re routed to re route destination by each VMIB announcement Flex 11 is Busy destination Flex 12 is Error destination and Flex 13 is No answer destination In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGMI button 2 Dial 228 3 Enter the appropriate CCR Table Number Range 01 70 4 Press FLEX1 Range FLEX1 FLEX13 1 Enter the appropriate Destination Type Range 01 11 2 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table 5 Press F
509. y The System HOLD SAVE 101 System Attendant has more priority over the Main Attendant Attendant s NOTE It is impossible to delete the first System Attendant Main Attendants Main Attendants generally serve as call FLEX2 Range VALUES Assignment handlers From the 2 to 5 Stations are the FLEX2 FLEX5 Station Default Not Main Attendants Number Assigned NOTE To delete a Main Attendant press the HOLD SAVE FLEX button and select the Attendant to 1 4 Number of delete press the SPEED button Use the Main Attendants Volume button to scroll and view all 5 Members when they aren t visible at one time 32 0 LPLLDK 20 100 300E version 3 8 a Admin Programming Manual September 2008 3 4 6 AUTO ATTENDANT VMIB ANNOUNCEMENT PGM 165 In this program mode the following items can be customized 1 Press the TRANS PGM button 2 Dial 165 3 Follow the specific Procedure as listed in the Table COMMENTS Auto Attendant A If this value is set to ON Auto FLEX1 1 VALUES Attendant is activated A 0 OFF 1 ON VMIB Announce This value is the number of VMIB FLEX2 VMIB announcements played when Auto announcement 00 70 Attendant is activated HOLD SAVE 3 4 7 CO TO CO COS PGM 166 When an external user of a DID DISA TIE line tries to access another CO Line in the system CO to CO COS is applied The attributes of CO to CO COS are the same as the Station COS In this program mode

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Sony SAL-85F28 Operating Instructions  MANU419 Erosion Rig - Concordia University  Braun 310 headset  Documento Normativo  Flexible Flyer 3100 Riding Toy User Manual    Samsung 2443BW Felhasználói kézikönyv  naufrage tragique - Site de Philippe Meirieu  Manual - LZC7091 PTZ Security Camera - English    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file